Contents

Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual PDF

1 of 622
1 of 622

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual PDF

GT15 User's Manual

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances. Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING

Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off. Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. For bus connection: The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative. For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

A - 1

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING

Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes out, the POWER LED flickers (green/orange) and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank, while the input of the touch switch(s) remains active. This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to operate. Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out. The POWER LED flickers (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank

The display section of the GT1595-X is an analog-resistive type touch panel. If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around the center of the touched point, if any, may operate. Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously. Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against

unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. *1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

A - 2

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring. Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm (3.94in.) apart.Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section. When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP addressis restricted according to the system configuration. When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network :

Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network :

Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network. Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18). The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit, printer unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the GOT. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

When installing the multi-color display board, wear an earth band etc. to avoid the static electricity. Not doing so can cause a unit corruption.

A - 3

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION

Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual. Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.

When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT. When loading the communication unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

When mounting the option function board onto the GOT, connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range (0.25 to 0.35 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. Loose tightening may cause the unit and/or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact. Overtightening may damage the screws, unit and/or GOT; they might malfunction.

Push the option function board onto the corresponding connector until it clicks, so that it will be secured firmly.

Push the multi-color display board onto the corresponding connector so that it will be secured firmly.

When inserting a CF card into the GOT, push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out. If not properly inserted, a bad connection may cause a malfunction.

When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT, turn the CF card access switch off in advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card.

When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break. Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity, and vibrations. When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

A - 4

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

CAUTION Always ground the FG terminal, LG terminal, and protective ground terminal of the GOT power to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.

When tightening the terminal screws, use a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.

Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0.5 to 0.8 Nm. Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals.

Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque. If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in failure.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range (0.5 to 0.8 Nm). Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the module during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring. Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.

Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

A - 5

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method. During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.

Connect the battery correctly. Do not perform the following actions to the battery. Charging, disassembling, heating, short-circuiting, or soldering the battery, or throwing it into the

fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat, burst or take fire, resulting in injuries or fires.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

A - 6

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.

Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly. Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.

The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped. Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result.

Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Replace battery with GT15-BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co. only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.

Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

A - 7

[BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT (and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology) and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight (when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user). Not doing so can cause an electric shock. Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or control panel to drop, resulting in an injury.

CAUTION Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user. Not doing so can cause an injury.

Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user. Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to 19.4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States.)

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. (Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regurated units.)

Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail. Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

A - 8

REVISIONS

For the software functions, refer to the product-specific screen design manual. The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date Manual Number Revision

Oct. 2004 SH(NA)-080528ENG-A First edition

Mar. 2005 SH(NA)-080528ENG-B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.09K

Chapter 6, Section 7.3.2, 8.2 to 8.6 8.2 to 8.4, 8.4.3, Section 9.1 to 9.3 9.1 to 9.2, Section 10.1 to 10.6 10.1 to 10.5, Section 12.1 to 12.6 12.1 to 12.5, Section 13.1, 13.2 to 13.6 13.3 to 13.7, Section 14.1 to 14.2 14.1, Section 15.1 to 15.2 15.1, Section 16.1 to 16.2 16.1, Chapter 18, Section 18.6 18.3, 18.3 to 18.5 18.4 to 18.6, Section 19.1, 19.2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.1, 2.2.2, Section 3.2, Section 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, Section 5.3, Section 7.3.1, 7.5.1, 7.5.2, Section 8.3, Appendix 1, 2, 4

Section 10.6, Section 12.6, Section 13.2

Apr. 2005 SH(NA)-080528ENG-C

Section 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 7.1.2, 7.5.2, 18.6, Appendix 1, Chapter 5 to 19 6 to 20, Appendix 2 to 4 3 to 5

Chapter 5, Appendix 2

Sep. 2005 SH(NA)-080528ENG-D Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.18U

Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 1.2, Section 2.1, 2.2, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, Section 4.1 to 4.4, Section 5.1, 5.1.3, 5.2.5, 5.4.2, Section 6.3, Section 7, 7.4, Section 8.1, 8.1.1, 8.1.2, 8.2, 8.3, 8.5.1, 8.5.2, 8.6.2, 8.7.3, 8.7.4, 8.11, 8.11.1, Section 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3.1, to 9.3.3, Section 10, 10.1.2 to 10.1.4, 10.2.2, 10.2.3, Chapter 11, 11.1, 11.1.1 to 11.1.3, 11.2.2, 11.2.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.4.2, 11.5.1 to 11.5.3, Section 12.1.1 to 12.1.3, Section 13, 13.1.2, 13.1.3, 13.2.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.4, 13.3.2 to 13.3.4, 13.4.2, 13.5.2, 13.6.1 to 13.6.3, 13.7, 13.7.1, 13.7.2, 13.7.4, 13.7.5, Chapter 14, 14.1.2, 14.2.1, 14.3.1 to 14.3.3, 14.4.2, 14.5.2, 14.6.2, 14.7.1, 14.7.2, Section 15.1.2, Section 16.1.3, Section 17.1.3, Chapter 18, 18.1, 18.2, 18.3, 18.3.1, 18.3.2, 18.4, Section 20.1, 20.2, Appendix 5

Section 5.3.2, 5.3.3, Section 6.2, 6.5, Section 8.4.1, 8.7.2, 8.8.1, 8.10.1, 8.10.2, Section 10.2.1, Section 11.2.1, 11.3.3, Section 13.1.5, Section 14.1.1, Section 19.2, 19.4, 19.5, 19.6.1, 19.6.2, Appendix 1, 3

Section 3.2.1 to 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.3.2, Section 4.1, Section 8.5.3, Section 11.6, 11.8, Section 13.8, 13.9, 13.10, Section 18.5

Section 4.1 to 4.3 Section 4.2 to 4.4 Section 11.6 Section 11.7

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

Partial corrections

Additions

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

A - 9

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date Manual Number Revision

Jan. 2006 SH(NA)-080528ENG-E Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.27D

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Chapter 1, Section 2.1, Section 8.1.1, 8.5 to 8.11 8.6 to 8.12, Section 9.2, 9.3, Section 10.1.3, Section 11.1, 11.7.2, Section 13.7.4, 13.10.4

Section 2.2, Section 6.3, Section 13.1.5, 13.2.4, Chapter 14, Section 19.4, Section 20.2, Appendix 1, 3, 5

Section 8.5, Section 14.8, 14.9

Jun. 2006 SH(NA)-080528ENG-F Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.32J

Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 5.3.1, 5.4.2, 8.4, 8.5.2, 8.9, 9.3, 11.2.2, 11.3.2, 11.4.2, 11.5.2, 11.7.2, 11.8.2, 12.1.3, 13.1.5, 13.2.2, 13.2.3, 13.2.4, 13.3.1, 13.3.3, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 13.6.2, 13.6.3, 13.7.2, 13.7.3, 13.8.2, 13.8.3, 13.9.2, 13.10.2, 13.10.3, 14.3.2, 14.4.2, 14.5.2, 14.6.2, 14.7.2, 14.9, 18.3.1, 18.4, 18.5.2

Chapter 1, Section 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.2.1 ~ 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.3.2, 5.3.2, 5.3.3, 6.2, 6.3, 7.1, 7.4, 8.1.2, 8.3.1, 8.7, 8.8, 8.10, 8.11, 8.12, 8.13, 9.2, 9.3.1, 10.1.3, Chapter 11, Section 11.1.1, 11.1, 2, 11.5.1, 11.7.1, 11.8.1, Chapter 14, Section 14.1.1, 14.2.1, 19.6.1, 20.2, Appendix 1, 3, 5

Section 3.2.5, 4.5, 5.3.4, 8.6, 11.9 ~ 11.11, 13.11, 14.8

Sep. 2006 SH(NA)-080528ENG-G

Section 5.1.1, 5.2.4, 5.3.2, 5.3.3, 5.3.6, 5.4.2

Nov. 2006 SH(NA)-080528ENG-H Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.43V.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, Chapter 7, Section 8.1 8.6, 8.2 8.7, 8.3 8.8, 8.4 8.14, 8.5 8.3, 8.6 8.4, Section 8.6.2, 8.7 8.1, 8.7.2, 8.7.3, 8.8 8.2, 10.1.3, 11.2.1, 11.3.1, 11.7.1, 11.7.2, 11.8.1, 12.1.3, 14.9.2, 14.9.3, 18.4, Chapter 20, Section 20.2

Section 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.2, 5.3.1, 5.3.4, 6.3, 9.2, Chapter 11, Section 11.1.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 13.1.1, 13.1.2, 13.1.5, 13.2.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.3, 13.2.4, 13.3.1, 13.3.2, 13.3.4, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 13.6.2, 13.7.2, 13.8.2, 13.9.2, 13.9.3, 13.10.1, 13.10.2, 13.10.3, 13.10.4, 13.11.2, 13.12.3, 14.3.1, 14.3.3, Chapter 17, Section 17.1.3, 18.3, 18.3.1, 19.6.2, Appendix 1, 3, 5

Section 8.5, 13.12

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

Partial corrections

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

A - 10

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date Manual Number Revision

Feb. 2007 SH(NA)-080528ENG-I Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.47Z.

Section 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.2.5, 6.1, 6.2, 7.2, 7.6, 7.6.1, 7.6.2, 10.1.3, 11.2.3, 13.1.2, 20.3.2, Appendix 1

Section 2.2.2, 5.2.3, 5.3.4, 6.2, 6.3, 8.5, 8.5.1, 8.5.2, 8.6.3, 14.7.1

Section 8.5.3, 8.5.4, 8.6.4, Appendix 5

May 2007 SH(NA)-080528ENG-J Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.58L

Section 2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.5, 3.3, 5.4.1, 6.3, 7.2, 8.5 8.7, 8.6 8.8, 8.7 8.9, 8.8 8.10, 8.9 8.11, 8.10 8.12, 8.11 8.13, 8.12 8.14, 8.16.1, 9.2, 10.1.3, 10.2.3, 11.7.1, 11.7.2, 11.7.3, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.1.1, 14.1.2, 14.7, 20.3.2, Appendix 3, 6

Section 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.2.1, 4.5, 5.2.3, 5.3.1, 5.3.4, 8.8, 11.7.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.4, Chapter 14, 20.3.1, Appendix 1, 6

Section 8.5, 8.6, 11.2, 14.11

Jul. 2007 SH(NA)-080528ENG-K Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.62R

Section 14.7.1, 19.6.1, 19.6.2

Section 9.2, 14.1, 20.3.2

Nov. 2007 SH(NA)-080528ENG-L Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.73B

Section 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.2.5, 8.1.1, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.2, 8.4.2, 8.5.2, 8.6.2, 8.8.2, 8.10.1,8.10.2, 8.16.1, 8.16.2, 13.7.2, 13.8.2, 14.7.1, 14.7.3, 19.6.2, Appendix 3

Section 1.2, 2.1, 2.2.2, 3.2, 5.3.1, 9.2, 10.1.3, Chapter 11, 11.12.1, 11.12.2, 11.12.3, 13.2.1, 13.3.1,13.10.2, Chapter 18, 18.1. 18.2, 18.3.1

Section 11.13

Feb. 2007 SH(NA)-080528ENG-M Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.77F

Section 1.2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.2.2, 3.2, 5.3, 6.3, 8.1, 9.2, Chapter 14, Section 20.3.2, Appendix 1, 3

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

Partial corrections

Partial additions

A - 11

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date Manual Number Revision Dec. 2008 SH(NA)-080528ENG-N Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.91V

Section 8.11.4, 8.13.2, 18.3.1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.1, 2.2.2, 3.1, 3.2.2, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 8.3.2, 8.8.1, 8.11.2, 9.2, 10.1.3, 12.1.3, Chapter 14, Section 14.11.1, 14.11.3, 19.4, Appendix 1, Appendix 3

Section 8.18, 14.12 Mar. 2009 SH(NA)-080528ENG-O Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.96A

Section 6.3, 10.1.3, 10.2.2, 14.7.1, Appendix 1

Section 2.2, 2.2.2, 3.2, 8.1.1, 9.2, 13.3.1, Appendix 3, Appendix 18 Jun. 2009 SH(NA)-080528ENG-P Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.96A

Chapter 5 Oct. 2009 SH(NA)-080528ENG-Q Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.01B

Additional information to be compatible with GT Designer3 Jan. 2010 SH(NA)-080528ENG-R Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.10L.

For SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, the usage of a battery added, the usage of a protective cover for oil added Compatible with the communication between the PC and GOT via modem Compatible with the connection to LCPU SoftGOT-GOT link function supported Change in the insulation sheets for protecting cables supported

Feb. 2010 SH(NA)-080528ENG-S Compliance with the EMC Directive by the GT1595 power specification change

Change in the FG and LG wiring diagram between a PLC and the GOT Model name of a ferrite core added

May 2010 SH(NA)-080528ENG-T Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.14Q.

Section 11.7 Jun. 2010 SH(NA)-080528ENG-U Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.17T.

Chapter 3 Oct. 2010 SH(NA)-080528ENG-V Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.19V.

Compatible with switching the display order of operation logs on the operation log information screen.

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Additions

Partial corrections

Partial additions

Partial additions

Partial additions

Partial corrections

A - 12

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date Manual Number Revision Jan. 2011 SH(NA)-080528ENG-W Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.23Z.

Compatible with the Ethernet settings check and the change of the host Compatible with "no setting" of the utility call key. Compatible with the setting of [Operating priority guaranteed time]/[Operation

status popup notification] in the [SoftGOT-GOT link] screen Compatible with the setting of [Comment setting] in the [Q/L/QnA ladder

monitor] screen Compatible with Behavior of duplicate IPs. Compatible with the latest display in Operation log information

Jul. 2011 SH(NA)-080528ENG-X Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.31H CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit added Error codes added Compatible with Behavior of duplicate IPs Compatible with Save ladder programs setting of Q/L/QnA ladder monitor Compatible with language setting of special data

Jan. 2012 SH(NA)-080528ENG-Y Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.40S Error codes added

Apr. 2012 SH(NA)-080528ENG-Z Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.45X Correction of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Compatible with the specification change of JIS B 3502 Correction of description of the GOT installation position

Jun. 2012 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AA Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.54G The company name of Panasonic Electric Works Co., Ltd. is changed to

Panasonic Corporation. The company name of Yamatake Corporation is changed to Azbil

Corporation. For the drawing check function, gray is added to the color displayed at the

missing bit check and the color check. Nov. 2012 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AB Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.63R

Corrective action for the error code added Feb. 2013 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AC Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.67V

The backup/restore function supports the check changes. Corrective action for the error code added Error code list deleted

A - 13

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Print Date Manual Number Revision Jun. 2013 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AD Compatible with GT Designer3 Version1.74C

Correction of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The company name of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation is changed to GE

Intelligent Platforms. The company name of Panasonic Corporation is changed to Panasonic

Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. The company name of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd. is

changed to FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. The company name of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd. is changed to FUJI

ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Sep. 2013 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AE Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.100E Jan. 2014 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AF Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.108N

The display angle of the LCD of GT1555-QSBD is changed. The Operation Log Data List screen is changed. The I/O check and a part of driver names are changed.

Apr. 2014 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AG Writing errors have been corrected. Apr. 2020 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AH Some corrections Jun. 2020 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AI Some corrections Oct. 2020 SH(NA)-080528ENG-AJ Some corrections

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

A - 14

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 1

REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 9

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 15

CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 15

ABOUT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 25

QUICK REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 28

ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 30

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 35

PACKING LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 36

1. OVERVIEW 1 - 1 to 1 - 4

1.1 Features 1 - 2

1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure 1 - 3

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 - 1 to 2 - 20

2.1 Overall Configuration 2 - 1

2.2 Component List 2 - 2 2.2.1 GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 2.2.2 Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7

3. SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1 to 3 - 20

3.1 General Specifications 3 - 1

3.2 Performance Specifications 3 - 3 3.2.1 GT1595-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 3.2.2 GT1585V-S, GT1585-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 3.2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13 3.2.5 GT1555-V, GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16

3.3 Power Supply Specifications 3 - 19 3.3.1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19 3.3.2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20

4. PART NAME AND SETTINGS 4 - 1 to 4 - 12

4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 4 - 1

4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 4 - 3

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal. Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.

CONTENTS

A - 15

4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 4 - 6

4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156 4 - 9

4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155 4 - 11

5. EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5 - 1 to 5 - 24

5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 - 1 5.1.1 EMC directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 5.1.2 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 5.1.3 Noise filter (power supply line filter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5

5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 - 6 5.2.1 Standard subject to GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 5.2.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 5.2.3 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 5.2.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 5.2.5 External wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8

5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5 - 9 5.3.1 GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 5.3.2 Connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10 5.3.3 When the communication unit is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11 5.3.4 When the option unit is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13 5.3.5 When the option is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13 5.3.6 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14

5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5 - 15 5.4.1 Power and ground wires wiring method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15 5.4.2 Processing connection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 5.4.3 Grounding the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24

6. INSTALLATION 6 - 1 to 6 - 12

6.1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 - 1

6.2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 - 2

6.3 Mounting Position 6 - 3

6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 - 11

6.5 Installation Procedure 6 - 11

7. WIRING 7 - 1 to 7 - 16

7.1 Power Supply Wiring 7 - 3

7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section 7 - 4

7.3 Grouding 7 - 6 7.3.1 Grounding the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6 7.3.2 Wiring-related malfunction causes and the measures examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 9

7.4 Panel Inside Wiring, Panel Outside Wiring 7 - 11 7.4.1 Panel inside wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11 7.4.2 Panel outside wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11

7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment 7 - 12

A - 16

7.6 Grounding Extension Units 7 - 13 7.6.1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13 7.6.2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15

8. OPTION 8 - 1 to 8 - 62

8.1 Communication Unit 8 - 1 8.1.1 Applicable communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 8.1.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15

8.2 RS-422 Conversion Unit 8 - 17 8.2.1 Applicable RS-422 conversion unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 8.2.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17

8.3 Printer Unit 8 - 18 8.3.1 Printer unit type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 8.3.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18

8.4 Video/RGB Unit 8 - 22 8.4.1 Video/RGB unit types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22 8.4.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22

8.5 External I/O Unit 8 - 25 8.5.1 Applicable external I/O unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25 8.5.2 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25

8.6 Sound Output Unit 8 - 27 8.6.1 Applicable sound output unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27 8.6.2 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27

8.7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8 - 30 8.7.1 Applicable CF card unit and CF card extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30 8.7.2 Installing on GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30 8.7.3 Installing on control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 32 8.7.4 Protective structure for CF card extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33

8.8 CF Card 8 - 34 8.8.1 Applicable CF card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34 8.8.2 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card interface of GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35 8.8.3 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39 8.8.4 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41

8.9 Memory Card Adaptor 8 - 43 8.9.1 Applicable memory card adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43 8.9.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43

8.10 Option Function Board 8 - 44 8.10.1 Applicable option function board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44 8.10.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44

8.11 Battery 8 - 46 8.11.1 Applicable battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46 8.11.2 Battery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46 8.11.3 Battery replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46 8.11.4 Battery life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47

A - 17

8.12 Protective Sheet 8 - 48 8.12.1 Applicable protective sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48 8.12.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49

8.13 Protective cover for oil 8 - 50 8.13.1 Applicable protective cover for oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50 8.13.2 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50

8.14 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 - 54 8.14.1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54 8.14.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54

8.15 Stand 8 - 56 8.15.1 Applicable stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56 8.15.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56

8.16 Attachment 8 - 58 8.16.1 Applicable attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58 8.16.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59

8.17 Multi-Color Display Board 8 - 61 8.17.1 Applicable multi-color display board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61 8.17.2 Installing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 62

9. UTILITY FUNCTION 9 - 1 to 9 - 12

9.1 Utility Execution 9 - 1

9.2 Utility Function List 9 - 2

9.3 Utility Display 9 - 5 9.3.1 Display operation of main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7 9.3.2 Utility basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10 9.3.3 Basic operation of settings change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11

10. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING (COMMUNICATION SETTING) 10 - 1 to 10 - 21

10.1 Communication Setting 10 - 1 10.1.1 Communication setting functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 10.1.2 Communication setting display operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 10.1.3 Communication setting contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7

10.2 Communication Detail Settings 10 - 13 10.2.1 Communication detail settings functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 10.2.2 Communication detail settings display operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 10.2.3 Display contents of communication detail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15

10.3 Ethernet Setting 10 - 19 10.3.1 Ethernet setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19 10.3.2 Display operation of Ethernet setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19 10.3.3 Display contents of Ethernet setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20

A - 18

11. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS (GOT SET UP) 11 - 1 to 11 - 53

11.1 Display Settings 11 - 2 11.1.1 Display setting functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 2 11.1.2 Display operation of display setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 5 11.1.3 Display setting operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 6

11.2 Brightness, Contrast Adjustment 11 - 12 11.2.1 Functions of the brightness, contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 12 11.2.2 Display operation of brightness, contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 12 11.2.3 Operating the brightness, contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 13

11.3 Operation settings 11 - 14 11.3.1 Operation setting functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 14 11.3.2 Display operation of display setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 15 11.3.3 Setting operation of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 16

11.4 Security Level Change 11 - 18 11.4.1 Security level change functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 18 11.4.2 Displaying the security level change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 18 11.4.3 Security level change operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 19

11.5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 - 20 11.5.1 Utility call key setting function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 20 11.5.2 Utility call key display operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 20 11.5.3 Utility call key setting operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 21

11.6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position(Touch panel calibration Setting) 11 - 23 11.6.1 Touch panel calibration setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 23 11.6.2 Touch panel calibration setting display operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 23 11.6.3 Touch panel calibration operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 24

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting 11 - 26 11.7.1 SoftGOT-GOT link function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 26 11.7.2 Displaying the SoftGOT-GOT link function setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 27 11.7.3 SoftGOT-GOT link function setting operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 28

11.8 Q/L/QnA Ladder Monitor 11 - 31 11.8.1 Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 31 11.8.2 Display operation of Q/L/QnA ladder monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 32 11.8.3 Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 33

11.9 Transparent Settings (Transparent Mode Setting) 11 - 34 11.9.1 Function of the transparent mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 34 11.9.2 Displaying the transparent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 34 11.9.3 Operation the transparent mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 35

11.10 Video Unit Settings 11 - 36 11.10.1 Functions of the video unit settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 36 11.10.2 Displaying the video unit settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 37 11.10.3 Operating the video unit settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 38

11.11 Video Display Settings 11 - 39 11.11.1 Functions of the video display settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 39 11.11.2 Displaying the video display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 39 11.11.3 Operating the video display settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 40

A - 19

11.12 RGB Display Settings 11 - 42 11.12.1 Functions of the RGB display settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 42 11.12.2 Displaying the RGB display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 42 11.12.3 Operating the RGB display settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 43

11.13 Backup/Restore Settings 11 - 44 11.13.1 Backup/restore function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 44 11.13.2 Display operation of backup/restoration setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 45 11.13.3 Backup/restoration setting operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 46

11.14 Trigger Backup Settings 11 - 48 11.14.1 Trigger backup settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 48 11.14.2 Display operation of trigger backup setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 48 11.14.3 Trigger backup setting operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 49

11.15 Behavior of duplicate IPs 11 - 51 11.15.1 Setting function for Behavior of duplicate IPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 51 11.15.2 Display operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 52 11.15.3 Setting operation for Behavior of duplicate IPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 52

12. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY (TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY) 12 - 1 to 12 - 6

12.1 Time Setting and Display 12 - 1 12.1.1 Time setting and display functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 12.1.2 Display operation of clock display and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2 12.1.3 Operating the time setting & display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 3

13. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY(PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL) 13 - 1 to 13 - 112

13.1 Data Storage Location 13 - 1 13.1.1 Drive name allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1 13.1.2 Data type and the storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 2 13.1.3 OS version confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 4 13.1.4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5 13.1.5 Display file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 6

13.2 OS Information 13 - 7 13.2.1 Function of OS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 7 13.2.2 Display operation of OS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 8 13.2.3 Display example of OS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9 13.2.4 Operation of OS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 10

13.3 Project Information 13 - 15 13.3.1 Functions of the project information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 15 13.3.2 Display operation of project information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 16 13.3.3 Display example of project information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 17 13.3.4 Operation of project information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 18

13.4 Alarm Information 13 - 28 13.4.1 Function of alarm information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 28 13.4.2 The display operation of alarm information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 28 13.4.3 The display example of alarm information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 29 13.4.4 Alarm information operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 30

A - 20

13.5 Hard Copy Information 13 - 36 13.5.1 The function of hardcopy information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 36 13.5.2 The display operation of hardcopy information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 36 13.5.3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 37 13.5.4 The operation of hardcopy information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 38

13.6 Memory Card Format 13 - 42 13.6.1 Function of the memory card format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 42 13.6.2 Display operation of memory card format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 42 13.6.3 Operating the memory card format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 43

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 - 45 13.7.1 Function of advanced recipe information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 45 13.7.2 Operation of advanced recipe information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 46 13.7.3 Example of advanced recipe information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 47 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 49 13.7.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 65

13.8 Logging Information 13 - 67 13.8.1 Function of logging information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 67 13.8.2 Display operation of logging information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 67 13.8.3 Example of logging information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 68 13.8.4 Logging information operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 69 13.8.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 78

13.9 Memory Information 13 - 80 13.9.1 Memory information functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 80 13.9.2 Memory information display operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 80 13.9.3 Memory information display example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 81

13.10 Special Data Information 13 - 82 13.10.1 Special data information function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 82 13.10.2 Special data information display operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 83 13.10.3 Special data information display example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 84 13.10.4 Special data information operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 85

13.11 Operation Log Information 13 - 91 13.11.1 Function of operation log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 91 13.11.2 Display operation of operation log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 92 13.11.3 Example of operation log information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 93 13.11.4 Operation log information operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 94 13.11.5 Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 108

13.12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13 - 110 13.12.1 GOT data package acquisition function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 110 13.12.2 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 110 13.12.3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 111 13.12.4 GOT data package acquisition operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 111

14. GOT SELF CHECK (DEBUG & SELF CHECK) 14 - 1 to 14 - 67

14.1 Debug 14 - 1 14.1.1 The Debug function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1 14.1.2 Display operation of Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 3

A - 21

14.2 Self check 14 - 4 14.2.1 Self check function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 4

14.3 Memory Check 14 - 5 14.3.1 Memory check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5 14.3.2 Display operation of memory check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5

14.4 Drawing Check 14 - 8 14.4.1 Drawing check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8 14.4.2 Display operation of drawing check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8 14.4.3 Drawing check operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9

14.5 Font Check 14 - 13 14.5.1 Font check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 13 14.5.2 Display operation of Font check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 13 14.5.3 Font check operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 14

14.6 Touch Panel Check 14 - 15 14.6.1 Touch panel check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15 14.6.2 Display operation of Touch panel check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15 14.6.3 Touch panel check operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16

14.7 I/O Check 14 - 17 14.7.1 I/O check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 17 14.7.2 Display operation of I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 18 14.7.3 I/O Check Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 19

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 - 22 14.8.1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 22 14.8.2 Displaying the NETWK unit status display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 22 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 23

14.9 System Alarm Display 14 - 35 14.9.1 System alarm display function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 35 14.9.2 Displaying the system alarm display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 35 14.9.3 Operating the system alarm display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 36

14.10 GOT Start Time 14 - 37 14.10.1 GOT start time function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 37 14.10.2 Display operation of GOT start time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 37 14.10.3 Display of GOT start time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 38

14.11 Operator Information Management 14 - 39 14.11.1 Operator management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39 14.11.2 Password change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 52 14.11.3 Function setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 54

14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14 - 58 14.12.1 The fingerprint authentication function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 58 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 58

15. CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION (CLEAN) 15 - 1 to 15 - 2

15.1 Clean 15 - 1 15.1.1 Display operation of Clean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1 15.1.2 Operation of Clean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2

A - 22

16. MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING (MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING) 16 - 1 to 16 - 4

16.1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 - 2 16.1.1 Function of the maintenance timing setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 2 16.1.2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 3 16.1.3 Operating the maintenance timing setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 4

17. ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION (ADDITION TIMES RESET) 17 - 1 to 17 - 2

17.1 Addition times reset 17 - 1 17.1.1 Addition times reset function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1 17.1.2 Display operation of Addition times reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1 17.1.3 Operation of Addition times reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2

18. INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 18 - 1 to 18 - 14

18.1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation 18 - 2

18.2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 18 - 3

18.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18 - 4 18.3.1 Installing when starting the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 5 18.3.2 Installation method using the program/data control function (Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 6

18.4 When installing the different version of BootOS, standard monitor OS 18 - 8

18.5 CoreOS 18 - 11 18.5.1 Installing the CoreOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 11 18.5.2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 14

19. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 19 - 1 to 19 - 19

19.1 Daily Inspection 19 - 2

19.2 Periodic Inspection 19 - 2

19.3 Cleaning Method 19 - 3

19.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 19 - 4

19.5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement 19 - 6

19.6 Backlight Replacement 19 - 7 19.6.1 Applicable backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 7 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 7

20. TROUBLESHOOTING 20 - 1 to 20 - 34

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet 20 - 1

20.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 - 14 20.2.1 Locating error positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 14 20.2.2 Further locating error positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 15 20.2.3 Specific example of troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 16

A - 23

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 - 17 20.3.1 Error Contents Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 17 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 20

APPENDICES App- 1 to App - 61

Appendix 1 External Dimensions App- 1

Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards App- 15

Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App- 16

Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions App- 20 Appendix 4.1 Relevant models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App- 20 Appendix 4.2 Transportation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App- 20

Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive App- 21

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series) App- 22 Appendix 6.1 GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App- 22 Appendix 6.2 For GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App- 57

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 3

WARRANTY

A - 24

ABOUT MANUALS

The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Designer2 product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080602ENG

(1D7M48)

GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (For GOT1000 Series) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080529ENG

(1D7M24)

GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 1/3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 2/3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual (For GOT1000 Series) 3/3

Stored in CD-ROM SH-080530ENG

(1D7M25)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (1/3) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2/3) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (3/3)

Stored in CD-ROM SH-080532ENG

(1D7M26)

GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080544ENG

(1D7M32)

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080545ENG

(1D7M33)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080654ENG

(1D7M63)

A - 25

The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Works3 product. Refer to each manual for any purpose. 1 Screen creation software manuals

2 Connection manuals

3 Extended and option function manuals

4 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080866ENG

(1D7MB9)

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080867ENG

(1D7MC1)

GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080861ENG

(1D7MB1)

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080862ENG

(1D7MB2)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080868ENG

(1D7MC2)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080869ENG

(1D7MC3)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080870ENG

(1D7MC4)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3

Stored in CD-ROM SH-080871ENG

(1D7MC5)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080858ENG

(1D7MA7)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080859ENG

(1D7MA8)

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080863ENG

(1D7MB3)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM SH-080860ENG

(1D7MA9)

A - 26

5 GT16 manuals

6 GT15 manuals

7 GT14 manuals

8 GT12 manuals

9 GT11 manuals

10 GT10 manuals

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080928ENG

(1D7MD3)

GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM SH-080929ENG

(1D7MD4)

GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41201 JY997D41202

(09R821)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT15 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080528ENG

(1D7M23)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT14 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D44801

(09R823)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT12 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM SH-080977ENG

(1D7ME1)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT11 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D17501

(09R815)

GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D20101 JY997D20102

(09R817)

Manual Name Packaging Manual Number

(Model code)

GT10 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D24701

(09R819)

A - 27

QUICK REFERENCE

11 Creating a project

12 Connecting a controller to the GOT

13 Transferring data to the GOT

Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2

Setting available functions on GT Designer3

Creating a screen displayed on the GOT

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2

Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3

Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT (Multi-channel function)

Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)

Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2) for GT Works3

Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3

Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2

Reading data from the GOT

Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

A - 28

14 Others Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and options) of each GOT

GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual GT15 User's Manual GT14 User's Manual GT12 User's Manual GT11 User's Manual GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual GT10 User's Manual

Installing the GOT

Operating the utility

GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual GT15 User's Manual GT14 User's Manual GT12 User's Manual GT11 User's Manual GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual GT10 User's Manual

Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3

Configuring the MES interface function GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3

Configuring the extended function and option function GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3

Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3

A - 29

ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows:

GOT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GOT1000 Series

GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD

GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD

GT1675

GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD

GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD

GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD

GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD

GT1665 GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD

GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD

GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD

GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD

GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT

GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD

GT1585 GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD

GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD

GT157

GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD

GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

GT156 GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD

GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD

GT155

GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD

GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD

GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT115 GT1155-Q

Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA, GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD

GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD

GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,

GT105 GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD

GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD

GT104 GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD

GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD

GT1030

Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2, GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2, GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2, GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2, GT1030-HWLW

GT1020 Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2, GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2, GT1020-LWLW

GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

Handy GOT

GT16 Handy GOT

GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD

GT11 Handy GOT

GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD

GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series

GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series

A - 30

Communication unit

*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set *2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set *3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set

Option unit

*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video/RGB unit

Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4

RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1

Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1

RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT

Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR

CF card unit GT15-CFCD

CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

A - 31

Option

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

Memory card CF card GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC, GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC, GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC

Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC

Option function board GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT15-MESB48M, GT11-50FNB

Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT

Protective Sheet

For GT16

GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW, GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW, GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW, GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW, GT16-50PSCB, GT16-50PSGB, GT16-50PSCW, GT16-50PSGW, GT16-90PSCB-012,GT16-80PSCB-012,GT16-70PSCB-012, GT16-60PSCB-012,GT16-50PSCB-012,GT16H-60PSC

For GT15

GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW, GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW, GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW, GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW, GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW

For GT11 GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW, GT11H-50PSC

For GT10

GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW, GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW, GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW, GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW

Protective cover for oil GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO,

GT05-50PCO, GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO

USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT11-50UCOV

Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND

Attachment GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85

Backlight

GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70VLTN GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN

Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV Memory loader GT10-LDR Memory board GT10-50FMB Panel-mounted USB port extension GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

A - 32

Software

License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

License key (for GT SoftGOT2)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator eneric term for integrated development environment software included in the SWDNC-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)

GX Works2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller engineering software

GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function

GX Simulator Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages (SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)

GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package

PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2

(SW DNC-MTW2-E)

MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series

MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software

MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software

FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE) NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator

FX Configurator-FP Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for

FX3U-20SSC-H (SW D5C-FXSSC-E) FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E) RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE) MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E,SW D5C-ACT-EA) MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E,SW D5C-SHEET-EA) LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

License key A9GTSOFT-LKEY-P (For DOS/V PC)

License key FD SW5D5F-SGLKEY-J (For PC CPU module)

A - 33

Others

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation

AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)

OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation

JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation

SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION

TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.

HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.

FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation

ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms

LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA

SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG

SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG

RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation

MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.

PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller

Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation

Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation

Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation

CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION

PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD

GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function

GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function

Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)

Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted to the base unit

MODBUS/RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication

MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network

A - 34

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

1 Functions This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer3 Version1.108N and GT Designer2 Version2.113T. For the Functions added by GT Designer3 version upgrade, refer to the following.

REVISIONS For the Functions added by GT Designer2 version upgrade, refer to the following.

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series) GT Designer3 and GT Designer2 have differences in the functions. For details of functions, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 ( GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual) GT Designer2 ( GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual) In addition, GT Designer2 Version2.98C supports the multimedia function of recording and playing video files with sound, and GT Works3 Version1.14Q supports the multidrop connection on GT16 and GT15.

2 Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual.

* The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.

Refers to the information

required.

Refers to the supplementary

explanations for reference.

Indicates the operation steps.

Menu and items are differentiated with

parentheses.

: refers to the menu of GOT utility.

: refers to the button in the dialog

box of GOT utility.

Indicates the items in which the detailed

explanation is described (manual, chapter,

section, item of the manual).

. . . .

[ ]

Remark

A - 35

PACKING LIST

After unpacking, confirm that the following parts are included.

The following products are included a spare for the plastic fixing screw of the GOT. GT1585-S: Hardware Version B or earlier (Apr.,2005) GT1575-S: Hardware Version B or earlier (Apr.,2005) GT1575-V: Hardware Version D or earlier (Apr.,2005) GT1565-V: Hardware Version D or earlier (Apr.,2005)

Model Product Quantity

GT1595-X

GOT 1

Installation fitting 8

GT15 General Description 1

GT1585V-S, GT1585-S, GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN, GT1565-V, GT1562-VN, GT1555-V, GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q

GOT 1

Installation fitting 4

GT15 General Description 1

A - 36

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

1. OVERVIEW

1 About GOT GOT is installed on the panel surface of control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC in the control panel. GOT carries out switch operation, lamp display, data display, and message display etc.

For display screen, two kinds of display screens, user-created screen and utility screen are available.

(1) User-created Screen User screen is a screen drawn by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. The objects of "Touch switch", "Lamp display", "Comment display", and "Numeric display" can be laid out arbitrarily to be displayed. Moreover, the multiple screens created by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 can be overlapped and switched to be displayed.

For details, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

(2) Utility Screen Utility screen is a screen prepared beforehand for GOT. Installing BootOS or standard OS in the GOT from GT Designer2 enables utility screen displaying. The utility screen has menus as [Brightness/contrast adjustment screen] and [GOT memory check screen] etc.

For details, refer to the following.

Chapter 9 to Chapter 17

PLC

Connector for program

GOT

1 - 1

1.1 Features (1) Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices

Using of TFT color liquid crystal display (high intensity, wide angle view and high definition type) provides clear full-color display and displays small characters clearly. (Displays digital images of BMP and other formats in 65536 colors.)*1

Provides multi-language display function based on Unicode2.1 True Type font and high-speed drawing of beautiful text.

High speed monitoring through high speed communication at maximum of 115.2kbps. High speed display and high speed touch switch response.

(2) More efficient GOT operations including screen design, startup, adjustment, management and maintenance works 9MB user memory is included as standard. (Memory capacity can be expanded up to 57MB by

increasing the option memory)*1

CF card interface is included as standard. Font installation is available to increase the system fonts. Combined use of 4 types of alarms (system alarm, user alarm, alarm history, alarm popup

display) realizes more efficient alarm notification. Maintenance timing report function is available that measures the backlight energization time

and notifies of maintenance time. The USB connector is positioned on the GOT front. This enables the system startup to be

performed more efficiently using FA device startup tool, and eliminates the necessity of indirect works (opening and closing the control panel, cable replacement, cable rewiring) in order to improve the working efficiency.

The blown backlight bulb can be confirmed even during screen saving, with the blinked POWER LED at backlight shutoff detection.

(3) Enhanced support of FA device setup tools Transferring and monitoring sequence programs with the personal computer connected to the

GOT can be executed when connecting to a PLC CPU with the direct CPU connection or bus connection. (FA transparent function)

*1 The specifications differ depending on the GOT to be used. For the specifications, refer to the following.

3.2 Performance Specifications

1 - 2 1.1 Features

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown.

Start

Create project data.

Wire for the GOT power supply.

Mount the option function board or multi-color

display board.

(As necessary)

Refer to Chapter 7 WIRING

Refer to Chapter 8 Option.

Refer to GT Works3 Version1 Installation Instructions

or GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data

Transfer Manual

Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals) or GT Designer2 Version Screen Design

Manual

Mount units to GOT.

Turn on the CF card access switch.

Check the Communication settings.

Connect the GOT and controller with a cable.

Turn on the power supply of GOT and

the system of the connection destination.

Start the monitor.

End

Refer to Chapter 8 OPTION.

Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3

and a controller used or GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

for GT Designer2/GT Works2

Refer to Chapter 18

INSTALLATION

OF COREOS, BOOTOS

AND STANDARD OS in

this manual for the

operations of GOT.

Refer to GT Designer3

Version1 Screen Design

Manual (Fundamentals)

or GT Designer2

Version Basic Operation/

Data Transfer Manual

Write the OS and project data to be

installed on the GOT from the PC to

the CF card.

1) Write the standard monitor OS,

communication driver, extended

function OS, option OS, project

data in the CF card.

Write the OS and project data to be

installed on the GOT from the PC to

the CF card.

1) Set the OS boot drive to

[A: Standard CF Card]. *2

2) Write the standard monitor

OS, communication driver,

option OS, extended

function OS, project data,

and special data into the CF card.

Transfer the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the GOT. 1) Install standard monitor OS, communication driver, extended function OS, option OS to the GOT. After installation is completed, the GOT automatically restarts.

2) Download the project data created by the PC. *1

Check that the CF card access

switch is off, and insert the CF card

into the GOT.

Turn on the CF card access switch.

When transferring data from PC to

built-in flash memory and starting

GOT with built-in flash memory.

When transferring data to CF card

and starting GOT with CF card.

When transferring data from CF card

to built-in flash memory and starting

GOT with built-in flash memory.

Connect GOT and PC with a USB

cable or RS-232 cable. Insert the CF card in the PC. Insert the CF card in the PC.

Check that the CF card access

switch is off, and insert the CF card

into the GOT.Turn on the CF card access switch,

and then install or download the

standard monitor OS, communication

driver, option OS, extended function

OS, and project data.

Install GT Works3 or GT Designer2 in the PC.

1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure

1 - 3

* 1 Project data can be also downloaded/uploaded via Ethernet. For download/upload of project data via Ethernet, BootOS and standard monitor OS should be installed in the GOT in advance so that the GOT and PC can communicate with each other via Ethernet by setting Communication Settings. Refer to the following manual for details.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (Chapter 7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT)

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA) * 2 The B drive cannot be set as the OS boot drive.

Precautions for setting OS boot drive to [A: Standard CF Card]

(1) GOT startup time When the OS boot drive is set to [A: Standard CF Card], the GOT startup time with the A drive takes longer than that with the C drive. The GOT startup time with the A drive differs depending on the CF card type, the numbers of extended function OSs and option OSs, and project data size.

(2) Handling CF card during booting OS Do not remove the CF card and do not turn off the CF card access switch during booting the OS. Doing so causes the boot to fail. As a result, the GOT does not start correctly.

(3) Corrective actions when OS cannot be booted The OS cannot be booted in the following conditions. Take the following corrective actions, and then boot the OS again.

Condition Corrective action

The type of the GOT to be used differs from the GOT type data set with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 stored in the CF card.

Select the same GOT type as the GOT to be used in the Communicate with Memory Card screen. Select OSs and project data to be downloaded, and then download the selected data to the CF card.

The GOT has insufficient memory.

Mount an option function board with add-on memory on the GOT or delete unnecessary data. For details, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/ Data Transfer Manual

The CF card access switch is off. Turn on the CF card access switch.

1 - 4 1.2 Rough Pre-operation Procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows. For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

Multi-color

display board

Personal computer

(Commercially available)

Extension unit

CF card

Memory card adaptor

CF card

Memory

card

Option function

board

RS-422 conversion

unit

Battery

Protective sheet

Protective cover

for oil

Stand

Bar code reader

(Commercially available)

RFID controller

(Commercially available)

2.1 Overall Configuration

2 - 1

2.2 Component List (1) Explanation of the GOT model name

GOT 1000 series GT15/GT11

*1 For GOTs that can display 65536 colors, refer to the following.

3.2 Performance Specifications

G T 1 5 7 5 V

Panel color type

Screen size type

Model type

Video/RGB

Resolution

Power type

Display device type

B : Black

A : 100 to 240VAC

D : 24VDC

T : TFT color (High intensity, Wide angle view)

N : TFT color

S : STN color

L : STN monochrome

V : Video/RGB compliant

(None) : -

5 : 65536/4096/256 colors*1

2 : 16 colors

0 : Monochrome (White/Black), 16 gray scale

9 : 15"

8 : 12.1"

7 : 10.4"

6 : 8.4"

5 : 5.7"

X : 1024 768 (XGA)

S : 800 600 (SVGA)

V : 640 480 (VGA)

Q : 320 240 (QVGA)

2 - 2 2.2 Component List

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(2) Explanation of the option model name

Common for GT16/GT15/GT11

G T

*1 The bus connection unit (GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBU2L, GT15-75ABUSL,

GT15-75ABUS2L), can also be used with GT155 .

*2 The USB environmental protection cover (GT11-50UCOV) can be used for

both the GT15 and GT11.

(None) : Common for all types

90 : Dedicated for 15"

80 : Dedicated for 12.1"

75 : Common for 15", 12.1",10.4", 8.4",

(Partially common for 5.7 ") *1

70 : Dedicated for 10.4"

60 : Dedicated for 8.4"

50 : Dedicated for 5.7"

15V : Dedicated for video/RGB compliant model

15 : Dedicated for GT15 (Partially common for GT16/GT15)

11 : Dedicated for GT11,

(Partially common for GT16/GT15/GT11) *2

09 :

05 :

01 :

2.2 Component List

2 - 3

(3) Third party PLC connection cable

Connector pin type of the connection target (For third party PLC side)

Application classification (For GOT1000 side)

G T 0 9 C n

P: Plug (male) S: Socket (female) T: Solderless terminal C: Preparatory soldering

Number of connector pins (Indicates the number of terminals for solderless or preparatory-soldered terminals.)

Example) Wirings are different for each PLC type. Connecting targets are different, such as servo, inverter, temperature controller.

Cable distinction numbers for one manufacturer's products (Two-digit sequence number: 01, 02, ...) * When cable distinction is needed for one manufacture's products

Cable classification

R2: For RS-232 communication R4: For RS-422 communication

Length classification * Indicated in 10cm unit. Example) 3m : 30 30m: 300

Third party PLC connection cable (Commonly used for GT16, GT15 and GT11)

01: For OMRON PLC 02: For YASKAWA PLC 03: For YOKOGAWA PLC 04: For HITACHI PLC 05: For TOSHIBA PLC 06: For SHARP PLC 07: For ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 08: For SIEMENS PLC 09: For PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 10: For FUJI PLC 11: For KEYENCE PLC 12: JTEKT PLC 13: For HITACHI PLC

2 - 4 2.2 Component List

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

2.2.1 GOT

(Continued to next page)

Product name Model name Specifications

GOT

GT1595-XTBA 15" (1024 768 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 9MB

GT1595-XTBD 15" (1024 768 dots), TFT color liquid crystal (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 24VDC, memory size 9MB

GT1585V-STBA 12.1" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, video/RGB compliant, 100 to 240VAC, memory size 9MB

GT1585V-STBD 12.1" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal display (high intensity,

wide angle view), 65536 colors*1, video/RGB compliant, 24VDC, memory size 9MB

GT1585-STBA 12.1" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 9MB

GT1585-STBD 12.1" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 24VDC, Memory size 9MB

GT1575V-STBA 10.4" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, video/RGB compliant, 100 to 240VAC, memory size 9MB

GT1575V-STBD 10.4 (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal display (high intensity, wide

angle view), 65536 colors*1, video/RGB compliant, 24VDC, memory size 9MB

GT1575-STBA 10.4" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 9MB

GT1575-STBD 10.4" (800 600 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 24VDC, Memory size 9MB

GT1575-VTBA 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 9MB

GT1575-VTBD 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 24VDC, Memory size 9MB

GT1575-VNBA 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 256 colors, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 5MB

GT1575-VNBD 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 256 colors, 24VDC, Memory size 5MB

GT1572-VNBA 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 5MB

GT1572-VNBD 10.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 24VDC, Memory size 5MB

GT1565-VTBA 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 9MB

2.2 Component List 2.2.1 GOT

2 - 5

*1: For GOTs supporting 65536 colors, refer to the following.

3.2 Performance Specifications

Product name Model name Specifications

GOT

GT1565-VTBD 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 24VDC, Memory size 9MB

GT1562-VNBA 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 100 to 240VAC, Memory size 5MB

GT1562-VNBD 8.4" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal, 16 colors, 24VDC, Memory size 5MB

GT1555-VTBD 5.7" (640 480 dots), TFT color liquid crystal (high intensity, wide angle view), 65536 colors, 24VDC, memory size 9MB

GT1555-QTBD 5.7" (320 240 dots), TFT color liquid crystal (high intensity, wide angle

view), 65536 colors*1, 24VDC, memory size 9MB

GT1555-QSBD 5.7" (320 240 dots), STN color liquid crystal, 4096 colors, 24VDC, memory size 9MB

GT1550-QLBD 5.7" (320 240 dots), STN monochrome liquid crystal, 16 (Grayscale), 24VDC, memory size 9MB

2 - 6 2.2 Component List 2.2.1 GOT

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

2.2.2 Option

Communication unit (Sold separately) Product name Model name Description

Bus connection unit

GT15-QBUS For QCPU (Q Mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q Series) connection (standard model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

GT15-QBUS2 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

GT15-ABUS For A/QnACPU/Motion controller CPU (A Series) connection (standard model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

GT15-ABUS2 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q Mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q Series) connection (slim model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

GT15-75QBUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU/Motion controller CPU (A Series) connection (slim model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

GT15-75ABUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

Serial communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P For RS-232 interface connection, connector type GT15-RS4-9S For RS-422 interface connection, connector type GT15-RS4-TE For RS-422 interface connection, terminal block type

Ethernet communication unit

GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T) unit

MELSECNET/H communication unit

GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical double loop unit GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit

MELSECNET/10 communication unit

GT15-75J71LP23-Z Optical loop unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set)

GT15-75J71BR13-Z Coaxial bus unit (A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set)

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2 Intelligent device station unit

CC-Link communication unit

GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compliant

GT15-75J61BT13-Z Intelligent device station unit (A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set)

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900 Conversion unit for GOT-A900/GOT800 series communication unit Serial multi-drop connection unit

GT01-RS4-M GOT multidrop connection unit

2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

2 - 7

QCPU (Q Mode) bus connection cable (Sold separately)

QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable (Sold separately)

(Continued to next page)

Product name Model name Description

Q extension cable GOT-to-GOT connection cable

GT15-QC06B Cable length 0.6m

For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting GOT and GOT

GT15-QC12B Cable length 1.2m

GT15-QC30B Cable length 3m

GT15-QC50B Cable length 5m

GT15-QC100B Cable length 10m

Q long distance connection cable GOT-to-GOT long distance connection cable

GT15-QC150BS Cable length 15m

For long distance connection (13.2m or longer) of QCPU and GOT (A9GT-QCNB is necessary) For long distance connection of GOT and GOT

GT15-QC200BS Cable length 20m

GT15-QC250BS Cable length 25m

GT15-QC300BS Cable length 30m

GT15-QC350BS Cable length 35m

Product name Model name Description

Small-size CPU extension cable GOT-to-GOT connection cable

GT15-A1SC07B Cable length 0.7m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT

GT15-A1SC12B Cable length 1.2m

GT15-A1SC30B Cable length 3m

GT15-A1SC50B Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU and GOT

GT15-A1SC05NB Cable length 0.45m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU/motion controller CPU (A series) and A7GT-CNB

GT15-A1SC07NB Cable length 0.7m

GT15-A1SC30NB Cable length 3m

GT15-A1SC50NB Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS/AnSCPU and A7GT-CNB

Large-size CPU extension cable

GT15-C12NB Cable length 1.2m For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series /Extension base) and GOT

GT15-C30NB Cable length 3m

GT15-C50NB Cable length 5m

GT15-AC06B Cable length 0.6m

For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series /Extension base) and A7GT-CNB

GT15-AC12B Cable length 1.2m

GT15-AC30B Cable length 3m

GT15-AC50B Cable length 5m

GT15-A370C12B-S1 Cable length 1.2m For connecting Motion controller CPU (A series / Extension base) and GOTGT15-A370C25B-S1 Cable length 2.5m

GT15-A370C12B Cable length 1.2m For connecting Motion controller CPU (A series / Extension base) and A7GT-CNBGT15-A370C25B Cable length 2.5m

Small-size CPU long distance connection cable

GT15-C100EXSS-1 Cable length 10.6m For long distance connection of QnAS/AnSCPU/ motion controller CPU (A series) and GOT For connecting A7GT-CNB and a combined product of the GT15-EXCNB and GT15-C BS (for long distance connection)

GT15-C200EXSS-1 Cable length 20.6m

GT15-C300EXSS-1 Cable length 30.6m

2 - 8 2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs (Sold separately)

(Continued to next page)

Product name Model name Description

GOT-to-GOT long distance connection cable

GT15-C07BS Cable length 0.7m

For connecting GOT and GOT

GT15-C12BS Cable length 1.2m

GT15-C30BS Cable length 3m

GT15-C50BS Cable length 5m

GT15-C100BS Cable length 10m

GT15-C200BS Cable length 20m

GT15-C300BS Cable length 30m

A0J2HCPU connection cable

GT15-J2C10B Cable length 1m For connecting A0J2HCPU power supply module (A0J2-PW) and GOT

Buffer circuit cable GT15-EXCNB Cable length 0.5m Combined with GT15-C BS, can be used as GT15-C EXSS-1

Product name Model name Description

RS-232 cable

Q/LCPU direct connection cable

GT01-C30R2-6P Cable length 3m For connecting Q/LCPU and GOT

FX communication function extension board connection cable, FX communication function adapter connection cable, data transfer cable

GT01-C30R2-9S Cable length 3m

For connecting FXCPU communication expansion board (D-sub 9 pins connector), FXCPU communication special adapter (D- sub 9 pins connector) and GOT For connecting personal computer (Drawing software) (D-sub 9 pins: female) and GOT (D-sub 9 pins: female)

FX communication function adaptor connection cable

GT01-C30R2-25P Cable length 3m For connecting FXCPU communcation special adaptor (D-sub 25 pins connector) and GOT

Computer link connection cable

GT09-C30R2-9P Cable length 3 m For connecting computer link module/serial communication module and GOT

GT09-C30R2-25P Cable length 3 m

2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

2 - 9

Connection cables for OMRON PLCs (Sold separately)

(Continued to next page)

Product name Model name Description

RS-422 cable

FXCPU direct connection cable, FX communication function extension board connection cable

GT01-C10R4-8P Cable length 1m

For connecting FXCPU (MINI DIN 8 pins connector) and GOT For connecting FXCPU communication expansion board (MINI DIN 8 pins connector) and GOT

GT01-C30R4-8P Cable length 3m

GT01-C100R4-8P Cable length 10m

GT01-C200R4-8P Cable length 20m

GT01-C300R4-8P Cable length 30m

QnA/A/FXCPU direct connection cable, computer link connection cable

GT01-C30R4-25P Cable length 3m

For connecting QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series)/FX (FX1,FX2,FX2C) and GOT For connecting FA-CNV CBL and GOT For connecting computer link module/serial communication module and GOT

GT01-C100R4-25P Cable length 10m

GT01-C200R4-25P Cable length 20m

GT01-C300R4-25P Cable length 30m

Computer link connection cable

GT09-C30R4-6C Cable length 3 m

For connecting computer link module/serial communication module and GOT

GT09-C100R4-6C Cable length 10 m

GT09-C200R4-6C Cable length 20 m

GT09-C300R4-6C Cable length 30 m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20101-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC, serial communication module, communication board, serial communication board

GT09-C30R20102-25S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable

GT09-C30R20103-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit

2 - 10 2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs (Sold separately)

Connection cables for SHARP PLCs (Sold separately)

Product name

Model name Description

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R40101-9P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC, serial communication module, serial communication board

GT09-C100R40101-9P Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40101-9P Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40101-9P Cable length 30m

GT09-C30R40102-9P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit, communication board

GT09-C100R40102-9P Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40102-9P Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40102-9P Cable length 30m

GT09-C30R40103-5T Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to OMRON communication board (CP1W-CIF11)

GT09-C100R40103-5T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40103-5T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40103-5T Cable length 30m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R21101-6P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC

GT09-C30R21102-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi-communication unit

GT09-C30R21103-3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi-communication unit

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R41101-5T Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi-communication unit GT09-C100R41101-5T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R41101-5T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R41101-5T Cable length 30m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20601-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09-C30R20602-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R40601-15P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09-C100R40601-15P Cable length 10m GT09-C200R40601-15P Cable length 20m GT09-C300R40601-15P Cable length 30m GT09-C30R40602-15P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09-C100R40602-15P Cable length 10m GT09-C200R40602-15P Cable length 20m GT09-C300R40602-15P Cable length 30m GT09-C30R40603-6T Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit GT09-C100R40603-6T Cable length 10m GT09-C200R40603-6T Cable length 20m GT09-C300R40603-6T Cable length 30m

2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

2 - 11

Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs (Sold separately)

Connection cables for SHINKO indicating controller (Sold separately)

Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs (Sold separately)

Connection cables for HITACHI IES PLCs (Sold separately)

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R21201-25P Cable length 3 m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R41201-6C Cable length 3 m

For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC GT09-C100R41201-6C Cable length 10 m GT09-C200R41201-6C Cable length 20 m GT09-C300R41201-6C Cable length 30 m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R21401-4T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHINKO indicating controller (FCR- 100/FCD100/FCR-23A/PC-/FIR series)

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20501-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C30R20502-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R40501-15P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C100R40501-15P Cable length 10m GT09-C200R40501-15P Cable length 20m GT09-C300R40501-15P Cable length 30m GT09-C30R40502-6C Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C100R40502-6C Cable length 10m GT09-C200R40502-6C Cable length 20m GT09-C300R40502-6C Cable length 30m GT09-C30R40503-15P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C100R40503-15P Cable length 10m GT09-C200R40503-15P Cable length 20m GT09-C300R40503-15P Cable length 30m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20401-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC, intelligent serial port module

GT09-C30R20402-15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES PLC

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R40401-7T Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to HITACHI IES intelligent serial port module

GT09-C100R40401-7T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40401-7T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40401-7T Cable length 30m

2 - 12 2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs (Sold separately)

Connection cables for FUJI PLCs (Sold separately)

Connection cables for PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLCs (Sold separately)

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 Cable

GT09-C30R21301-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI communication module (LQE560/LQE060/LQE160)

RS-422 Cable

GT09-C30R41301-9S Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC (LPQ510) and communication module (LQE565/LQE165)

GT09-C100R41301-9S Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R41301-9S Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R41301-9S Cable length 30m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 Cable

GT09-C30R21003-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to FUJI RS-232C interface card(NV1L- RS2), RS-232C/485 interface capsule(FFK120A-C10), and general-purpose interface module(NC1L-RS2/FFU120B)

RS-422 Cable

GT09-C30R41001-6T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to FUJI RS-232C/485 interface capsule(FFK120A-C10) and general-purpose interface module(NC1L-RS4/FFU120B)

GT09-C100R41001-6T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R41001-6T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R41001-6T Cable length 30m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20901-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX RS422/232C conversion adapter

GT09-C30R20902-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC, computer communication unit

GT09-C30R20903-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

GT09-C30R20904-3C Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

2 - 13

Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs (Sold separately)

Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs (Sold separately)

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20201-9P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09-C30R20202-15P Cable length 3m

GT09-C30R20203-9P Cable length 3m

GT09-C30R20204-14P Cable length 3m

GT09-C30R20205-25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R40201-9P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09-C100R40201-9P Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40201-9P Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40201-9P Cable length 30m

GT09-C30R40202-14P Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09-C100R40202-14P Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40202-14P Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40202-14P Cable length 30m

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20301-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port/D-Sub 9-pin conversion cable

GT09-C30R20302-9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module

GT09-C30R20304-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA converter (ML2- )

GT09-C30R20305-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PLC

RS-422 cable

GT09-C30R40301-6T Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module

GT09-C100R40301-6T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40301-6T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40301-6T Cable length 30m

GT09-C30R40302-6T Cable length 3m

GT09-C100R40302-6T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40302-6T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40302-6T Cable length 30m

GT09-C30R40303-6T Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller (GREEN series)

GT09-C100R40303-6T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40303-6T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40303-6T Cable length 30m

GT09-C30R40304-6T Cable length 3m

For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA temperature controller (UT2000 series)

GT09-C100R40304-6T Cable length 10m

GT09-C200R40304-6T Cable length 20m

GT09-C300R40304-6T Cable length 30m

2 - 14 2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Connection cables for ALLEN-BRADLEY PLCs (Sold separately)

Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs (Sold separately)

RS-422 conversion unit (Sold separately)

Bus extension connector box (Sold separately)

Bus connector conversion box (Sold separately)

CF card (Sold separately)

*2: Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20701-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC

Product name

Model name Description

RS-232 cable

GT09-C30R20801-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter

Product name Model name Description

RS-422 conversion unit

GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit

RS-422 side connector 9 pins

GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25 pins

Product name Model name Description

Bus extension connector box

A9GT-QCNB For QCPU (Q Mode)/Motion controller CPU (Q series) long distance (13.2m or longer) bus connection

Product name Model name Description

Bus connector conversion box

A7GT-CNB For QnA/ACPU/Motion controller CPU (A series) long distance bus connection (For conversion from large type connector to small type connector)

Product name Model name Description

CF card

GT05-MEM-16MC Flash ROM 16MB

GT05-MEM-32MC Flash ROM 32MB

GT05-MEM-64MC Flash ROM 64MB

GT05-MEM-128MC Flash ROM 128MB

GT05-MEM-256MC Flash ROM 256MB

GT05-MEM-512MC Flash ROM 512MB

GT05-MEM-1GC Flash ROM 1GB

GT05-MEM-2GC Flash ROM 2GB

Commercially-available CF card *2

2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

2 - 15

Bar code reader (Sold separately)

*3: Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.

RFID controller (Sold separately)

*4: Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.

Memory card adaptor (Sold separately)

Option function board (Sold separately)

Product name Model name Description

Bar code reader Commercially-available bar code reader *3

Product name Model name Description

RFID controller Commercially-available RFID controller *4

Product name Model name Description

Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC CF card to memory card (Type II) conversion adaptor

Product name Model name Description

Option function board

GT15-FNB Option function board

GT15-QFNB Option function board Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-QFNB16M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+16MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-QFNB32M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+32MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-QFNB48M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+48MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-MESB48M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+48MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, document display function, and MES interface function

2 - 16 2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Multi color display board (Sold separately)

*5: To use it for a SVGA or VGA GOT, install the following OS to the GOT.

(Cannot be used for a SVGA or VGA GOT without installing the OS.)

For how to install the OS, refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) or GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual.

Option unit (Sold separately)

Option unit dedicated cable (Sold separately)

*6: Included with an option unit at the time of purchase.

Stand (Sold separately)

Battery (Sold separately)

Product name Model name Description

Multi-color display board

GT15-XHNB Multi-color display board for XGA (For 65536-color display)

Multi-color display board for SVGA/VGA (For 65536-color display) *5

GT15-VHNB Multi-color display board for SVGA/VGA (For 65536-color display)

Boot OS Ver. 02.01.00.E or later

Standard monitor OS: Ver. 02.01.00 or later

Product name Model name Description

Printer unit GT15-PRN For connecting a printer

USB slave (PictBridge) 1 channel

Video input unit GT15V-75V4 For NTSC/PAL input 4 channels

RGB input unit GT15V-75R1 For analog RGB input 1 channel

Video/RGB input unit GT15V-75V4R1 For NTSC/PAL (4ch)/analog RGB (1ch) mixed input

RGB output unit GT15V-75ROUT For analog RGB output

CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive)

CF card extention unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For CF card installation (B drive)

External I/O unit GT15-DIO For connecting an external I/O device/operation panel

GT15-DIOR For connecting an external I/O device/operation panel (Negative Common Input/Source Type Output)

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output

Product name Model name Description

Dedicated printer

connection cable *6 GT09-C30USB-5P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT (USB mini) to printer (USB)

Product name Model name Description

Stand

GT15-90STAND Stand for 15"

GT15-80STAND Stand for 12.1"

GT15-70STAND Stand for 10.4"/8.4"

GT05-50STAND Stand for 5.7"

Product name Model name Description

Battery GT15-BAT Battery for clock data and maintenance report data backups

2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

2 - 17

Protective sheet (Sold separately)

Protective cover for oil (Sold separately)

Backlight (Sold separately)

*7: At GOT purchase, it is installed in the main unit.

Product name Model name Description

Protective sheet

GT15-90PSCB

15" protective sheet

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-90PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-90PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-90PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-80PSCB

12.1" protective sheet

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-80PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-80PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-80PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-70PSCB

10.4" protective sheet

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-70PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-70PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-70PSGW Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-60PSCB

8.4" protective sheet

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-60PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-60PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-60PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-50PSCB

5.7" protective sheet

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-50PSCW Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-50PSGW Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets

Product name Model name Description

Protective cover for oil

GT05-90PCO For 15" GOT

GT05-80PCO For 12.1" GOT

GT05-70PCO For 10.4" GOT

GT05-60PCO For 8.4" GOT

GT05-50PCO For 5.7" GOT

Product name Model name Description

Backlight *7

GT15-90XLTT For 15" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (XGA) GT1595-X

GT15-80SLTT For 12.1" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1585V-S, GT1585-S

GT15-70SLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA) GT1575-S (Function version B or earlier)

GT15-70VLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA, VGA)

GT1575V-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-S (Function version C or later)

GT15-70VLTN For 10.4" TFT (VGA) GT1575-VN, GT1572- VN

GT15-60VLTT For 8.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (VGA) GT1565-V

GT15-60VLTN For 8.4" TFT (VGA) GT1562-VN

2 - 18 2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

USB environmental protection cover (Sold separately)

*8: At GOT purchase, it is installed in the main body.

Attachment (Sold separately)

*9 The GP250 and GP260 manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation can also be replaced with the 10.4" GOT1000.

Drawing software (Sold separately)

* 10: The is assigned with an integer 2 or more.

Product name Model name Description

USB environmental

protection cover *8

GT15-UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side (For complying IP67)

15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4"

GT11-50UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side (For complying IP67)

5.7"

Product name Model name Description

Applicable GOT screen size

GOT model to be replaced

Alternative GOT model

Attachment

GT15-70ATT-98

10.4"

A985GOT*9

GT157 GT15-70ATT-87

A870GOT-SWS

A870GOT-TWS

A8GT-70GOT-TW

A8GT-70GOT-TB

A8GT-70GOT-SW

A8GT-70GOT-SB

GT15-60ATT-97

8.5"

A97 GOT

GT156

GT15-60ATT-96 A960GOT

GT15-60ATT-87

A870GOT-EWS

A8GT-70GOT-EW

A8GT-70GOT-EB

A77GOT-EL-S5

A77GOT-EL-S3

A77GOT-EL

GT15-60ATT-77

A77GOT-CL-S5

A77GOT-CL-S3

A77GOT-CL

A77GOT-L-S5

A77GOT-L-S3

A77GOT-L

GT15-50ATT-95W 5.7" A956WGOT GT155 GT115GT15-50ATT-85 A85 GOT

Product name Model name Description

GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-E Drawing software for GOT2000/GOT1000 series

GT Designer2

SW D5C-GTD2-J ( indicates the

version)*10

Drawing software for GOT1000/GOT900 series

2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

2 - 19

PC connection cable (Sold separately) Product name Model name Description

Project data transfer cable

GT01-C30R2-9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT (D sub 9-pin female) and PC (D sub 9-pin female)

GT09-C20USB-5P Cable length 2m For connecting GOT (USB mini) and PC (USB)

GT09-C30USB-5P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT (USB mini) and PC (USB)

2 - 20 2.2 Component List 2.2.2 Option

1

O V

E R

V IE

W

2

S Y

S T

E M

C

O N

F IG

U R

A T

IO N

3

S P

E C

IF IC

A T

IO N

S

4

P A

R T

N A

M E

A N

D

S E

T T

IN G

S

5

E M

C A

N D

L O

W

V O

LT A

G E

D

IR E

C T

IV E

6

IN S

TA L

L A

T IO

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O P

T IO

N

3. SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 General Specifications

Item Specifications

Operating

ambient

temperature*1

Display section 0 to 50C

Other than the

display section 0 to 55C

Storage ambient temperature -20 to 60C

Operating ambient humidity*6 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing

Storage ambient humidity*6 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing

Vibration resistance*2

Compliant

with JIS

B3502 and

IEC61131-2

Frequency Acceleration Half-

amplitude Sweep count

Under

intermittent

vibration

5 to 8.4Hz - 3.5mm 10 times each

in X, Y and Z

directions 8.4 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 -

Under

continuous

vibration

5 to 8.4Hz - 1.75mm

- 8.4 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 -

Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502, IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y and Z

directions)

Operating atmosphere No greasy fumes, corrosive gas, flammable gas, excessive conductive dust, and

direct sunlight(Same as storage atmosphere)

Operating altitude*3 2000 m (6562 ft) max.

Installation location Inside control panel

Overvoltage category*4 II or less

Pollution degree*5 2 or less

Cooling method Self-cooling

Grounding Grounding with a resistance of 100 or less

3.1 General Specifications

3 - 1

*1 When any of the following units is mounted, the maximum operating ambient temperature must be 5C lower

than the one described in the general specifications.

MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13)

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

Protective cover for oil

*2 When using the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link

communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z), refer to the manual of the communication unit you use. (Differs with

the specification of GOT.)

*3 Do not use or store the GOT under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m (0ft.). Failure to

observe this instruction may cause a malfunction.

When an air purge is made inside the control panel by adding pressure, there may be a clearance between the

surface sheet and the screen making it difficult to use the touch panel, or the sheet may come off.

*4 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the

public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises.

Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.

The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.

*5 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the

equipment is used.

In pollution degree 2, only non-conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to

condensation.

*6 For the STN LCD model, the wet-bulb temperature must be 39C or less.

3 - 2 3.1 General Specifications

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3.2 Performance Specifications The performance specifications of the GT15 is as follows.

3.2.1 GT1595-X

3.2.2 GT1585V-S, GT1585-S 3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN 3.2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 3.2.5 GT1555-V, GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q

3.2.1 GT1595-X

(Continued to next page)

Item Specifications

GT1595-XTBA GT1595-XTBD

Display

section*1

Type TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view)

Screen size 15"

Resolution 1,024 768 dots

Display size 304.1(12.0)(W) 228.1(8.98)(H) [mm](inch)

Display character 16-dot standard font: 64 characters 48 lines (2byte character)

12-dot standard font: 85 characters 64 lines (2byte character)

Display color 65536 colors*2

Display angle*10 Left/Right: 75 degrees Top: 50 degrees Bottom: 60 degrees

Intensity of LCD only 450 [cd/m]

Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment

Life Approx. 52,000 h (Operating ambient temperature : 25C)

Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) backlight shutoff detection function is included Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.

Life*3 Approx. 50,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Touch

panel*7

Type Analog resistive film

Key size Minimum 2 2 dots (per key)

Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched

Simultaneous presses not allowed. (Only 1 point can be touched.)*9

Life 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)*8

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.1 GT1595-X

3 - 3

Item Specifications

GT1595-XTBA GT1595-XTBD

Human sensor

Detection length 1(39.37) [m](inch)

Detection range Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 70 degrees

Detection delay time 0 to 4s

Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4C or higher

Memory*4

C drive Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)

Life (Number of write times)

100,000 times

Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery (Option)

Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data

Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambiant temperature of 25C)

Built-in interface

RS-232*6

RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

USB

USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

CF card

Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Not available

Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch

Multi-color display board For multi-color display board mounting, 1ch

Extension unit*6 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch

Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)

Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67*5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

External dimensions (Excluding USB environmental protection cover)

397(15.6)(W) 296(11.7)(H) 61(2.40)(D)[mm](inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 383.5(15.1)(W) 282.5(11.1)(H)[mm](inch)

Weight 5.0kg(11.0lb) (mounting fixtures are not included)

Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.17T or later

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.32J or later

3 - 4 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.1 GT1595-X

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.

*2 With the hardware version indicated below, it will be 256 colors when the multi-color display board is not installed. For how to confirm the function version, refer to the following.

Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards

*3 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.

*4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached. Compliant with IP2X at the USB

interface only when a USB cable is connected. Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.

*6 For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)

*7 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more

*8 When using a stylus pen, it will be 100,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N max.) Since the touch panel is a consumable product structurally, it may not be used even fewer than above, depending on the using method and usage environment.

*9 An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2 points on the screensimultaneously.

*10 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.

Item Model Function version GT1595 GT1595-XTBA A

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.1 GT1595-X

3 - 5

3.2.2 GT1585V-S, GT1585-S

(Continued to next page)

Item Specifications

GT1585V-STBA GT1585V-STBD GT1585-STBA GT1585-STBD

Display section*1

Type TFT color liquid crystal display (High intensity and wide angle view)

Screen size 12.1

Resolution 800 600 dots

Display size 246(9.69)(W) 184.5(7.26)(H) [mm](inch)

Display character 16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (2byte character)

Display color 65536 colors*2

Display angle*8 Left/Right: 60 degrees Top: 40 degrees Bottom: 50 degrees

Left/Right:65 degrees Top:45 degrees Bottom:55 degrees

Intensity of LCD only 350 [cd/m2] 400 [cd/m2]

Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment

Life Approx. 50,000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25C)

Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.

Life*3

Approx. 50,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Touch

panel*7

Type Matrix resistive film

Number of touch keys 1,900 objects/screen (38 lines 50 columns)

Key size Minimum 16 16 dots (16 8 dots for the last line only) (per key)

Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched

Maximum of 2 objects

Life 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)

Human Sensor

Detection length 1(39.37) [m](inch)

Detection range Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 70 degrees

Detection delay time 0 to 4s

Detection temperature Temperature difference between human body and ambient air: 4C or higher

Memory*4

C drive Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)

Life (Number of write times)

100,000 times

Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery (Option)

Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data

Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)

3 - 6 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.2 GT1585V-S, GT1585-S

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.

*2 With the hardware version indicated below, it will be 256 colors when the multi-color display board is not installed. For how to confirm the function version, refer to the following.

Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards

*3 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.

*4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data.

Item Specifications

GT1585V-STBA GT1585V-STBD GT1585-STBA GT1585-STBD

Built-in interface

RS-232*6

RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 15,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

USB

USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

CF card

Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Not available

Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch

Multi-color display board For multi-color display board mounting, 1ch

Extension unit*6 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch

Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)

Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67 *5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

External dimensions (Excluding USB environmental protection cover)

316(12.44)(W) 242(9.53)(H) 52(2.05)(D) [mm](inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 302(11.89)(W) 228(8.98)(H)[mm](inch)

Weight 2.8 kg(6.2lb) (mounting fixtures are not included)

Compatible software package GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.32J or later

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.04E or later

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.17T or later

Item Model Function version

GT1585 GT1585-STBA A GT1585-STBD A

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.2 GT1585V-S, GT1585-S

3 - 7

*5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached. Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected. Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.

*6 For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)

*7 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more

*8 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.

3 - 8 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.2 GT1585V-S, GT1585-S

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN

(Continued to next page)

Item

Specifications

GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD, GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

Display

section*1

Type TFT color liquid crystal (LCD of high intensity and wide angle view)

TFT color liquid crystal

Screen size 10.4"

Resolution 800 600dots 640 480dots

Display size 211(8.31)(W) 158(6.22)(H)[mm](inch)

Display character

16-dot standard font: 50 characters 37 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 66 characters 50 lines (2byte character)

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2byte character)

Display color 65536 colors*2

GT1575-VN: 256color GT1572-VN: 16color

Display angle*8 Left/Right/Top/ Bottom: 85 degrees

Left/ Right/Top/ Bottom: 85 degrees

Left/Right: 45 degrees Top: 30 degrees Bottom: 20 degrees

Intensity of LCD only 400[cd/m2] 380[cd/m2] 200[cd/m2]

Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment 4-level adjustment

Life Approx. 50,000 h (Operating ambient temparature: 25C)

Approx. 41,000 h (Operating ambient temparature:25C)

Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.

Life*3 Approx. 40,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Touch

panel*7

Type Matrix resistive film

Number of touch keys 1,900 objects/screen (38 lines 50 columns)

1,200 objects/screen (30 lines 40 columns)

Key size Minimum 16 16 dots (16 8 dots for the last line only)(per key)

Minimum 16 16 dots (per key)

Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched

Maximum of 2 objects

Life 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98 max.)

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN

3 - 9

(Continued to next page)

Item

Specifications

GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD, GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

Human sensor

Detection length None

Detection range None

Detection delay time None

Detection temperature

None

Memory *4

C drive Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)

Built-in flash memory 5Mbytes (for storing project data and OS)

Life (Number of write times)

100,000 times

Batery GT15-BAT lithium battery (Option)

Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data

Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Built-in interface

RS-232*6

RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

USB

USB (Full Speed 12 Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

CF card

Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE I Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Not available

Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch

Multi-color display board

For multi-color display board mounting, 1ch

Cannot be used. (Even installed, 65536 colors will not be displayed.)

Extension unit*6 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch

Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)

Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67*5 Inside the enclosure: IP2X

3 - 10 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.

*2 With the hardware version indicated below, it will be 256 colors when the multi-color display board is not installed. For how to confirm the function version, refer to the following.

Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards

*3 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.

*4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached. Compliant with IP2X at the USB

interface only when a USB cable is connected. Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.

Item

Specifications

GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD, GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

External dimensions (Excluding USB environmental protective cover)

303(11.93)(W) 214(8.43)(H) 49(1.93)(D)[mm](inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 289(11.38)(W) 200(7.87)(H)[mm](inch)

Weight 2.3 kg(5.1lb) (mounting fixtures are not included)

2.4 kg(5.3lb) (mounting fixtures are not included)

2.3 kg(5.1lb) (mounting fixtures are not included)

Compatible software package

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.32J or later

GT1575-STBA: GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.04E or later GT1575-STBD: GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.17T or later

GT1575-VTBA: GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.04E or later GT1575-VTBD: GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.17T or later

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.17T or later

Item Model Function version

GT1575

GT1575-STBA A GT1575-STBD A GT1575-VTBA A GT1575-VTBD A

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN

3 - 11

*6 For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)

*7 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more

*8 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.

3 - 12 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3.2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN

(Continued to next page)

Item Specifications

GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD

Display

section*1

Type TFT color liquid crystal (LCD of high intensity and wide angle view)

TFT color liquid crystal

Screen size 8.4"

Resolution 640 480dots

Display size 171(6.73)(W) 128(5.04)(H)[mm](inch)

Display character 16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2byte character) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2byte character)

Display color 65536 colors*2 16 colors

Display angle*8 Left/Right: 65degrees Top: 50 degrees Bottom: 60 degrees

Left/Right: 45degrees Top: 20 degrees Bottom: 20 degrees

Intensity of LCD only 380[cd/m2] 150[cd/m2]

Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment 4-level adjustment

Life Approx. 41,000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25C)

Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable) backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.

Life*3 Approx. 40,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Touch

panel*7

Type Matrix resistive film

Number of touch keys 1,200 objects/screen (30 lines 40 columns)

Key size Minimum 16 16 dots (per key)

Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched

Maximum of 2 objects

Life 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)

Human sensor

Detection length None

Detection range None

Detection delay time None

Detection temperature None

Memory*4

C drive Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes (for string project data and OS)

Built-in flash memory 5Mbytes (for string project data and OS)

Life (Number of write times)

100,000 times

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN

3 - 13

*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect.

*2 With the hardware version indicated below, it will be 256 colors when the multi-color display board is not installed. For how to confirm the function version, refer to the following.

Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards

Item Specifications

GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD

Battery GT-15BAT lithium battery (Option)

Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data

Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Built-in interface

RS-232*6

RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

USB

USB (Full Speed 12 Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation, FA transparent function)

CF card

Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE 1 Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Not available

Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch

Multi-color display board For multi-color display board mounting, 1ch

Cannot be used. (Even installed, 65536 colors will not be displayed.)

Extension unit*6 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 2ch

Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)

Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67*5

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

External dimensions (Excluding USB environmental protective cover)

241(9.49)(W) 190(7.48)(H) 52(2.05)(D)[mm](inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 227(8.94)(W) 176(6.93)(H)[mm](inch)

Weight 1.9 kg(4.2lb) (mounting fixtures are not included)

Compatible software package

GT1565-VTBA: GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.04E or later GT1565-VTBD: GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.17T or later

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.17T or later

Item Model Function version

GT1565 GT1565-VTBA A GT1565-VTBD A

3 - 14 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

*3 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.

*4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached. Compliant with IP2X at the USB

interface only when a USB cable is connected. Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.

*6 For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)

*7 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more

*8 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN

3 - 15

3.2.5 GT1555-V, GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q

(Continued to next page)

Item Specifications

GT1555-VTBD GT1555-QTBD GT1555-QSBD GT1550-QLBD

Display section *1

Type TFT color liquid crystal (LCD of high intensity and wide angle view)

STN color liquid crystal STN monochrome liquid crystal

Screen size 5.7"

Resolution 640 480dots 320 240dots

Display size 115(4.53)(W) 86(3.39)(H)[mm](inch)

Display character

16-dot standard font: 40 characters 30 lines (2byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 53 characters 40 lines (2byte characters)

16-dot standard font: 20 characters 15 lines (2byte characters) 12-dot standard font: 26 characters 20 lines (2byte characters)

Display color 65536color*2 4096color monochrome (16-level)

Display angle*8

Left/Right: 80 degrees Top: 80 degrees Bottom: 70 degrees

Left/Right: 70 degrees Top: 70 degrees Bottom: 50 degrees

Left/Right: 50 degrees Top: 50 degrees Bottom:

70 degrees*7

Left/Right: 45 degrees Top: 20 degrees Bottom: 40 degrees

Intensity of LCD only 350[cd/m2] 400[cd/m2] 380[cd/m2] 220[cd/m2]

Intensity adjustment 8-level adjustment

Contrast adjustment None 16-level adjustment

Life Approx. 50,000 h (Operating ambient temperature: 25C)

Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube (nonreplaceable) backlight shutoff detection function is included. Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.

Life*2 Approx. 75,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Approx. 58,000 h or longer (Time when display luminance reaches 50% at the operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Touch panel *6

Type Matrix resistive film

Number of touch keys 1200 objects/screen (Matrix structure of 30 lines

40 columns) 300 objects/screen (Matrix structure of 15 lines 20 columns)

Key size Minimum 16 16 dots (per key)

Number of objects that can be simultaneously touched

Maximum of 2 objects

Life 1 million times or more (operating force 0.98N max.)

Human sensor

Detection length None

Detection range None

Detection delay time None

3 - 16 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.5 GT1555-V, GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Item Specifications

GT1555-VTBD GT1555-QTBD GT1555-QSBD GT1550-QLBD

Human sensor

Detection temperature

None

Memory *3

C drive Built-in flash memory 9Mbytes (for string project data and OS)

Life (Number of write times)

100,000 times

Battery GT15-BAT lithium battery (Option)

Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data

Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Built-in interface

RS-232*5

RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male) Application: For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Project data read/ write, OS installation and FA transparent function)

USB

USB (Full Speed 12 Mbps), Device, 1ch Connector shape: Mini-B Application: For connecting a personal computer (Project data read/write, OS installation and FA transparent function)

CF card

Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE 1 Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup When formatting a CF card to FAT16: Up to 2GB When formatting a CF card to FAT32: Not available

Option function board For option function board mounting, 1ch

Extension unit*5 For communication unit/option unit mounting, 1ch

Buzzer output Single tone (tone length adjustable)

Protective structure Outside the enclosure: IP67*4

Inside the enclosure: IP2X

External dimensions (Excluding USB environmental protective cover)

167(6.6)(W) 135(5.3)(H) 56(2.2)(D)[mm](inch)

Panel cutting dimensions 153(6.0)(W) 121(4.8)(H)[mm](inch)

Weight 1.1 kg(2.4lb) (mounting fixtures are not included)

Compatible software package

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.58L or later

GT Designer3 Version1.01B or later GT Designer2 Version2.32J or later

3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.5 GT1555-V, GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q

3 - 17

*1 Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements. Flickers may be observed depending on the display color. Please note that these dots and flickers appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect. There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels. When using multiple liquid crystal display panels, please note that there is an individual difference between them. A crosstalk (shadow as an extension of the display) may appear on the liquid crystal display panel. Please note that it appears due to its characteristic. When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle, the display color seems like it has changed. Please note that it is due to its characteristic. Please note that the response time, brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature. There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels. When using multiple liquid crystal display panels, please note that there is an individual difference between them. A crosstalk (shadow as an extension of the display) may appear on the liquid crystal display panel. Please note that it appears due to its characteristic. When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle, the display color seems like it has changed. Please note that it is due to its characteristic. Please note that the response time, brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature.

*2 The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.

*3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data. *4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached. Compliant with IP2X at the USB

interface only when a USB cable is connected. Note that this does not guarantee all users' operation environment. In addition, the GOT may not be available for use in the environment where oil or chemicals are splashed over for a long period or where oil mist is filled.

*5 For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply. For the current for the extension units, bar code reader or RFID controller, and the current that the GOT can supply, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)

*6 To use a stylus pen, the following specifications must be met. Material: Polyacetal resin Tip radius: 0.8mm or more

*7 For hardware version AS or earlier, the display angle is as follows. Left/Right: 55 degrees Top: 65 degrees Bottom: 70 degrees

*8 LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.

3 - 18 3.2 Performance Specifications 3.2.5 GT1555-V, GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3.3 Power Supply Specifications The following describes the power supply specifications for the GT15.

3.3.1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply

3.3.2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply

Remark Operation at momentary failure

If an instantaneous power failure occurs in the power supply and continues for more than the permissible period, the GOT will be reset.

Make sure to power on the unit more than 5 seconds after power-off.

3.3.1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply

Item

Specifications

GT1595-XTBA GT1585V-STBA, GT1585-STBA

GT1575V-STBA, GT1575- STBA, GT1575-VTBA,

GT1575-VNBA, GT1572- VNBA, GT1565-VTBA,

GT1562-VNBA

Input power supply voltage 100 to 240VAC (+10% -15%)

Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%

Input max. apparent power 110VA (maximum load)

Power consumption 56W or less 41W or less 39W or less

At backlight off 30W or less 28W or less

Inrush current 50A or less (4ms) (maximum load)

45A or less (4ms) (maximum load)

40A or less (4ms) (maximum load)

Allowable momentary power failure time

20ms or less (100VAC or more)

Noise immunity 1,500Vp-p noise voltage, 1s noise width (when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency)

Dielectric withstand voltage 1500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance 10M or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2 [mm2]

Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 to 0.8 [Nm]

3.3 Power Supply Specifications 3.3.1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply

3 - 19

3.3.2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply

Item

Specifications

GT1595-XTBD GT1585V-STBD, GT1585-STBD

GT1575V-STBD, GT1575-STBD, GT1575-VTBD, GT1575-VNBD, GT1572-VNBD, GT1565-VTBD, GT1562-VNBD

GT1555-V GT1555-QTBD GT1555-QSBD GT1550-QLBD

Input power supply voltage

24VDC (+25%, -20%)

Power consumption

57W or less (2380mA/ 24VDC)

43W or less (1790mA/ 24VDC)

41W or less (1710mA/ 24VDC)

19W or less (790mA/ 24VDC)

18W or less (750mA/ 24VDC)

17W or less (710mA/ 24VDC)

15W or less (620mA/ 24VDC)

At backlight off

32W or less (1330mA/ 24VDC)

30W or less (1250mA/24VDC)

14W or less (580mA/ 24VDC)

13W or less (540mA/24VDC)

Inrush current

100A or less (4ms) (maximum load)

115A or less (1ms)(maximum load)

67A or less (1ms)(maxim um load)

60A or less (1ms)(maximum load)

Allowable momentary power failure time

10 ms or less

Noise immunity 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width (when measuring with a noise simulator under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency)

Dielectric withstand voltage

500VDC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth

Insulation resistance

10M or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance tester

Applicable wire size

0.75 to 2 [mm]

Applicable solderless terminal

Solderess terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

Applicable tightening torque (Terminal block terminal screw)

0.5 to 0.8 [Nm]

3 - 20 3.3 Power Supply Specifications 3.3.2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

4. PART NAME AND SETTINGS

4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595

2), 3)

1)

4)

16)

14)

5) 6)

GOT rear face

11) 12)

13)7)

15)

17)

8)

9)

10)

4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595

4 - 1

*1 For the multi-color display board, refer to the following.

3.2.1 GT1595-X

Remark Connector used for the RS-232 interface

The specification of the cconnector used for the RS-232 interface of GT1595 is as follows.

No. Name Description

1) POWER LED

Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green : Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied

2) Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen.

3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen

4) USB interface For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: TYPE Mini-B)

5) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)

6) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

7) Extension interface For installing an extension unit

8) CF card interface For installing a CF card

9) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit : CF card not accessed

10) CF card access switch

Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF : CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)

11) Optional function board interface

For installing the optional function board

12) Multi-color display board

interface*1 For installing the multi-color display board

13) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)

14) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting

15) Battery holder Houses the battery.

16) Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement

17) Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup

Manufacturer :DDK Ltd.

Mode name :17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product

4 - 2 4.1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585

2), 3)

1)

17)

5)

6) 7)

15)

16)

9)

10)

4)

11)

GOT rear face

12) 13)

14)8)

4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585

4 - 3

*1 It is provided for the GT1585V-S only. *2 For the multi-color display board, refer to the following.

3.2.2 GT1585V-S, GT1585-S

No. Name Description

1) POWER LED

Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green : Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied

2) Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen.

3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen

4) Video/RGB interface*1 For installing the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, or RGB output unit

5) USB interface For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: TYPE Mini-B)

6) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)

7) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

8) Extension interface For installing an extension unit

9) CF card interface For installing a CF card

10) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit : CF card not accessed

11) CF card access switch

Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF : CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)

12) Optional function board interface

For installing the optional function board

13) Multi-color display board

interface*2 For installing the multi-color display board

14) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)

15) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting

16) Battery holder Houses the battery.

17) Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement

4 - 4 4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Connector used for the RS-232 interface

The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT1585 is as follows.

GOT model name Hardware version Connector

GT1585V-STBA A (March, 2006) or later Manufacturer: DDK Ltd. Model name: 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent productGT1585V-STBD A (May, 2006) or later

GT1585-STBA B (April, 2005) or before

Manufacturer: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name: GM-C9RMDU11 or equivalent product

C (April, 2005) or later Manufacturer: DDK Ltd. Model name: 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent productGT1585-STBD A (July, 2005) or later

4.2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585

4 - 5

4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157

2), 3)

1)

5)

6) 7)

15)

16)

9)

10)

8)

4)

11)

14)

12) 13)

GOT rear face

4 - 6 4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

*1 It is provided for the GT1575V-S only. *2 For the multi-color display board, refer to the following.

3.2.3 GT1575V-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN

No. Name Description

1) POWER LED

Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green : Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied

2) Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen.

3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen

4) Video/RGB interface*1 For installing the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, or RGB output unit

5) USB interface For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: TYPE Mini-B)

6) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)

7) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

8) Extension interface For installing an extension unit

9) CF card interface For installing a CF card

10) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit : CF card not accessed

11) CF card access switch

Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF : CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)

12) Optional function board interface

For installing the optional function board

13) Multi-color display board

interface*2

For installing the multi-color display board (For GT1575-VN and GT1572-VN, 65536 color display is not supported even with the multi-color display board installed.)

14) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)

15) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting

16) Battery holder Houses the battery.

4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157

4 - 7

Remark Connector used for the RS-232 interface

The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT157 is as follows.

GOT model name

Hardware version Connector

GT1575-STBA A (March, 2006) or later Manufacturer: DDK Ltd. Model name: 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent productGT1575-STBD A (March, 2006) or later

GT1575-STBA B (April, 2005) or before

Manufacturer: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name: GM-C9RMDU11 or equivalent product

C (April, 2005) or later Manufacturer: DDK Ltd. Model name: 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent productGT1575-STBD A (July, 2005) or later

GT1575-VTBA D (April, 2005) or before

Manufacturer: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Model name: GM-C9RMDU11 or equivalent product

E (April, 2005) or later

Manufacturer: DDK Ltd. Model name: 17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product

GT1575-VTBD A (July, 2005) or later

GT1575-VNBA A (July, 2005) or later

GT1575-VNBD A (July, 2005) or later

GT1572-VNBA A (September, 2005) or later

GT1572-VNBD A (September, 2005) or later

4 - 8 4.3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156

2) 3)

1)

4)

5) 6)

14)

GOT rear face

11) 12)

15)

8)

9)

10)

7) 13)

4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156

4 - 9

*1 For the multi-color display board, refer to the following.

3.2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN

Remark Connector used for the RS-232 interface

The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT156 is as

follows.

No. Name Description

1) POWER LED

Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange : Screen saving Blinks in orange/green : Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied

2) Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen.

3) Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen

4) USB interface For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: TYPE Mini-B)

5) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)

6) Power terminal Power input terminal, LG terminal, FG terminal

7) Extension interface For installing an extension unit

8) CF card interface For installing a CF card

9) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit : CF card not accessed

10) CF card access switch

Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF : CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)

11) Optional function board interface

For installing the optional function board

12) Multi-color display board

interface*1 For installing the multi-color display board (For GT1562-VN, 65536 color display is not supported even with the multi-color display board installed.)

13) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)

14) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting

15) Battery holder Houses the battery.

Manufacturer :DDK Ltd.

Mode name :17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product

4 - 10 4.4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155

1)

2),3)

4) 13)

5) 14) 6)

11)

9) 10) 12)

15)

GOT rear face

8)

7)

4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155

4 - 11

Remark Connector used for the RS-232 interface

The specification of the connector used for the RS-232 interface of GT155 is as

follows.

No. Name Description

1) POWER LED

Lit in green : Power is correctly supplied Lit in red : Screen saving Blinks in red : Blown back light bulb Not lit : Power is not supplied

2) Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen

3) Touch key For operating touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen

4) USB interface For connecting a personal computer (Connector type: TYPE Mini-B)

5) RS-232 interface For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer (Connector type: D sub 9-pin)

6) Power terminal Power input terminal, FG terminal

7) Extension interface For installing an extension unit

8) CF card interface For installing a CF card

9) CF card access LED Lit : CF card accessed Not lit : CF card not accessed

10) CF card access switch

Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON : CF card being accessed (CF card removal prohibited) OFF : CF card not accessed (CF card removal possible)

11) Optional function board interface

For installing the optional function board

12) Reset switch Hardware reset switch (Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed)

13) Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting

14) Battery holder Houses the battery

15) Protective ground terminal For earthing

Manufacturer :DDK Ltd.

Mode name :17LE-23090-27 (D4CK) or equivalent product

4 - 12 4.5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5. EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE

For the products sold in European countries, the conformance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the European Directives, has been a legal obligation since 1996. Also, conformance to the Low Voltage Directive, another European Directives, has been a legal obligation since 1997. Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a "CE mark" on their products.

Authorized representative in Europe Authorized representative in Europe is shown below. Name :Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address :Gothaer strase 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany

5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive EMC Directives are those which require "any strong electromagnetic force is not output to the external.: Emission (electromagnetic interference)" and "It is not influenced by the electromagnetic wave from the external.: Immunity (electromagnetic sensitivity)". Items 5.1.1 thru 5.1.3 summarize the precautions to use GOT and configure the mechanical unit in order to match the EMC directives. Though the data described herein are produced with our best on the basis of the requirement items and standards of the restrictions gathered by Mitsubishi, they do not completely guaranteed that all mechanical unit manufactured according to the data do not always match the above directives. The manufacturer itself which manufactures the mechanical unit must finally judge the method and others to match the EMC directives.

5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive

5 - 1

5.1.1 EMC directive

The standards of the EMC Directive are shown below.

(Continued to next page)

Applied standard

Test standard Test details Standard value

EN61131-2 : 2007

EN55011

Radiated noise*1 Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured.

30M-230MHz QP: 30dB V/m (30m in measurement

range)*2, *3

230M-1000MHz QP: 37dB V/m(30m in measurement

range)*2, *3

EN55011

Conducted noise*1

Electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power line is measured.

150k-500kHz QP:79dB,

Mean: 66dB*2

500k-30MHz QP:73dB,

Mean: 60dB*2

EN61000-4-2

Electrostatic immunity*1

Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment.

4kV Contact discharge 8kV Aerial discharge

EN61000-4-3 Radiated field AM

modulation*1

Immunity test in which field is irradiated to the product.

80-1000MHz:10V/m 1.4-2GHz:3V/m 2.0-2.7GHz:1V/m 80%AM modulation@1kHz

EN61000-4-4 Fast transient burst

noise*1

Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal lines.

Power line:2kV Digital I/O(24V or higher): 1kV (Digital I/O(24V or less))> 250V (Analog I/O, signal lines)> 250V

EN61000-4-5

Surge immunity*1 Immunity test in which lightening surge is applied to the product.

AC power type Power line (between line and ground) : 2kV Power line (between lines) : 1kV Data communication port : 1kV DC power type Power line (between line and ground) : 0.5kV Power line (between lines) : 0.5kV Data communication port : 1kV

EN61000-4-6 Conducted RF

immunity*1

Immunity test in which a noise inducted on the power and signal lines is applied.

Power line: 10V Data communication port: 10V

5 - 2 5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5.1.1 EMC directive

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

*1: The GOT is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a conductive control panel. The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi PLC.

*2: QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean : Average value *3: The above test items are conducted in the following conditions.

30M-230MHz QP: 40dB V/m (10m in measurement range) 230M-1000MHz QP: 47dB V/m (10m in measurement range)

Applied standard

Test standard Test details Standard value

EN61131-2 : 2007

EN61000-4-8 Power supply frequency magnetic field immunity

Test for checking normal operations under the circumstance exposed to the ferromagnetic field noise of the power supply frequency (50/60Hz).

30 A/m

EN61000-4-11 Instantaneous power failure and voltage dips immunity

Test for checking normal operations at instantaneous power failure.

AC power type 0.5 cycle 0% (interval 1 to 10s) 250/300 cycle 0% 10/12 cycle 40% 25/30 cycle 70% DC power type 10ms (interval 1 to 10s)

5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5.1.1 EMC directive

5 - 3

5.1.2 Control panel

The GOT is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a conductive control panel. It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT, on the control panel.

(1) Control panel (a) The control panel must be conductive.

(b) When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts, do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so that they will come into contact. And connect the door and box using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency.

(c) When using an inner plate to ensure electric conductivity with the control panel, do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and control panel to ensure conductivity in the largest area as possible.

(d) Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency.

(e) The diameter of cable holes in the control panel must be 10cm (3.94in.). In order to reduce the chance of radio waves leaking out, ensure that the space between the control panel and its door is small as possible. Attach some EMI gaskets to fill up the space and suppress the leakage of radio waves.

Our test has been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB max. and 30dB mean (measured by 3m method with 30 to 300MHz).

(2) Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below.

(a) Provide a grounding point near the GOT. Short-circuit the LG and FG terminals of the GOT (LG: line ground, FG: frame ground) and ground them with the thickest and shortest wire possible (The wire length must be 30cm (11.81in.) or shorter.) The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PC system to the ground, so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured. As the wires are used to relieve the noise, the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna.

Note) A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency.

(b) The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power supply wires. By twisting with the earthing wire, noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the earthing. However, if a filter is installed on the power supply wires, the wires and the earthing wire may not need to be twisted.

Manufacturer Series model name

KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. UC series (Recommended Product)

5 - 4 5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5.1.2 Control panel

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5.1.3 Noise filter (power supply line filter)

The noise filter (power supply line filter) is a device effective to reduce conducted noise. Except some models, installation of a noise filter onto the power supply lines is not necessary. However conducted noise can be reduced if it is installed. (The noise filter is generally effective for reducing conducted noise in the band of 10MHz or less.) Usage of the following filters is recommended.

The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below.

(1) Do not install the input and output cables of the noise filter together to prevent the output side noise will be inducted into the input side cable where noise has been eliminated by the noise filer.

(2) Connect the noise filters ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest cable as possible (approx. 10cm (3.94 in.) or less).

Model name FN343-3/01 FN660-6/06 ZHC2203-11

Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK

Rated current 3A 6A 3A

Rated voltage 250V

(a) Installing the input and output cables together will cause noise induction.

(b) Separate the input cable from the output cable.

Filter

Induction

Output side

(device side)

Input side

(power supply side)

Filter

Output side

(device side)

Input side

(power supply side)

5.1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5.1.3 Noise filter (power supply line filter)

5 - 5

5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive

The Low Voltage Directive requires each device which operates with power supply ranging from 50VAC to 1000V and 75VDC to 1500V to satisfy necessary safety items. In the Sections from 5.2.1 to 5.2.5, cautions on installation and wiring of the GOT to conform to the Low Voltage Directive requires are described. We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the Directive that we have collected. However, compatibility of the devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above Directive is not guaranteed. Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the final judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility.

5.2.1 Standard subject to GOT

5.2.2 Power supply

The insulation specification of the GOT was designed assuming installation category II. Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the GOT. The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by lightning strike. Category I has the lowest durability; category IV has the highest durability.

Installation Category

Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution.

Standard applied to GOT: EN61131-2 Programmable controllers - Equipment requirements and tests

EN60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

Category ICategory IICategory IIICategory IV

5 - 6 5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5.2.1 Standard subject to GOT

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5.2.3 Control panel

Because the GOT is open type equipment (device designed to be stored within another device), be sure to use it only when installed in a control panel.

(1) Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility, e.g., an operator, from getting a shock, make sure to take the following measures on the control panel.

(a) Store the GOT within the control panel locked, and allow only those who are familiar with power facility to unlock the panel.

(b) Build the structure in order that the power supply will be shut off when the control panel is opened.

(2) Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also provides protection from dust, water and other substances. Insufficient ingression protection may lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in insulation destruction. The insulation in the GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2, so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or better.

5.2.4 Grounding

The following are applicable ground terminals.Use them in the grounded state. Be sure to ground the GOT for ensuring the safety and complying with the EMC Directive.

Protective grounding : Ensures the safety of the GOT and improves the noise resistance.

Functional grounding : Improves the noise resistance.

Pollution level1 : An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist.

Pollution level2 : An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist, but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust. Generally, this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory.

Pollution level3 : An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust. An environment for a typical factory floor.

Pollution level4 : Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, etc. An outdoor environment.

5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5.2.3 Control panel

5 - 7

5.2.5 External wiring

(1) External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the GOT, select a model which complies with the Low Voltage Directive's requirements for isolation between the primary and secondary circuits.

(2) Insulation requirements Dielectric withstand voltages are shown in the following table.

Reinforced Insulation Withstand Voltage (Installation Category II, source : IEC664)

Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage (1.2/50 s)

150 VAC or below 2500V

300 VAC or below 4000V

5 - 8 5.2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5.2.5 External wiring

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration For the GOT1000 series models compliant with the EMC Directive, contact your local distributor.

5.3.1 GOT

Use any of the following GOTs with which CE mark logo is printed on the rating plate. For how to confirm the hardware version of a GOT, refer to the following.

Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards When using a GOT other than shown below, the system does not conform to the EMC Directive.

Item Model Hardware version of the GOT (Production year and month)

GT1595 GT1595-XTBA Version B or later (Jan., 2006)

GT1595-XTBD Version B or later (Jun., 2006)

GT1585

GT1585V-STBA Version K or later (Feb., 2007)

GT1585V-STBD Version G or later (Feb., 2007)

GT1585-STBA Version C or later (Apr., 2005)

GT1585-STBD Version B or later (Jan., 2006)

GT157

GT1575V-STBA Version J or later (Feb., 2007)

GT1575V-STBD Version G or later (Feb., 2007)

GT1575-STBA Version C or later (May, 2005)

GT1575-STBD Version B or later (Jan., 2006)

GT1575-VTBA Version E or later (May, 2005)

GT1575-VTBD Version B or later (Jan., 2006)

GT1575-VNBA Version K or later (Jan., 2006)

GT1575-VNBD Version B or later (Mar., 2006)

GT1572-VNBA Version K or later (Jan., 2006)

GT1572-VNBD Version B or later (Jan., 2006)

GT156

GT1565-VTBA Version E or later (Apr., 2005)

GT1565-VTBD Version B or later (Nov., 2005)

GT1562-VNBA Version J or later (Nov., 2005)

GT1562-VNBD Version B or later (Mar., 2006)

GT155

GT1555-VTBD Version E or later (Aug., 2007)

GT1555-QTBD Version F or later (Dec., 2006)

GT1555-QSBD Version F or later (Dec., 2006)

GT1550-QLBD Version F or later (Dec., 2006)

5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5.3.1 GOT

5 - 9

5.3.2 Connection method

Use the following methods to connect with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive. : Compliant with EMC Directive : Not compliant with EMC Directive

*1: For details about each connection method, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

*2: When connecting the GOT to other controllers as a PLC manufactured by other company, create the cable (by the user) and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device.

( 5.4.2 (8)PLC (manufactured by other company), microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo

amplifier, CNC, MODBUS(R)/RTU or MODBUS(R)/TCP connection)

Connected devices

If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products (MELSEC-Q series, MELSEC-L series, MELSEC-QnA series or MELSEC-A series) please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device.

Connection method GT15

Bus connection

Direct connection to CPU

Computer link connection

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

CC-Link connection (via G4)

Ethernet connection

GOT multi-drop connection

Other connections *2

5 - 10 5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5.3.2 Connection method

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5.3.3 When the communication unit is used

Use the following communication unit with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive. The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when connected with other than followings.

(Continued to next page)

Connection method Communication unit used Hardware version of the communication unit

(Production year and month)

Bus connection

GT15-QBUS Version D or later (Oct., 2005)

GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2

Version C or later (Oct., 2005)

GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

Version G or later (Mar., 2005)

Direct connection to CPU

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

Computer link connection

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13

Version C or later (Sep., 2006)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

GT15-J71GP23-SX Version A or later (Dec., 2007)

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

GT15-J71GF13-T2 Version A or later (Apr., 2011)

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

GT15-J61BT13 Version C or later (Sep., 2006)

Ethernet connection GT15-J71E71-100 Version B or later (Mar., 2005)

Microcomputer connection (Serial)

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)

GT15-J71E71-100 Version B or later (Mar., 2005)

5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5.3.3 When the communication unit is used

5 - 11

The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when it is used with the following unit.

Connection method Communication unit used Hardware version of the communication unit

(Production year and month)

Third party PLC connection

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

Temperature controller connection

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

Inverter connection

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS4-9S Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

Servo amplifier connection

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

CNC connection

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13 GT15-J61BT13

Version C or later (Sep., 2006)

GT15-J71E71-100 Version B or later (Mar., 2005)

MODBUS /RTU connection

GOT RS-232 interface -

GT15-RS2T4-9P Version A or later

GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S

Version D or later (Jan., 2006)

MODBUS /TCP connection

GT15-J71E71-100 Version B or later (Mar., 2005)

Product name Model name

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z

CC-Link communication unit G15-75J61BT13-Z

5 - 12 5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5.3.3 When the communication unit is used

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5.3.4 When the option unit is used

The following shows EMC Directive compliance of option units. : Compliant with EMC Directive : Not compliant with EMC Directive

*: For the printer to be connected, configure the system in accordance with the EMC Directive specifications for the printer as requested by the printer manufacturer.

5.3.5 When the option is used

The following shows EMC Directive compliance of option. : Compliant with EMC Directive : Not compliant with EMC Directive

Product name Model name EMC Directive Hardware version

(Production year and month)

Printer unit* GT15-PRN Version B or later (Feb.,2006)

Video input unit GT15V-75V4R1 Version D or later (Feb.,2007)

RGB input unit GT15V-75V4 Version D or later (Feb.,2007)

Video/RGB input unit GT15V-75R1 Version D or later (Feb.,2007)

RGB output unit GT15V-75ROUT Version C or later (Feb.,2007)

CF card unit GT15-CFCD Version C or later (Jul.,2007)

CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET Version B or later (Jul.,2007)

External I/O unit GT15-DIO Version B or later (May,2007)

GT15-DIOR Version A or later (Jul.,2007)

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT Version B or later (May,2007)

Product name Model name EMC Directive Hardware version

(Production year and month)

Option function board GT15-FNB

Version A or later (Mar.,2005)

GT15-QFNB

Option function board with add-on memory

GT15-QFNB16M

GT15-QFNB32M

GT15-QFNB48M

GT15-MESB48M Version C or later (Jun.,2006)

5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5.3.4 When the option unit is used

5 - 13

5.3.6 Cables

(1) Cables used (a) For the MELSECNET/H connection (coaxial cable), MELSECNET/10 connection (coaxial

cable), and video connection, use double shield coaxial cables. The 5C-2V connector plug is applicable to double-shielded coaxial cable. Connect the 5C-2V connector plug to the coaxial cable inside a double-shielded coaxial cable. Ground the shielded part outside a double-shielded coaxial cable as shown in the following figure.

(b) For the CC-Link IE Field Network connection, use the following cable dedicated to the CC-Link IE Field Network.

(c) For details of the cables used for conncetions other than the above, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

(2) Adjusting a cable for the EMC Directive compliance Modify the cables (including user-produced cable) to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive. For details, refer to Section 5.4.2.

Manufacturer Model name

Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. SC-E5EW-S M

Grounding

Mitsubishi Cable ... 5C-2V-CCY

Double-shielded coaxial cable

Internal conducter

Insulation material

External conductor

Sheath

External conductor (Grounding)

SheathEnlarged view of cable

5 - 14 5.3 EMC Directive-Compliant System Configuration 5.3.6 Cables

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product

Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below. If the GOT1000 series equipments are configured in a way different from the following instructions, the system may not comply with EMC directives.

5.4.1 Power and ground wires wiring method

(1) Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration, and be sure to attach a ferrite core within the range shown below. (Ferrite cores are not required for GT155 .) Select a ferrite core to be attached depending on the usage. (ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK Corporation or RFC-H13 manufactured by KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD.) Attach the ferrite core as shown below. Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in Section 5.1.2 (2). Be sure to ground the LG cable, FG cable, and protective ground cable.

(a) 100-240VAC GOT power section Video/RGB connection

GOT power supply section

INPUT 100-240VAC

(LG) (FG)

9 0 m

m o

r le

s s

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.1 Power and ground wires wiring method

5 - 15

GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT1595: Hardware version R (February 2010) or earlier

GOT power supply section

GT1595: Hardware version S (February 2010) or later GOT power supply section

9 0 m

m o

r le

s s

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

INPUT 100-240VAC

(LG) (FG)

9 0 m

m o

r le

s s

Ferrite core

(RFC-H13)

INPUT 100-240VAC

(LG) (FG)

5 - 16 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.1 Power and ground wires wiring method

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(b) 24VDC GOT power section GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , and GT156

GT155

* Be sure to ground the protective ground terminal and the FG terminal respectively.

When the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit or the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit is mounted on GT155

9 0

m m

o r

le s s

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

INPUT 24VDC

(LG) (FG)

INPUT 24VDC

+-

Protective grounding

(FG)

Ferrite core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

INPUT 24VDC

+-

Protective grounding

(FG)

9 0 m

m o

r le

s s

5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.1 Power and ground wires wiring method

5 - 17

5.4.2 Processing connection cables

Process the cable used with the GOT with the following method. When processing the cable, ferrite core, cable clamp and shielding material are required. The cable clamp used by Mitsubishi Electric for the EMC specification compatibility test is shown below. TDK corporation brand ZCAT3035-1330 Ferrite Core Mitsubishi Electric Model AD75CK cable clamp Japan Zipper Tubing Co., Ltd. Zipper tube SHNJ type

(1) BUS connection cable

(a) For GT15-QC B, GT15-QC BS Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below. Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) at both ends of the cable, and expose the

shield braided wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.))

(b) For GT15-C BS Cut the connection wire protruding from both ends of the cable to the lengths shown below. Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the ground

wire into the ferrite core. Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) at both ends of the cable, and expose the

shield braided wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.))

60 or less (2.36)

Ferrite Core (ZCAT3035-1330)

Unit : mm (inch) 360 or less

(14.17) 360 or less

(14.17)(1.57)(1.57)

40 40

GOT side PLC/GOT side

60 or less

GOT side PLC/GOT side Ferrite Core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

360 or less

(2.36)

(14.17) (1.57)

40

60 or less

360 or less

(2.36)

(14.17)(1.57)

40

Unit : mm (inch)

Ground wires

(280mm (11.0 inch))

5 - 18 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.2 Processing connection cables

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(c) For other bus connection cables Wind cable shield material around the cable, and pull out the grounding braided wire of the

cable shield material with the length shown below. Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the braided

wire for grounding into the ferrite core.

(2) CPU direct connection and computer link connection Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) of the cable to expose the shield braided wire for

grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 5.4.3))

(a) For RS-232 cable

(b) RS-422 cable (For AC30/100/300R4-25P)

80

Grounding braided wire

(200mm (7.87 inch))

Grounding braided wire

(50mm (1.97 inch))

Cable shield material

40 or less

GOT side PLC side Ferrite Core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

(1.57)

40 or less

(1.57)

(3.15)

80

(3.15)

Unit : mm (inch)

GOT side PLC side

Unit : mm (inch)

230 or less

(9.06)

40

(1.57)

GOT side PLC side

230 or less 40

Unit : mm (inch)(9.06) (1.57)

5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.2 Processing connection cables

5 - 19

(3) MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network) and MELSECNET/10 connction (PLC to PLC network) (a) For coaxial cable

Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the outer braided shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 5.4.3.))

Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below.

(b) For optical fiber cable Processing of the cable is not required.

(4) CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station) Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 4.4.3.)) Attach ferrite cores to the cable in the positions as illustrated below.

CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and PLC.

CC-Link dedicated cable for connecting the GOT and GOT

(ZCAT3035-1330)

GOT side

130 or

less

130 or

less

230 or less

Ferrite Core

(5.12) (5.12)

(9.06) Unit : mm (inch)(1.57)

40

(1.57)

40 400 or less

(15.75)

PLC side

GOT side

230 or less

(9.06) (1.57)

40

(ZCAT3035-1330)

Ferrite Core

(1.57)

40 400 or less

(15.75)

PLC side

130

(5.12)

130

(5.12)

Unit : mm (inch)

GOT side GOT side

230 or less

(9.06)

230 or less

(9.06)(1.57)

40

(ZCAT3035-1330)

Ferrite Core

(1.57)

40

Unit : mm (inch)

130

(5.12)

130

(5.12)

5 - 20 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.2 Processing connection cables

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(5) CC-Link IE Field Network connection and Ethernet connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the

braided shield for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.)) Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.

(6) External I/O device connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the

braided shield for grounding.(For grounding with cable clamps (Refer to Section 5.4.3.)) Connect the braided shield to the connector with the connector cover. Twist power cables.

GOT side Controller sideFerrite Core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

120 or

less

(4.72)

230 or less

(9.06)

400 or less

(15.75)(1.57)

40

(1.57)

40

Unit : mm (inch)

Connector cover

Braided shield

GOT side External I/O device side

360 or less 360 or less40 40

Unit : mm (inch)

Power cable

(14.17) (14.17) (1.57) (1.57)

5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.2 Processing connection cables

5 - 21

(7) Video/RGB connection (a) Video input

Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) at both ends of the cable, and expose the shield braided wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps. (refer to Section 5.4.3.))

Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.

(b) RGB input/output Wind cable shield material around the cable, and pull out the grounding braided wire of the

cable shield material with the length shown below. Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below.

(8) PLC (manufactured by other company), microcomputer, temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, CNC, MODBUS(R)/RTU or MODBUS(R)/TCP connection Produce the cable (RS-232 cable, RS-422 / 485 cable) for connecting the GOT to a controller with reference to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

Configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device when connecting the GOT to a controller. The following gives the instructions to ensure the machinery comply with the EMC Directive. However, the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives: if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives.

(ZCAT3035-1330)

GOT side

130 or

less

130 or

less

230 or less

Ferrite Core

(5.12) (5.12)

(9.06)

Camcorder/vision

sensor side

Unit : mm (inch)(1.57)

40

(1.57)

40 400 or less

(15.75)

GOT side

Vision sensor/

personal computer/

external display side

40

or less130 or less

Unit : mm (inch)

Ferrite Core

(ZCAT3035-1330)

Grounding braided wire

(50mm)

Cable shield material 40

or less 130 or less

(5.12) (1.57) (5.12)(1.57)

5 - 22 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.2 Processing connection cables

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(a) For RS-422 / 485 cable Each signal wire (excluding SG and FG) should be made into a two power wires and

connected, then twisted.

Make the SG wire more than two wires and connect. Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) of the created cable to expose the shield

braided wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 5.4.3))

(b) For RS-232 cable Use a twisted pair style for each signal wire (except SG, FG) with SG.

Peel the sheath (with the length shown below) of the created cable to expose the shield braided wire for grounding. (For grounding with cable clamps (refer to Section 5.4.3))

RDA

RDB

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SDA

SDB

GOT side PLC side

230 or less 40

Unit : mm (inch)(9.06) (1.57)

RD

SD

DTR

DSR

SG

SD

RD

DSR

DTR

SG

GOT side PLC side

230 or less 40

Unit : mm (inch)(9.06) (1.57)

5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.2 Processing connection cables

5 - 23

5.4.3 Grounding the cable

Ground the cable and grounding wire to the control panel where the GOT and base unit are installed.

Braided shield

Cable clamps

GOT FG terminal FG wire

Bus connection cable

a) For GT15-C EXSS-1 and GT15-C BS

Ground the ground wire to the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section.

2) Do not arrange the cable clamp adjacent to other cables which do not clamp.

Noise from the control panel may access the GOT from the cable clamp and

cause adverse effects.

1) Ground the braided shield portion of the cable to the control panel

with the cable clamp (AD75CK).

b) For other bus connection cables

Ground the braided wire for grounding to the control panel

by tightening a screw.

For the cable clamp attaching details,

refer to AD75CK-type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual .

5 - 24 5.4 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product 5.4.3 Grounding the cable

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

6. INSTALLATION

6.1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT

Install the GOT and the CF card extension unit on the control panel out of the way for the equipment inside the control panel. Do not install the GOT and the unit in prohibited areas for the installation.

Applicable cable

Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT. Therefore, consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation.

CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual. Do not expose the GOT to dust, lamp soot, conductive dust, corrosive gas, or combustible gas; high-temperature, condensing, wind or rain; or to vibrations and impact. Failure to do so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration. Do not drop chips or wire scraps near the ventilation window of the GOT when processing screw holes or wiring. Failure to do so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction. Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short-circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the unit. Make sure to install the connection cable to the connector specified during the power OFF. Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to the poor contact.

6.1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT

6 - 1

6.2 Panel Cutting Dimensions (1) Panel cutting dimensions when installing GOT

Make a installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below. Make space of 10mm above and below the hole respectively for the installation fittings.

(2) Panel cutting dimensions when installing CF card extension unit Make an installation hole on the control panel with the dimensions shown below. Make space of 10mm on the left and right of the hole respectively for the installation fittings.

Precautions before executing the panel cut

If the GOT is installed on the panel, remove the GOT from the panel temporarily.

A

B

* Panel thickness: 2 to 4 mm or less

GOT A [mm] (inch) B [mm] (inch)

GT1595 383.5(15.1) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

282.5(11.12) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

GT1585 302(11.89) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

228(8.98) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

GT157 289(11.38) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

200(7.87) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

GT156 227(8.94) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

176(6.93) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

GT155 153(6.02) (+2(0.08),0(0))

121(5) (+2(0.08),0(0))

A

B

* Panel thickness: 2 to 4 mm or less

GOT A [mm] (inch) B [mm] (inch)

GT15- CFEX- C08SET

94(3.7) (+2(0.08), 0(0))

33(1.3) (+2(0.08), 0 (0))

6 - 2 6.2 Panel Cutting Dimensions

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

6.3 Mounting Position

1 For installing GOT When mounting the GOT, the following clearances must be left from the other device. Depending on the units and cables connected to the GOT, clearances more than the described dimensions can be required. Therefore, consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation. For the lead-in allowance for cables at the bottom of the GOT, refer to the following.

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

According to the dimensions in the following table, leave clearances between the GOT and the other devices. The values enclosed in square brackets apply to the case where no other equipment generating radiated noise (such as a contactor) or heat is installed near the GOT. However, keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55C or lower.

(Continued to next page)

Type GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155

A

GOT only 50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more [21(0.83)

or more]26

49(1.93) or more

Bus connection unit is fitted 50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more [35(1.38) or more]

50(1.97) or more [40(1.57) or more]

50(1.97) or more

Serial communication unit fitted 50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more [21(0.83) or more]

49(1.93) or more

RS-422 Conversion unit is fitted

50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[39(1.54) or more]

53(2.09) or more

58(2.28) or more

Ethernet communication unit is fitted

50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

B A

C D E

Panel thickness:

2 to 4mm

(0.08 to 0.16inch)

6.3 Mounting Position

6 - 3

(Continued to next page)

Type GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155

A

MELSECNET/10 communication unit (coaxial) is fitted

50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) fitted

50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) fitted

50 (1.97) or more [20 (0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[24(0.94) or more]

MELSECNET/10 communication unit (optical) fitted

50(1.97) or more

[20(0.79)

or more]*1

50(1.97) or more

[26(1.02)

or more]*1

50(1.97) or more [43(1.69)

or more]*1

50(1.97) or more

[48(1.89)

or more]*1

MELSECNET/H communication unit (coaxial) fitted

50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more [30(1.18) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[35(1.38) or more]

64(2.52) or more

MELSECNET/H communication unit (optical) fitted

50 (1.97) or more

[20 (0.79)

or more]*1

50 (1.97) or more

[23 (0.91)

or more]*1

50 (1.97) or more

[37 (1.46)

or more]*1

50 (1.97) or more

[42 (1.65)

or more]*1

79(3.11)

or more*1

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit fitted 50 (1.97) or more

[20 (0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more [23(0.91) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[28(1.10) or more]

57(2.24) or moreCC-Link IE Field Network

communication unit fitted

Printer unit fitted 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[29(1.14) or more]

Video input unit fitted 61 (2.40)

or more*2

75 (2.95)

or more*2

RGB input unit fitted 50 (1.97) or more

[20 (0.79) or more]*3

Video/RGB input unit fitted 61 (2.40)

or more*2*3

75 (2.95)

or more*2*3

RGB output unit fitted 50 (1.97) or more

[20 (0.79) or more]*3

CF card unit 50 (1.97) or more

[20 (0.79) or more]

CF card extension unit

50 (1.97) or more

[20 (0.79) or more]

50 (1.97) or more

[49(1.93) or more]

63 (2.48) or more

68 (2.68) or more

97 (3.82) or more

6 - 4 6.3 Mounting Position

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Unit: mm (inch) *1 This value differs depending on the cable used.

Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. The value indicated in the table is a reference value.

*2 This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C-2V (JIS C 3501). For specifications of the cable, refer to the following manual.

MODEL GT15V-75V4R1 Video/RGB Input Unit MODEL GT15V-75V4 Video Input Unit MODEL GT15V- 75R1 RGB Input Unit User's Manual (Section 2.4.1 Specifications of the cables (coaxial cables) used when displaying video images)

*3 This value differs depending on the cable used. If the bending radius of the cable used is greater than the value specified above, apply the value of the cable used.

Type GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155

A External I/O unit

50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

50(1.97) or more

[24(0.94) or more]

50(1.97) or more [29(1.14) or more]

58(2.28) or more

Sound output unit 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

B 80(3.15) or more [20(0.79) or more]

C

(When the CF card is not used) 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

(When the CF card is used) 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more] 100(3.94) or

more

D 50(1.97) or more [20(0.79) or more]

E 100(3.94) or more [20(0.79) or more]

6.3 Mounting Position

6 - 5

2 For installing CF card extension unit (1) Installing location

(a) Depth dimensions When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel, 180mm in depth (including the bending radius of the cable) is required inside the control panel.

(b) Available area for installation When the control panel side installation unit is installed on the control panel, a distance of 25mm is required around the unit. Keep a distance of 25mm or more between the control panel side installation unit and the GOT. The control panel side installation unit can be installed in the area shown in the following figure. For the installation, do not give stresses, including an incorrect bending radius of the cable, on the connection cable.

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

180 or more

Unit : mm(inch)

(7.09)

500 or less

Available area

for installation

25 or more

2 5

o r m

o re

Prohibited area

for installation

Unit : mm(inch)

500 or less

4 0

0 o

r le s s

6 0

0 o

r le s s

GOT

(19.69)(19.69)

(0.98)

(0 .9

8 )

(2 3

.6 2

) (1

5 .7

5 )

6 - 6 6.3 Mounting Position

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(2) Prohibited area for installation The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the CF card extension unit is used with the other extension units, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in some areas because the cables of the other extension units get in the way of the control panel side installation unit. The following shows prohibited areas for the installation.

(a) For GT1595 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. (Prohibited areas for the installation with the other extension units do not exist.)

(b) For GT1585 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.

X

Prohibited area for installation

with an extension unit

Hole for installing GOT

(View from the rear side)

130 80 (3.15)(5.12)

Extension unit Model X

(Unit: mm(inch))

Bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUS2L, CGT15-75ABUSL GT15-ABUS, CGT15-ABUS2 -*

GT15-75QBUS2L, CGT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUSL, CGT15-QBUS

31(1.38)

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, CGT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE -*

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 30(1.18)

GT15-J71BR13 -*

MELSECNET/10 communication unit

GT15-75J71LP23-Z 68(2.68)

GT15-75J71BR13-Z -*

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX -*

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2 -*

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z -*

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT15V-75V4 68(2.68)

RGB input unit GT15V-75R1 -*

Video/RGB input unit GT15V-75V4R1 68(2.68)

RGB output unit GT15V-75ROUT -*

6.3 Mounting Position

6 - 7

(c) For GT157 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.

X

Prohibited area for installation

with an extension unit

Hole for installing GOT

(View from the rear side)

130 80 (3.15)(5.12)

Extension unit Model X

(Unit: mm(inch))

Bus connection unit

GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2 -*

GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-QBUS2 GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-QBUS

45(1.77)

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE -*

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 44(1.73)

GT15-J71BR13 -*

MELSECNET/10 communication unit

GT15-75J71LP23-Z 85(3.35)

GT15-75J71BR13-Z -*

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX 30(1.18)

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2 -*

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z -*

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT15V-75V4 85(3.35)

RGB input unit GT15V-75R1 -*

Video/RGB input unit GT15V-75V4R1 85(3.35)

RGB output unit GT15V-75ROUT -*

6 - 8 6.3 Mounting P

osition

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(d) For GT156 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.

X

80 40

Hole for installing

GOT

(View from the

rear side)

Prohibited area for installation

with an extension unit

(3.15) (1.57)

Extension unit Model X

(Unit: mm(inch))

Bus connection unit

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL

28.5(1.12)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

50(1.97)

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE

27.5(1.08)

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 -*

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 49(1.93)

GT15-J71BR13 43(1.69)

MELSECNET/10 communication unit

GT15-75J71LP23-Z 91(3.58)

GT15-75J71BR13-Z -*

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX 35(1.38)

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2 21(0.83)

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z 35(1.38)

Printer unit GT15-PRN -*

6.3 Mounting Position

6 - 9

(e) For GT155 The control panel side installation unit cannot be installed within 25mm (0.98inch) from the GOT. When the CF card interface of the GOT (A drive) is used, the unit cannot be installed in the area of 100mm wide by 68mm long on the right side of the hole for installing the GOT in the rear view. A CF card cannot be inserted and ejected. When the other extension units are used, the control panel side installation unit cannot be installed in the areas shown in the following figure.

X

80

100

40

6 8

Hole for installing

GOT (View from the

rear side)

Prohibited area for installation

with an extension unit

(3.15) (1.57)

(3.94)

(2 .6

8 )

Prohibited area

for installation

with CF card

interface (A drive)

Extension unit Model X

(Unit: mm(inch))

Bus connection unit

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

57.5(2.26)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

79(3.11)

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S 56.5(2.22)

GT15-RS4-TE -*

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit

GT15-J71LP23-25 78(3.07)

GT15-J71BR13 71(2.80)

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX 64(2.52)

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2 50(1.97)

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z

31(1.38)

Printer unit GT15-PRN 36(1.42)

6 - 10 6.3 Mounting Position

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle

When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar, set the display section as shown below. When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55C or less, the mounting angle should be in the range 60 to 105 degrees.

The GOT will be deteriorated earlier if it is used at the mounting angle other than the above. Therefore, the temperature inside the control panel should be within 40C.

*: When mounting MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13), the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5C against the maximum values described in general specifications.

6.5 Installation Procedure The GOT mounting procedure is as follows. For the panel cutting dimensions of each GOT, refer to the following.

6.2 Panel Cutting Dimensions

1 Insert the GOT into the panel opening from the front side.

GOT

Display

section

Control panel,

etc.

105

60

panel opening

GOT

6.4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle

6 - 11

2 Place the mounting fixtures (included with GOT) on the mounting fixture attaching part of the GOT, and fix them by tightening the mounting screws in the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm. (Failure to do so may distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the protective sheet.)

3 A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment. Remove the film when the installation is compelted.

For other than GT1595-X: Fix the GOT with

4 mounting fixtures.

For GT1595-X: Fix the GOT with 8 mounting fixtures.

Magnified figure Magnified figure

6 - 12 6.5 Installation Procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

7. WIRING

This section describes wiring to the GOT power supply section. For the connection to a controller, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

For external dimensions of connection cable, refer to the following. Appendix.1 External Dimensions

WARNING Before starting wiring, always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases.

Not doing so may cause an electric shock, product damage or malfunction.

CAUTION Please make sure to ground FG terminal, LG terminal, and protective ground terminal of the GOT

power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is used exclusively for the GOT. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrange- ment of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range. Undertight- ening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

7 - 1

Remark General preventive measures against noise

There are two kinds of noises: Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines. Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points.

(1) Protecting against noise (a) Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high-

power drive circuit.

(b) Shield the signal lines.

(2) Reducing generated noise (a) Use a noise filter, etc. to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a

source such as a high-power motor drive circuit.

(b) Attach a surge suppressor on the terminal of the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor to supress the noise.

(3) Releasing noise to the ground (a) Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground.

(b) Use a short and thick cable to lower its ground resistance.

(c) Ground the power system and the control system separately.

7 - 2

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

7.1 Power Supply Wiring Make wiring connections to the power supply, I/O equipment and power equipment separately by system

as shown below. When frequent noise is identified, connect an isolation transformer.

Wiring diagram for power supply

Twist 100V AC, 200V AC or 24V DC cable as closely as possible and connect the cable of the minimum length between modules. Also, use the thickest cable as possible (Max. 2mm2) to minimize the voltage drop. Use M3 solderless terminals and securely tighten them with a tightening torque of 0.5 to 0.8Nm so that no problem will result.

Separate the 100V AC, 200V AC or 24V DC cable from the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) and/or I/O signal lines. Keep a distance of 100mm or more.

As measures against surge due to lightning, connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below.

Lightning surge absorber connection

1. Separate the grounding of the lightning surge absorber (E1) from the grounding of the GOT (E2).

2. Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber so that the supply voltage does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage of the surge absorber even when it rises to the maximum.

T1

Main power

GOT

power

GOT

Isolation

transformer

I/O power

Main circuit

power

I/O equipment

Main circuit equipment

AC

E1

E2

Lightning surge absorber

GOT

I/O equipment

7.1 Power Supply Wiring

7 - 3

7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section This section provides an example for connecting power cables and ground cables to the power terminals situated on the back of the GOT.

AC

(LG) (FG)

(LG) (FG)

INPUT

100-240VAC

GOT

GOT

INPUT

24VDC

AC DC

Fuse

100/110V AC

24V DC

In the case of 100V AC

+-

(FG)

GOT

INPUT

24VDC

Ground cables

Grounding

+-

In the case of 24V DC (GT1595,

GT1585,

GT157 ,

GT156 )

In the case of 24V DC (GT155 )

7 - 4 7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(1) Precautions for wiring to the power supply section For 100V AC, 200V AC or 24V DC cable, use the thickest cable as possible

(Max. 2mm2) and start twisting them at the position closest to the connected terminals. To prevent a short circuit due to loose screws, use the solderless terminal with insulation sleeve.

When connection is made between LG and FG terminals, be sure to connect them to the ground. Otherwise, the system becomes susceptible to noise. Since the LG terminal has potential equal to a half of the input voltage, touching the terminal may lead to an electric shock.

When grounding the GT155 , ground it with the ground terminal equipped at the lower-left corner on the GOT main unit back face. (Refer to the above.) Connect only the ground cables of the bus connection cable and the CF card extension unit connection cable to the FG terminal.

(2) Wiring the power section of the GT155 when using an extension unit Be sure to wire the power section before connecting a cable to the extension unit. If connecting a cable to the extension unit before wiring the power section, the terminal block of the power section will be blocked by the cable and the power section cannot be wired.

7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section

7 - 5

7.3 Grouding

7.3.1 Grounding the GOT

1 About grounding Perform the following three items for grounding. Independent grounding should be performed as possible for the GOT.

Perform grounding works. (grounding resistance 100 or less) When independent grounding cannot be performed for the GOT, perform "(2) Shared grounding"

shown below.

Use a cable of 2mm2 or more for grounding when performing (1) or (2) above. Ground the cable at a point as close to the GOT as possible to make the ground cable short.

2 Grounding examples (1) Independent grounding (Best)

* For the control equipment, ground the system at one end. Especially for the control equipments communicating each other, ground the system at one end.

GOT Other

device

Grounding

(1) Independent ground

...... Best condition

GOT Other

device

Grounding

(2) Shared grounding

...... Good condition

GOT Other

device

(3) Common grounding

...... Not allowed

GOT

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG

LG

Grounding for

control system

Ground

terminal

block

Connection cable PLC

Panel

grounding

Grounding for

power system

FG

FG

LG

Power equipment

(servo, etc.)

Ground terminal block

7 - 6 7.3 Grouding 7.3.1 Grounding the GOT

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(2) Shared grounding (Good)

* Ground the system at one end. To prevent noise from entering the GOT, use a short and thick wire for grounding between the ground and the panel to ensure lower ground resistance.

(3) Common grounding (Not allowed)

* Do not connect the ground cables of the power equipment and control equipment with a wire. If the cables are connected, noise from the power equipment may influence the control equipment, causing malfunction.

GOT

CN1A CN1B

CN2 CN3

FG

LG

Connection cable

Panel

grounding Panel

grounding

Use a short and thick cable as much as possible.

FG

FG

LG

Power equipment

(servo, etc.) PLC

GOTFG

LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2 LG

Power equipment

(servo, etc.)

The power equipment and

control equipment are

connected with a wire.

7.3 Grouding 7.3.1 Grounding the GOT

7 - 7

3 Recommended terminal shape

Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25- 3, V2- S3.3, V2- N3A, FV2- N3A

Terminal

screw

Solderless

terminal Terminal

screw 6.2mm

or less

3.2

3.2

6.2mm

or less

When wiring one cable to

one terminal

When wiring two cables to

one terminal

Solderless

terminal

7 - 8 7.3 Grouding 7.3.1 Grounding the GOT

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

7.3.2 Wiring-related malfunction causes and the measures examples

The malfunction causes in grounding the GOT include potential difference caused by groundings and noise. Potential difference and noise may be reduced by taking the following measures.

1 Wiring of GOT's ground cable and power line When the ground cable and power line of the GOT are installed together, the GOT may malfunction due to noise. Separating the ground cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise.

2 Leading of the ground cable from the panel having a control equipment in the panel having the GOT When a single ground cable is led from the panel having a control equipment such as PLC in the panel having the GOT, the cable may need to be directly connected to the terminal block of the GOT.

.

GOT

FGLG

Power for the power equipment Power for the power equipment

GOT

FGLG

Good example: The ground and power cables

are separated in wiring.

Bad example: The ground and power cables are

installed together.

Connection cable

Ground cable led from the panel

having the control equipment

GOT FG LG

7.3 Grouding 7.3.2 Wiring-related malfunction causes and the measures examples

7 - 9

The malfunction occurred by the potential difference caused by the groundings in such a case, may be prevented by reducing the voltage with the following measure example 1, where the voltage is reduced.

Measure example 1 (Refer to the measure examples 1-1 and 1-2 below.) When any potential difference occurs between the ground cable and the panel having the GOT and the GOT is influenced by the potential difference, connect another ground cable to the panel. When taking of measure 1-1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example, perform the wiring as shown in 1-2.

.

If the GOT is affected by noise when measure example 1 is taken, the influence of noise may be reduced with the following measure example 2.

Measure example 2 (Refer to the measure examples 2-1 and 2-2 below.) When the noise generated from the panel affects the GOT even if measure example 1 is taken, attach the ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent product). When attaching a ferrite core, insert the wire into the hole of the ferrite core several times (approximately three times). When taking of measure 2-1 is difficult since the wiring cannot be done for example, perform the wiring as shown in 2-2.

Measure example 1-1 Measure example 1-2

Measure example 2-1 Measure example 2-2

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ground cable

Use a short

and thick

wire as

possible.

FG

LG

Connection cable

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ground cable FG

LG

Connection cable

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ferrite coreGround cable

Use a short

and thick

wire as

possible.

FG

LG

Connection cable

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ground cable FG

LG

Connection cable

Ferrite core

7 - 10 7.3 Grouding 7.3.2 Wiring-related malfunction causes and the measures examples

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

7.4 Panel Inside Wiring, Panel Outside Wiring

7.4.1 Panel inside wiring

In wiring, the power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network cable must not be mixed. Mixing the power line and communication cable may cause malfunction due to noise. When using an equipment that may occur surge noise, such as molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), electromagnetic contactor (MC), relay (RA), solenoid valve, or induction motor, using a surge suppressor is effective. For surge suppressor, refer to the following.

7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment

7.4.2 Panel outside wiring

When leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel, open cable holes at two separate places to lead the cables separately out. If cables are led out through the same cable hole for wiring reasons, the cables are more easily influenced by noise.

Install the power line and communication cable as apart from each other as possible in the duct. If the cables are installed closely with each other for wiring reasons, using a separator (made of metal) can make the cables less influenced by noise.

Wiring for leading the power line and communication cable out from the panel

Wiring of power lines and communication cables in the duct

Terminal block

Control panel inside

Separated power lines and communication cables

Power cable

GOT connection cable

GOT connection cable

PLC's I/O wire

Drive control wire

NFB

MC MC RA RA

Terminal block

Control panel inside

Mixed power lines and communication cables

Power cable

Drive control wire

NFB

MC MC RA RA

PLC's I/O wire

Power line

Communication cable

Cable hole

Power line Communication cable

Power line Wiring duct Separator

Power line Signal line

Communication cable

100mm or more

7.4 Panel Inside Wiring, Panel Outside Wiring 7.4.1 Panel inside wiring

7 - 11

7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment

If an improper operation such as communication error occurs in the GOT in synchronization with ON/OFF of a particular control equipment (hereinafter abbreviated to load) such as MCCB, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor, the GOT may be influenced by surge noise. In such a case, install the ground cable or communication cable apart from the load. If the ground cable or communication cable has to be installed close to the load unavoidably, attaching a surge suppressor is effective. Attach the surge suppressor at the position closest to the load.

Measures for AC inductive load

Measures for DC inductive load

AC

C L

R

Output equipment

such as PLC's

output module

The surge suppressor must be

attached close to the load

The GOT's ground cable and communication cable

must not be installed close to the load.

Output

DC

D L

Output equipment

such as PLC's

output module Output

The surge suppressor must be

attached close to the load

The GOT's ground cable and communication cable

must not be installed close to the load.

7 - 12 7.5 Attaching Surge Suppressor for Control Equipment 7.4.2 Panel outside wiring

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

7.6 Grounding Extension Units

7.6.1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable

This section describes wiring of the FG cable when a PLC CPU is connected to the GOT.

Cable connected to the PLC CPU

Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) or I/O signal lines.

1 When connecting QCPU or motion controller CPU (Q series) to the GOT Grounding of the FG cable for QCPU and motion controller CPU (Q series) is not necessary since they

have no FG wire.

2 When connecting QnACPU, ACPU, or motion controller CPU (A series) to the GOT When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15C BS, perform the grounding in the following steps.

(1) GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model. Before wiring, check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used.

(2) Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively. For three or more ground cables, connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal.

7.6 Grounding Extension Units 7.6.1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable

7 - 13

(1) When using GT15-C EXSS-1

(2) When using GT15-C BS For the both side GOTs, connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.

1 Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them with a cable.

2 Use the GT15-C BS's FG cable of 28cm or less.

3 Do not connect the GT15-EXCNB's FG ground cable.

4 Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power's terminal block.

5 Connect the GT15-C BS's FG cable on the PLC side to FG of the PLC's power supply module.

6 Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the PLC and ground them with a cable.

FG

LG

N

L

PLC

Not connected

(GT15-EXCNB)

GOT

OUT IN

FGLGNL

2SQ cables to

FG terminals,

28cm or less

(GT15-C BS)

7 - 14 7.6 Grounding Extension Units 7.6.1 Wiring FG cable of bus connection cable

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

7.6.2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable

The following explains wiring the FG cable when the CF card extension unit is installed on the GOT.

(1) Cables to be connected to CF card extension unit Do not install the connection cable together with the main circuit lines (high voltage, large current) and I/O signal lines.

(2) GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model. Before wiring, check the terminal layout of the GOT to be used.

(3) Ground cables Up to two ground cables can be connected to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT respectively. For three or more ground cables, connect the third or later ground cables to the LG terminal.

When the CF card extension unit is used, ground the ground cable as shown below.

1 Install the shorting bar to the LG and FG terminals of the GOT's power.

For GT155 , shorting is not needed.

GOT GT15-CFEXIF

GT15-C08CF

FGLGNL

L

Shorting bar

N LG FG

7.6 Grounding Extension Units 7.6.2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable

7 - 15

2 Connect the ground cable of the connection cable with the GOT's ground cable to the FG terminal of the GOT's power.

For GT155 , connect the ground cable of the connection cable to the FG terminal of the GOT's power, and connect the GOT's ground cable to the protective ground terminal. For connecting the ground cables, each flat side of the two solderless terminals must be faced.

3

For the ground cable of the connection cable, use the following solderless terminals.

For grounding the GOT, refer to the following.

7.2 Wiring to GOT Power Section

Applicable solderless terminal

RAV1.25-3, V1.25-B3A, FV1.25-B3A

Ground cable of connection cable

Ground cable of GOT

L N LG FG Terminal screw

Solderless terminal

Shorting bar

7 - 16 7.6 Grounding Extension Units 7.6.2 Wiring FG cable of CF card extension unit connection cable

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8. OPTION

8.1 Communication Unit The communication unit is used to relate the GOT extension interfaces to the system at the connection destination. To connect the communication unit, make Communication Settings for communications with a PLC. For details of connection, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

8.1.1 Applicable communication unit

The following communication units are applicable for GT15.

Product name Model Description

Bus connection unit

GT15-QBUS*1 For QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) connection (standard model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4", 5.7"

GT15-QBUS2*1 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

GT15-ABUS*1 For A/QnACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) connection (standard model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

GT15-ABUS2*1 For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q series) connection (slim model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

GT15-75QBUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU/motion controller CPU (A series) connection (slim model)

For last GOT, Number of IN side connectors: 1

GT15-75ABUS2L For intermediary and last GOT, Number of IN and OUT side connectors: 1 for each side

Serial communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P*1 For RS-232 interface connection, connector type

GT15-RS4-9S*1 For RS-422 interface connection, connector type

GT15-RS4-TE*1 For RS-422 interface connection, terminal block type

Ethernet communication unit

GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T) unit

MELSECNET/H communication unit

GT15-J71LP23-25*2 Optical double loop unit

GT15-J71BR13*2 Coaxial bus unit

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.1 Applicable communication unit

8 - 1

*1 When using this unit, use a standard monitor OS and communication driver of GT Designer3 Version1 1.01B and GT Designer2 Version2.15R or later. With a standard monitor OS and communication driver of an older version, the GOT has cannot recognize the unit to perform monitoring.

*2 This can be used with the GT1585-STBA and GT1575-STBA of hardware version C or later or the GT1575-VTBA and GT1565-VTBA of hardware version E or later

*3 When using this unit, use a standard monitor OS and communication driver of GT Designer2 Version2.77F or later. With a standard monitor OS and communication driver of an older version, the GOT has cannot recognize the unit to perform monitoring.

*4 When connecting this unit to the GOT, use the GT15-RS4-9S or GT15-RS4-TE. *5 When using this unit, use a standard monitor OS and communication driver of GT Designer3 Versioin1.31H or

later.

MELSECNET/10 communication unit

GT15-75J71LP23-Z Optical loop unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set)

For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4"GT15-75J71BR13-Z

Coaxial bus unit (A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set)

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX*3 Optical loop unit

For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4", 5.7"

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2*5 Intelligent device station unit

For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4", 5.7"

CC-Link communication unit

GT15-J61BT13*2 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compliant

For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4", 5.7"

GT15-75J61BT13-Z Intelligent device station unit (Set of A8GT-61BT13+GT15-75IF900)

For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4"

Interface converter unit

GT15-75IF900 Conversion unit for GOT-A900/GOT800 series communication unit

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M*4 GOT multidrop connection unit

For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4", 5.7"

Product name Model Description

8 - 2 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.1 Applicable communication unit

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.1.2 Installing procedure

This section describes how to install a communication unit on a GOT. A communication unit can also be installed together with another extension unit. When installing a communication unit together with some other extension unit, after executing the procedure in this section, refer to the following.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

1 Bus connection unit (1) GT15-QBUS, GT15-ABUS

3 Fit the communication unit in the GOT case.

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT.

4 Fasten the communication unit by tightening its mounting screws (2 places) with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

8 - 3

5 When installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed, refer to the following.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed, in order to avoid receiving electrostatic, stick accessory stickers to cover the top of mounting screws (2 places). Keep the connector cover fixed. Keep the sticker stuck as it is.

(2) GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2

Sticker

Accessory stickers

Connector cover

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face.

3 Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I/F-2 side of the GOT. After the installation, detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board. For GT155 , the extension interface relay board is not needed.

Remove the connector cover

8

- 4 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5 After the installation, tighten the mounting screws (4 places) in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48Nm).

6 Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48Nm). (2 places)

Removing the GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2

Before removing the unit, unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws. ( above )

4 Install the communication unit in the extension interface of the GOT rear face. (When the extension unit is installed in GOT, remove the installed extension unit. And, do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit.)

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

8 - 5

(3) GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face.

3 Install the communication unit on the extension interface of the GOT rear face. (When the extension unit is installed in GOT, remove the installed extension unit. And, do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit.)

7 When installing an extension unit on the outer layer, refer to the following.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer, cover the top of mounting screws (4 places) with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity. Keep the connector cover fixed. Keep the sticker stuck as it is.

8 - 6 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

4 After the installation, tighten the mounting screws (4 places) in the specified torque range (0.42 to 0.57Nm).

5 Paste the provided stickers after tightening the mounting screws in order to avoid receiving electrostatic.

2 Serial communication unit, Ethernet communication unit (1) Unit installation

The following explanation uses the Ethernet communication units as an example. The serial communication unit can be installed with the same procedure.

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT. .

3 Fit the communication unit in the GOT case.

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

8 - 7

4 Fasten the communication unit by tightening its mounting screws (2 places) with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm.

5 When installing an extension unit on the outer layer, refer to the following. 8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer, cover the top of mounting screws (4 places) with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity. Keep the connector cover fixed. Keep the sticker stuck as it is.

Remove the serial communication unit, Ethernet communication unit

If you remove the serial communication unit or Ethernet communication unit, detach it from specified direction (shown PULL) so as not to break a connector.

Sticker

Accessory stickers

Connector cover

8 - 8 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(2) Terminal block socket installation (For GT15-RS4-TE only)

1 Insert the terminal block socket in the serial communication unit.

2 Fasten the terminal block by tightening the terminal block fixing screws (2 places) with the tightening torque of 0.20 to 0.25 Nm.

When attaching or removing a communication cable

When attaching or removing a communication cable to/from the terminal block socket, detach the terminal block socket from the connector. (When extension units are installed in multiple layers, the units do not have to be removed from the GOT main unit.)

(Extended figure of part A)

A

A terminal block fixing screw

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

8 - 9

3 MELSECNET/10 communication unit, CC-Link communication unit

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT.

3 Fit the GT15-75IF900 in the GOT case.

4 Fasten the GT15-75IF900 by tightening its mounting screws (3 places) with tightening torque 0.36 to 0.48 Nm.

5 Attach the communication unit fixing brackets (3 places) to GT15-75IF900, then fasten them with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm.

8 - 10 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

6 Mount the network unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 or A9GT-QJ71BR13) or CC-Link communication unit (A8GT- J61BT13) to GT15-75IF900.

7 Fasten the unit fixing brackets (3 places) with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48Nm.

4 MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61B13) (1) Unit installation

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face.

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

8 - 11

5 After the installation, tighten the mounting screws (4 places) in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48Nm).

3 Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I/F-2 side of the GOT. After the installation, detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board. For GT155 , the extension interface relay board is not needed.

Remove the connector cover

4 Install the communication unit on the extension interface of the GOT rear face. (When the extension unit is installed in GOT, remove the installed extension unit. And, do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit.)

8 - 12 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

6 Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48Nm). (2 places)

Removing the MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

Before removing the unit, unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws. ( above )

(2) Terminal block socket installation (For GT15-J61BT13 only)

1 Insert the terminal block socket in CC-Link communication unit.

7 When installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed, refer to the following.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed, in order to avoid receiving electrostatic, stick accessory labels to cover the top of mounting screws (4 places). Keep the connector cover fixed. Keep the sticker stuck as it is.

A

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

8 - 13

2 Fasten the terminal block by tightening the terminal block fixing screws (2 places) with the tightening torque of 0.20 to 0.25 Nm.

When attaching or removing a communication cable

When attaching or removing a communication cable to/from the terminal block socket, detach the terminal block socket from the connector. (When extension units are installed in multiple layers, the units do not have to be removed from the GOT main unit.)

(Extended figure of part A)

A terminal block fixing screw

8 - 14 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

This section describes how to install another extension units on the extension units that has been installed on the GOT. When no extension units is installed on the GOT, apply the steps in this section after installing an extension units. Printer unit ( 8.3.2 Installing procedure)

Video/RGB unit ( 8.4.2 Installing procedure)

Communication unit ( 8.1.2 Installing procedure)

1 Remove the connector cover and sticker from the installed extension units.

2 Install the unit on the unit that has been installed.

3 After installing the unit, fasten it by tightening the mounting screws (2 places) with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48Nm.

Connector cover

Sticker

8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

8 - 15

4 When installing another extension unit on the unit that has been installed, implement the above operations of to .

5 When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed, in order to avoid receiving electrostatic, stick accessory stickers to cover the top of mounting screws.

6 Keep the connector cover fixed. 7 Keep the sticker stuck as it is. 8

(1) Installation position for a communication unit that occupies two extend I/Fs Install a communication unit that occupies two extend I/Fs directly to the GOT main unit. It cannot be installed on the back stage of another communication unit. If a video/RGB unit has been installed, install the communication unit on the back stage of that video/RGB unit.

(2) Installing the GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, GT15- 75ABUS2L These cannot be installed on the back stage of a video/RGB unit. For bus connection, use the GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, or GT15-ABUS2.

(3) Removing video/RGB unit, bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2), MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Before removing the unit, unscrew the extend interface board fixing screws.)

Sticker

Accessory stickers

Connector cover

8 - 16 8.1 Communication Unit 8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.2 RS-422 Conversion Unit The RS-422 conversion unit is inserted to the GOT RS-232 connector to enable the RS-422 communication by RS-232/RS-422 conversion. Refer to the following for the details of connection statuses.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

8.2.1 Applicable RS-422 conversion unit

The following RS-422 conversion units are applicable for GT15 .

Notes on using the RS-422 conversion unit

1. Use GT15-RS2T4-25P when you switched to use from the GOT-A900 series. Use GT15-RS2T4-9P when you newly use the GOT1000 series.

2. Set to [ON] by [5V supply] at [Communication settings] of the utility. ( 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation)

8.2.2 Installing procedure

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 While sliding the hook of the RS-422 conversion unit along the RS-422 conversion unit mounting rail of the GOT, install the RS-422 conversion unit to the RS-232 interface of the GOT.

3 Tighten the fixing screws in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48Nm) after the installation.

Model name Description

GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-232-RS-422 conversion unit

RS-422 side connector 9 pins (15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4")

GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25 pins (15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4")

8.2 RS-422 Conversion Unit 8.2.1 Applicable RS-422 conversion unit

8 - 17

8.3 Printer Unit Printer unit is used for connecting a printer to GOT. To connect the printer unit, make Communication Settings. For details of connection, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

8.3.1 Printer unit type

The following type of printer unit can be used for GT15 .

8.3.2 Installing procedure

This section describes how to install printer on GOT. A printer unit and another extension unit can be installed on a GOT together. Refer to the following item after implementing the steps described in this section. One printer unit can be installed at either 1st to 3rd stage of the exteded interface.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

1 Cable connection

1 Connect the dedicated printer connection cable to the printer unit.

2 Attach the accessory connector holder to the dedicated printer connection cable and tighten the screw of connector holder with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48N m.

Model name Description

GT15-PRN 83g (including connector holder and cable clamp)

Dedicated printer connection cable

Connector holder

8 - 18 8.3 Printer Unit 8.3.1 Printer unit type

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3 Depending on the use environment such as when fastening cable is difficult, attach a cable clamp to the printer unit. Be sure to attach the cable clamp to section A (see the following figure) with its band positioned outside and press it until it clicks. For the band inserting direction, refer to the arrow. (As a cable clamp, "RST-1NB" manufactured by TAKEUCHI INDUSTRY CO.LTD. is used.)

4 Insert the dedicated printer connection cable in the looped cable clamp band and pull the band to fasten the cable.

2 Unit installation

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT.

Cable clamp

A

8.3 Printer Unit 8.3.2 Installing procedure

8 - 19

3 Fit the printer unit in the GOT case.

4 Fasten the printer unit by tightening its mounting screws (2 places) with tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48 N m.

5 When mounting any extension unit in a later stage, refer to the following. 8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

6 When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed, stick accessory stickers on the top of mounting screws (2 places) to cover the top of them in order to avoid receiving electrostatic charge. Keep the connector cover and sticker fixed as shown in the following figure.

(1) Cable to be used When connecting the printer to the GOT, use the dedicated printer connection cable supplied with the printer unit.

In the case a cable clamp is attached

In the case a cable clamp is attached

Sticker

Accessory stickers

Connector cover

8 - 20 8.3 Printer Unit 8.3.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(2) Precautions for connecting the dedicated printer connection cable (USB cable) Wait 5s or more between the connection and disconnection of the dedicated

printer connection cable. If connecting or disconnecting the dedicated printer connection cable shortly after disconnecting or connecting the cable, the GOT may not operate normally.

Do not connect or disconnect the dedicated printer connection cable during printing. Doing so can cause the GOT operate incorrectly.

Connected printer may not be recognized in rare cases. When printer is not recognized, disconnect the dedicated printer connection cable once and connect it again.

When the printer has been connected to a personal computer and used before it is connected to GOT, power on the printer again and connect it to GOT.

Any printer cannot be connected to GOT via USB hub. Do not connect any device to the printer while GOT is connected to it. Do not connect any device other than printer to the printer unit.

(3) Cable connection/disconnection When connecting and disconnecting the dedicated printer connection cable, leave an interval of at least 3 seconds.

(4) Printer unit removal

To remove the printer unit, detach it from specified direction ( PULL) so as not to break the connector.

(5) Cable clamp Pulling out the cable clamp band

The cable clamp band can be pulled out after cable treatment. Pull out the band with pressing the tab of the cable clamp outward using a driver etc.

Removing from the printer unit The dedicated printer connection cable can be removed from the unit with the cable clamp attached. Remove the cable clamp by pressing it in both directions (arrow A).

(6) Screw of the connector holder Do not remove the screw attached to the connector holder. In the case the screw is removed, do not use any other screw. Doing so may damage the unit.

A

8.3 Printer Unit 8.3.2 Installing procedure

8 - 21

8.4 Video/RGB Unit The video/RGB unit is used to connect a video camera, personal computer, or commercially available display to a GOT. To connect video/RGB unit, make Communication Settings. For details of connection, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

Video/RGB unit Images taken with a video camera and a personal computer display can be displayed on the GOT.

Video input unit Images taken with a video camera can be displayed on the GOT.

RGB input unit A personal computer display can be displayed on the GOT.

RGB output unit A GOT display can be displayed on a commercially available display.

8.4.1 Video/RGB unit types

There are the following types of video/RGB units.

8.4.2 Installing procedure

This section explains how to install a video/RGB unit on a GOT. A video/RGB unit can also be installed together with another extension unit. When installing a video/RGB unit together with some other extension unit, after executing the procedure in this section, refer to the following. One video/RGB unit can be installed only in the first stage of the extension interface.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

Model name Description

GT15V-75V4 For NTSC/PAL input 4 channels

Only for video/RGB compliant models

GT15V-75R1 For analog RGB input 1 channel

GT15V-75V4R1 For NTSC/PAL (4ch)/analog RGB (1ch) mixed input

GT15V-75ROUT For analog RGB output

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT rear face.

8

- 22 8.4 Video/RGB Unit 8.4.1 Video/RGB unit types

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5 After the installation, tighten the mounting screws (4 places) in the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48Nm).

3 Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I/F-2 side of the GOT. After the installation, detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board.

Remove the connector cover

4 Install the video/RGB unit on the extension interface of the GOT rear face. (When the extension unit is installed in GOT, remove the installed extension unit. And, do not touch the board in the GOT when install the video/RGB unit.)

8.4 Video/RGB Unit 8.4.2 Installing procedure

8 - 23

6 Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48Nm). (2 places)

Removing the video/RGB unit

Before removing the unit, unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws. ( above )

7 When installing an extension unit on the unit, refer to the following.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer, cover the top of mounting screws (4 places) with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity. Keep the connector cover fixed. Keep the sticker stuck as it is.

8 - 24 8.4 Video/RGB Unit 8.4.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.5 External I/O Unit The external I/O unit is used for connecting to an external I/O device or operation panel. For connecting the external I/O unit, set the communication settings. For connection details, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

8.5.1 Applicable external I/O unit

The following external I/O unit is applicable to GT15 .

8.5.2 Installation procedure

The external I/O unit can be installed on the GOT with other extension units. For installing the external I/O unit with other extension units, refer to the following after implementing the steps described in this section. One external I/O unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

1 Turn off the GOT.

2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT.

3 Fit the external I/O unit in the GOT case.

Model Description

GT15-DIO External I/O unit (Positive Common Input / Sink Type Output)

GT15-DIOR External I/O unit (Negative Common Input / Source Type Output)

8.5 External I/O Unit 8.5.1 Applicable external I/O unit

8 - 25

4 Tighten two external I/O unit mounting screws with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48N m.

5 For installing an extension unit on the external I/O unit, refer to the following.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

When an extension unit is not installed on the unit, stick accessory stickers over two mounting screws so as not to damage the unit by static electricity. Keep the connector cover and sticker fixed as shown in the following figure.

Sticker

Accessory sticker

Connector cover

8 - 26 8.5 External I/O Unit 8.5.2 Installation procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.6 Sound Output Unit The sound output unit is used for connecting to external speakers. For connecting the sound output unit, set the communication settings. For connection details, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

8.6.1 Applicable sound output unit

The following sound output unit is applicable to GT15 .

8.6.2 Installation procedure

The sound output unit can be installed on the GOT with other extension units. For installing the sound output unit with other extension units, refer to the following after implementing the steps described in this section. One sound output unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

1 Cable connection

1 Connect a cable of an external speaker to the sound output unit.

2 Attach the cable clamp to the unit. Be sure to attach the cable clamp to section A as shown in the following figure with its band positioned outside until it clicks. Put the band of the cable clamp through the hole of the cable clamp in the direction of the arrow. (The RST-1NB manufactured by TAKEUCHI INDUSTRY CO., LTD. is applicable as the cable clamp.)

Model Description

GT15-SOUT Sound output unit

Cable of

external

speaker

8.6 Sound Output Unit 8.6.1 Applicable sound output unit

8 - 27

3 Put the cable of the external speaker through the looped cable clamp band, and pull the band for fixing the cable.

2 Unit installation

1 Turn off the GOT.

2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT.

3 Fit the sound output unit in the GOT case.

4 Tighten two sound output unit mounting screws with a torque of 0.36 to 0.48N m.

Cable clamp

A

8 - 28 8.6 Sound Output Unit 8.6.2 Installation procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

5 When installing an extension unit on the outer layer, refer to the following.

8.1.3 Installing multiple extension units in layers

When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer, cover the top of mounting screws (4 places) with accessory stickers in order to avoid receiving static electricity. Keep the connector cover and sticker fixed as shown in the following figure.

(1) Precautions for connecting external speakers Do not connect or disconnect the cable of the external speaker during sound

outputs. Do not connect any devices other than external speakers to the sound output

unit. (2) Removing sound output unit

When removing the sound output unit, tilt PULL of the unit and remove the unit so as not to break the connector.

(3) Cable clamp Removing cable clamp band

The cable clamp band can be removed after the cable of the external speaker is fixed with the cable clamp. Pull out the cable clamp band with the tab of the cable clamp pushed up using a tool, including screwdrivers.

Removing from sound output unit The cable of the external speaker can be removed even though the cable is fixed with the cable clamp. Remove the cable clamp by pressing it in both directions (arrow A).

Sticker

Accessory sticker

Connector cover

A

8.6 Sound Output Unit 8.6.2 Installation procedure

8 - 29

8.7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit When an additional drive is used, the CF card unit or CF card extension unit can be used as the B drive of the GOT. The CF card extension unit is a set of the control panel side installation unit (GT15-CFEX) and the GOT side installation unit (GT15-CFEXIF). When the CF card extension unit is used, the control panel side installation unit on the control panel has the CF card interface. Therefore, when the CF card is inserted or ejected, there is no need to open the control panel's door. For using the CF card unit and the CF card extension unit, set the communication settings.

8.7.1 Applicable CF card unit and CF card extension unit

The following CF card unit and the CF card extension unit are applicable to GT15 .

8.7.2 Installing on GOT

The section explains how to install the CF card unit or the CF card extension unit on the GOT. The following is an example of installing the CF card unit. For installing the CF card extension unit, install the GOT side installation unit on the GOT with the same procedure.

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Remove one extension unit covers of the GOT and fit the CF card unit in the GOT case.

3 Fasten the CF card unit by tightening its mounting screws (2 places) with tightening torque 0.36 to 0.48N m.

Model name Description

GT15-CFCD CF card unit

GT15-CFEX-C08SET CF card extension unit

8 - 30 8.7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8.7.1 Applicable CF card unit and CF card extension unit

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Installation and removal precautions

Extension units cannot be installed on the CF card unit and the CF card extension unit. For installing extension units, install the CF card unit or the CF card extension unit at the last.

When installing the CF card unit on extension interface 1 (left side), do not install more units on extension interface 2 (right side) than on extension interface 1 (left side). If doing so, the CF card cannot be installed or removed.

For removing the CF card unit or the CF card extension unit, tilt PULL of the unit and remove the unit so as not to break the connector.

The CF card unit cannot be used with the CF card extension unit. For details, refer to the following.

Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive

8.7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8.7.2 Installing on GOT

8 - 31

8.7.3 Installing on control panel

The following shows how to install the CF card extension unit on the control panel.

1 Insert the control panel side installation unit into the installation hole of the control panel. For the installation hole, refer to the following.

6. INSTALLATION

2 Fix the GOT side installation unit by tightening its fixing screws (2 places) with a tightening torque of 0.36 to 0.48N.m.

3 Insert the connector with the ground cable into the GOT side installation unit, and insert the connector without the ground cable into the control panel side installation unit.

(For GT155 , before connecting the connection cable to the GOT side installation unit, connect the ground cable of the connection cable to the GOT's terminal block. Because the GOT's terminal block overlaps with the connection cable, the ground cable cannot be connected to the GOT's terminal block.) After inserting the connectors, tighten the connection cable fixing screws.

4 Connect the ground cable of the connection cable to the FG terminal of the GOT's power. For connecting the ground cables, refer to the following.

7.6 Grounding Extension Units

Ground cable

GOT side installation unit

GOT

A side

A

Control panel side installation unit

B

B side

8 - 32 8.7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8.7.3 Installing on control panel

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.7.4 Protective structure for CF card extension unit

The protective structure of the outside the enclosure for the control panel side installation unit is IP65 in shipping. When the dustproof rubber for the CF card cover is changed with the CF card cover fixing screw, the protective structure is IP67.

The following shows how to install the CF card cover fixing screw.

1 Open the CF card cover, and remove the dustproof rubber in the direction of the arrow.

2 Insert the CF card cover fixing screw into the hole of the CF card cover, and install the washer in the direction of the arrows.

3 Close the CF card cover, and tighten the CF card cover fixing screw with a tightening torque of 0.11 to 0.48N.m.

Precautions when the CF card cover is opened

The environmental protective structure of the CF card extension unit is IP2X when the CF card cover is opened.

Part Protective structure

Dustproof rubber IP65

CF card cover fixing screw IP67

8.7 CF Card Unit and CF Card Extension Unit 8.7.4 Protective structure for CF card extension unit

8 - 33

8.8 CF Card The CF card is used to transfer the OS or project data and to save data of the alarm history function or other functions. Refer to the following for details.

13. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL)

8.8.1 Applicable CF card

The following CF cards are applicable for GT15 .

*1: Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the validated models, refer to Technical News GOT-A-0010 "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" separately available, or contact your local distributor.

The flash PC card of the GOT-A900 series

In the GT15 , the flash PC card for GOT-A900 series cannot be used. Use the CF card which is described in the above.

Mode Description

GT05-MEM-16MC Flash ROM 16MB

GT05-MEM-32MC Flash ROM 32MB

GT05-MEM-64MC Flash ROM 64MB

GT05-MEM-128MC Flash ROM 128MB

GT05-MEM-256MC Flash ROM 256MB

GT05-MEM-512MC Flash ROM 512MB

GT05-MEM-1GC Flash ROM 1GB

GT05-MEM-2GC Flash ROM 2GB

Commercially-available CF card *1

8 - 34 8.8 CF Card 8.8.1 Applicable CF card

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.8.2 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card interface of GOT

Install/remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF.

1 Installing

1 Turn the CF card access switch of the GOT off.

2 Open the cover of the CF card interface. Insert and install the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside.

CF card eject button

For the following GOTs, after installing the CF card, turn the CF card eject button to 90 degree while being pulled.

GT1585-S, GT1575-S: Hardware version B (April, 2005) or earlier GT1575-V, GT1565-V: Hardware version D (April, 2005) or earlier

When using other than the GT155 When using the GT155

When using other than the GT155 When using the GT155

ACCESS

OFF ON

ACCESS

OFF ON

CF Card

top face CF Card

top face

8.8 CF Card 8.8.2 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card interface of GOT

8 - 35

3 Close the cover of the CF card interface. Set the CF card access switch to ON.

When using other than the GT155 When using the GT155

ACCESS

OFF ON

ACCESS

OFF ON

8 - 36 8.8 CF Card 8.8.2 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card interface of GOT

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

2 Removing

1 Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF, and make sure that the CF card access LED turns off. (When the CF card access LED turns off, the CF card can be removead even during the GOT power on.)

2 Open the cover of the CF card interface. Push the CF card eject button of the GOT. (The CF card eject button is pulled out after pushing at once.)

When using other than the GT155 When using the GT155

When using other than the GT155

When using the GT155

ACCESS

OFF ON

ACCESS

OFF ON

8.8 CF Card 8.8.2 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card interface of GOT

8 - 37

CF card eject button

For the following GOTs, after opening the cover of the CF card interface, raise the CF card eject button.

GT1585-S, GT1575-S: Hardware version B (April, 2005) or earlier GT1575-V, GT1565-V: Hardware version D (April, 2005) or earlier

3 Push the CF card eject button of the GOT to lift the CF card and remove it.

Precautions for removing the CF card

1. While the CF card access LED is on, do not install/remove the CF card or power off the GOT. To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction.

2. When ejecting the CF card, support it by hand since it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card.

3. Do not install/remove the CF card while downloading the monitor data or other data by the RS-232 transmission. To do so may cause a faulty communication of the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 and the data cannot be downloaded normally.

When using other than the GT155 When using the GT155

8 - 38 8.8 CF Card 8.8.2 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card interface of GOT

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.8.3 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card unit

Install/remove a CF card while the GOT power or the CF card access switch is OFF.

1 Installation

1 Open the CF card cover and turn off the CF card access switch of the unit.

2 Insert the CF card into the CF card connector with the face out.

3 Turn on the CF card access switch.

8.8 CF Card 8.8.3 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card unit

8 - 39

2 Removal

1 Open the CF card cover. Turn off the CF card access switch of the unit and check that the CF card access LED turns off. (When the LED turns off, the CF card can be removed even while the GOT is on.)

2 Press the CF card eject button to pop out the CF card and remove it.

Precautions for removing CF card

(1) Do not insert or eject a CF card, and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card access LED turns on. Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with the CF card unit.

(2) When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit, support the card with the hand, because the card might pop out. Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit, resulting in a damage or failure of the card.

8 - 40 8.8 CF Card 8.8.3 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card unit

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.8.4 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card extension unit

Install/remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF.

1 Installation

1 When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw, unscrew the screw.

2 Open the CF card cover, and turn off the CF card access switch of the unit.

3 Insert the CF card into the CF card connector with the front side facing up.

4 Turn on the CF card access switch.

8.8 CF Card 8.8.4 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card extension unit

8 - 41

2 Removal

1 When the CF card cover is fixed with the CF card cover fixing screw, unscrew the screw.

2 Open the CF card cover. Turn off the CF card access switch and check that the CF card access LED turns off. (The CF card can be removed when the CF card access LED turns off even though the GOT's power is on.)

3 Press the CF card eject button, and then the button pops out. Press the button again, and then the CF card pops out. Remove the card.

Precautions for removing CF card

(1) Do not insert or eject a CF card, and do not turn off the GOT while the CF card access LED turns on. Failure to do so might cause a data damage in the CF card and a malfunction with the CF card unit.

(2) When a CF card is removed from the CF card unit, support the card with the hand, because the card might pop out. Failure to do so might cause the CF card to drop from the unit, resulting in a damage or failure of the card.

8 - 42 8.8 CF Card 8.8.4 CF card inserting/removing method with CF card extension unit

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.9 Memory Card Adaptor The memory card adaptor is used to convert the CF card into the memory card (Type II). The memory card (Type II) is used to transmit the OS, project data and to save the data of alarm history function or other functions by installing it to the PC which is equipped with the CMCIA interface. Refer to the following for the details related to CF card.

8.8 CF Card

8.9.1 Applicable memory card adaptor

The following memory card adaptor is applicable for GT15 .

8.9.2 Installing procedure

1 Fit the memory card in the memory card adaptor.

Mode Description

GT05-MEM-ADPC Converts the CF card into a memory card

CF card Memory card

adaptor

8.9 Memory Card Adaptor 8.9.1 Applicable memory card adaptor

8 - 43

8.10 Option Function Board The optional function board is used to extend the option function and the built-in flash memory. When the function version of the GOT to be used is D or later, the option functions operated with the GT15- FNB can be used without an option function board installed. (The latest standard monitor OS must be installed on the GOT.) For the option functions operated with the GT15-FNB, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

8.10.1 Applicable option function board

The following option function boards are applicable for GT15 .

8.10.2 Installing procedure

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Detach the extension unit cover (I/F-1 side) of GOT rear face. When extention units are mounted on the GOT, remove the extention units.

Model Description

GT15-FNB Option function board

GT15-QFNB Option function board Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-QFNB16M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+16MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-QFNB32M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+32MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-QFNB48M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+48MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, and document display function

GT15-MESB48M Option function board with add-on memory (Option function+48MB) Applicable to MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function, multi-channel function, document display function, and MES interface function

8 - 44 8.10 Option Function Board 8.10.1 Applicable option function board

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3 Insert the option function board to the option function board interface to which the positioning crenas are fitted.

For installing the option function board, do not touch a board inside the GOT.

4 Push down the option function board until it clicks.

5 After the installation of option function board, attach the extension unit cover. For installation of extension unit, install the extension unit.

8.10 Option Function Board 8.10.2 Installing procedure

8 - 45

8.11 Battery Battery is used to backup data when the power supply of GOT is OFF. The data which can be backed-up with the battery is shown below. Present time (Clock data) ( 12.1 Time Setting and Display) Maintenance time notification data ( 16.1 Maintenance Timing Setting)

8.11.1 Applicable battery

The following battery is applicable for GT15 .

8.11.2 Battery specifications

For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to 19.4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States.

8.11.3 Battery replacement procedure

Replace battery periodically by referring to Section 8.11.4 Battery life.

1 Keep the GOT power supply on for 10 minutes or more, and turn it off. (Executes step to within 5 minutes of powering the GOT power supply off.)

2 Remove the battery holder form the GOT backside.

Model Description

GT15-BAT Battery for backup of clock data and maintenance timing setting data.

Item Specifications

Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery

Initial voltage 3.0V

Nominal current 1800mAh

Storage life Approx.5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25C)

Total power stoppage time Refer to Section 8.11.4 Battery life

Lithium content 0.49g

Application For backup of clock data and maintenance timing setting data.

For other than GT155 For GT155

8 - 46 8.11 Battery 8.11.1 Applicable battery

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3 Remove the old battery from the holder and disconnect the connector.

4 Connect the new battery to the connector.

5 Insert the battery into the holder and set it into the GOT backside.

6 Turn the GOT power supply on.

7 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility. Refer to the following for the details of battery status display.

12. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY (TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY)

1. Precautions after battery replacement

Make sure to turn on the GOT power supply once upon completion of battery replacement. Failure to do so may decrease the battery life.

2. When the 2- slot type extension unit is connected to GT156 .

Before installing or replacing the battery, disconnect the unit. (When connecting or disconnecting the unit, be sure to power off the GOT and PLC.)

8.11.4 Battery life

Life span of the battery set in the GOT is shown below.

*: In the following conditions, the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off. The battery connector is disconnected. The battery lead is disconnected.

Battery life and replacement time

1. Battery life reference: Approx.5 years in actual use (Operating ambient temperature of 25C) Battery replacement time reference: 4 to 5 years Calculate the natural discharge amount of the battery, as necessary.

2. Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility. Refer to the following for the details of battery status display.

12. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY (TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY)

Battery life

Operating ambient temperature of 0 to 45C

Operating ambient temperature of 45 to 55C

Data backup time after detection of battery voltage low*

5 years 3 years 14 days

8.11 Battery 8.11.4 Battery life

8 - 47

8.12 Protective Sheet The protection sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated.

8.12.1 Applicable protective sheet

The following protective sheets are applicable for GT15 . When giving priority to brightness, select the clear protective sheet; when giving priority to preventing glare, select the anti-glare protective sheet.

*1 Because the frame section is white, use this when making the GOT front face (other than the display section) white.

Product name Model Description

Protective sheet

GT15-90PSCB

15" protective sheet

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-90PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-90PSCW*1 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-90PSGW*1 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-80PSCB

Protection sheet for 12.1"

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-80PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-80PSCW*1 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-80PSGW*1 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-70PSCB

Protection sheet for 10.4"

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-70PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-70PSCW*1 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-70PSGW*1 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-60PSCB

Protection sheet for 8.4"

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-60PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-60PSCW*1 Clear (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-60PSGW*1 Antiglare (Frame: White) 5 sheets

GT15-50PSCB

5.7" protective sheet

Clear 5 sheets

GT15-50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets

GT15-50PSCW*1 Clear (Frame: white) 5 sheets

GT15-50PSGW*1 Antiglare (Frame: white) 5 sheets

8 - 48 8.12 Protective Sheet 8.12.1 Applicable protective sheet

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.12.2 Installing procedure

1 Remove the old protective sheet from the GOT, and clean the GOT surface.

2 Peel the release paper from the back of the new protective sheet, and attach its adhesive side to the GOT display section. When attaching the protective sheet, make sure to fit it on the display section closely without leaving any clearance between them.

3 Peel the protective film off the protective sheet. When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.

Remark Replacement time of protective sheet

Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection. The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks, causing malfunction. Proceeds replacement promptly.

8.12 Protective Sheet 8.12.2 Installing procedure

8 - 49

8.13 Protective cover for oil Use of the protective cover for oil improves oil resistance, and chemical resistance of the GOT.

8.13.1 Applicable protective cover for oil

The following protective covers for oil are applicable to the GT15 .

8.13.2 Installation procedure

Before attaching protective cover for oil

For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted on the control panel, follow the procedures as below.

Remove the GOT from the control panel. Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in advance.

Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel.

1 When the USB environmental protection cover is installed on the GOT, remove the cover.

2 After removing the cover, put the USB connector protective sticker on the USB connector.

Product name Model Description

Protective cover for oil

GT05-90PCO For 15" GOT

GT05-80PCO For 12.1" GOT

GT05-70PCO For 10.4" GOT

GT05-60PCO For 8.4" GOT

GT05-50PCO For 5.7" GOT

8 - 50 8.13 Protective cover for oil 8.13.1 Applicable protective cover for oil

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3 Position the POWER LED frame of the cover to the POWER LED on the GOT front face, and the directiveof the cover is decided.

4 One corner of the cover is pulled outside, and it hangs it on the corner of the front panel of GOT.

5 The oil cover was hung and the edge of the oil cover is sequentially obtained and obtain the oil cover to cover rubber packing parts in the back of GOT of the front panel. (It is the order of the arrow from A side to D side.)

Protective Cover For oil

POWER LED window

POWER LED

GOT

Protective Cover For oil

The corner is hung.

GOT

Please do not pull the oil cover more than the necessity,

and do not bend it extremely.

The seat part and the rubber part in the display part

might flake off.

The corner on the left is hung and the oil cover is hung

from A side to D side on the starting point sequentially.

A

B

C

D

8.13 Protective cover for oil 8.13.2 Installation procedure

8 - 51

Before mounting the GOT onto the control panel

Please confirm all surroundings. Whether the rubber packing part is surely covered to prevent going into such as the requids in the board.

6 Mount the GOT onto the control panel. When the control panel is dirty, clean the control panel. The panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are the same as those without the cover. For how to mount the GOT onto the control panel, refer to the following.

7 6. INSTALLATION

Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front.

Protectivecover

for oil

Panel cut

dimensions

Mounting metal fixture

Control panel

8 - 52 8.13 Protective cover for oil 8.13.2 Installation procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

Precautions for protective cover for oil

The protective cover for oil is a consumable product. Check the cover for scratch, damage or dirt at regular intervals, and replace with new one if necessary.

Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools, including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers. Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover.

Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches, thinners, organic solvents, corrosive chemicals, and others. Doing so causes changes in shape and color of the cover.

When the protective cover for oil is attached to the GOT, do not stretch and bend the cover too much. Doing so may cause a separation between the sheet and rubber.

Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine. When the protective cover for oil gets dusts, wipe the dusts off with a damp

cloth. When the protective cover for oil is used, the USB connector on the GOT

front face cannot be used. When the protective cover for oil is used, the human sensor does not

correctly operate. Disable the human sensor with the utility. For the human sensor setting, refer to GT15 User's Manual.

11.1.3 Display setting operations

Do not attach and remove the protective cover for oil frequently. Doing so reduces oil resistance and chemical resistance.

It is not the one to guarantee all customer's environments. Moreover, it is not likely to be able to use it in the environment to which oil splashes for a long time and the environment with which Oilmist is filled.

8.13 Protective cover for oil 8.13.2 Installation procedure

8 - 53

8.14 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environment cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust, water, and oil. The GOT is installed with the USB environment cover at factory shipment. Replace when damage and deterioration are caused.

8.14.1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover

The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT15 .

8.14.2 Installing procedure

1 Fix the USB environmental protection cover to the GOT by tightening its upper fixing screw within the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48 Nm). (It is advisable to set the USB environmental protection cover along a guiding hole which is provided in the GOT, as it will make the installation easier.)

2 When the USB interface is not used, also tighten the lower fixing screw of the USB environmental protection cover within the specified torque range (0.36 to 0.48 Nm). (IP67 compliant)

Model Description

GT15-UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side (For complying IP67) (For 15", 12.1", 10.4", 8.4")

GT11-50UCOV Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side (For complying IP67) (For 5.7")

For other than GT155 For GT155

For other than GT155 For GT155

Guiding

hole

Guiding hole

8 - 54 8.14 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8.14.1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

3 When the USB interface is used, remove the lower fixing screw of the USB environmental protection cover, and connect the USB cable. (IP67 incompliant)

Precautions when the USB environment cover is opened

Environmental protective structure of USB interface is "IP2X" when the USB environmental cover is opened.

For other than GT155 For GT155

8.14 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8.14.2 Installing procedure

8 - 55

8.15 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily.

8.15.1 Applicable stand

The following stand is applicable for GT15 .

8.15.2 Installing procedure

(1) GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND

1 Set the stand so that the front side of the GOT to be mounted faces the front. For GT15-70STAND, the surface to be used to set the GOT changes according to the GOT mounted.

2 Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting screw of the stand.

3 Put the GOT into the Stand from the front side and fix it using the fixtures. For the GOT mounting method, refer to the following.

6.5 Installation Procedure

Product name Model Description

Stand

GT15-90STAND Stand for 15"

GT15-80STAND Stand for 12.1"

GT15-70STAND Stand for 10.4"/8.4"

GT05-50STAND Stand for 5.7"

For GT15-70 STANDFor GT15-90 STAND,GT15-80 STAND

8 - 56 8.15 Stand 8.15.1 Applicable stand

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

(2) GT05-50STAND

1 Determine the angle for installing the GOT. Slide the angle adjustment fitting as shown below to determine the angle. The angle can be adjusted to 75, 65, 55 or 45. When installing multiple units to the GOT, use the stand with 75 or 65 degrees for securing lead- in allowances for cables at the bottom of the GOT.

2 Once the angle is determined, insert the angle adjustment fitting's fixing hook into the hook insertion section on the bottom of the stand.

3 Securely tighten the fixing screw.

4 Insert the GOT from the front of Stand and install it to Stand. Refer to the following for details on installing the GOT.

6.5 Installation Procedure

5 After the installation, perform wiring, etc.

8.15 Stand 8.15.2 Installing procedure

8 - 57

8.16 Attachment

The attachment is used to replace A960GOT, AC97 GOT to GT156 (8.4"). If use attachment when replace A960GOT or AC97 GOT to GT156 , there is no need of additional processing as mounting hole of the inside control panel etc. which is used for A960GOT, A97 GOT.

8.16.1 Applicable attachment

The following attachments are applicable for GT156 .

*1 The GP250 and GP260 manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation can also be replaced with the 10.4" GOT1000.

Product name Model name

Description

Applicable GOT screen size

GOT model to be replaced

Alternative GOT model

Attachment

GT15-70ATT-98

10.4"

A985GOT*1

GT157 GT15-70ATT-87

A870GOT-SWS

A870GOT-TWS

A8GT-70GOT-TW

A8GT-70GOT-TB

A8GT-70GOT-SW

A8GT-70GOT-SB

GT15-60ATT-97

8.4"

A97 GOT

GT156

GT15-60ATT-96 A960GOT

GT15-60ATT-87

A870GOT-EWS

A8GT-70GOT-EW

A8GT-70GOT-EB

A77GOT-EL-S5

A77GOT-EL-S3

A77GOT-EL

GT15-60ATT-77

A77GOT-CL-S5

A77GOT-CL-S3

A77GOT-CL

A77GOT-L-S5

A77GOT-L-S3

A77GOT-L

GT15-50ATT-95W 5.7"

A956WGOT GT155

GT15-50ATT-85 A85 GOT

8 - 58 8.16 Attachment 8.16.1 Applicable attachment

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.16.2 Installing procedure

(1) For GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, GT15-60ATT-87 and GT15-60ATT-77 The following figures show an example of the GT15-60ATT-97 installarion. Follow the same procedure for installing the other models.

1 The model name is indicated on the attachment. The upper part of the attachment has the model indication. (Example of model indication)

2 Hang the two upper hooks on the upper part over the mounting holes in the control panel. Refer to the figure shown in .

3 While lifting the attachment upward, hang the two lower hooks on the lower part of the control panel.

4 Fix the attachment to the control panel with four clamp screws in the torque range of 0.2 to 0.28Nm.

5 Place the GOT into the attachment from the front, and fix it by tightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm.

Upper part

Lower part

Upper part

Lower part

Model

8.16 Attachment 8.16.2 Installing procedure

8 - 59

(2) For GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-50ATT-95W and GT15-50ATT-85 The following figures show an example of the GT15-70ATT-87 installarion. Follow the same procedure for installing the other models.

Precautions when the attachment is installed

1 The model is indicated on the attachment. The position of the model indication does not affect the performance of the attachment. (Example of model indication)

2 Remove two-sided tapes from the rear face of the attachment.

3 Fix the attachment to fit the mounting hole on the control panel. If the control panel is dirty, the attachment might fall, causing an injury. Wipe the control panel, and then install the attachment.

4 Place the GOT into the attachment from the front, and fix it by tightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm.

The attachment can be used when the mounting panel thickness is 2 to 3mm. If the installation panel thickness exceeds 3mm, the GOT cannot be replaced by using the attachment.

Replacing GOT with the attachment does not compliant with the standard IP65, IP67, NEMA4 of the waterproof and dustproof.

Upper

part

Lower

part

Upper

part

Lower

part

Model

8 - 60 8.16 Attachment 8.16.2 Installing procedure

1

O VE

R VI

EW

2

SY ST

EM

C O

N FI

G U

R AT

IO N

3

SP EC

IF IC

AT IO

N S

4

PA R

T N

AM E

AN D

SE

TT IN

G S

5

EM C

A N

D L

O W

VO

LT AG

E D

IR EC

TI VE

6

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N

7

W IR

IN G

8

O PT

IO N

8.17 Multi-Color Display Board The multi-color display board is used when supporting 65536 display colors. Depending on the function version of the GOT to be used, 65536 colors are available without the multi-color display board. For GOTs requiring installation of the multi-color display board, refer to the following.

3.2 Performance Specifications

8.17.1 Applicable multi-color display board

The following multi-color display board is applicable for GT15 .

*1: To use it for a SVGA or VGA GOT, install the following OS to the GOT.

(Cannot be used for a SVGA or VGA GOT without installing the OS.)

For how to install the OS, refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) or GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual.

When using GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN, GT1562-VN

For GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN and GT1562-VN, 65536 color display is not supported even with the multi-color display board installed.

Model Description

GT15-XHNB Multi-color display board for XGA (For 65536-color display)

Multi-color display board for SVGA/VGA (For 65536-color display)*1

GT15-VHNB Multi-color display board for SVGA/VGA (For 65536-color display)

BootOS Ver. 02.01.00.E or later

Standard monitor OS: Ver. 02.01.00 or later

8.17 Multi-Color Display Board 8.17.1 Applicable multi-color display board

8 - 61

8.17.2 Installing procedure

1 Power OFF the GOT.

2 Remove the extension unit cover (I/F-2 side) of GOT rear face.

3 Install the multi-color display board in the multi-color display board interface. (When the extension unit is installed in GOT, remove the installed extension unit. And, do not touch the board in the GOT when install the multi-color display board.)

4 After the installation, tighten a fixing screw within the specified torque range (0.25 to 0.35Nm).

8 - 62 8.17 Multi-Color Display Board 8.17.2 Installing procedure

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

9. UTILITY FUNCTION

Utility is a function, which carries out connection of GOT and controller, screen display and operation method settings, program/data control and self-check etc.

Refer to the following for the utility function list.

9.3 Utility Display

9.1 Utility Execution For utility execution, utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the C drive (built in flash memory).

There are following three types for the installing BootOS and standard monitor OS methods.

Refer to the following for the installation which uses GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual

Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT.

18. INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS

BootOS, standard

monitor OS installation

CF card

GOTGOT

OS file

upload

3) GOT CF card GOT

Install the CF

card in GOT

Install OS from GOT to GOT using

CF card

Via USB interface or

RS-232 interface

BootOS or standard OS installation

Installed directly from the GT Designer3

or GT Designer2

BootOS or standard

monitor OS installation

CF card

GT Designer3

or

GT Designer2

GT Designer3

or

GT Designer2

GOT

GOT

OS file

write

GT Designer2 GOT

GT Designer2 CF card GOT

Install the CF

card in GOT

When GOT is remote, installed easily

using the CF card

GT Designer3

or

GT Designer3

or

1)

2)

9.1 Utility Execution

9 - 1

9.2 Utility Function List

The items in the following list can be set/operated on the utility screens.

(Continued to next page)

Item Functions overview Reference

Commun ication setting

Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication interfaces.

10 Communication setting

Setting communication parameters

Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words, canceling sequence program protection status (When connecting to FX series CPU)

Ethernet setting Displaying the contents of Ethernet setting, changing the host 10.3

GOT setup

Display

Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time

11.1

Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving

Switching message languages

Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF

Setting the black and white inversion display to ON or OFF (For GT15, applicable to only GT1550-Q)

Setting the human sensor (Applicable to only GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, and GT1585-S)

Adjusting brightness and contrast 11.2

Operation

Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer

11.3Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed

Setting the touch detection mode (Applicable to only GT1595-X)

Changing security levels 11.4

Setting the utility call keys 11.5

Adjusting the touch panel (Applicable to only GT1595-X) 11.6

SoftGOT-GOT link function setting 11.7

Q/L/QnA ladder monitor

Setting the data storage location for the MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function.(Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

11.8

Transparent mode settings

Setting the channel No. to be used for the communication for the FA transparent function

11.9

Video/RGB Setting

Setting the video display and RGB display (Applicable to only GT1585V- S and GT1575V-S)

11.12

Backup/ restoration setting

Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings, and setting the maximum number of backup data

11.13

Setting the trigger backup 11.14

Behavior of duplicate IPs

Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards.

11.15

Time setting & display

Selecting a base clock

12Displaying and setting the clock current time

Displaying the battery status

9 - 2 9.2 Utility Function List

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(Continued to next page)

Item Functions overview Reference

Program/ data control

OS information Installing or uploading OS, displaying OS property, checking OS data 13.2

Project Information

Downloading/uploading/deleting/copying project files, displaying project file property, checking project file data

13.3

Alarm information

Deleting or copying alarm log files

13.4Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV/TXT format

Displaying graphs of alarm log files

Advanced Recipe information

Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format CSV/TXT format Deleting/copying/moving advanced recipe files, creating a new advanced recipe file Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders, changing advanced recipe folder names, creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing/reading/matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list

13.7

Logging information

Converting logging files in G1L format CSV/TXT format 13.8Deleting/copying/moving logging files, changing logging file names

Deleting logging folders, creating a new logging folder

Operation log information

Converting operation log files in G1O format CSV/TXT format

13.11Deleting/copying/moving operation log files, changing operation log file names Deleting operation log folders, creating a new operation log folder

Hard copy information

Deleting/copying hard copy files, changing hard copy file names 13.5

Memory card format

Formatting memory cards 13.6

Memory Information

Displaying the available memory of the GOT 13.9

Special data information

Deleting or checking special data files Deleting special data folders Downloading special data stored in the A drive (Standard CF card) or B drive (Extended memory card) to the C drive (Built-in flash memory)

13.10

GOT data package acquisition

Copying the OS, special data, and project data to a memory card 13.12

9.2 Utility Function List

9 - 3

Item Functions overview Reference

Debug & self check

Debug

Ladder monitor.(Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

14.1

System monitor

A List editor

FX list editor

Intelligent module monitor (Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

Network monitor

Motion monitor for Q series motion controller CPU

Servo amplifier monitor

CNC monitor (Applicable to only GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, GT1585-S, GT1575V-S, and GT1575-S)

Backup/restoration

CNC data I/O (Applicable to only GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, GT1585-S, GT1575V-S, and GT1575-S)

SFC monitor(Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

Ladder editor (Inapplicable to GT1555-V, GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

Motion SFC monitor

Self check

Memory check 14.3

Drawing check 14.4

Font check 14.5

Touch panel check 14.6

I/O check 14.7

Network unit status display 14.8

System alarm display

Displaying or resetting GOT errors Displaying CPU errors and network errors

14.9

GOT start time Displaying the GOT start date and time, current time, and accumulated operating hours

14.10

Operator info. management

Adding/editing/deleting/importing/exporting operator information, changing passwords, Setting the automatic logout time, password expiration date and external authentication ID

14.11

Fingerprint authentication

Adding/deleting fingerprint informatioin 14.12

Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display 15.

Maintenance timing setting Setting the maintenance notification times for the backlight and display Setting the number of maintenance notifications for touch keys and the built-in flash memory

16.

Addition times reset Resetting accumulated hours and counts for maintenance time notifications

17.

9 - 4 9.2 Utility Function List

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

9.3 Utility Display To display setting screens fot each utility, the main menu has to be displayed first.

(1) Main menu The menu items that can be set at the GOT utility are displayed. Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item. In this manual, with a few special exceptions, explanations are given primarily using the GT1575-V screens.

(2) System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility or system alarms.

When touching the button, the Select Language screen is displayed.

1 Touch the button of a language to be displayed and then button, and the language is selected. *1 (The mark moves.)

(1)

(2)

Language

OK

9.3 Utility Display

9 - 5

2 Touching the button restarts the GOT and the language on the utility is switched to the selected one.

*1: Only selectable languages are displayed. The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT. For details of the fonts, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters)

When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and the installed fonts are not matched

The following screen will be displayed. Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is switched to the selected one.

Remark System language switching using the device

The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designer3. For the setting method of the system language switching device, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.3 Language Switching Device Setting)

9 - 6 9.3 Utility Display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

9.3.1 Display operation of main menu

The following three types of operation can display the main menu. (Display the main menu after installing the basic OS from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to the GOT built in flash memory.)

(1) When project data is undownloaded If the power supply of GOT turns ON, the main menu is displayed automatically after title display.

(2) When touching menu call key If you touch the menu call key while user-created screen is displayed, the main menu is displayed. The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility, GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. (The menu call key is set in the position as described below at factory shipment.)

Model name Default setting at factory shipment

GT1595 1-point press on the GOT screen upper left corner

GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155 Simultaneous 2-point presses on the GOT screen upper- right and left corners

GOT power supply ON

Main menu

Main menu

Menu call key

Simultaneous 2-point touch

Menu call key

1-point touch on the upper-left corner

9.3 Utility Display 9.3.1 Display operation of main menu

9 - 7

(1) Prohibited simultaneous 2-point presses on the GT1595-X In the case of using a GT1595-X, do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously. Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point.

(2) When setting menu call key to 1-point When having set [Pressing time] of the menu call key setting screen to other than "0 (s)", keep pressing the touch panel for the period set to [Pressing time] or more before leaving the finger from the touch panel. For menu call key setting, refer to the following.

11.5 Utility Call Key Setting

(3) When touching special function switch (utility) If you touch the special function switch (utility) while user-created screen is displayed, the main menu is displayed. The special function switch (utility) can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user-created screen by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

For the details of the special function switch, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (2.7 Setting Special Function Switch)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (6.2.5 Setting items of special function switch)

Main menu

Special function switch

(Utility)

9 - 8 9.3 Utility Display 9.3.1 Display operation of main menu

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

Remark Locking the utility display by password

When you try to display the utility main menu while the password is set to the GOT by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2, the display for password input will be appeared. (The password setting of GT Designer3 is in the common menu. The password setting of GT Designer2 is in the common menu.)

When the password is not matched, displays the error message.

When touching , the screen returns to the monitor screen.

(1) Input operation of password

1)Input the password after touching to , to key.

2)Define the password by touching key, after password input.

3)To correct the input character, touch key to delete the correcting character and reinput/retype the new character.

(2) Password input cancel operation

When button is touched, it returns to the monitor screen.

Refer to the following for the details related to the password setting. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

OK

0 9 A F

Enter

Del

9.3 Utility Display 9.3.1 Display operation of main menu

9 - 9

9.3.2 Utility basic configuration

The basic configuration of utility is as follows.

(1) Title display The screen title name is displayed in title display part. As the screen is composed of multiple layers, the title including these layers is displayed.

(2) Close/Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed, if the (Close/return) button in the right corner of screen is touched, returns to the previous screen. If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen, the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen.

(3) Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page, there is a right or down scroll button on the screen.

Scroll one line/column

Scroll window

Title display Close/Return button

Scroll key

Screen

Title display

Title display

9 - 10 9.3 Utility Display 9.3.2 Utility basic configuration

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

9.3.3 Basic operation of settings change

1 Change of setting value

1 Touch the select button (setting point) on the screen. According to the setting item, the button requires selecting setting value, inputting value or displaying other setting screen.

In the above mentioned screen example, there is no setting item which displays the keyboard. For the operation of keyboard refer to the next page.

Touching confirms the numerical input. When the setting range exists it repeats the numerical without displaying keyboard.

Key: It shifts to the setting screen of each setting item when touched. (Displays the another setting screen.)

2 Setting contents are reflected if button is touched.

Key : It is a key for selecting the setting value. Repeats with each touch .

Key : It is a key for inputting the numerical value. It displays the keyboard on the bottom of the screen when touched.

Setting item Select button

Setting item Select button

ON ON OFF

Numerical

Enter

4800bps 9600bps 19200bpsExample:

Setting...

OK

9.3 Utility Display 9.3.3 Basic operation of settings change

9 - 11

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialogue mentioned below is displayed.

2 Keyboard operation

1 Touch the numerical value to be changed.

2 Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously. The key board display position chanegs by the position of numerical value touched. (At the time of numerical input, displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting.)

3 Input numeric with keyboard.

to Key : Input the numeric.

Key : Touching the key completes numeric input and closes the keyboard.

Key : Touching the key cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard.

Key : Moves the cursor to the right or left side. Available only if any selectable item is at the right/left side of the cursor.

Key : key is used when canceling the input by 1 character.

key and the key which is not mentioned do not function.

4 If key is touched, numeric input is completed and keyboard is closed. 5

OK

Keyboard

Cursor

0 9

Enter Enter

Cancel Cancel

Del Del

Enter

9 - 12 9.3 Utility Display 9.3.3 Basic operation of settings change

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

10. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING (COMMUNICATION SETTING)

In the communication setting, the communication interface names and the related communication channel, communication driver names display and channel numbers are set. Moreover, in the communication detail settings, the communication interface details are set. (Communication parameters setting)

10.1 Communication Setting

10.1.1 Communication setting functions

Item Description Reference page

Communication setting The setting contents of the communication interface can be checked or changed.

10-1

Ethernet setting The contents of the Ethernet setting can be checked and the host can be changed.

10-19

Function Description

Channel-Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No. and communication driver name.

Channel no. (Ch No.) setting Set the channel numbers of the communication interface (Standard interface/ Extend interface).

Communication parameters setting

Set communication parameters of communication devices.

10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.1 Communication setting functions

10 - 1

10.1.2 Communication setting display operation

Communication setting

Main menu

Touch [Communication setting]

Communication setting

Touch [Communication setting]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

10 -

2 10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.2 Communication setting display operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

10.1.3 Communication setting contents

This section describes setting items and display contents for Communication Setting.

(1) Channel-Driver assign (a) Assignment of communication drivers to channels

Communication drivers installed in the GOT can be assigned to channels. Even without setting [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3 or [Communication Setting] on GT Designer2, communication with controller is available by assigning channel No. with this function.

( 10.1.4 Channel-Driver assign operation)

(b) Changing the assignment of communication drivers to channels Without using GT Designer3 or GT Designer2, the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed. (When change a communication driver, the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance.)

(2) Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in GT15 . There are the following 2 types. RS232...For communicating with PC (GT Designer3 or GT Designer2), controller USB.......For communicating with PC (GT Designer3 or GT Designer2)

(3) Extend interface display BOX The name of the unit installed in the extend interface is displayed. (Displays [None] when any unit is not mounted.) For details of each uint, refer to the following.

8.1 Communication Unit

(2)

(4)

(4)

(3)

(5) (5)

(5)

(1)(2)

GOT front face

USB interface (Standard interface)

GOT rear face

RS-232 interface (Standard interface)

Extend interface

10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.3 Communication setting contents

10 - 3

(4) Channel number specification menu BOX Set channel No. to use with standard interface or extend interface. Refer to this section (5) for driver that can be assigned to each channel.

Fixed to 9 for the USB interface. *1 The same device cannot be used for ChNo.5 to ChNo.8 simultaneously.

For restrictions on external devices, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used (1.1 Setting the Communication Interface)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.7 Communication Interface Setting (Communication Settings))

(5) Driver display BOX The name of communication driver assigned to the channels or the driver set with the Communication Setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is displayed. For details of drivers to be displayed, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used (1.1 Setting the Communication Interface)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.7 Communication Interface Setting (Communication Settings))

Display [None] in the driver display BOX in case of the followings. The communication driver is not installed. ( 13.2 OS Information)

In channel number specification menu BOX, [0] is set. The communication unit type and the communication driver are mutually not corresponding at

the extend interface side. When the channel number for the standard I/F-1 is set to [9], the communication driver [Host (PC)] or [Host (Modem)] can be selected. When the channel number for the standard I/F-2 is set to [9], the communication driver [Host (PC)] is automatically assigned. For how to set the communication driver, refer to the following.

10.1.4 Setting of Host (PC)/Host (Modem)

0 : Set when the communication interface is not used. 1 to 4 : Set when connecting to a controller.

(Except bar code reader and RFID controller) 5 to 7*1 : Set when connecting to a barcode reader, an RFID controller or a PC.

Only extend I/F setting is possible. 8*1 : Set when connecting to a fingerprint unit, a barcode reader, an RFID controller or a

PC. Only standard I/F setting is possible.

9 : Set when connecting with PC (GT Designer3 or GT Designer2). (For USB and RS- 232 interface, the simultaneous setting is possible. However, when either interface is during communication, communication is not possible for another interface.)

* : Set "*" when using the gateway function (when connection types except the Ethernet connection is used for connecting to controllers), Ethernet download function, printer, video display, RGB display, RGB output, CF card unit, CF card extension unit, sound output, or external I/O.

10 - 4 10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.3 Communication setting contents

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

Precautions for communications between GOT and controller

(1) Installing communication driver and downloading Communication Setting The followings below are required for the communication interface to communicate with the controller.

Refer to the following for details.

(2) When Communication Setting has not been downloaded. The GOT automatically assigns the installed communication driver in the order of 1 to 4 as follows.(Only the extend interface is assigned automatically.)

1) ChNo.1, Communication driver installed at 1st 2) ChNo.2, Communication driver installed at 2nd 3) ChNo.3, Communication driver installed at 3rd 4) ChNo.4, Communication driver installed at 4th (a) After communication driver is assigned automatically.

When saving the settings to the GOT with button after the automatic assignment of communication driver, automatic assignment will not be performed at the next time and after.

1) Installing communication drivers (Up to 4 communication drivers) 2) Assigning the channel number and communication driver for the

communication interface 3) Downloading the contents (project data) assigned in 2). Perform1), 2), 3) by GT Designer3 or GT designer2.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used (1.1 Setting the Communication Interface)

GT Designer2Version Screen Design Manual (3.7 Communication Interface Setting (Communication Settings))

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7.3.7 Reading project data)

GT Designer2Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8.3.1 Downloading project data [PC to GOT])

1)

3)

2)

4)

OK

10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.3 Communication setting contents

10 - 5

(b) Priority against [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 or [Communication Settings] of GT Designer2

If download the communication settings to the GOT with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 after the automatic assignment, the GOT will operate with the communication settings of the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. (The GOT operates with the latest communication settings.)

(3) When the communication driver does not match with the unit that is installed in the GOT An error is displayed on the GOT when displaying [Communication setting]. If an error is displayed, confirm the combination of the communication driver and communication unit. Refer to the following manual for the combination.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used (System Configuration in each chapter) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2 (System Configuration in each chapter)

10 - 6 10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.3 Communication setting contents

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

10.1.4 Communication setting display operation

1 Channel-Driver assign operation The following describes how to operate the Channel-Driver assign. The example of changing to direct CPU connection (Communication driver: "A/QnA/L/QCPU, L/ QJ71C24") for the GOT of computer link connection (Communication driver: [AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*]) is used.

Before the operation

The GOT automatically restarts after executing this setting. If project data has been downloaded, the GOT starts monitoring of the controller after restarting. Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety.

1 Install communication driver "A/QnA/L/ QCPU, L/QJ71C24" to GOT. (Download of [Communication Setting] from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is not required.) After installing communication driver, touch the button in [Communication Setting].

2 Touch the button on the dislayed screen as shown left.

(Continued to next page)

Channel Driver assign

Change assignment

10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation

10 - 7

3 As the communication driver ([A/QnA/L/ QCPU, L/QJ71C24]) installed in the GOT is displayed, touch it.

4 The screen returns to the Channel-Driver assign screen. Touch the button.

5 Touch the button and return to the Communication Setting screen.

6 Confirm that the selected communication driver ([A/QnA/L/QCPU, L/QJ71C24]) is assigned.

7 After the confirmation, touch the button.

8 Touch the button to restart GOT. 9

OK

OK

10 - 8 10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Channel number setting operation

1 Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set.

2 The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed. Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed.

3 Input the channel number from the keyboard and touch key, and the value is defined. Simultaneously, the name of the communication driver corresponding to the channel number assigned by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is displayed in the driver display BOX.

keyboard

Enter

10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation

10 - 9

3 Communication detail settings switching operation

1 If you touch the driver display BOX, the screen switches to the detailed setting screen of the related controller device. ( 10.2 Communication Detail Settings)

4 5V power supply setting operation When connecting a controller to the RS-232 interface, whether to supply 5VDC power or not to the controller through 9 pins can be selected. Thus, it is not necessary to connect an external power supply. When setting the RS-232 interface to "9" (Host (PC)), the 5V supply is automatically changed to [NO].

1 Touch [5V supply].

2 Select and define whether 5V power supply is supplied or not.

10 - 10 10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 After setting completion, [ ] is displayed indicating that 5V power supplying setting is on.

10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation

10 - 11

5 Setting of Host (PC)/Host (Modem) The following describes how to set the [Host (PC)] and [Host (Modem)]. When setting [Host (PC)] for [PC connection type], the following settings are not required. Set as follows only when selecting [Host (Modem)].

*1 The maximum number of characters of the AT command depends on the specifications of the modem. When the maximum number of characters of the AT command which can be used for a modem is less than 255,

the initialize command is set according to the specifications of the modem.

Item Description Setting range

PC connection type Connecting method to the PC can be selected. Host (PC)/Host (Modem)

Transmission Speed Set the transmission speed for communication. 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200

Data Bit Set the data bit for communication. 7/8

Stop Bit Set the stop bit for communication. 1/2

Parity Set whether to check the parity for communication and select the format to check.

Odd/Even/None

Timeout Time(SEC.) Displays the timeout time (sec.) for communication.

Retry(TIMES) Displays the number of retry (times) for communication.

Init. AT command Set the AT command to initialize the modem. English one byte characters within 255

characters*1

Modem operation Touch the [Init.] button to initialize the modem. Touch the [Disc.] button to disconnect the line.

-

10 - 12 10.1 Communication Setting 10.1.4 Communication setting display operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

10.2 Communication Detail Settings

10.2.1 Communication detail settings functions

10.2.2 Communication detail settings display operation

1 Touch the driver display BOX of the communication parameter to be set in the communication setting screen.

Function Description

Communication parameters setting

Set various communication parameters of communication devices. The settable parameters differ according to the communication device.

Keyword setting For the FX series PLCs, key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set.

Key word deleting For the FX series PLCs, key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted.

Key word protection cancel

For the FX series PLCs, the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled.

Keyword protection For the FX series PLCs, the cancelled program protection status in the PLC can be returned to the protection status again.

10.2 Communication Detail Settings 10.2.1 Communication detail settings functions

10 - 13

2 The screen switches to the communication detail setting screen. Set communication parameters from this screen. Refer to the following for the setting change operation.

9.3.3 Basic operation of settings change

Communication parameter setting by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2

Set the communication parameters for each communication driver at [Communication Settings] in [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 or in [System Environment] of GT Designer2. When change the communication parameters after downloading project data, change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.7 Communication Interface Setting (Communication setting))

Communication parameter

10 - 14 10.2 Communication Detail Settings 10.2.2 Communication detail settings display operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

10.2.3 Display contents of communication detail settings

The contents of Communication Detail Settings varies according to driver type.

This section explains setting items different from the communication detail settings of the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. For setting items other than described in this section, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.7 Communication Interface Setting (Communication Settings))

10.2 Communication Detail Settings 10.2.3 Display contents of communication detail settings

10 - 15

1 Key word registration, deletion and protection delete MELSEC-FX

(1) Registration Register key words.

1 Touching the key pop-up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword.

2 Input a keyword and touch the key, and the registration completes. Up to 8 characters can be set for keyword with using A to F and 0 to 9.

*1 [Registration condition]

The access restriction can be selected from [Read/Write Protect], [Write Protect], and [All Protect]. For access restriction on each setting, refer to the following manual.

The User's Manual of the FX series PLC you are using

PLC connected Setting

When registering keyword and 2nd keyword When registering keyword only

FX CPU compatible with 2nd keyword

[Registration condition]*1 can be selected.

[Registration condition]*1 cannot be selected. FX CPU not compatible with 2nd keyword

Regist

Enter

10 - 16 10.2 Communication Detail Settings 10.2.3 Display contents of communication detail settings

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(1) How to select a keyword protection level For equipments that are allowed to operate the FX PLC on line, 3 levels of protection level can be set. When performing monitoring or changing settings with any on-line equipment is required, set password with referring to the following.

(a) When setting keyword only

Select a protection level by the initial letter of keyword. All operation protect: Set a keyword with initial letter of "A", "D" to "F", or "0" to "9". Read/Incorrect write protection : Set a keyword with initial letter of "B". Incorrect write protect: Set a keyword with initial letter of "C".

(b) When setting keyword and 2nd keyword

Select a protection level by [Registration condition]. (2) Monitoring availability at each keyword protection level

Device monitoring availability at each keyword protection level is shown in the following.

(3) Difference between all online operations prohibition and all operations prohibition When specifying All online operations prohibited, displaying devices and inputting data with a programming tool or GOT are all prohibited. When all operations are prohibited, displaying devices and inputting data with the GOT are enabled while all operations using a programming tool are prohibited.

Item

When registering keyword only When registering keyword and 2nd

keyword Keyword

not registered

or protection cancelled

All operation

protect

Read/ Incorrect

write protection

Incorrect write

protect

All on-line operation

protect

Read/ write

protect

Write protect

Monitoring devices

Changing devices

T, C set value and

file register (D1000 and

the following)

Other than the above

10.2 Communication Detail Settings 10.2.3 Display contents of communication detail settings

10 - 17

(2) Deletion Delete a registered keyword.

1 Touching the key pop-up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword.

2 Input a key word and touch the key, and the keyword is deleted.

(3) Protection delete Delete the protection by key word in order to access to a FX PLC to which a key word is registered.

1 Touching the key pop-up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword.

2 Input a keyword and touch the key to delete the protection.

(4) Protection Reset the keyword in which protection has been deleted to the protection status.

1 Touch the key, and the keyword goes to a protected status.

PLC connected Setting

FX CPU compatible with 2nd keyword

Input a keyword to delete.

FX CPU not compatible with 2nd keyword

Input the keyword to delete only into the keyword. The 2nd keyword will be ignored.

PLC connected Setting

FX CPU compatible with 2nd keyword

Input a keyword to delete the protection.

FX CPU not compatible with 2nd keyword

Input a keyword to delete only into the keyword. The 2nd keyword will be ignored.

Regist

Enter

Clear

Enter

Protect

10 - 18 10.2 Communication Detail Settings 10.2.3 Display contents of communication detail settings

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

10.3 Ethernet Setting

10.3.1 Ethernet setting function

The contents of the Ethernet set in GT Designer3 can be checked. The setting of the host station can be changed. For the Ethernet setting, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used

10.3.2 Display operation of Ethernet setting

Ethernet setting

Main menu

Touch [Communication setting]

Communication setting

Touch [Ethernet setting]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

10.3 Ethernet Setting 10.3.1 Ethernet setting function

10 - 19

10.3.3 Display contents of Ethernet setting

The following describes the setting items and the display contents of the Ethernet setting.

(1) Ethernet setting tab [*] is displayed when the setting is changed.

(2) Ethernet setting items The contents of the Ethernet setting configured in GT Designer3 are displayed. Only [Host], [NW No.] and [PC No.] are displayed for GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q. The setting of the host station can be changed.

Change of host

(3) Restore default settings If touch this button, the change of the setting is canceled and the setting returns to the status when the project data was written.

(1) How to cancel the change of the setting in the [Ethernet setting] screen. Cancel the settings changed in the [Ethernet setting] screen with the [Restore default settings] button. The changed settings remain until they are canceled with the [Restore default settings] button. The changed settings are not canceled even if writing the project data or OS to the GOT. When the project data is written to the GOT without canceling the changed settings, those changed settings are reflected to the Ethernet setting of the written project data. (If the written project data does not have a channel with same Ethernet settings as that of the channel changed in [Ethernet setting] screen, the changed settings are not reflected.)

1)

3)

2)

10 - 20 10.3 Ethernet Setting 10.3.3 Display contents of Ethernet setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(2) Range where the settings changed in the [Ethernet setting] screen are reflected The settings changed in the [Ethernet setting] screen are valid in the GOT. On the other hand, they are not overwritten to the project data written to the GOT. The changed settings are not reflected to the project data which is read from the GOT after changing the settings. If the GOT data is copied with the GOT data package acquisition, the change in the [Ethernet setting] screen is reflected to the copied data.

1 Change of host

1 Touch the device to be set as the host.

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 Touch the button to restart GOT and to reflect the setting contents.

OK

OK

10.3 Ethernet Setting 10.3.3 Display contents of Ethernet setting

10 - 21

11. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS (GOT SET UP)

Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from GOT setup. In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation, the following settings can be set.

Item Description Reference page

Display

Opening screen time, screen save time, screen save backlight, language, battery alarm display, Invert Color, human sensor, sensor detect level, sensor detect time, sensor off delay

11-2

Brightness 11-12

Operation

Buzzer volume, window move buzzer volume, Key sensitivity, Key reaction speed, Touch detection mode

11-14

Security setting 11-18

Utility call key 11-20

Touch panel calibration 11-23

SoftGOT-GOT link function 11-26

Q/L/QnA ladder monitor

Data save location 11-31

Transparent mode Ch No. 11-34

Video/RGB Setting

Video unit, video display, RGB display 11-36

Backup/ restoration setting

Setting the storage locations for backup data and backup settings, and setting the maximum number of backup data

11-44

Setting the trigger backup 11-48

Behavior of duplicate IPs

GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards.

11-51

11 - 1

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.1 Display Settings

11.1.1 Display setting functions

Setting regarding display is possible. The items which can be set are shown below. When each item part is touched, the respective setting becomes possible.

Items Description Setting range

Opening screen time The title display period at the main unit boot can be set.

0 to 60 seconds *1

Screen save time The period from the user stops the touch panel operation till the screen save function starts can be set.

0 to 60 minutes

Screen save backlight Whether turn ON or OFF the backlight simultaneously at the screen save function start can be specified.

ON/OFF

Language*3

Confirmation of the current language and switching language can be performed regarding with the language displayed by utility and dialogue.

(Japanese)

(English)

(Chinese (Simplified))

(Chinese (Traditional))

(Korean)

(German)

Battery alarm display Whether to display system alarm when the voltage of the GOT internal battery has dropped can be specified.

Brightness, Contrast The brightness can be adjusted.

11.2 Brightness, Contrast Adjustment

Invert Colors Whether to invert white and black on the user- created screen and utility screen can be specified.

ON/OFF

Human sensor

Screen saver status cancel by human sensor can be set to Effective or Invalid.

Effective/Invalid

Sensor detect level *2

The sensor detect level can be set.

0 to 10

11.1 Display Settings 11.1.1 Display setting functions

11 - 2

*1: If setting 0, the title screen is not hidden. The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer (which changes depending on the project data contents).

*2: The monitoring time corresponding to the sensor detect level (0 to 10) is as follows. As the sensor detect level becomes greater, the sensitivity of the human sensor becomes higher.

*3: Only selectable languages are displayed. The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT. For details of the fonts, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters)

(1) Display setting by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Set title display period, screen save time and screen save backlight at [GOT set up] in [Environmental Setting] of GT Designer3 or in [System Environment] of GT Designer2. When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data, change the setting by [Display] screen of the GOT.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.8 Setting of the GOT display and operation (GOT setup) )

(2) Screen save time Using the system information function can compulsorily switch the controller to the screen saving status (Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal) or disable the screen save time (Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal) set with Utility.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.6 System Information Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.6 Setting System Information)

Sensor detect time *2

The time corresponding to the [Sensor detect level] is displayed. (setting is disabled) When the [Sensor detect level] is changed, the corresponding time is reflected by touching

button.

0 to 4

Sensor off delay

The time period from when the human sensor detects no human movement until the Human Sensor Detection Signal (System Signal 2-1.b5) turns OFF can be set.

0Min 10Sec to 60Min 0Sec

10Sec>

Sensor detect level 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sensor detect time [s] 0 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.8 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4

Items Description Setting range

Enter

11 - 3 11.1 Display Settings 11.1.1 Display setting functions

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(3) Screen save backlight When [Screen save backlight] is set to [ON], using the system information function (Backlight OFF output signal) can switch the backlight OFF from the controller. When [Screen save backlight] is set to [OFF], the above signal has no effect on the screen save backlight.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.6 System Information Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.6 Setting System Information)

(4) Display control by human sensor (Specific to GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, GT1585-S) The human sensor is a function that releases the GOT from the screen saving mode without the necessity to touch the GOT. This function releases the GOT from the screen saving mode when the operator has come closer to the GOT.

Refer to the following manual for the Human Sensor Detection Signal (System Signal 2-1.b5).

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.6 System Information Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.6 Setting System Information)

(5) When setting the human sensor to invalid (Specific to GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, GT1585-S) Even if setting the human sensor to invalid by the utility, the Human Sensor Detection Signal (System Signal 2-1.b5) turns ON when the human sensor detects human movement. Unintended operation may result, therefore, if controlling the Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal (System Signal 1-1.b1) and Human Sensor Detection Signal associating them with each other by a sequence program, etc. When setting the human sensor to invalid, review the related sequence program, etc.

When there is no operator around the GOT for the time set as "Sensor OFF delay", the "Human Sensor Detection Signal" turns OFF. When the time set as the "Screen save time" elapses after the "Human Sensor Detection Signal" turns OFF, the GOT enters the screen saving mode.

ON OFF

Operator motion [Sensor detect level]

Human Sensor Detection Signal [System Signal 2-1.b5]

Approach Go away Approach Go away

[Sensor off delay]

Screen saving

Screen saving mode released Screen saving mode active

[Screen save time]

[Sensor off delay]

[Sensor detect time]

11.1 Display Settings 11.1.1 Display setting functions

11 - 4

11.1.2 Display operation of display setting

Restart after setting change

If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the button after the setting of each item is changed and touch the button on the GOT setup screen, the GOT will restart. After GOT restarts, it is displayed with the changed settings. If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above, the setting contents are canceled without reflected.

GOT setup

Display

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main menu

Touch an item to

change settings

Touch

[Display]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

If touch , the GOT restarts

and the changes are reflected.

11 -

5 11.1 Display Settings 11.1.2 Display operation of display setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.1.3 Display setting operations

1 Opening screen, screen save time

1 If touching the setting (numerical), keyboard is displayed. Input numeric with the keyboard.

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

OK

OK

11.1 Display Settings 11.1.3 Display setting operations

11 - 6

2 Screen save backlight, battery alarm display

1 Setting item is changed if setting item is touched. (ON OFF)

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is

displayed.

4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

OK

OK

11 - 7 11.1 Display Settings 11.1.3 Display setting operations

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 Language

1 Touch the setting item to display the Select Language screen.

2 When touching the button of a desired language, the language is selected and the screen returns to the Display screen. *1

3 Touching the button determines the set contents. The displayed language will not be changed until is performed.

OK

11.1 Display Settings 11.1.3 Display setting operations

11 - 8

*1: Only selectable languages are displayed. The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT. For details of the fonts, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters)

4 Brightness, Contrast Refer to the following for brightness, contrast setting.

11.2 Brightness, Contrast Adjustment

5 Invert Colors

4 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

5 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

1 Touching each setting item changes its setting. (ON OFF)

2 Touching the button fixes the settings.

OK

OK

11 - 9 11.1 Display Settings 11.1.3 Display setting operations

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

6 Human sensor

3 Touching the button but not the button displays the left dialog box.

4 If closing the [GOT setup: Display] and [GOT setup] screens after setting all items to be changed with the button, the GOT restarts and reflects the setting.

1 Setting item is changed if setting item is touched. (Effective Invalid)

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

OK

OK

OK

11.1 Display Settings 11.1.3 Display setting operations

11 - 10

7 Sensor detect level, sensor off delay

1 If touching the setting (numerical), keyboard is displayed. Input numeric with the keyboard. To move the cursor, touch the or button.

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

OK

OK

11 - 11 11.1 Display Settings 11.1.3 Display setting operations

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.2 Brightness, Contrast Adjustment

11.2.1 Functions of the brightness, contrast

The brightness and contrast can be adjusted.

11.2.2 Display operation of brightness, contrast

Function Description

Brightness setting Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels. (4 levels for the GT1575- VN, GT1572-VN or GT1562-VN)

Contrast adjustment The display section contrast can be adjusted by 16 levels. (GT1555-QSBD, GT1550-QLBD)

GOT setup Display

Brightness, contrast adjustment

Touch / to

adjust the brightness.

Touch [Brightness,

contrast]

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main menu

+ -

Touch

[Display]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11.2 Brightness, Contrast Adjustment 11.2.1 Functions of the brightness, contrast

11 - 12

11.2.3 Operating the brightness, contrast

1 Brightness can be adjusted by touching , key of brightness adjustment.

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with button, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents. (When changing only [Brightness, contrast], the GOT does not restart.)

+ -

OK

OK

11 - 13 11.2 Brightness, Contrast Adjustment 11.2.3 Operating the brightness, contrast

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.3 Operation settings

11.3.1 Operation setting functions

Setting regarding GOT operation can be set. The items which can be set are described below. If touch the each item part, the respective setting becomes possible.

*1 Relation between the [Key sensitivity] setting and [Key reaction speed]

The larger the set value in [Key sensitivity] is, the shorter the time taken from touching the touch panel until the GOT responds becomes. E.g. decrease the value set for [Key sensitivity] when double-touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once. (Decrease the reaction speed.) The relation between the [Key sensitivity] setting and [Key reaction speed] is as follows.

Function Description Setting range

Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed. OFF/SHORT/LONG

Window move buzzer volume setting Whether turn ON/OFF buzzer when move window can be selected.

ON/OFF

Security setting screen change Security level change screen can be displayed.

11.4 Security Level Change

Utility call key screen change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed.

11.5 Utility Call Key Setting

Key sensitivity setting

The touch panel sensitivity when touching the GOT screen can be set. E.g. a setting can be changed when double-touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once. (For preventing chattering)

1 to 8 *1

Touch panel calibration

Touch panel reading error can be corrected.

11.6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position (Touch panel calibration Setting)

Touch detection mode

For the GT1595-X, whether to reduce incorrect inputs (responses of parts other than the touched part) when more than 2 points are touched simultaneously on the GOT or to prioritize response can be selected.

Continuous key input/ Avoid input error

SoftGOT-GOT link function setting

The authorization of the SoftGOT-GOT link function can be set, and the exclusive authorization can be obtained or released.

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting

[Key sensitivity] setting Quick response Slow response

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

[Key reaction speed] - 20ms- - 10ms 0ms

(Standard) + 10ms + 20ms + 40ms + 80ms + 120ms

11.3 Operation settings 11.3.1 Operation setting functions

11 - 14

Operation settings by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2

Set buzzer volume and window move buzzer volume by [GOT setup] in [Environmental Setting] of GT Designer3 or in [System Environment] of GT Designer2. When change a part of the setting, change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.8 Setting of the GOT display and operation (GOT setup))

11.3.2 Display operation of display setting

GOT setup

Operation settings

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main menu

Touch an item to

change settings

Touch

[Operation]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11 - 15

11.3 Operation settings 11.3.2 Display operation of display setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

Restart after setting change

If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the button after the setting of each item (excluding the security setting) is changed and touch the button on the GOT setup screen, the GOT will restart. After GOT restarts, it is displayed with the changed settings. If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above, the setting contents are canceled without reflected.

11.3.3 Setting operation of operation

1 Buzzer volume, window move buzzer, Touch detection mode

1 Setting items are changed if setting item is touched.

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

If touch , the GOT restarts

and the changes are reflected.

OK

11.3 Operation settings 11.3.3 Setting operation of operation

11 - 16

2 Security setting Refer to the following for the security setting operation

11.4 Security Level Change

3 Utility call key Refer to the following for the utility call key operation

11.5 Utility Call Key Setting

4 Key sensitivity setting

5 Touch panel adjustment Refer to the following for touch panel adjustment operation.

11.6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position (Touch panel calibration Setting)

6 SoftGOT-GOT link function setting Refer to the following for the SoftGOT-GOT link function setting operation.

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with button after completing the setting of all items to change, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

1 If touching the setting items, keyboard is displayed. Input numeric with the keyboard.

2 The key response speed corresponding to the [Key sensitivity] setting is displayed.

3 Touching the button determines the setting.

OK

OK

11 - 17 11.3 Operation settings 11.3.3 Setting operation of operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.4 Security Level Change

11.4.1 Security level change functions

Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch. To change the security level, input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.l

Restrictions on screen display

The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT. Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT.

11.4.2 Displaying the security level change

Security level setting................... GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.7 Security Setting)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (5.8 Security function)

Password setting......................... GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.7 Security Setting)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.5 Set Password)

GOT setup Operation settings

Security level changeSecurity setting

Touch

[Security level change]

Input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

Touch

[Security setting]

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main menu

Touch

[Operation]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11.4 Security Level Change 11.4.1 Security level change functions

11 - 18

11.4.3 Security level change operation

1 Password input operation

About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily

When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level, do not forget to return the security level to the original level.

1 By touching to , to key, the password of the changed security level is input.

2 When correcting the input character, touch key to delete the correcting character

and input the password again.

3 After inputting password, touch the key. When the password matches, the normal completion message is displayed. When the password does not match, an error message is displayed.

4 If button is touched it returns to the password input screen again.

5 If button is touched it returns to security setting screen.

0 9 A F

Del

Enter

OK

11 - 19 11.4 Security Level Change 11.4.3 Security level change operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.5 Utility Call Key Setting

11.5.1 Utility call key setting function

The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified. For the key position, 1 point/2 points/no specification can be set for 4 corners on the screen. (No specification can be set when GT Designer3 is used.) When specifying 1 point, a setting to switch the screen to the utility by keeping pressing the key position is available. This prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation.

The number of key positions that can be set differs depending on the GOT type.

Operation settings by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2

Set the utility call key at [GOT set up] in [Environmental Setting] of GT Designer3 or in [System Environment] of GT Designer2. When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data, change the setting by [Display] screen of the GOT.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.8 Setting of the GOT display and operation (GOT setup))

11.5.2 Utility call key display operation

Model name The number of settable key positions

GT1595 1 point, 0 point (no specification)

GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155 1 point, 2 points, 0 point (no specification)

GOT setup Operation settings

Menu call key

Touch [Utility call key]

Touch buttons to set for the menu call key

Touch [GOT setup]

Main menu

Touch [Operation]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11.5 Utility Call Key Setting 11.5.1 Utility call key setting function

11 - 20

11.5.3 Utility call key setting operation

1 Touch or displayed at the 4 corners of the setting screen. The button repeats with every touch. Set the corner to be specified as a key position to .

2 For the key position, up to 2 points can be specified.

3 When the key position is not specified, displaying the utility with the utility call key is not available.

4 When specifying 1 point, specify time for keeping pressing the key position to switch to the utility. Touch the time input area.

5 Touching the input area displays a keyboard. Input numerical value from the keyboard.

6 Touching button determines the setting.

7 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

8 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with button after completing the setting of all items to change, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

OK

OK

11 - 21 11.5 Utility Call Key Setting 11.5.3 Utility call key setting operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(1) When using GT1595-X For the key position, 1 point only can be specified.

(2) Specifying another key position when two have been already set

Change either key position from to before specifying.

You cannot select three at the same time.

Example: Changing the 2 points of the upper left and right corners to those of the upper left and lower left corners.

(3) When the utility call key is not specified The followings are the method for displaying the utility without using the utility call key. (a) Changing the project data in GT Designer3

1. Read the project data in GT Designer3. 2. Set either of the followings in GT Designer3.

3. Write the project data whose setting is changed to the GOT. (b) Operating the forced start-up of the utility with the GOT

The operation differs depending on the GOT to be used.

When restricting the display of the utility, set a password in GT Designer3. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.7 Security Setting)

Set the utility call key in the [Display/Operation] tab of the [Environmental Setting] dialog box.

Set a special function switch to display the utility at the user-created screen.

GOT Forced start-up of the utility

GT1595-X After powering on the GOT, press the S.MODE switch during [Booting] displayed on the upper left in the screen.

Other than above

Power on the GOT with touching the upper left of the GOT screen.

at the upper

.

Change at the lower

.

Change

right corner to left corner to

11.5 Utility Call Key Setting 11.5.3 Utility call key setting operation

11 - 22

11.6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position (Touch panel calibration Setting)

11.6.1 Touch panel calibration setting function

Touch panel reading error can be corrected. Normally the adjustment is not required, however, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, correct the position with this function.

11.6.2 Touch panel calibration setting display operation

Run Stop Run Stop

Before adjustment After adjustment

The [Run] will operate though you

intended to touch the [Stop] button. The [Stop] button can be touched

without fail.

GOT setup

Touch panel calibration

Operation settings

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main menu

Perform touch panel

adjustment

Touch

[Touch panel calibration]

Touch

[Operation]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11 -

23 11.6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position (Touch panel calibration Setting) 11.6.1 Touch panel calibration setting function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.6.3 Touch panel calibration operation

Touch the point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting.

1 Touch the point displayed on the upper left. Be sure to touch the center of the precisely.

2 Touch the point displayed on the upper right.

3 Touch the point displayed on the lower left.

11.6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position (Touch panel calibration Setting) 11.6.3 Touch panel calibration operation

11 - 24

4 Touch the point displayed on the lower right.

5 When the setting is completed, the message shown left is displayed. Touching the button returns to the previous screen.

OK

11 - 25 11.6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position (Touch panel calibration Setting) 11.6.3 Touch panel calibration operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting

11.7.1 SoftGOT-GOT link function

The authorization of the SoftGOT-GOT link function can be set, and the exclusive authorization can be obtained or released. Only the GOT can obtain the exclusive authorization. While the GOT has the exclusive authorization, GT SoftGOT1000 cannot obtain the authorization. For the details of the SoftGOT-GOT link function, refer to the following.

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Function Description Seting range

Exclusive authorization obtained state

The status whether or not the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization is displayed. Obtaining or releasing the exclusive authorization can be executed by the GOT.

Obtain/Release (At GOT startup: Release)

Authorization obtained time

The time length from the last operation of GT SoftGOT1000 after obtaining the authorization until the GOT automatically obtains the authorization can be set.

0 to 3600 seconds (At factory shipment: 60 seconds)

Operating priority guaranteed time

The time length for keeping the authorization obtained after the last operation of GT SoftGOT1000/ GOT with the obtained authorization can be set. (The unauthorized side cannot obtain the authorization until the set time is elapsed.)

0 to 3600 seconds (At factory shipment: 0 seconds)

Operation status popup notification

When the authorization is not obtained in GT SoftGOT1000/GOT, whether to display or not the information of the authorized side in pop-up can be set.

Yes/No

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting 11.7.1 SoftGOT-GOT link function

11 - 26

11.7.2 Displaying the SoftGOT-GOT link function setting

GOT setup Operation settings

SoftGOT-GOT link

Touch [SoftGOT-GOT link]

Touch [GOT setup]

Main menu

Touch [Operation]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11 - 27

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting 11.7.2 Displaying the SoftGOT-GOT link function setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.7.3 SoftGOT-GOT link function setting operation

1 Exclusive authorization obtained state

(1) Obtaining the exclusive authorization

(2) Releasing the exclusive authorization

2 Authorization obtained time

1 Touch the button to display the dialog box.

Touch the button to obtain the exclusive authorization.

Touch the button to stop obtaining the exclusive authorization.

1 Touch the button to display the dialog box.

Touch the button to release the exclusive authorization.

Touch the button to stop releasing the exclusive authorization.

1 Touch the authorization obtained time display area to display a keyboard. Enter the authorization obtained time with the keyboard. When setting to 0 second, the authorization is not automatically obtained by the GOT.

2 Touch the button to determine the setting.

1

Obtain

OK

Cancel

1

Release

OK

Cancel

1

OK

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting 11.7.3 SoftGOT-GOT link function setting operation

11 - 28

3 Operating priority guaranteed time

Relation between the authorization obtained time and the operating priority guaranteed time

When the followings are set, the authorization obtained time is prioritized. (After the authorization obtained time is elapsed, the GOT automatically obtains the authorization.)

1sec or more is set for the authorization obtained time. The authorization guarantee time is set longer than the authorization obtained

time.

3 If the button is touched before the button, the left dialog box appears.

4 Touch the button to return to the [Operation] screen

1 If touch the display area of the operating priority guaranteed time, a keyboard is displayed. Enter the operating priority guaranteed time with the keyboard.

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 Touching the button restarts GOT.

OK

1

OK

OK

11 - 29 11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting 11.7.3 SoftGOT-GOT link function setting operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Operation status popup notification

1 Setting items are changed if setting item is touched. (YES/NO)

2 Setting contents are defined if button is touched.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 If touch the button, the screen returns to the [Operation] screen.

1

OK

OK

11.7 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting 11.7.3 SoftGOT-GOT link function setting operation

11 - 30

11.8 Q/L/QnA Ladder Monitor

11.8.1 Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting function

Storage locations and others for data to be used for the ladder monitor function can be set. Saving the ladder data cuts out the need for reading the ladder data from PLC CPU at the next GOT start-up, enabling to start the ladder monitoring earlier. Refer to the following manual for details of the ladder monitoring function.

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

(1) Ladder data to be saved (a) The ladder data to be saved is used by the GOT to execute ladder

monitoring. The ladder data can be saved in the CF card with this function, however it cannot be copied in the PC to be referred/edited with GX Developer, etc. The name of the ladder data to be stored can be checked with the project information. For how to check the name of ladder data, refer to the following.

13.3.2 Display operation of project information

(b) The ladder data saved in the built-in flash memory and memory card (file name: CIRDAT) can be deleted by selecting [Project information] of [Program/Data control].

13.3.4 Operation of project information

(2) For the GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q This setting is not provided for these models since they do not support the MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor.

Function Description Setting range

Data save location Select the ladder data storage location of the Q/L/ QnA ladder monitor.

C: Flash Memory/B: Memory card/A: Built-in CF card/Not store

Automatic program read

Whether to automatically read sequence program when the ladder monitor starts from a touch switch or Advanced Alarm Display can be selected.

YES/NO

Priority comment

If both Common comment and Each program comment are set for the same device in a sequence program, select either of the comments to be displayed in the ladder monitor.

Common comment/Each program comment

Local device monitor

Select if monitoring local devices are executed or not when monitoring devices with the ladder monitor. (Applicable to only the MELSEC-Q series ladder monitor)

YES/NO

Drive for device comment

Select the drive to be used for reading comment data for the ladder monitor.

A:Built-in CF card/B:Memory card

Comment setting Select if the comment data used in the ladder monitor is displayed/hidden.

Hide comment/Display comment/32-char comment

Setting to save ladders

Select [Save a ladder program]/[Save ladder programs] for the save setting of ladder data to be used in the ladder monitor.

Save ladder programs/Save a ladder program

11 - 31 11.8 Q/L/QnA Ladder Monitor 11.8.1 Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.8.2 Display operation of Q/L/QnA ladder monitor

Restart after setting change

If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the button after the setting of each item is changed and touch the button on the GOT setup screen, the GOT will restart. After GOT restarts, it is displayed with the changed settings. If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above, the setting contents are canceled without reflected.

GOT setup

[Q/L/QnA ladder monitor]

Touch [GOT setup] Touch [Q/L/QnA ladder

monitor]

Main menu

Select the ladder data storage location of the Q/L/QnA ladder monitor.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

If touch , the GOT restarts

and the changes are reflected.

11.8 Q/L/QnA Ladder Monitor 11.8.2 Display operation of Q/L/QnA ladder monitor

11 - 32

11.8.3 Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting operation

1 Setting items are changed if setting item is touched.

2 By touching the button, the setting is reflected.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 Touching the button closes the [Q/L/ QnA ladder monitor] screen and the [GOT setup] screen. Then, the GOT restarts. After restarting, GOT operates with changed value.

OK

OK

11 - 33 11.8 Q/L/QnA Ladder Monitor 11.8.3 Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.9 Transparent Settings (Transparent Mode Setting)

11.9.1 Function of the transparent mode

When using the multi-channel function, the channel No. of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be specified. For the multi-channel function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (20 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.8 Multi-channel Function)

Also, refer to the following manual for the FA transparent function.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 (21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2 (53 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION)

11.9.2 Displaying the transparent mode

Function Description Setting range

ChNo. The channel No. of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be set.

When using other

than the GT155 1/2/3/4

When using the

GT155 1/2

GOT setupMain menu

Transparent made

Touch the channel No. display area of ChNo.

Touch [GOT setup] Touch

[Transparent made]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11.9 Transparent Settings (Transparent Mode Setting) 11.9.1 Function of the transparent mode

11 - 34

11.9.3 Operation the transparent mode

1

1 Touching the transparent ChNo. (numerical part) on the left, the keyboard is displayed. Input numerical value by the keyboard.

2 Touching the button reflects the selected setting.

3 Touching the button without touching the button displays the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with button after completing the setting of all items to change, GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents.

OK

OK

11 - 35 11.9 Transparent Settings (Transparent Mode Setting) 11.9.3 Operation the transparent mode

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.10 Video Unit Settings

11.10.1 Functions of the video unit settings

The video input signal and resolution can be selected.

*: Only when PAL is selected

Input signal settings

Set the input signal as follows according to the output format for the video camera or the like connected. If the settings made differ from these, video images may not be displayed correctly.

Item Description Setting range

Video Unit Settings The input signal and resolution can be selected.

Input signal: NTSC, PAL

Resolution: 640 480,

720 480*

Output format for video camera or the like Input signal setting

NTSC format NTSC

PAL format PAL

EIA format NTSC

CCIR format PAL

11.10 Video Unit Settings 11.10.1 Functions of the video unit settings

11 - 36

11.10.2 Displaying the video unit settings

GOT setup Video/RGB setting

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main Menu

Touch

[Video/RGB]

Communication setting

Video Unit Settings

Touch

[Video Unit Settings]

Touch an item to be set

Touch

[Video/RGB Setting]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

( 10.1 Communication Setting)

1

1 - 37 11.10 Video Unit Settings 11.10.2 Displaying the video unit settings

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.10.3 Operating the video unit settings

1 When you touch the setting item, the setting contents change. Input signal :PAL NTSC Resolution :720 480 640 480

2 When you touch the button, the setting contents are determined.

3 If you touch the button without touching the button, the dialog box on the left is displayed.

4 After completing the settings for all the items you want to change in [Video Unit Settings], when closing [Video Unit Settings] and [Video/RGB Setting]/ [Communication Setting] with the button, the GOT is restarted, and the new setting contents are reflected.

Confirm

Confirm

11.10 Video Unit Settings 11.10.3 Operating the video unit settings

11 - 38

11.11 Video Display Settings

11.11.1 Functions of the video display settings

The target for the video settings and the preview channel can be selected and the captive area and image quality can be set.

11.11.2 Displaying the video display settings

Item Description Setting range

Video Display Settings

The target for the video settings and the preview channel can be selected and the captive area (in the horizontal direction and vertical direction) and image quality (color tone, contrast, brightness, color intensity) can be set. The captive area and image quality can be set for each channel.

Channel 1/2/3/4 Captive area Horizontal: -100 to 100 Vertical: -100 to 100 Image Quality and Color Tone: -100 to 100 Contrast: -100 to 100 Brightness : -100 to 100 Intensity : -100 to 100

GOT setup Video/RGB Setting

Main Menu

Communication Settings

Video Display Settings

Touch

[GOT steup]

Touch [Video Display Settings]Touch

[Video/RGB Setting]

Touch [Video/RGB]

Touch an item to be set

( 9.3 Utility Display)

( 10.1 Communication Setting)

1

1
- 39 11.11 Video Display Settings 11.11.1 Functions of the video display settings

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.11.3 Operating the video display settings

1 Select a video channel No. to be displayed. The video image for the selected channel No. is previewed.

2 To change the captive area or image quality, touch the display section of each item.

Captive Area : Refer to to .

Image Quality : Refer to to .

3 The captive area (horizontal direction/ vertical direction) for the selected channel No. can be changed.

Touching returns to the default status.

4 When touching the button, the setting contents are determined.

5 If you touch the button without touching the button, the dialog box on the left is displayed.

6 After completing all the items to set, if you touch the button, the display returns to the preview screen .

7 10

Moves the captive area a certain distance in the direction.

Moves the captive area to the touched position.

Moves the captive area a certain distance in the direction.

Default

Confirm

Confirm

11.11 Video Display Settings 11.11.3 Operating the video display se

ttings

11 - 40

Precautions for setting

Incorrect settings may disrupt or stop the video image. (If this happens, returning the settings to their default values restores normal display. This phenomenon depends on the video camera or other device connected. Use setting values that provide proper display.

7 The image quality (color tone, contrast, brightness, color intensity) for the selected channel No. can be changed.

Touching returns to the default status. When touching , the image quality (color tone, contrast, brightness, color intensity) for the selected channel No. is matched with the image quality settings for Channel No. 1 ( ).

8 When touching the button, the setting contents are determined.

9 If you touch the button without touching the button, the dialog box on the left is displayed.

10 After completing all the items to set, if you touch the button, the display returns to the preview screen .

11 After completing the settings for all the items you want to change in the video display settings, when closing [Video Display (Preview)] with the button, the display returns to [Video/RGB Setting].

Changes the number a certain amount in the direction.

Changes the number to the touched position.

Changes the number a certain amount in the direction.

Default

Copy CH1

CH1

Confirm

Confirm

11 - 41 11.11 Video Display Settings 11.11.3 Operating the video display settings

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.12 RGB Display Settings

11.12.1 Functions of the RGB display settings

The RGB clock phase and screen position can be set.

11.12.2 Displaying the RGB display settings

Item Description Setting range

RGB Display Settings The RGB clock phase* and screen position (horizontal direction and vertical direction) can be set.

ClockPhase: -100 to 100 Display position Horizontal: -100 to 100 Vertical: -100 to 100

*: Adjust when a noise is displayed along the horizontal direction or characters are blotted or the contours are unclear.

GOT setup Video/RGB Setting

Main Menu

Communication Settings

RGB Display Settings

Touch

[GOT setup]

Touch

[Video/RGB Setting]

Touch

[RGB Display Settings]

Touch

[Video/RGB]

Touch an item to be set

( 9.3 Utility Display)

( 10.1 Communication Setting)

11.12 RGB Display Settings 11.12.1 Functions of the RGB display settings

11 - 42

11.12.3 Operating the RGB display settings

Precautions for setting

If the value for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] is too large, RGB display may not be performed or the display may be disrupted or stopped. If this happens, return the settings to their default values and make settings in the range where RGB display is possible.

1 The clock phase and screen display position (horizontal direction/vertical direction) can be changed.

2 When touching the button, the setting contents are determined.

3 If you touch the button without touching the button, the dialog box on the left is displayed.

4 After completing all the items to set, if you touch the button, the display returns to [Video/RGB Setting].

Changes the number a certain amount in the direction.

Changes the number to the touched position.

Changes the number a certain amount in the direction.

Confirm

Confirm

11 - 43 11.12 RGB Display Settings 11.12.3 Operating the RGB display settings

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.13 Backup/Restore Settings

11.13.1 Backup/restore function

The storage location for backup data can be set. For how to use the backup/restore function, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 (11 BACKUP/RESTORE) GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2 (11 Backup/restore)

Set the following items with touching the items on the GOT.

Function Description Setting range

Drive for backup setting The drive for storing backup settings, including parameters and passwords for controllers, can be selected.

A: Standard CF Card B: Memory card

Drive for backup data The drive for storing backup data can be selected.

A: Standard CF Card B: Memory card

Trigger backup setting

The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers (Rise, Time) specified for each backup setting are met.

None/Rise/Time

11.13 Trigger backup setting

Max. of backup data

Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored. (When 0 is specified, the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored.)

Setting range: 0 to 50

11.13 Backup/Restore Settings 11.13.1 Backup/restore function

11 - 44

11.13.2 Display operation of backup/restoration setting

GOT setup

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main menu

Backup/restoration setting

Touch an item to

change settings

Touch

[Backup/restoration setting].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11 - 45

11.13 Backup/Restore Settings 11.13.2 Display operation of backup/restoration setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.13.3 Backup/restoration setting operation

1 Drive for backup setting, drive for backup data

2 Trigger backup setting For operations of the trigger backup setting, refer to the following.

11.13 Trigger backup setting

1 Touch a setting item, and then the setting is changed.

2 Touch the button, and then the setting is reflected.

3 Touch the button without touching the button, and then the dialog box

shown left is displayed.

4 After all settings in the backup/restoration setting are completed, end the backup/ restoration setting and GOT setup with touching the button, and then the settings are reflected.

1

2

OK

OK

11.13 Backup/Restore Settings 11.13.3 Backup/restoration setting operation

11 - 46

3 Max. number of backup data

1 Touch the setting item, and then a keyboard appears. Input values with the keyboard.

Setting range: 0 to 50, Default: 10 (When 0 is specified, the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored.)

2 Touch the button, and then the setting is reflected.

3 Touch the button without touching the button, and then the dialog box

shown left is displayed.

4 After all settings in the backup/restoration setting are completed, end the backup/ restoration setting and GOT setup with touching the button, and then the settings are reflected.

1

2

OK

OK

11 - 47 11.13 Backup/Restore Settings 11.13.3 Backup/restoration setting operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.14 Trigger Backup Settings

11.14.1 Trigger backup settings

When the conditions of the trigger specified for each backup setting (Rise, Time) are met, the GOT automatically backs up data. How to use the trigger backup, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 (11 BACKUP/RESTORE) GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2 (11 Backup/restore)

11.14.2 Display operation of trigger backup setting

GOT setup

Touch [GOT setup]

Main menu Backup/restoration setting

Touch [Trig bkup setting]

Touch an item to change settings

Trigger backup settings

Touch [Backup/restoration setting].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

11.14 Trigger Backup Settings 11.14.1 Trigger backup settings

11 - 48

11.14.3 Trigger backup setting operation

1 Touch a setting item for the trigger type, and then the setting is changed.

2 Touch a setting item for check changes, and then the setting is changed.

3 When the trigger type is changed, a password input window appears by touching the button. Input the password for the backup/restore. When the password is verified, the settings are reflected, and then the screen returns to the trigger backup setting screen. When the trigger type is not changed, touching the button reflects the settings.

1 2

3

4

(None Rise Time)

None : The GOT does not execute the trigger backup.

Rise : The GOT backs up data when the trigger device turns on.

Time : The GOT backs up data at the specified time.

: Backup is executed regardless of whether the backup data has been changed.

: When the backup is executed, the GOT checks if the backup data and the data stored in the file register have been changed after the previous backup.When the data has been changed, the GOT backs up the changed data.

: When the backup is executed, the GOT checks if the backup data has been changed after the previous backup. When the data has been changed, the GOT backs up the changed data. However, the GOT does not check if the data stored in the file register has been changed.

OK

OK

11 - 49 11.14 Trigger Backup Settings 11.14.3 Trigger backup setting operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

Precautions for setting

When the trigger type is set to [Rise], set the trigger device with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 in advance. Failure to do so disables the backup setting with [Rise] set.

4 When the trigger type is set to [Time], touch a setting item for [Detail] and the screen is switched to the trigger time setting screen. In the screen, specify the days and time that the GOT executes the backup.

5 Touch the button without touching the button, and then the dialog box

shown left is displayed.

6 After all settings in the backup/restoration setting are completed, end the backup/ restoration setting and GOT setup with touching the button, and then the settings are reflected.

Day : Select days that the GOT executes the backup by touching displayed items. Multiple days can be selected.

Time : Set the time that the GOT executes the backup by touching the displayed item.

OK

11.14 Trigger Backup Se 11.14.3 Trigger backup s

ttings etting operation

11 - 50

11.15 Behavior of duplicate IPs

11.15.1 Setting function for Behavior of duplicate IPs

The GOT operation can be set when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards.

(1) For checking IP address duplication Use CoreOS with the version 05.10.00AG or later.

(2) When the IP address duplication is not checked (a) When the IP address of the GOT is set to 192.168.0.18, the IP address

duplication check is not performed.

(b) Depending on the device to connect with the GOT, the IP address duplication check may not be performed.

(3) When the GOT is added to the network in which a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT exists GOT goes into offline status and the following dialog box appears.

When correcting the same IP address of other device as that of GOT After correcting the same IP address of other device as that of GOT, touch the [Reboot GOT] button to restart the GOT.

When changing the IP address of GOT Touch the [Clear IP Address] button to clear the IP address of GOT. After touching the [Reboot GOT] button to restart the GOT, change the IP address of GOT by the utility.

Items Description Setting range

Behavoir when a device of the same IP address as the GOTs address joins the network

The GOT operation can be set when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards.

Maintain a network connection (rec)/Do not maintain a network connection

11 - 51 11.15 Behavior of duplicate IPs 11.15.1 Setting function for Behavior of duplicate IPs

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

11.15.2 Display operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs

11.15.3 Setting operation for Behavior of duplicate IPs

1 If touch the setup item, the setup contents is changed. Maintain a network connection (rec):

The GOT stays connected to the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards. A system alarm occurs.

Do not maintain a network connection: The GOT is disconnected from the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards.

2 If touch button, the setup contents is reflected.

GOT setup

Touch

[GOT setup]

Main menu

Behavior of duplicate IPs

Touch

[Behavior of duplicate IPs].

Touch an item to

change settings

( 9.3 Utility Display)

1

2

OK

11.15 Behavior of duplicate IPs 11.15.2 Display operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs

11 - 52

(1) Precautions for selecting [Do not maintain a network connection] When selecting [Do not maintain a network connection], the GOT is disconnected from the network at the addition of a device with the same IP address as the GOT. Therefore, there is a possibility that the running GOT cannot be communicated by IP address setting mistakes or intended actions by malicious users, and the system control may be influenced by those errors. Please change the setting of [Behavior of duplicate IPs] after carefully examining the necessity.

(2) Precautions for using a switching hub compatible with the spanning tree protocol For the switching hub port connected with the GOT, configure the setting (PortFast or others) that makes the GOT be ready for communications (forwarding state). The setting is required to make sure that the delay right after the connection by the spanning tree protocol does not occur. Without the setting, the Ethernet IP address duplication is not correctly detected. Additionally, the GOT may not be connected to Ethernet correctly. For the setting that makes the GOT be ready for communications (forwarding state), refer to the users manual for the switching hub used.

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog box mentioned left is displayed.

4 If touch button, GOT restarts. After restart, GOT operates with the changed settings.

OK

11 - 53 11.15 Behavior of duplicate IPs 11.15.3 Setting operation for Behavior of duplicate IPs

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

12. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY (TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY)

The clock display setting items and the time when displayed the setting screen are displayed. (While displaying clock and the seting screen, the display time does not change.) The voltage status of the built-in battery is also displayed.

12.1 Time Setting and Display

12.1.1 Time setting and display functions

Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built-in battery are possible.

Changing times

When the time is changed on the Time setting & display screen, the changed time is written in a programmable controller even though [Adjust] or [Broadcast] is set for [Clock setting]. As a result, the time of the programmable controller can be changed on the GOT even though [Adjust] is set for [Clock setting]. The clock data of the controller set as [Adjust CH No.] of [Clock data GOT is matched to clock data External (Adjust)] in [GOT Setup] ([Clock Setting]) of GT Designer3 or in [System Environment] ([Time setting]) of GT Designer2 is changed.)

For details of [Adjust] and [Broadcast], refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

Function Description Reference

page

Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock data of controller connected to the GOT.

12-3

Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data. 12-5

GOT internal battery voltage status

Displays GOT internal battery voltage status. 12-6

12.1 Time Setting and Display 12.1.1 Time setting and display functions

12 - 1

12.1.2 Display operation of clock display and setting

Time setting & display

Touch [Time setting &

display]

Main menu

Set the Clock settings

and Time settings

( 9.3 Utility Display)

12 -

2 12.1 Time Setting and Display 12.1.2 Display operation of clock display and setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

12.1.3 Operating the time setting & display

1 Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT data and the clock data of controller connected to the GOT.

Setting Description

Adjust

Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of controller.

It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designer2.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.9.2 How to match clock data between the GOT and controllers) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.5 Clock Function)

Broadcast

Adjust the time of controller clock data to the clock data of GOT.

It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designer2.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.9.2 How to match clock data between the GOT and controllers) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.5 Clock Function)

None No adjustment of clock data.

Adjust/Broadcast

Adjust the GOT and controllers to the controller whose clock data is used as a base.

It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designer2.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.9.2 How to match clock data between the GOT and controllers)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.5 Clock Function)

1 If touch the setup item, the setup contents is changed.

2 If touch button, the setup contents is reflected.

Adjust

Broadcast

Adjust/Broadcast

None

OK

12.1 Time Setting and Display 12.1.3 Operating the time setting & display

12 - 3

(1) When connecting to an external device which does not have clock function If set to [Adjust] or [Broadcast] for clock setting while the GOT is connected to external devices (PLC or microcomputers) which do not have clock function, the clock data will not be adjusted. Refer to the following for the list of PLC installed with clock function.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.5.3 PLC CPUs with clock function)

(2) Clock setting when using the multi-channel function The channel No. of a controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted cannot be set by the utility. The controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted can be set by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. For channel settings, refer to the following.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.5.1 Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU)

(3) Setting of clock setting and battery The battery is not installed in GOT at purchase. When select [Broadcast] or [None] in clock setting, set the clock of the GOT once with installing the optional battery to the GOT.

(4) Operation setting by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Carry out the setting of clock setting in [GOT set up] in [Environmental Setting] of GT Designer3 or in [System Environment] of GT Designer2. To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data, change the setting at the display setting of GOT.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.8 Setting of GOT Display and Operation (GOT Setup))

3 If touch button without touching button, the dialog mentioned left is

displayed.

4 If touch button, GOT restarts. After restart, GOT operates with the changed settings.

OK

12 - 4 12.1 Time Setting and Display 12.1.3 Operating the time setting & display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Clock display Carry out the display and seting of GOT clock data. The setup methods of clock data are shown below.

1 If touch the clock display section, the keyboard for input is displayed and the clock update stops.

2 Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below. Input the scheduled time when the operation of is to be carried out since the input time is reflected at the time of the operation of . The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date. The effective range of clock setting is as follows. Jan. 1. 2000 to Dec. 31, 2037

Key Description

to Input numeric value in cursor position.

/ Move the cursor.

Move the cursor to the left by one character when Key is touched while inputting year, month, day, time, minutes, seconds. Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above.

Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display. The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed.

The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of .

Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the keyboard. The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed.

The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of .

3 If touch button, the setting contents are reflected and the clock display update re-starts.

4 If touch button, the GOT restarts if the clock settings is changed, or the screen closes if clock settings is not changed. If touch button without touching

button, the dialog shown left is displayed and the changed contents are cancelled and the screen is closed.

0 9

Del

Del

Enter

Cancel

OK

OK

12.1 Time Setting and Display 12.1.3 Operating the time setting & display

12 - 5

3 GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status.

When the battery voltage is low, replace the battery immediately. Refer to the following for battery replacement procedure.

8.11 Battery

Display Status

Normal Normal

Low/None Low voltage

12 - 6 12.1 Time Setting and Display 12.1.3 Operating the time setting & display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL)

OS, project data (screen data) or alarm data which is written in the GOT or memory card can be displayed and data can be transferred between GOT and memory card. The format of the memory card is also possible.

13.1 Data Storage Location

13.1.1 Drive name allocation

For the GOT built in flash memory or standard CF card, the following drive names (A drive, B drive, C drive) are allocated.

Drive name Allocation

A drive Standard CF card

B drive Extended memory card

C drive Built in flash memory

13.1 Data Storage Location 13.1.1 Drive name allocation

13 - 1

13.1.2 Data type and the storage location

1 System The data storage location and transferring (write/read) route for each data type are shown below.

Upload

Upload

Install

Download

Write

Install

Download

PC

GT Designer3

or

GT Designer2

GOT main unit

(C drive)

(A drive, B drive)

Standard CF card

(when installed in GOT, CF card unit,

CF card extension unit)

Inserting/Removing

Standard CF card

(when installed in PC)

Built-in flash memory

BootOS

OS

Project

data

BootOS

OS

Project

data

BootOS

Project

data + OS

BootOS

OS

Project

data

Copy files on Windows

Project

data

Project

data

R

13 - 2 13.1 Data Storage Location 13.1.2 Data type and the storage location

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 At maintenance

The data of the build in flash memory (Project data, etc.) can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes low.

*1 When using the project data stored in the Standard CF Card (A drive) or extended memory card (B drive) with the GOT, hold the CF card installed to the GOT.

Item Data type Storage location

BootOS

Built in flash memory (C drive) Standard monitor OS

PLC communication driver

Extended function OS

Option OS

Project data (Including recipe setting, alarm conditions, time action, and GOT setup.)

Standard CF card (A drive)

Extended memory card (B drive) *1

Built-in flash memory (C drive) *1

Alarm data (Extended alarm log file and alarm log file)

Standard CF card (A drive) Recipe data (Advanced recipe file, Recipe file)

Logging (Logging file)

Image file (Hard copy function)

Copy files on Windows

Resource data

upload

PC

GT Designer3

or

GT Designer2

GOT main unit

(C drive)

(A drive, B drive)

Standard CF card

(when installed in GOT, CF card unit,

CF card extension unit)

Standard CF card

(when installed in PC)

Built-in flash memory

Alarm

Recipe

Hard copy

Alarm

Recipe

Alarm

Logging

Inserting/Removing

Copy

Alarm

Hard copy

Copy

Recipe

Alarm

Install, Download, Write :

Upload, Read :

Hard copy

Logging

Logging

Hard copy

Hard copy

R

BootOS

OS

Project

data

Alarm

Recipe

Logging

Hard copy

13.1 Data Storage Location 13.1.2 Data type and the storage location

13 - 3

13.1.3 OS version confirmation

Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and standard monitor OS. When OS is installed, GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically.

(1) When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version, GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installtion so that the older version may not be written. (Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version, the version information and the dialog for selecting continue/not continue will be displayed.) When installing from the standard CF card, the dialog is displayed by the main unit. When installing from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 via USB or RS-232, the dialog is displayed by the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

(2) When install standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS When standard monitor OS, communication driver, or option OS has already been installed, the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue/not continue will be displayed. Moreover, when the different versions will coexist amoung all OSs (standard monitor OS, communication driver, and option OS) by installing OS, the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled.

(3) When download project data GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS. When the versions are different, the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed. When downloading the project data from the memory card, storing the project data and OS beforehand is recommended.

The version of each OS installed in the GOT can be confirmed by [Property] of [OS information] screen.

Refer to the following for details of the screen display operation.

13.2 OS Information

Explanation of OS version

01.00.00A BootOS version

Appears only when the property

of the BootOS is displayed.

Minor version

Major version

13 - 4 13.1 Data Storage Location 13.1.3 OS version confirmation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate

Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating plate of GOT rear face.

13.1.4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location

When download the project data, confirm the capacity of the user area in the drive to which transferred, the transferred project data size, the transfer size and buffering area size of the optional function OS in advance to judge whether to carry out the download. The capacities can be confirmed by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. Refer to the following for details.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7.5.2 Drive capacity required for data transfer)

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8.1.2 Drive capacity required for data transfer)

MODEL

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL

SERIAL

GT1575-VTBA

00004701

BootOS version

(In case that the BootOS is two digits,

only the first digit is written.)

AA00001-A

IN 100V to 240V AC 50/60 Hz

POWER MAX 90VA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN

A A

BACKLIGHT GT15-70VLTT

13.1 Data Storage Location 13.1.4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location

13 - 5

13.1.5 Display file

The display screen and storage destination for each type of data are shown below. The file name and contents of each data can be displayed with property display of the utility.

*1 The user-created screen data, comment data, and font data are displayed as project data. *2 Each folder is created automatically when a file is installed, downloaded, or uploaded. *3 The folder names and file names can be set at [System Settings] in [System Environment] of GT Designer3 or

GT Designer2 .

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.1 GOT Type Setting)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.1 GOT/Controller Type Setting)

*4 A serial number is automatically added to file names.

Item Display screen Storage destination

(Drive name/folder name)

BootOS

OS information screen

A drive/B drive/C drive:\G1BOOT\*2

Standard monitor OS

Standard monitor OS system screen data

A drive/B drive/C drive:\G1SYS\*2

Standard monitor OS system screen management information file

Standard monitor OS (monitor function)

6 8-dot font (ASCII characters)

24-dot numerical HQ font

32-dot numerical HQ font

TrueType numerical font

12-dot standard font

16-dot standard font

Extended function OS

Option OS

Communication driver

Project data*1

Project information screen

A drive/B drive/C drive:\PROJECT1\*2*3

User-created screen data

Comment data

12-dot HQ fonts (Mincho/Gothic)

16-dot HQ fonts (Mincho/Gothic)

TrueType (Mincho/Gothic)

Resource data

Advanced alarm log file CSV file *4

Alarm information screen

A drive/B drive:\ With GT Designer3 or GT Designer2, any folder

name or file name can be specified.*2

Advanced alarm log file TXT file *4

Advanced alarm log file binary file *4

Alarm log file CSV file*4

Hard copy file BMP file*4 Hard copy information screenHard copy file JPG file*4

Advanced recipe file CSV file *4 Advanced recipe information screen

Advanced recipe file TXT file *4

Advanced recipe file binary file *4

Operation log file CSV file *4 Operation log information screen

Operation log file TXT file *4

Operation log file binary file *4

13 - 6 13.1 Data Storage Location 13.1.5 Display file

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.2 OS Information

13.2.1 Function of OS information

Each file name/folder name of BootOS and OS (Standard monitor OS, communication driver and optional function OS) by which each drive (A: Standard CF card, B: Extended memory card, C: Built-in flash memory) holds can be displayed in lists. Installation and uploading of the files are also possible.

(1) Precautions for installing OS Installing Boot OS and OS will delete project data in the GOT. After installing them, install or download necessary data again.

(2) Precautions for operating OS files When the OS boot drive is set to [A: Standard CF Card], installing and uploading OS files are not available.

Function Description Reference page

Information display of files and folders Displays the kind, name, data size, creation date and time of the file or folder. 13-9, 13-10

Install All OS files written in the A drive (Standard CF card) and B drive (Extended memory card) can be installed in the C drive (Built in flash memory).

13-11

Upload All OS files in the C drive (Built in flash memory) can be uploaded to the A drive (Standard CF card) and B drive (Extended memory card).

13-12

Property display Displays the property (file name, data size, type, version and creation date) of the file.

13-13

Data check Data check of files is possible. 13-14

13.2 OS Information 13.2.1 Function of OS information

13 - 7

13.2.2 Display operation of OS information

Touch

[Program/Data control]

Touch [OS

information]

Program/Data control

OS information

Main menu

Operate BootOS

and OS file.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 -

8 13.2 OS Information 13.2.2 Display operation of OS information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.2.3 Display example of OS information

Remark Displayed folders and files

For the folders and files displayed, refer to the following.

13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Select drive The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected. When the CF card is not installed, [A: Built-in CF Card] / [B: Memory card] are not displayed.

(2) Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder. In case of file, displays the extension; in case of folder, displays "DIR".

(3) Name

The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed. When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters, the exceeding characters (the 21th character or after) are not displayed.

(4) Path name The path name of the currently displayed drive/folder is displayed.

(5) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name.

(6) Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed.

(7) The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection.(Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive.)

(8) Operation switch Execution switch of each function.

(9) Number of folders and files

Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

(5) (6)

(7) (8) (9)

13.2 OS Information 13.2.3 Display example of OS information

13 - 9

13.2.4 Operation of OS information

1 Display operation of OS information

1 If touch a drive in [Select drive], the information of the first folder of the touched drive is displayed.

2 If touch a folder name, the information of the touched folder is displayed.

3 If touch a folder name of ". .", the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed.

4 If touch button of the scrollbar, the screen scrolls up/down by one line. If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

5 If touch a file name, the touched file name is selected and inverted.

6 Refer to the following for operation of installation, upload, property, data check.

Installation............... this section Upload..................... this section Property................... this section Data check.............. this section

7 Touching button closes the screen.

13 - 10 13.2 OS Information 13.2.4 Operation of OS information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Installation operation BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive (Standard CF card) or B drive (Extended memory card) can be installed in GOT. (This item explains using the A drive.)

1 Install the CF card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT. Refer to the following for inserting/ removing method of CF card.

8.8 CF Card

2 Touch [A: Built-in CF Card] for drive selection.

3 Touching button starts the install.

4 When the installation is completed, the dialog shown left is displayed.

GOT restarts if touch button.

Install

OK

13.2 OS Information 13.2.4 Operation of OS information

13 - 11

3 Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive (Built in flash memory) can be uploaded to the A drive (Standard CF card). The CF card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT.

18. INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS. (This item explains using the A drive.)

1 Install the CF card used as the uploading destination to GOT.Refer to the following for inserting/removing method of CF card.

8.8 CF Card

2 Touch [A: Built-in CF Card] of [Select drive].

3 Touching starts the uploading.

4 When the upload is completed, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touching closes the dialog.

Upload

OK

13 - 12 13.2 OS Information 13.2.4 Operation of OS information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Property display operation Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder.

1 If touch button after selecting the property displaying target folder, the Property display shown left is displayed. In Property display, the following information is displayed for each file selected by .

2 If touch button of the scrollbar, the screen scrolls up/down by one line. If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

3 Touching button returns the screen to the previous screen display.

Property

Item Description

Name Displays the file name.

Size Displays the file size.

Type

Displays the following items according to the file type. Boot: BootOS Basic: Standard monitor OS Extend: Extended function OS Option : Optional function OS Comm. : Communication driver

Version Displays the version of BootOS and OS.

Date and time

Displays the date and time of the file creation.

13.2 OS Information 13.2.4 Operation of OS information

13 - 13

5 Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file.

1 Touch button after selecting a data check target file. The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check.

2 Touching button closes the dialog.

Dialog at data check normal

Dialog at data check abnormal

Data check

OK

13 - 14 13.2 OS Information 13.2.4 Operation of OS information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.3 Project Information

13.3.1 Functions of the project information

The project data files stored in each drive (A: standard CF card, B: Extended memory card, C: built in flash memory) can be displayed by lists. In addition, the files can be downloaded, uploaded, deleted or copied, etc.

Precautions for operating project data

When the OS boot drive is set to [A: Standard CF Card], deleting, copying, downloading, setting up, and uploading project data are not available.

Function Description Reference page

Information display of files and folders Displays the kind, name, data size, the creation date and time of the file or folder. 13-17, 13-18

Delete Deletes project data. 13-39

Copy Copies project data. (can copy between the A drive and B drive or in each drive) 13-19

Property display Displays the project data creation date, author name and the version of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

13-13

Data check Data check of the file can be executed. 13-14

Download Downloads the project data written in the A drive (Standard CF card) / B drive (Extended memory card) to C drive (Built in flash memory).

13-23

Setup The project data to be displayed can be selected. 13-25

Upload Uploads the project data written in the C drive (Built in flash memory) to the A drive (Standard CF card) / B drive (Extended memory card).

13-26

Setup cancel Cancels the item which is selected for the project data to be displayed. 13-27

13.3 Project Information 13.3.1 Functions of the project information

13 - 15

13.3.2 Display operation of project information

Touch

[Project information] Touch

[Program/Data control]

Program/Data control

Project Information

Main menu

Operate Project data file.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 -

16 13.3 Project Information 13.3.2 Display operation of project information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.3.3 Display example of project information

Remark Displayed folders and files

For the folders and files displayed, refer to the following.

13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Select drive The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected. When the CF card is not connected, [A: Built-in CF card] and [B: Memory card] are not displayed.

(2) Name

The project data (Project Folder) in the selected drive is displayed. When the name exceeds 18 characters, the 19th and later characters are not displayed. The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by "*%".

(3) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed. (4) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name. (5) Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed.

(6) The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection. (Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive.)

(7) Operation switch Displays the execution switch of functions (download, upload, etc.) which can be carried out in [Project information].

(8) Number of folders and files

Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6) (7) (8)

13.3 Project Information 13.3.3 Display example of project information

13 - 17

13.3.4 Operation of project information

1 Display operation of project information

2 Delete operation This operation deletes the selected file.

1 Touch the drive in Select drive. The project data in that drive will be displayed.

2 Touch the project data. It is then selected and highlighted.

3 Refer to the following for operation of delete, copy, property, data check, download, upload.

Delete................ this section Copy.................. this section Property............. this section Data check ........ this section Download, setup

.......................... this section Upload, setup cancel

.......................... this section

4 Touching button closes the screen.

1 Touch and select the file to delete.

2 Screen mentioned left is displayed if button is touched.

Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified correctly. If touch button, the file is deleted. If touch button, the deletion is canceled.

3 When the deletion completes, the dialog box shown left is displayed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

Delete

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 18 13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 Copy operation Using the A drive and B drive, the following operations are possible.

Copying to another directory in the same drive Copying between A drive and B drive

Copy to/from C drive is disabled. (This item explains using the A drive.)

1 Install CF card in the PC, in which create a folder for the copy destination. Set the same character with [System Information] of [Environmental Setting] of GT Designer3 or with [System Setting] of [System Environment] of GT Designer2 for the folder name.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.1 GOT Type Setting)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.1 GOT/Controller Type Setting)

2 Install the CF card mentioned above to GOT. Refer to the following for inserting/ removing method of CF card.

8.4 Video/RGB Unit

3 Open [Project Information] screen to select the file to copy.

4 If touch button, the message [Please select a destination.] is displayed in the left bottom of the screen.

5 If the copy destination folder is touched, the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination. At this time, it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists. Select other folders.

Copy

13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

13 - 19

6 If touch button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

7 Touch button. If there is no file of the same name in the copy destination folder, starts to copy. When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder, the dialog mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy. If copy, in this case, the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder. If touch button, starts to copy. If touch button, cancels to copy.

8 When copying completes, the dialog of completion is displayed. If touch button, closes the dialog.

Next

OK

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 20 13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Property display operation Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder.

1 If touch button after selecting the project data to display the property, the property is displayed as shown left. In property display, the following information is displayed.

2 If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down line by one line.

3 If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

4 If touch button, the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen.

Property

Item Description

Date Displays the creation date of the file.

Author Displays the author of the project data.

Drawing S/W version

Displays name and version of the drawing software by which the project data is created.

13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

13 - 21

5 Data check operation Carrys out data check of the selected project file.

1 Touch the button after selecting the file for data check. The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left.

2 If touch button, the dialog is closed.

Dialog at data check normal

Dialog at data check abnormal

Data check

OK

13 - 22 13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

6 Download operation/setup operation (1) Download operation

Transfers the project data stored in the A drive (Standard CF Card) or B drive (Extended memory card) to the C drive (Built in flash memory). (The GOT monitors using the data in the C drive.) (This item explains using the A drive.)

Before download operation

(1) Setup cancel When the project data in the A drive or B drive is set up, the project data cannot be downloaded to the C drive. Execute setup cancel ( (2) Setup cancel) before downloading the project

data. (2) Project data to be stored in a CF card

When storing the project data from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to CF card, select [C: Built-in flash memory] for [Project Data] in the [Boot Drive].

1 Install a CF card in the GOT Refer to the following for inserting/ removing method of CF card.

8.4 Video/RGB Unit

2 Touch [A: Standard CF Card] in Select drive

(Continued to next page)

13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

13 - 23

3 If touch the button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

Touching the button executes downloading.

4 If any project data with the same name exists in the C drive, the screen shown left is displayed without starting downloading. In this case, the project data of the C drive is overwritten with the project data of the A drive when downloaded. Touching the button cancels the downloading.

5 When the downloading is completed, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

Touching the button restarts the GOT.

Download

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 24 13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(2) Setup operation Sets the project data stored in the A drive (Standard CF Card) or B drive (Extended memory card) to be used in the GOT. The GOT monitors using the data in the A drive or B drive. (This item explains using the A drive.)

Before setup operation

When storing project data from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to CF card, select [A: Standard CF Card] for [Project Data] in [Boot Drive].

1 Install a CF card in the GOT. For how to install a CF card, refer to the following.

8.8 CF Card

2 Touch [A: Standard CF Card] in Select drive.

3 If touch the button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

If touch button, the setup is executed.

4 When the setup is completed, the dialog mentioned left is displayed.

Touching the button restarts the GOT.

Download

OK

OK

13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

13 - 25

7 Upload/setup cancel operation (1) Upload operation By upload operation, the project data is transferred from the C drive (Built in flash memory) to the A drive (Standard CF Card) or B drive (Extended memory card). The CF card after uploading can be used for downloading project data to another GOT. (This item explains using the A drive.)

Before setup operation

The project data cannot be uploaded to the A drive or B drive when the project data of the A drive or B drive is set up.

Execute setup cancel ( (2) Setup cancel operation) before uploading the project data.

1 Touch [A: Standard CF Card] in Select drive.

2 If touch the button, the screen mentioned left is displayed.

3 Touching the button executes uploading.

4 If any project data with the same name exists in the A drive, the screen shown left is displayed without starting uploading. In this case, touching the button overwrites the project data of the A drive with the project data with the same name of the A drive. Touching the button cancels uploading.

5 When the uploading is completed, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. Touching the button restarts the GOT.

Upload

OK

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 26 13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(2) Setup cancel operation By setup cancel, setup is canceled. (This item explains using the A drive.)

1 Touch [A: Standard CF Card] in Select drive.

2 If touch the button, the screen mentioned left is displayed.

3 If touch the button, setup cancel is executed.

4 When the setup cancel is completed, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. Touching the button restarts the GOT. After restart, the GOT monitors with the project data in the C drive.

Upload

OK

OK

13.3 Project Information 13.3.4 Operation of project information

13 - 27

13.4 Alarm Information

13.4.1 Function of alarm information

The extended alarm log file or alarm log file held by each drive (A: Built-in CF card, B: Extended memory card, C: Flash Memory) is displayed. The functions below can be carried out for files. For details of Advanced Alarm, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (10 ALARM) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (8 ALARM)

13.4.2 The display operation of alarm information

Function Description Reference page

Information display of files and folders Displays name, data size, creation date and time of file or folder. 13-29, 13-30

G1A CSV conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to CSV file. 13-31

G1A TXT conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to TXT file. 13-31

Deletion Deletes file. 13-39

Copy Copys file. 13-19

Graph Displays the advanced alarm watch result by historical graph or tally graph. 13-34

Touch

[Alarm information]

Touch

[Program/Data control]

Program/Data control

Alarm information

Main menu

Operate Extended alarm

log file or Alarm log file.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 -

28 13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.1 Function of alarm information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.4.3 The display example of alarm information

Display of creation date and time

The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the alarm information display screen. If close the screen currently displayed (moving the screen to the folder of the upper hierarchy, etc.) and display the screen again, the updated contents are displayed.

Remark Folders and files displayed

For the folders and files displayed, refer to the following. 13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Select drive The drive which displays file or folder can be selected. When CF card is not installed, [A: Built-in CF card] and [B: Memory card] are not displayed.

(2) Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder. In case of file, displays the extension; in case of folder, displays "DIR".

(3) Name

Displays the file name or folder name. For the long file/folder name, entire part may not be displayed.

Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button, etc.

( 13.4.4 Copy operation)

After confirmation, touch the button to cancel the operation.

(4) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed.

(5) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name.

(6) Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed.

(7) The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection. (Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive.)

(8) Operation switch Execution switch of each function.

(9) Number of folders and files

Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(7) (8) (9)

Copy

Cancel

13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.3 The display example of alarm information

13 - 29

13.4.4 Alarm information operation

1 The display operation of alarm information

1 If touch a drive of select drive, the information of the touched drive is displayed.

2 If touch a folder name, the information of the touched folder is displayed.

3 If touch a folder of ". .", the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed.

4 If touch button of the scrollbar, the screen scrolls up/down by one line. If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

5 If touch a file name, the file is selected.

6 Refer to the following for G1A CSV, G1A TXT, delete, copy, graph operations. G1A CSV , G1A TXT....... this section Delete................ this section Copy.................. this section Graph ................ this section

7 If touch button, the screen is closed.

13 - 30 13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.4 Alarm information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 G1A CSV conversion operation, G1A TXT conversion operation The selected G1A file is converted to CSV file or TXT file.

1 Touch and select the G1A file which is to be converted to CSV file or TXT file.

2 The following dialogue is displayed when touching the following button according to the file type to convert to.

CVS file: Button TXT file: Button

(Example: Dialogue when button is touched)

3 Touch button. When the file, whose name is the same, exists in the destination folder, the dialog showed at left appears without starting the conversion. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels the conversion.

4 The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

G1A->CSV

TXT->CSV

G1A->CSV

OK

OK

Cancel

OK

13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.4 Alarm information operation

13 - 31

3 Deletion operation Deletes selected files.

1 Touch and select the file to delete.

2 If touch button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. If touch button, the file is deleted. If touch button, the deletion is canceled.

3 When the deletion is completed, the completion dialog is displayed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

Del

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 32 13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.4 Alarm information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Copy operation Copies the selected file.

1 Touch and select the file to copy.

2 If touch button, the message [Please select a destination.] is displayed in the left bottom of the screen.

3 If the copy destination folder is touched, the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination. At this time, it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists. Select other folders.

4 If touch button, the following dialog shown left is displayed.

5 Touch button. If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder, the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels to copy.

6 When the copy is completed, the dialog of completion is displayed. If touch button, closes the dialog.

Copy

Next

OK

OK

Cancel

OK

13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.4 Alarm information operation

13 - 33

5 Graph operation Displays the selected extended alarm log file in a graph. When the extended alarm watch (advanced user alarm, advanced system alarm) is set in history mode, the selected extended alarm log file is displayed in historical graph ( (1) Historical graph display).

When set in accumulation mode, displayed it in tally graph ( (2) Tally graph display). Refer to the following for details related to setting of the extended alarm watch.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (10 ALARM) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (8 ALARM)

1 Touch and select the G1A file to display in a graph.

2 If touch button, displays the historical graph or tally graph according to the setting of the extended alarm watch.

3 When move a graph, operate as follows.

If touch / button, moves the graph up/down line by line.

If touch / button, moves the graph up/down by one screen.

If touch / button, moves the graph to left/right by one column.

If touch / button, moves the graph to left/right by one screen.

4 If touch button, closes the graph. (Example: Historical graph)

Graph

13 - 34 13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.4 Alarm information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(1) Historical graph display

Displays the generated time ( ), confirmed time ( ) and restored ( ) time of each alarm. Displays the time scales by 30 minutes interval in the bottom of the graph. The alarms generated in the order of registering alarm are displayed. By the name of each alarm, the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT

Designer3 or GT Designer2 are displayed with up to 12 characters of full-size character (up to 24 half-size characters). The 13th of full-size character and after (the 25th and after for half-size character) are not displayed.

The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen.

(2) Tally graph display

Displays the generated frequency of each alarm by the sideways bar chart. By the name of each alarm, the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT

Designer3 or GT Designer2 are displayed with up to 12 characters of full-size character (up to 24 half-size characters). The 13th of full-size character and after (the 25th and after for half-size character) are not displayed.

The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen.

13.4 Alarm Information 13.4.4 Alarm information operation

13 - 35

13.5 Hard Copy Information

13.5.1 The function of hardcopy information

Carries out delete, copy and move to the file created by the hardcopy function. Refer to the following manual for details of hard copy function.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (37 HARD COPY FUNCTION)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (13.2 Hard Copy)

13.5.2 The display operation of hardcopy information

Function Description Reference page

Information display of files and folders Displays the kind, name, data size, creation date and time of the file or folder. 13-37, 13-38

Delete Deletes the file. 13-39

Copy Copies the file. 13-40

Rename Renames the file. 13-41

Touch [Hard copy

information]

Touch [Program/Data

control]

Program/Data control

Hard copy information

Main menu

Operate the Hard copy

file

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 -

36 13.5 Hard Copy Information 13.5.1 The function of hardcopy information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.5.3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information

Display of the creation date and time

The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the hardcopy information. To display the updated creation date and time, close the screen currently displayed (by moving to the upper hierarchy folder, etc.) and display the screen again.

Remark Displayed folders and files

For the folders and files displayed, refer to the following. 13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Select drive The drive which displays file or folder can be selected. When CF card is not installed, [A: standard CF Card] and [B: Memory card] are not displayed.

(2) Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder. In case of file, displays the extension; in case of folder, displays "DIR".

(3) Name

Displays the file name or folder name. For the long file/folder name, entire part may not be displayed.

Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button, etc.

( 13.5.4 Copy operation)

After confirmation, touch the button to cancel the operation.

(4) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed. (5) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name. (6) Date and time Displays the creation date and time of each file.

(7) The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection. (Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive.)

(8) Operation switch Execution switch of each function.

(9) Number of folders and files

Displays the total number of the files and folders displayed.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(7) (8) (9)

Copy

Cancel

13.5 Hard Copy Information 13.5.3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information

13 - 37

13.5.4 The operation of hardcopy information

1 Display operation of hardcopy information

1 If touch a drive of select drive, the information of the touched drive is displayed.

2 If touch a folder name, the information in the touched folder is displayed.

3 If touch a name of the folder of ". .", the information in the folder of one higher hierarchy is displayed.

4 If touch button of the scrollbar, scrolls up/down line by one line. If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

5 If touch a file name, the file is selected.

6 For the operations of the delete, copy, and rename, refer to the following.

Delete................ this section Copy.................. this section Rename............. this section

7 If touch button, closes the screen.

13 - 38 13.5 Hard Copy Information 13.5.4 The operation of hardcopy information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Delete operation Deletes the selected file.

1 Touch and select the file to delete.

2 If touch button, the screen mentioned left is displayed. If touch button, deletes the file. If touch button, cancel the deletion.

3 When the deletion is completed, the completion dialog is displayed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

1

2

Del

OK

Cancel

OK

13.5 Hard Copy Information 13.5.4 The operation of hardcopy information

13 - 39

3 Copy operation Copies the selected file.

1 Touch and select the file to copy.

2 If touch button, the dialog [Please select a destination.] is displayed in the left bottom of the screen.

3 If touch the folder of the copy destination, the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination. The copied file cannot be copied to its own folder.Select the different folder.

4 If touch button, the dialog box shown left is displayed.

5 Touch button. If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder, the screen shown left is displayed without starting to copy. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels to copy.

6 When the copy is completed, the dialog of completion is displayed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

Copy

Next

OK

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 40 13.5 Hard Copy Information 13.5.4 The operation of hardcopy information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Rename operation Rename the selected file.

1 Select a file to be renamed with touching the file.

2 Touch the button, and then the screen shown left is displayed. Input the file name to be changed. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

: Alphabet capital

: Numeric/Symbol

3 Touch the button, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed.

4 Touch the button, and then renaming the file is started.

5 When renaming the file is completed, a completion dialog box is displayed. Touch the button, and then the dialog box is closed.

1

2

Rename

A-Z

0-9

Enter

OK

OK

13.5 Hard Copy Information 13.5.4 The operation of hardcopy information

13 - 41

13.6 Memory Card Format

13.6.1 Function of the memory card format

Formats the memory card.

13.6.2 Display operation of memory card format

Touch [Memory card

format]

Touch [Program/Data

control]

Program/Data control

Memory card format

Main menu

Select the drive

and format.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 -

42 13.6 Memory Card Format 13.6.1 Function of the memory card format

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.6.3 Operating the memory card format

1 Install the memory card to GOT. Refer to the following for inserting/ removing method of memory card.

8.8 CF Card

2 Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection.

3 If touch button, the password input screen is displayed.

4 Type and touch the key. The dialog box shown on the left will appear. (The password is fixed to 1111.) Confirm the contents of the dialog. When execute the memory card format, touch button. When cancel the memory card format, touch button.

5 If touch button by , the dialog mentioned left is displayed for reconfirm.

6 Reconfirm whether to format the memory card. If touch button, starts formatting. If touch button, cancels formatting.

Format

OK1 OK1 OK1 OK1 Enter

OK

Cancel

OK

OK

Cancel

13.6 Memory Card Format 13.6.3 Operating the memory card format

13 - 43

Remark Restrictions on formatting

When use an unformatted memory card in GOT, format the memory card by PC. GOT cannot format the unformatted memory card.

The formatting of GOT does not change the file system (Example: FAT16) of the memory card and inherits the file system before formatting.

7 When the formatting is completed, the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed.

8 If touch button, closes the dialog.OK

13 - 44 13.6 Memory Card Format 13.6.3 Operating the memory card format

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information

Before using advanced recipe information

For writing/reading into/from a controller with this function or editing of advanced recipe file on the personal computer, refer to the following manual. Specifications and operating procedure are described.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (24.3 Advanced Recipe Function) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (12.3 Advanced Recipe Function)

13.7.1 Function of advanced recipe information

For the advanced recipe file used in advanced recipe function, copy/delete/file output are available. In addition, it is possible to writing/reading into/from a controller by using this function, without creating the screen to operate the advanced recipe. (Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is required.)

Function Description Refer to

Advanced Recipe Information screen

Displaying file, folder data

The file/folder name, data size and creating date & time are displayed. 13-47,13-49

G1P CSV conversion

G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to CSV file. 13-50

G1P TXT conversion

G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to Unicode text file. 13-50

Del File or folder is deleted. 13-52

Copy File is copied. 13-53

Move File is moved. 13-54

Rename File name is changed. 13-56

Create Folder New folder is created. 13-57

Create G1P New G1P file of advanced recipe file is created. 13-58

Advanced Recipe Record List screen

Load record

GOT PLC Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller. 13-60

Save record

PLC GOT The device of controller is saved in selected record. 13-61

Match records

GOT PLC Selected record is verified to the device value of controller. 13-62

Delete Device Value

The device value contained in selected record is deleted. 13-64

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.1 Function of advanced recipe information

13 - 45

13.7.2 Operation of advanced recipe information display

Touch [Program/Data

control]

Program/Data control

[Advanced Recipe Information]

Main menu

Operate advanced

recipe file.

Touch [Advanced

Recipe Information]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 - 4

6 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.2 Operation of advanced recipe information display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.7.3 Example of advanced recipe information display

1 Advanced recipe information screen

About the displayed file

The files other than that for advanced recipe are not displayed on the advanced recipe information screen.

Remark Folders and files displayed

For the folders and files displayed, refer to the following.

13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Drive The target drive can be selected. (Even if CF card is not installed, this message appears.)

(2) Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder. In case of file, displays the extension; in case of folder, displays "DIR".

(3) Name

Displays the file name or folder name. For the long file/folder name, entire part may not be displayed.

Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button, etc.

( 13.7.4 Rename operation)

After confirmation, touch the button to cancel the operation.

(4) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed.

(5) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name.

(6) Creating date & time The date and time when each file was created are displayed.

(7) Drive size Displays the used/entire size of drive selected by select drive.

(8) Operation switch Execution switch of each function.

(9) Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders.

(1)

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7) (8) (9)

Rename

Cancel

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.3 Example of advanced recipe information display

13 - 47

2 Advanced recipe record list screen Touching the button on the advanced recipe information screen after selecting the

advanced recipe file, this screen appears. Records selected in each advanced recipe file can be displayed or saved/loaded.

Number Item Description

(1) No. Record No. of advanced recipe file is displayed.

(2) Attr

Attribution of record is displayed. Attribution of record can be changed with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

V : Record can be loaded/saved (Record whose value is selected.)

VP : Record only for loading (Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed.)

Blanc : Record only for saving (Record whose value is deleted or not selected.)

P : Record unusable (reserved area) (Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed.)

(3) Record Comment Record Comment is displayed.

(4)

File Name Path and name of recipe file are displayed.

Setting No. Recipe No. is displayed.

Name Recipe name is displayed.

(5) Date and time Date and time when record comment is updated are displayed.

(6) Operating switch Execution switch of each function.

Excute

(1) (4) (5)

(6)

(2) (3)

13 - 48 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.3 Example of advanced recipe information display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

1 Display operation of advanced recipe information

1 If touch a drive of select drive, the information of the touched drive is displayed.

2 If touch a folder name, the information of the touched folder is displayed.

3 If touch a folder of ". .", the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed.

4 If touch button of the scrollbar, the screen scrolls up/down by one line. If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

5 If touch a file name, the file is selected.

6 For operation of operating switches, refer to the following. G1A CSV, G1A TXT ....... this section Delete ................ this section Copy .................. this section Move.................. this section Rename ............. this section Create Folder..... this section Create G1P........ this section Execute...... this section to

7 If touch button, the screen is closed.

8

9 12

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 49

2 G1P CSV conversion operation, G1P TXT conversion operation Advanced recipe file (G1P file) is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed/edited on personal computer.

1 Touch and select the G1P file which is to be converted to CSV file or Unidcode text file.

2 Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type.

CSV file : button Unicode text file : button

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.)

(Example: Dialog if the button is touched.)

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touch the button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

(Continued to next page)

G1P->CSV

G1P->TXT

G1P->CSV

Excute

OK

13 - 50 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

5 When the file, whose name is the same, exists in the destination folder, the dialog shown left appears without starting the conversion. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels the conversion.

6 The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

OK

Cancel

OK

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 51

3 Delete operation Folder and file to be used on advanced recipe are deleted.

1 Touch and select the file/folder to delete.

2 If touch button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. If touch button, the file/folder is deleted. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.) If touch button, the deletion is canceled.

3 When the deletion is completed, the completion dialog is displayed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

4 When it cannot be deleted, the dialog showed at left appears. (Only when deleting folder is executed.)

5 Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again. ( 13.8.5 Precautions)

Del

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 52 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Copy operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is copied.

1 Touch and select the file to copy.

2 Touch the button.

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.) At this time, it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists. Select other folders.

4 If touch button, the following dialog shown left is displayed. Touch button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder, the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels to copy.

(Continued to next page)

Copy

Excute

OK

OK

Cancel

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 53

5 Move operation Files to be used in advanced recipe are moved.

6 When the copy is completed, the dialog of completion is displayed. If touch button, closes the dialog.

1 Select the file to be moved by touching it.

2 Touch the button.

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive.)

(Continued to next page)

OK

Move

13 - 54 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touch the button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 When any file with the same name exists in the destination folder, the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement. Touching the button overwrites the file. If touch the button, cancels moving.

6 When moving is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Execute

OK

OK

OKCancel

OK

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 55

6 Rename operation File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed.

1 Select the file to be renamed by touching.

2 If touch the button, displays the screen shown left, then input the file name to be renamed. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital :Numeric/Symbol

3 If touch the button, displays the dialog shown left.

4 If touch the button, starts renaming file. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 When renaming is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

OKRename

A-Z

0-9

Enter

OK

OK

13 - 56 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

7 Folder create operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is created.

6

1 Touch the button.

2 The input key window shown left appears, then input the file name to be created. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital

:Numeric/Symbol

3 If touch the button, displays the dialog shown left.

4 If touch the button, starts creating folder.

5 When creating folder is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Create Folder

A-Z

0-9

Enter

OK

OK

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 57

8 G1P file create operation Advanced recipe file (G1P file) is created. When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility, advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance.

1 Touch the button.

2 The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed. Select the advanced recipe setting to be used for new file. After selecting, touch the button.

3 As the input key window is displayed, input the file name for new file. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital :Numeric/Symbol

(Continued to next page)

Create G1P

Next

A-Z

0-9

13 - 58 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touch the button.

5 When the file, whose name is the same, exists in the destination folder, the dialog shown left appears without starting the creation. Touching the button overwrites the file. If touch the button, cancels creating.

6 When creating is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Enter

OK

OK

OKCancel

OK

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 59

9 Record load operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller.

1 Select the recipe file and touch the button.

2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment to which you want to load the device value.

3 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed.

4 If touch the button, starts loading record.

5 When loading is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Excute

Load record GOT PLC

OK

OK

13 - 60 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

10 Record save operation Device value of a controller is saved in the selected record.

1 Select the recipe file and touch the button.

2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment for saving the device value.

3 If touch the button, the screen shown left is displayed. For changing the record comment of saving destination, input the record comment. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital :English minuscule

:Numeric/Symbol Other than alphanumeric and symbol can not be inputted. If record comment is not changed, it is not need to input.

(Continued to next page)

Excute

Save record PLC GOT

A-Z

a-z

0-9

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 61

11 Record match operation Verifies weather selected record matches to the device value of the controller. After executing loading/saving with advanced recipe, verifies weather its contents are reflected.

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed.

5 If touch the button, starts saving record.

6 When saving is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

1 Select the recipe file and touch the button.

(Continued to the next page)

Enter

OK

OK

Excute

13 - 62 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment for matching the device value.

3 If touch the button, dialog shown left is displayed.

4 If touch the button, starts matching record.

5 When matching is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

6 If selected record does not match to the device value of controller, the dialog shown left is displayed.

Match records GOT PLC

OK

OK

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

13 - 63

12 Device value delete operation The device value of selected record is deleted (without value) and changed to record only for reading. (The record name is not deleted.)

1 Select the recipe file and touch the button.

2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment to be deleted. (If the data of which attribution contains "P" can not be deleted.)

3 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed.

4 If touch the button, starts deleting device value. (The "Processing..." message is displayed on the screen.)

5 When deleting is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Excute

Delete Dvice Value

OK

OK

13 - 64 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.4 Advanced recipe information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.7.5 Precautions

1 Precautions for create/delete (1) When creating folder/file

(a) Number of characters set for folder or file name. GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below. Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters. Users only can rename folder or file name. (Other than folder/file name is automatically printed.)

Example, CSV file Path in memory card (for GT15)

Remark If folder is assigned the hierarchy.

The \ mark is displayed between folder name and folder name, folder name and file name. The \ mark is also counted as one character.

(b) Character strings that cannot be set The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name. Even small characters of those cannot be used.

In addition, the folder/file name showed below cannot be used. The folder name which begins with G1. Folder name and file name which begin with . (period). Folder name and file name which finish with . (period). Folder name and file name which have only . (one period) or ..(two periods).

(2) For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted. Delete the folder after having deleted the files. In addition, on the advanced recipe information screen, the file other than that for advanced recipe is not displayed on GOT. When the folder, in which there is no file displayed on the screen, cannot be deleted, confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer, etc.

COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON NUL PRN CLOCK$

Max. 78 characters

Folder name .CSV\A :\

Extension

(4 characters) Drive name

(1 character)

(1 character)(2 characters)

File name

13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.5 Precautions

13 - 65

2 Precautions for operation

(1) Precautions during folder/file operation (Create/Delete/Copy/File output, etc) Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files, the processing continues to be executed. (Example: Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder, the folder is created.) Therefore, do not pull out the CF card while the "Processing..." message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF.

(2) While GOT is accessing to other file (Alarm data, etc) When folder/file processing for the advanced recip is excecuted while the GOT is in access to other file (CF card access LED ON), the GOT executes folder/file processing for the Advanced Recipe after the processing for other file has completed. Therefore, it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder/file. (The "Processing..." message is displayed on the screen.)

Remark Estimation of processing time

The process may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file to be operated. (The more number of blocks increases, the longer it takes to process advanced recipe folder/file.)

(Reference value) Direct connection to QCPU and CPU(device point:32767 points setting, transmission speed: 115200bps)

When the block setting number to1: about 17 seconds When the block setting number to 2048: about 4 minutes

(3) For executing the saving/loading of device value with advanced recipe file which has been moved or whose name has been changed. Adjust [Recipe File] setting of advanced recipe setting with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to file which has been moved or whose name has been changed. After the setting has been changed, download the advanced recipe setting to GOT.

13 - 66 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information 13.7.5 Precautions

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.8 Logging Information

13.8.1 Function of logging information

Logging files created with the logging function can be copied, deleted or renamed, etc. Without using a personal computer, you can manage logging files on the GOT. For details of the logging function, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (23 LOGGING FUNCTION)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (11.3 Logging Function)

13.8.2 Display operation of logging information

Function Description Refer to

Displaying file, folder data

The file/folder name, data size and creating date & time are displayed. 13-68,13-69

G1L CSV conversion

G1L file of logging file is converted to CSV file. 13-70

G1L TXT conversion

G1L file of logging file is converted to Unicode text file. 13-70

Del File or folder is deleted. 13-72

Copy File is copied. 13-73

Move Folder is moved. 13-74

Rename File name is changed. 13-76

Create Folder New folder is created. 13-77

Touch [Program/Data

control]

Program/Data control

[Logging Information]

Main menu

Operate Logging file.

Touch [Logging

Information]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13.8 Logging Information 13.8.1 Function of logging information

13 - 67

13.8.3 Example of logging information display

About the displayed file

The files other than that for logging are not displayed on the logging information screen.

Remark Folders and files displayed

For the folders and files displayed, refer to the following.

13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Drive The target drive can be selected. (Even if CF card is not installed, this message appears.)

(2) Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder. In case of file, displays the extension; in case of folder, displays "DIR".

(3) Name

Displays the file name or folder name. For the long file/folder name, entire part may not be displayed.

Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button, etc.

( 13.8.4 Rename operation)

After confirmation, touch the button to cancel the operation.

(4) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed.

(5) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name.

(6) Creating date & time The date and time when each file was created are displayed.

(7) Drive size Displays the used/entire size of drive selected by select drive.

(8) Operation switch Execution switch of each function.

(9) Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders.

(1)

(2) (3) (4)

(5) (6)

(7) (8) (9)

Rename

Cancel

13 - 68 13.8 Logging Information 13.8.3 Example of logging information display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.8.4 Logging information operation

1 Display operation of logging information

1 If touch a drive of select drive, the information of the touched drive is displayed.

2 If touch a folder name, the information of the touched folder is displayed.

3 If touch a folder of ". .", the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed.

4 If touch button of the scrollbar, the screen scrolls up/down by one line. If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

5 If touch a file name, the file is selected.

6 For operation of operating switches, refer to the following. G1L CSV , G1L TXT........ this section Delete ................ this section Copy .................. this section Move.................. this section Rename ............. this section Create Folder..... this section

7 If touch button, the screen is closed.

13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

13 - 69

2 Operation of G1L CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion Logging file (G1L file) is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed/edited on personal computer.

1 Touch and select the G1L file which is to be converted to CSV file or Unidcode text file.

2 Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type.

CSV file : button Unicode text file : button

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.)

(Example: Dialog if the button is touched.)

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touch the button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

(Continued to next page)

G1L->CSV

G1L->TXT

G1L->CSV

Excute

OK

13 - 70 13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

5 When the file, whose name is the same, exists in the destination folder, the dialog shown left appears without starting the conversion. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels the conversion.

6 The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

OK

Cancel

OK

13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

13 - 71

3 Delete operation Folder and file to be used on logging are deleted.

1 Touch and select the file/folder to delete.

2 If touch button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. If touch button, the file/folder is deleted. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.) If touch button, the deletion is canceled.

3 When the deletion is completed, the completion dialog is displayed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

4 When it cannot be deleted, the dialog showed at left appears. (Only when deleting folder is executed.)

5 Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again. ( 13.11.5 Precautions)

Del

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 72 13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Copy operation Folder to be used in logging is copied.

1 Touch and select the file to copy.

2 Touch the button.

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.) At this time, it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists. Select other folders.

4 If touch button, the following dialog shown left is displayed. Touch button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder, the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels to copy.

(Continued to next page)

Copy

Excute

OK

OK

Cancel

13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

13 - 73

5 Move operation An operation log file is moved.

6 When the copy is completed, the dialog of completion is displayed. If touch button, closes the dialog.

1 Select the file to be moved by touching it.

2 Touch the button.

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive.)

(Continued to next page)

OK

Move

13 - 74 13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touch the button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder, the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement. Touching the button overwrites the file. If touch the button, cancels moving.

6 When moving is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Execute

OK

OK

OKCancel

OK

13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

13 - 75

6 Rename operation An operation log file is changed.

1 Select the file to be renamed by touching.

2 If touch the button, displays the screen shown left, then input the file name to be renamed. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital :Numeric/Symbol

3 If touch the button, displays the dialog shown left.

4 If touch the button, starts renaming file. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 When renaming is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

OKRename

A-Z

0-9

Enter

OK

OK

13 - 76 13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

7 Folder create operation An operation log folder is created.

1 Touch the button.

2 The input key window shown left appears, then input the file name to be created. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital

:Numeric/Symbol

3 If touch the button, displays the dialog shown left.

4 If touch the button, starts creating folder.

5 When creating folder is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Create Folder

A-Z

0-9

Enter

OK

OK

13.8 Logging Information 13.8.4 Logging information operation

13 - 77

13.8.5 Precautions

1 Precautions for create/delete (1) When creating folder/file

(a) Number of characters set for folder or file name. GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below. Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters. Users only can rename folder or file name. (Other than folder/file name is automatically printed.)

Example, CSV file Path in memory card (for GT15)

Remark If folder is assigned the hierarchy.

The \ mark is displayed between folder name and folder name, folder name and file name. The \ mark is also counted as one character.

(b) Character strings that cannot be set The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name. Even small characters of those cannot be used.

In addition, the folder/file name showed below cannot be used. The folder name which begins with G1. Folder name and file name which begin with . (period). Folder name and file name which finish with . (period). Folder name and file name which have only . (one period) or ..(two periods).

(2) For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted. Delete the folder after having deleted the files. In addition, on the logging information screen, the files other than logging files are not displayed on GOT. When the folder, in which there is no file displayed on the screen, cannot be deleted, confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer, etc.

COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON NUL PRN CLOCK$

Max. 78 characters

Folder name .CSV\A :\

Extension

(4 characters) Drive name

(1 character)

(1 character)(2 characters)

File name

13 - 78 13.8 Logging Information 13.8.5 Precautions

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Precautions for operation (1) Precautions during folder/file operation (Create/Delete/Copy/File output, etc)

Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files, the processing continues to be executed. (Example: Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder, the folder is created.) Therefore, do not pull out the CF card while the "Processing..." message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF.

(2) While GOT is accessing to other file (Alarm data, etc) When folder/file processing for the logging is excecuted while the GOT is in access to other files (CF card access LED ON), the GOT executes folder/file processing for the logging after the processing for other files is completed. Therefore, it may take some time to finish the process of the logging folder/file. (The "Processing..." message is displayed on the screen.)

13.8 Logging Information 13.8.5 Precautions

13 - 79

13.9 Memory Information

13.9.1 Memory information functions

Displays the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size. Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a personal computer.

13.9.2 Memory information display operation

Touch

[Memory Information]

Touch [Program/Data

control]

Program/Data control

[Memory Information]

Main menu

Check memory

information.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 -

80 13.9 Memory Information 13.9.1 Memory information functions

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.9.3 Memory information display example

No. Item Description

(1) Flash memory empty area size

Indicates the memory space of each drive available for the user to store files or folders. The [A: Standard CF Card] and [B: Memory card] are not displayed when CF card is not installed.

(2) Boot drive empty area size Indicates the empty area size of boot drive specified by the user.

(1)

(2)

13.9 Memory Information 13.9.3 Memory information display example

13 - 81

13.10 Special Data Information

13.10.1 Special data information function

Special data used in the intelligent unit monitor function or others can be copied, deleted, downloaded, or uploaded. For details of special data, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7.5 Data Types and Sizes Transferred to the GOT) GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8.1 Data Types and Sizes Transferred to the GOT)

Precautions for operating special data

When the OS boot drive is set to [A: Standard CF Card], deleting and downloading special data are not available.

Function Description Reference page

Information display of files and folders

Displays the name, data size, creation date and time of file or folder. 13-85

Delete Deletes a file or holder. 13-86

Property Displays the property of special data. 13-87

Data check Copies a file. 13-88

Download Downloads the special data written in the A drive (Standard CF Card) / B drive (Extended memory card) to the C drive (Built-in flash memory).

13-89

13 - 82 13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.1 Special data information function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.10.2 Special data information display operation

Touch [Special data

information]

Touch [Program/Data

control]

Program/Data control

[Special data information]

Main menu

Operate Project data

file.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.2 Special data information display operation

13 - 83

13.10.3 Special data information display example

Remark Folders and files displayed

For the folders and files displayed, refer to the following.

13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Select drive The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected. When the CF card is not installed, [A: Built-in CF card] and [B: Memory card] are not displayed.

(2) Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder. In the case of file, displays the extension; in the case of folder, displays "DIR".

(3) Name Displays the name of special data in the selected drive. When the name exceeds 18 characters, the 19th and later characters are not displayed. The special data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by "*%".

(4) Path name Displays the path name of drive /folder which is currently displayed.

(5) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name.

(6) Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed.

(7) The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection.(Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive.)

(8) Operation switch Displays switch of each function executable in the Special data information (download, upload, etc.).

(9) Number of folders and files

Displays the total number of displayed files and folders.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7) (8) (9)

13 - 84 13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.3 Special data information display example

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.10.4 Special data information operation

1 Special data information display operation

1 If touch a drive in [Select drive], the special data in the drive is displayed.

2 Refer to the following for operation of delete, property, data check and download.

Delete .............. in this section Property ........... in this section Data check....... in this section Download......... in this section

3 Touching the button closes the screen.

13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.4 Special data information operation

13 - 85

2 Delete operation Deletes the selected file.

1 Touch and select the file to delete.

2 If touch the button, the screen mentioned left is displayed. Check if the deletion target file is specified correctly. Touching the button deletes the file. Touching the button cancels the deletion.

3 When the detection is completed, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. If touch the button, the dialog is closed.

Delete

OK

OKCancel

OK

13 - 86 13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.4 Special data information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 Property display operation Displays the property of selected special data.

1 Touch the button after selecting a special data to display Property as shown left. In Property display, the following information is displayed.

2 If touch the button, the screen scrolls up/down line by one line.

3 If touch the button, screen scrolls up/ down by one screen.

4 If touch the , the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen.

Property

Item Description

Date Displays date and time of file creation.

Author Displays the author of the project data.

Drawing S/W version

Displays name and version of the drawing software by which the project is created.

13.10 Special Data Info 13.10.4 Special data inf

rmation ormation operation

13 - 87

4 Data check operation Checks the selected special data.

1 Select a data check target file and touch the button. The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left.

2 If touch the button the dialog is closed.

Dialog when data is normal

Dialog when data is error

Data check

OK

13 - 88 13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.4 Special data information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

5 Download operation Transfers the special data written in the A drive (Standard CF Card) or B drive (Extended memory card) to the C drive (Built-in flash memory). The GOT monitors C drive data. (This item explains using the A drive.)

Special data to be stored in a CF card

When storing the project data from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to CF card, select [C: Built-in flash memory] for [Project Data] in [Boot Drive].

1 Install a CF card on the GOT Refer to the following for inserting/ removing method of CF card.

8.8 CF Card

2 Touch [A: Standard CF Card] in Select drive.

(Continued to next page)

13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.4 Special data information operation

13 - 89

3 If touch the button, the screen mentioned left is displayed. Downloading is executed when the button is touched.

4 If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive, the screen shown left is displayed. If touch the button, the project data is downloaded and the project data in the C drive is overwritten. Downloading is canceled when the button is touched

5 When the downloading is completed, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. Touching the button restarts the GOT.

Download

OK

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 90 13.10 Special Data Information 13.10.4 Special data information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.11 Operation Log Information

13.11.1 Function of operation log information

Operation log files created with the operation log function can be copied, deleted or renamed, etc. Without using a personal computer, you can manage operation log files on the GOT. For details of the operation log function, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (22 OPERATION LOG FUNCTION)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (15.2 Operation Log Function)

Function Description Refer to

Displaying file, folder data

The file/folder name, data size and creating date & time are displayed. 13-93,13-94

G1O CSV conversion

G1O file of operation log file is converted to CSV file. 13-95

G1O TXT conversion

G1O file of operation log file is converted to Unicode text file. 13-95

Del File or folder is deleted. 13-97

Copy File is copied. 13-98

Move Folder is moved. 13-99

Rename File name is changed. 13-101

Create Folder New folder is created. 13-102

List Displays operation logs in a list and allows searching. 13-103

Switching display order

Display order of operation log is switched. 13-104

Displaying screen image

Displays the screen image for the operation logs in the selected row. 13-104

Search Operation logs are searched. 13-105

Latest Displays the latest operation log in a list. 13-107

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.1 Function of operation log information

13 - 91

13.11.2 Display operation of operation log information

Remark Default display drive when displaying the operation log information screen.

When [Save to] of the [Environmental Setting] dialog box is set in GT Designer3, the default display drive for displaying the operation log information screen is the drive set in GT Designer3.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION)

In the following cases, the default display drive is A drive. [Save to] is not specified in GT Designer3. The drive set as [Save to] in GT Designer3 is not found.

Touch [Program/Data control]

Program/Data control

[Operation log Information]

Main menu

Operate Operation log file.

Touch [Operation log Information]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 - 9

2 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.2 Display operation of operation log information

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.11.3 Example of operation log information display

About the displayed file

The files other than that for operation log are not displayed on the operation log information screen.

Remark Folders and files displayed

Refer to the following for the details of folders and files displayed.

13.1.5 Display file

Number Item Description

(1) Drive The target drive can be selected. (Even if CF card is not installed, this message appears.)

(2) Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder. In case of file, displays the extension; in case of folder, displays "DIR".

(3) Name

Displays the file name or folder name. For the long file/folder name, entire part may not be displayed.

Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button, etc.

( 13.8.4 Rename operation)

After confirmation, touch the button to cancel the operation.

(4) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed.

(5) Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name.

(6) Creating date & time The date and time when each file was created are displayed.

(7) Drive size Displays the used/entire size of drive selected by select drive.

(8) Operation switch Execution switch of each function.

(9) Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders.

(1)

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7) (8) (9)

Rename

Cancel

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.3 Example of operation log information display

13 - 93

13.11.4 Operation log information operation

1 Display operation of operation log information

1 If touch a drive of select drive, the information of the touched drive is displayed.

2 If touch a folder name, the information of the touched folder is displayed.

3 If touch a folder of ". .", the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed.

4 If touch button of the scrollbar, the screen scrolls up/down by one line. If touch button, the screen scrolls up/down by one screen.

5 If touch a file name, the file is selected.

6 For operation of operating switches, refer to the following. G1O CSV, G1O TXT....... this section Delete ................ this section Copy .................. this section Move .................. this section Rename ............. this section Create Folder..... this section List ..................... this section Latest ................. this section

7 If touch button, the screen is closed.

8

9

13 - 94 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Operation of G1O CSV conversion G1O TXT conversion Operation log file (G1O file) is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed/edited on personal computer.

1 Touch and select the G1O file which is to be converted to CSV file or Unidcode text file.

2 Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type.

CSV file : button

Unicode text file : button

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.)

(Example: Dialog if the button is touched.)

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touch the button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

(Continued to next page)

G1O->CSV

G1O->TXT

G1O->TXT

Excute

OK

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

13 - 95

5 When the file, whose name is the same, exists in the destination folder, the dialog shown left appears without starting the conversion. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels the conversion.

6 The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 96 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 Delete operation Folder and file to be used on operation log are deleted.

1 Touch and select the file/folder to delete.

2 If touch button, the dialog mentioned left is displayed. If touch button, the file/folder is deleted. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.) If touch button, the deletion is canceled.

3 When the deletion is completed, the completion dialog is displayed. If touch button, the dialog is closed.

4 When it cannot be deleted, the dialog showed at left appears. (Only when deleting folder is executed.)

5 Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again. ( 13.11.5 Precautions)

Del

OK

Cancel

OK

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

13 - 97

4 Copy operation An operation log file is copied.

1 Touch and select the file to copy.

2 Touch the button.

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.) At this time, it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists. Select other folders.

4 If touch button, the following dialog shown left is displayed. Touch button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder, the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy. If touch the button, overwrites the file. If touch button, cancels to copy.

(Continued to next page)

Copy

Excute

OK

OK

Cancel

13 - 98 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

5 Move operation An operation log file is moved.

6 When the copy is completed, the dialog of completion is displayed. If touch button, closes the dialog.

1 Select the file to be moved by touching it.

2 Touch the button.

3 Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive.)

(Continued to next page)

OK

Move

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

13 - 99

4 If touch the button, the dialog shown left is displayed. Touch the button. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder, the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement. Touching the button overwrites the file. If touch the button, cancels moving.

6 When moving is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Execute

OK

OK

OKCancel

OK

13 - 100 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

6 Rename operation An operation log file is changed.

1 Select the file to be renamed by touching.

2 If touch the button, displays the screen shown left, then input the file name to be renamed. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital :Numeric/Symbol

3 If touch the button, displays the dialog shown left.

4 If touch the button, starts renaming file. (While executing, "Processing..." message appears on the screen.)

5 When renaming is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

OKRename

A-Z

0-9

Enter

OK

OK

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

13 - 101

7 Folder create operation An operation log folder is created.

1 Touch the button.

2 The input key window shown left appears, then input the file name to be created. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.

:English capital

:Numeric/Symbol

3 If touch the button, displays the dialog shown left.

4 If touch the button, starts creating folder.

5 When creating folder is completed, completion dialog is displayed. If touch the button, closes the dialog.

Create Folder

A-Z

0-9

Enter

OK

OK

13 - 102 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

8 List display Displays operation logs in an operation log file in a list.

1 Touch and select a file for displaying the list.

2 Touching the button displays the list. In the list, the following contents can be checked. Display items: Date Time Screen No. Operation type Value after change For operation of operating switches, refer to the following. Date (ascending/descending) .....................(1) Display order switching

operation Image...........(2) Display operation of

screen image Search .........(3) Search operation

3 To display the details of an operation log, touch the row for that operation log to select it. The color of the row is inverted (white black).

List

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

13 - 103

(1) Display order switching operation

(1) Selected line position after switching the display order After the display order is switched while lines are selected, the lines still remain selected. Depending on which line is selected, the selected line may not be displayed on the screen after switching the display order.

(2) Display order of operation logs in non-chronological order When the display order of operation logs are switched, the logs are displayed in order as collected, not in order as the date they are collected. In case that the displayed operation logs are not lined up in time order due to the time change of GOT clock, the displayed logs may not be lined up in order of the log dates even though the operation logs are switched.

(2) Display operation of screen image

4 Touching the selected row again displays the detailed information for the operation log. Touch the button to close the dialog.

1 Touch / in the list to switch the

display order of operation logs. 2 and

are switched every time the button is touched.

3 The buttons show the current display order.

4 : Data is displayed in chronological order as collected.

5 : Data is displayed in reverse chronological order as collected.

1 Touch the [Image] button in the list to switch displaying/hiding the window of the screen image corresponding to the operation log in the selected row.

2 Touch the title bar to move the window of the screen image.

3 The window of the screen image is displayed until the display of the list is closed.

4 Touch the button to close the window of the screen image.

Date (ascending) Date (descending)

Date (ascending) Date (descending)

Date (ascending)

Date (descending)

13 - 104 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(1) When the row in the operation log is not selected, or when the row in the operation log , which indicates an error such as data damaged, is selected The window color of the screen image is a gray.

(2) Whether to display the screen image or not Whether the screen image is displayed or not depends on the object type or the operation type.

(3) Precautions for displaying the screen image The screen image to be displayed is an object or a shape based on the object data. Therefore, if the numerical display, the lamp display, and others exist on the screen, the numeric value and the status of the lamp in the actual operation are not displayed. If the project data when the operation log is collected is different from that currently in operation, the screen image might not be dislayed properly.

(3) Search operation

1 Touching in the list enables searching of a log using the following items. Item: Date Time

2 Input the date or time to be searched.

(Continued to next page)

Search

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

13 - 105

3 Touching the button displays the dialog on the left. Touch the OK button. (When processing is being executed, the "Processing" message is displayed on the screen.)

4 The results found are displayed and the dialog on the left is displayed. To continue a search, touch the button. To stop a search, touch the button.

5 When searching is completed, a completion message is displayed in the dialog.

6 Touching the button closes the dialog.

Enter

OK

OK

Cancel

OK

13 - 106 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

9 Latest display The latest operation log files are selected and displayed in a list.

1 If touch the button, the latest one in the operation log files is displayed in a list.

2 In the list, the following contents can be checked. Display items: Date Time Screen No. Operation type Value after change For operation of operating switches, refer to the following. Date (ascending/descending)

..................... (1) Display order switching operation

Image........... (2) Display operation of screen image

Search ......... (3) Search operation

3 For the method for displaying the detail of each operation log, refer to the following.

4 this section

Latest

8

8

8

8

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.4 Operation log information operation

13 - 107

13.11.5 Precautions

1 Precautions for create/delete (1) When creating folder/file

(a) Number of characters set for folder or file name. GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below. Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters. Users only can rename folder or file name. (Other than folder/file name is automatically printed.)

Example, CSV file Path in memory card (for GT15)

Remark If folder is assigned the hierarchy.

The \ mark is displayed between folder name and folder name, folder name and file name. The \ mark is also counted as one character.

(b) Character strings that cannot be set The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name. Even small characters of those cannot be used.

In addition, the folder/file name showed below cannot be used. The folder name which begins with G1. Folder name and file name which begin with . (period). Folder name and file name which finish with . (period). Folder name and file name which have only . (one period) or ..(two periods).

(2) For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted. Delete the folder after having deleted the files. In addition, on the operation log information screen, the file other than that for operation log is not displayed on GOT. When the folder, in which there is no file displayed on the screen, cannot be deleted, confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer, etc.

COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON NUL PRN CLOCK$

Max. 78 characters

Folder name .CSV\A :\

Extension

(4 characters) Drive name

(1 character)

(1 character)(2 characters)

File name

13 - 108 13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.5 Precautions

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Precautions for operation

(1) Precautions during folder/file operation (Create/Delete/Copy/File output, etc) Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files, the processing continues to be executed. (Example: Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder, the folder is created.) Therefore, do not pull out the CF card while the "Processing..." message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF.

13.11 Operation Log Information 13.11.5 Precautions

13 - 109

13.12 GOT Data Package Acquisition

13.12.1 GOT data package acquisition function

The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the memory card OS (Boot OS, standard monitor OS, communication driver, extended function OS, option OS) Special data Project data

The copied data can be utilized for backup or creating the same GOT system by installing the data. For installation function of the GOT, refer to the following.

18.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card

13.12.2 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition

Touch

[Program/data control].

Touch [GOT data

package acquisition].

Program/data control

GOT data

package acquisition

Main menu

( 9.3 Utility Display)

13 - 1

10 13.12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13.12.1 GOT data package acquisition function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

13.12.3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition

13.12.4 GOT data package acquisition operation

1 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the memory card. (This item explains using the A drive.)

No. Item Description

(1) Select Drive Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied. When the memory card is not installed, [A: Built-in CF card] and [B: Memory card] are not displayed.

(2) Copy Touching the button starts copying.

1 Touching the drive name below [Select Drive] inverts the touched drive name.

Touching the button starts copying.

(Continued to next page)

1)

2)

Copy

13.12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13.12.3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition

13 - 111

Remark Processing time reference

The time required for the processing depends on conditions such as OS, data capacity, and file structure. (Reference values)

When the capacity is 4 Mbytes: Around 6 seconds When the capacity is 12 Mbytes: Around 18 seconds

2 Precautions for operation (1) Copying project data

If the Boot source drive and copy destination drive for project data is the same, the project data cannot be copied. If the drives are the same, cancel the setup.

(2) When project data are copied to the GOT If OS or project data is copied to the GOT using the memory card created with GOT data package acquisition, the utility setting is also copied. Check each utility setting after copying to the GOT and change the setting according to need.

(3) Memory card to be used When performing GOT data package acquisition, do not store other data to the memory card. If doing so, the previous data will be unavailable.

(Example: Dialog box after touching the button) 2 The display depends on the status of copy destination and setup. Operate with following the displayed dialog box.

3 After copying OS and data, the dialog box for notifying the completion appears. Touching the button closes the dialog box.

Copy

OK

13 - 112 13.12 GOT Data Package Acquisition 13.12.4 GOT data package acquisition operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14. GOT SELF CHECK (DEBUG & SELF CHECK)

The GOT can display the screen for debugging or self-checking. The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking function.

14.1 Debug In this manual, the overview of the debuggingfunction and the operation procedure until displaying the screen are described. For display contents and operation procedure of debuggings, refer to the following manual.

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

14.1.1 The Debug function

The Debug function is designed to confirm the device status of PLC CPU and to make the response for PLC system trouble more efficient. The following shows the functions that can be performed with the Debug function.

Item Description Reference page

Debug

System monitor, Ladder monitor, A list editor, List editor for MELSEC-A, intelligent module monitor, Network monitor, Q motion monitor, servo amplifier monitor, CNC monitor, Backup/restoration, and CNC data I/O, SFC monitor, Ladder editor, Motion SFC monitor

14-1

Self check Memory check, Drawing check, Font check, Touch panel check, I/O check, NETWK unit status display

14-4

System alarm display GOT errors, CPU errors, network errors 14-35

GOT start time Time when the GOT was started 14-37

Operator info. Management

Operator management, Password change, Function setting 14-39

Fingerprint authentication

Administrator password setting, Contents registered list 14-58

Item Description Compatible

GT Designer2

Compatible GT Works3

System monitor The device of PLC CPU and buffer memory of intelligent function module can be monitored or tested.

Ladder monitor The program of PLC CPU can be monitored in ladder format.

A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited.

FX list editor The sequence program of FXCPU can be list edited.

Intelligent unit monitor Buffer memory in the intelligent function module can be monitored or the data can be changed on the dedicated screen. And the signal status of I/O modules can be monitored.

14.1 Debug 14.1.1 The Debug function

14 - 1

*1: CC-Link IE Field Network is not compatible.

Network monitor The network status of the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II), CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link IE Field Network can be monitored.

*1

Motion monitor The servo monitoring and parameter settings of the motion controller CPU (Q series) are available.

Servo amplifier monitor Various monitor functions, parameter change, test operation, etc. of the servo amplifier are available.

CNC monitor Functions equivalent to the MELDAS dedicated display, such as Position Display Monitor, Alarm Diagnosis Monitor, Tool Offset/ Param, and Program Monitor, are available.

Backup/restoration Executing backups, executing restorations, and deleting backup data are possible.

CNC Data I/O Machining programs, parameters, and others of the CNC connected to the GOT can be copied or deleted.

SFC Monitor The GOT can monitor and display SFC programs of the PLC CPU in the SFC diagram format (MELSAP3 or MELSAP-L format).

Ladder editor The sequence program of PLC CPU can be edited.

Motion SFC monitor The motion SFC program and devices in the motion controller CPU (Q series) can be monitored.

Item Description Compatible

GT Designer2

Compatible GT Works3

14 - 2 14.1 Debug 14.1.1 The Debug function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.1.2 Display operation of Debug Main menu Debug & self check Debug

Debug is displayed.

(For System monitor)

Touch the debug to

be operated.

Touch

[Debug].

Touch

[Debug & self check].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14.1 Debug 14.1.2 Display operation of Debug

14 - 3

14.2 Self check

14.2.1 Self check function

Carries out self-check of screen data or memory etc. The items which can be self-checked are as follows.

Items Description Reference page

Memory check Carries out write/read check of the memory card and built-in flash memory

[Password] 14-5

Drawing Check Carries out missing bit check, color check and drawing check. 14-8

Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually. 14-13

Touch panel Check Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit (16 dots x 16 dots).

14-15

I/O check Carries out RS-232 connecting target confirmation and self-loopback check. 14-17

NETWK unit status display

Displays the LED status, error information, etc. of the installed MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit or CC-Link communication unit (GT15- J61BT13).

14-35

5 9 2 0

14 - 4 14.2 Self check 14.2.1 Self check function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.3 Memory Check

14.3.1 Memory check function

Memory check function carries out the write/read check of A drive (Standard CF Card), B drive (Extended memory card), and C drive (Built-in flash memory).

14.3.2 Display operation of memory check

Function Description

A drive memory check Checks whether the memory (CF card) of the A drive can be read/written normally.

B drive memory check Checks whether the memory (Extended memory card) of the B drive can be read/written normally.

C drive memory check Checks whether the memory (Built-in flash memory) of the C drive can be read/written normally.

Main menu Debug & self check Self check

Memory check

Touch

[Memory check]

Touch

[Self check]

Touch

[Debug & self check]

Select the memory to check

and touch [Check].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14.3 Memory Check 14.3.1 Memory check function

14 - 5

Remark Mounting condition of optional devices (board)

The mounting status of option function board and multi-color display board is displayed on the lower left of the memory check screen.

Carries out write/read check of memory.

When drive is not displayed

When the drive (memory) to check is not displayed, confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following.

CF card inserting/removing method ( 8.8 CF Card) When no faults are found in mounting, etc, a memory failure may be arosen. Replace the memory card or built-in flash memory (C drive). For details of built-in flash memory, contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service.

The following example explains about Memory Check using built-in flash memory (C drive). For the Bulit-in CF card (A drive) memory check or Extended memory card (B drive) memory check, install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built-in flash memory.

1 Select [Flash Memory] in the Memory check setting screen.

If select button, the numeric keyboard window is displayed.

If select button, returns to the initial menu.

2 Touch to input password ( ) and touch .

If touch ,executes read/write check for the built-in flash memory, which is completed in around 10 seconds.

When mounted : The model numbers of the mounted option function board and multi-color display board are displayed.

When not mounted : "None" is displayed.Memory check operation

OK

Cancel

5 9 2 0

Enter

Enter

14 - 6 14.3 Memory Check 14.3.2 Display operation of memory check

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

Remark Password change

The password cannot be changed. When input password error, the cancel dialog is displayed.

If touch , returns to the Memory check screen.

When error is found in memory

When error is found by memory check, the dialog indicating the area in which the error occurred is displayed. In case of error, contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service.

If touch , returns to the Memory check screen.

OK

OK

14.3 Memory Check 14.3.2 Display operation of memory check

14 - 7

14.4 Drawing Check

14.4.1 Drawing check function

The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check, color check, basic figure display check, move check among screens.

14.4.2 Display operation of drawing check

Notes on drawing check

Missing bits is occurred in the following cases. 1. There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color. 2. There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn

according to the layout and procedures described in "Section 13.3.3 Display and Operation of Drawing Check".

When missing bits occurs, contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service.

Start Drawing check

If touch the [Drawing check] of Display

check, the screen for drawing check is

displayed.

Main menu Debug & self check Self check

Display check

Touch

[Display check] Touch

[Self check] Touch

[Debug & self check]

Touch

[Drawing check]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14 - 8 14.4 Drawing Check 14.4.1 Drawing check function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.4.3 Drawing check operation

The screen for drawing check can be displayed by touching [Drawing check] on the Display check menu.

1 Before execute drawing check

Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during drawing check. Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the [Display check] screen.

1 Missing bit, Color Check

Each touch of the upper-right part of the screen, the entire screen color changes in the following order: blue, black, red, purple, green, light blue, yellow, white, and gray. Check missing bit and color visually.

If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color (white screen), the following 2) Basic figure check screen is displayed.

Upper-left touch

position

Upper-right touch

position

Black Red Purple Green Light blue Yellow White GrayBlue

To (b) Basic figurecheck screen

14.4 Drawing Check 14.4.3 Drawing check operation

14 - 9

2 Basic figure check

Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses. The basic figure drawn has 4 types: 1. Filled circle, 2. Line, 3. Rectangle, 4. Ellipse.

To (a) Pattern 1of (3) Move check

among screens

14 - 10 14.4 Drawing Check 14.4.3 Drawing check operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 Move check among screens

(a) Pattern 1: Shape transformation, color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals. If the shape and color are displayed visually in order, it is normal.

(b) Pattern 2: Shape transformation, color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals. If the shape and color are displayed visually in order, it is normal.

To Pattern 2

Pattern 1

To Pattern 3

Pattern 2

14.4 Drawing Check 14.4.3 Drawing check operation

14 - 11

(c) Pattern 3: Shape transformation, color check The overlaped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed. If the shape and color are displayed visually in order, it is normal.

(d) Pattern 4: Shape Check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals. If the shape and color are displayed visually in order, it is normal. If touch the upper right part of the screen, returns to [Display check] screen.

To Pattern 4

To [Display check]

The main screen image after the screen information read and write is executed

14 - 12 14.4 Drawing Check 14.4.3 Drawing check operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.5 Font Check

14.5.1 Font check function

The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT. The character data of the font is displayed on the upper left part of the screen one by one.

14.5.2 Display operation of Font check

Notes on Font Check

Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed. (UNICODE)

If the characters above are not displayed correctly, the fonts may not be installed. Install the standard monitor OS again.

Alphabetic characters etc. : 0 x 0000 to 0 x 04F9 (From basic Latin to Kirill) Hangul characters : 0 x AC00 to 0 x D7A3 (Hangul / Hangul auxiliary) Kanji : 0 x 4E00 to 0 x 9FA5 (CJK integrated Kanjis)

Main menu Debug & self check Self check

Display check

Starts font check

When touch [Font check] of the [Display check],

Font check starts. Touch

[Font check]

Touch

[Display check] Touch

[Self check] Touch

[Debug & self check]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14.5 Font Check 14.5.1 Font check function

14 - 13

14.5.3 Font check operation

Font check starts by touching [Font Check] in the [Display check] screen. The character data of the built-in font (in the built-in flash memory) can be checked visually to confirm the font drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen.

1 Before execute font check

Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check. Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the [Display check] screen.

The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Option fonts

To display optional fonts, the followings are required. The option font installation Option function board installation

The option fonts are displayed at the end. 11

Upper-left touch

position

Upper-right touch

position

Font data

14 - 14 14.5 Font Check 14.5.3 Font check operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.6 Touch Panel Check

14.6.1 Touch panel check function

Touch panel check is a function which checks whether there is no dead zone area in touch key minimum unit (16 dots x 16 dots).

14.6.2 Display operation of Touch panel check

Notes on Touch panel check

If the touched part is not filled with yellow color, there are the following two possible causes. 1. Display part failure 2. Touch panel failure

In that case, contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service.

Main menu Debug & self check Self check

Starts Touch panel check

When touch [Touch panel check] of [Display check],

Touch panel check starts.

Touch

[Debug & self check]

Touch

[Touch panel check]

Touch

[Self check]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14.6 Touch Panel Check 14.6.1 Touch panel check function

14 - 15

14.6.3 Touch panel check operations

If touch [Touch panel check] of self-check, a black-filled screen is displayed over the entire screen area.

1 Touch a part of the screen. The touched part becomes a yellow-filled display.

2 If touch the upper left part, returns to the self-check.

Remark Checking the upper left part of the screen

Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow. If returnes to the self-check by touching the upper left part, judge that the upper left area operates normally.

Black-filled screen

Yellow color

Upper-left touch position

14 - 16 14.6 Touch Panel Check 14.6.3 Touch panel check operations

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.7 I/O Check

14.7.1 I/O check function

The I/O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other. If I/O check ends normally, the communication interface and the connection cable hardwares are normal. To execute I/O check, the communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. Refer to the following for the details related to the installation of the communication driver.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT)

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8. TRANSFERRING DATA)

(1) Communication drivers inapplicable to I/O check When the following communication drivers are used, the I/O check cannot be executed.

Connection type Communication driver

Connection to MITSUBISHI PLC

MELSECNET/H connection

MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/10 connection

MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

CC-Link IE Controller Network

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

CC-Linlk (ID), CC-Link Ver.2(ID)

Ethernet connection Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700

Connection to FUJI PLC FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH

Connection to YASKAWA PLC YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS, Ethernet (YASKAWA)

Connection to YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3/STARDOM, Ethernet (YOKOGAWA)

Connection to ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC EtherNet/IP(AB)

Connection to SIEMENS PLC SIEMENS S7-200, SIEMENS S7-300/400, Ethernet (SIEMENS S7)

Microcomputer connection Computer

Inverter connection FREQROL 500/700/800, Sensorless servo

MODBUS /TCP connection MODBUS/TCP

AZBIL control equipment connection Azbil SDC/DMC

Connection to RKC temperature controller

RKC SR Mini HG (MODBUS)

14.7 I/O Check 14.7.1 I/O check function

14 - 17

14.7.2 Display operation of I/O Check

Main menu Debug & self check Self check

I/O check

Touch

[Debug & self check]

Touch

[I/O check]

Touch

[Self check]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14 - 18 14.7 I/O Check 14.7.2 Display operation of I/O Check

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.7.3 I/O Check Operation

1 Connecting target confirmation If touch [CPU] button, the connecting target confirmation communication check is carried out.

1 After the CPU communication starts normally, the dialog mentioned right notifying that it is on checking, untill the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally.

2 When the connecting target confirmation communication ends, its result is notified by dialog. If the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally, the dialog notifying of the normal termination mentioned right is displayed. If touch button after confirming the result, returns to [I/O check].

3 If the dialog mentioned right is displayed after selecting connecting target confirmation or during CPU communication check, confirm the following. No misconnection with CPU ( GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used (1.5 Verifying GOT recognizes controllers) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2 (3.3.6 Verifying GOT recognizes controllers)) No missettings of parameter ( 10.2 Communication Detail Settings) No hardware error. ( 20. TROUBLESHOOTING)

If touch button in the dialog After confirming the result, returns to [I/O check].

OK

OK

14.7 I/O Check 14.7.3 I/O Check Operation

14 - 19

2 Self-loopback If touch [Self], the hardware check of RS-232 interface is carried out.

1 For preparation for the self-loopback communication check, insert the connector for self-loopback check (Customer purchased) shown in the diagram right in the RS-232 interface. For this connector, short 2 and 3 pins, 7 and 8 pins and 4 and 6 pins, respectively. In the communication setting of the GOT utility, set the channel number for the RS-232 interface to 0 ([None]).

2 After selecting [Self], the transferred data and received data are verified through the self-loopback connector. When the GOT cannot receive the data during the data transmission, the dialog shown right appears and the GOT restarts in five seconds. When the dialog shown right appears, check the following. Check if the pins of the connector for self-loopback check are incorrectly shorted. Check if the channel number for the RS-232 interface is set to 0 ([None]) in the communication setting of the GOT utility. ( 10.2 Communication Detail Settings) Check if the hardware has no problems. ( 20. TROUBLESHOOTING)

3 During check, the dialog shown right is displayed.

RS-232 interface

Display unit (rear face)

14 - 20 14.7 I/O Check 14.7.3 I/O Check Operation

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 When the all checks ended normally, the dialog shown right is displayed. And the GOT restarts in five seconds.

5 When an error occurs, the dialog that shows the GOT abnormal termination and the byte with the error appears, and then the GOT restarts in five seconds. When the dialog shown right appears, check the following. Check if the hardware has no problems. ( 20. TROUBLESHOOTING)

14.7 I/O Check 14.7.3 I/O Check Operation

14 - 21

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display

14.8.1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display

The network unit status display is a function that uses the communication units below to monitor the network status. MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13) CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit (GT15-J71GP23-SX) CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit (GT15-J71GF13-T2) CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

The LED status or error status of a network module can be checked. For the corrective actions for errors that occur on the network, refer to the following manual.

The Reference Manual of the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 network system (PLC to PLC network) to be used

CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual

The User's Manual of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module to be used

The User's Manual of the CC-Link system master/local module to be used

14.8.2 Displaying the NETWK unit status display

Main menu Debug & self check Self check

NETWK unit status display

Touch

[Debug & self check].

Touch

[NETWK unit status

display].

Touch

[Self check].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

1

4 - 22 14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

1 MELSENCNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

(g)

(h)

(c) (a)

(b)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

(c) (a)

(b)

(d)

(e)

(f)

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

14 - 23

(1) LED status Displays the MELSECNET/H communication unit operation status.

*: For monochrome display, it is displayed as (lit) or (not lit).

(2) Loop information Displays the MELSECNET/H communication unit loop status.

*: For the GT15-J71BR13, "---" is displayed.

No. Item LED

color* Lit Not lit

(a)

RUN Green Data link normal Data link error

MNG Green Operating as control station Operating other than as control station

S.MNG Green Operating as sub control station Operating other than as sub control station

D.LINK Green Data link being executed Data link stopped T.PASS Green Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed SW.E. Green Switch setting error Normal

M/S.E. Green Duplicate station number and control station error

Normal

PRM.E. Green Parameter error Normal GOT R/W Green Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT

(b)

CRC Red Code check error Normal OVER Red Data entry delay error Normal AB.IF Red All reception data 1 Normal TIME Red Time limit exceeded Normal DATA Red Reception data error Normal UNDER Red Send data error Normal

LOOP Red Forward/reverse loop reception error

Normal

SD Green Sending data RD Green Receiving data

No. Item Description

(c)

F loop* Displays the status (Normal/NG) of the F loop. R loop* Displays the status (Normal/NG) of the R loop.

FLoopBK Sta* Displays the F loopback station execution status (No per/Number of the station at which loopback is executed).

RLoopBK Sta* Displays the R loopback station execution status (No per/Number of the station at which loopback is executed).

Loop Back *

Displays the loopback status (No per/Perf). No per: Loop normal, forward loop error, reverse loop error, data link not possible Perf: During loopback

14 - 24 14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(3) Data link information Displays the MELSECNET/H communication unit data link information (communication status, cause of communication suspension, cause of communication stop).

(4) Transient status Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error code.

No. Item Description

(d) Com Status

Displays the communication status of the host. D-Link in prog. : FData link being executed D-Link Stop(A)ss : Cyclic transmission stopped from other station D-Link Stop (H) : Cyclic transmission stopped by host B-Pass exec (No Area) : Host B/W send no allocation B-Pass exec (Param Err) : Error in host parameters B-Pass exec (Param unreceived) : Common parameters not received Disconnect (No B-Pass) : Station numbers duplicated, cable not connected Disconnect (Line Err) : Cable not connected Testing : Testing online/offline Reset. in prgr. : Hardware failure

(e)s Cause of Ssp

Displays the cause of disabled communication (transient transmission) of the host. Normal Comm : Communicating normally Offline : Offline Offline test : Testing offline Initialize : Error (error code: F101, F102, F105) Change Ctrl Sta : Error (error code: F104, F106) Testing Online : FError (error code: F103, F109, F10A) Baton Missing : Error (error code: F107) Baton Duplicated : Error (error code: F108) Dup Sta No : Error (error code: F10B) Dup Ctrl Sta : Error (error code: F10C) Rcv Retry Err : Error (error code: F10E) Send Retry Err : Error (error code: F10F) Time Out Err : Error (error code: F110) Abnormal Line : Error (error code: F112) Disconnection : Error (error code: F11B) No Own Sta Baton : Error (error code: F11F) Other (error code) : Error (error code: displayed)

(f) Cause of Stop

Displays the cause of disabled data link (cyclic transmission) of the host. Normal : Communicating normally StopOrder : Cyclic transmission of all stations stopped from

host or other station No Shared Param : Parameters cannot be received Bad Shared Param : Set parameter error Bad Self Sta CPU : A medium/critical error occurred in the host CPU Com Aborted : Host data link error occurred

No. Item Description (g) Transmission Err Displays the number of transient transmission errors.

(h) ErrCode

For other than the GT155

Error histories of 16 errors are displayed in 16 lows from the latest.

For the GT155 Only the latest error history is displayed as only a single low is provided.

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

14 - 25

2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

(1) LED status Displays the operation status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.

No. Item LED

color* Lit Not lit Blink

(1)

RUN Green Operating normally Hardware failure or WDT error

PC Green Data link being executed Data link not executed With communication error stations or duplicated station numbers

ONLINE Green Online mode Other than online mode TEST Green Test mode Other than test mode OFFLINE Green Offline mode Other than offline mode

M/S.ERR Red Duplicated control station or station No.

No duplicated control station or station No.

MANAGER Green Control station in operation Other than control station in operation

S.MANAGER Green Sub-control station in operation

Other than sub-control station in operation

NORMAL Green Normal station in operation Other than normal station in operation

(10)

(9)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1)

(3)

14 - 26 14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

*: For monochrome display, it is displayed as (lit) or (not lit).

(2) Loop information Displays the loop status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.

No. Item LED

color* Lit Not lit Blink

(2)

PARAM.ERR Red Parameter error No parameter error F LOOP ERR Red IN-side error No IN-side error SD Green Sending data Not sending data RD Green Receiving data Not receiving data TOKEN PASS Green Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed

DATA LINK Green Data link being executed (Cyclic transmission exe- cuted)

Data link not executed Data link being executed (Cyclic transmission stopped)

GOT R/W Green

Offline, or hardware test, self-loopback test, internal self-loopback test or station-to-station test being executed

Online or circuit test being executed

R LOOP ERR Red OUT-side error No OUT-side error

No. Item Description

(3)

IN: Loop Sts. Displays the IN-side connection status of the host station. (Normal/Rev connect)

IN: LoopBK Sta Displays the station No. of the IN-side loopback station. (No loopback station: ---, value: 1 to 120)

IN: LoopBK factor Displays the cause of the loopback. (No LoopBK Sta./OUT: cable disconnection/OUT: connecting a line/OUT: wrong cable connection)

OUT: Loop Sts. Displays the OUT-side connection status of the host station. (Normal/Rev connect)

OUT: LoopBK Sta Displays the station No. of the OUT-side loopback station. (No loopback station: ---, value: 1 to 120)

OUT: LoopBK factor Displays the cause of the loopback. (No LoopBK Sta./IN: cable disconnection/IN: connecting a line/IN: wrong cable connection)

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

14 - 27

(3) Data link information Displays the data link information (Com Status, Cause of Ssp, Cause of Stop) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.

(4) Transient status Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error codes.

No. Item Description

(4) Com Status

Displays the communication status of the host station. D-Link in prog. D-Link stopped B-Pass exec B-Pass stopped Testing Offline Offline

(5) Cause of Ssp

Displays the cause of the interrupted communication (transient transmission) of the host station. Normal Comm Cable disconnection Wrong cable connection Checking cable IN/OUT Disconnecting/returning to system Offline Offline test Self-check mode

(6) Cause of Stop

Displays the cause of the interrupted data link (cyclic transmission) of the host station. Normal Comm StopOrder D-Link observation timer time up Testing Line Param not rcvd Host out of range Host reservation Dup Host No. Dup CtrlSta Sta.No. not set Invalid NETWK No. Param Err Params in comm. CPU stop error CPU pwr stp err

No. Item Description (7) Transmission Err Displays the number of transient transmission errors.

(8) ErrCode Other than GT155

The histories of 16 latest errors are displayed in 16 rows in reverse chronological order.

GT155 Only the latest error is displayed in one row.

14 - 28 14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(5) Link scan time information Displays the link scan time.

(6) Host station line status Displays the connection status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

No. Item Description

(9)

Current LS time Displays the current link scan time. Max. LS time Displays the maximum link scan time. Min. LS time Displays the minimum link scan time. Constant LS time Displays the link scan time set in the parameter.

No. Item Description

(10)

Connction

Displays the connection status of the host station.

Other than GT155

Normal IN: Loop Back (OUT: cable disconnection) IN: Loop Back (OUT: connecting a line) IN: Loop Back (OUT: wrong cable connection) OUT: Loop Back (IN: cable disconnection) OUT: Loop Back (IN: connecting a line) OUT: Loop Back (IN: wrong cable connection) Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: cable disconnection) Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: connecting a line) Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: wrong cable connection) Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: cable disconnection) Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: connecting a line) Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: wrong cable connection) Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connection, OUT: cable disconnection) Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connection, OUT: connecting a line) Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connction, OUT: wrong cable connction)

GT155

Normal OUT: cable disconnection OUT: connecting a line OUT: wrong cable connection IN: cable disconnection IN: connecting a line IN: wrong cable connection Disconnect

IN: cable disconnct count

0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors

IN: line err count 0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors OUT: cable disconnct count

0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors

OUT: line err count 0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

14 - 29

3 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

(1) LED status Displays the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit operation status.

* For monochrome display, it is displayed as (lit) or (not lit).

No. Item LED

color* Lit Not lit Blink

(1)

RUN Green Operating normally

Hardware failure or WDT error occurred, communication unit being reset

MST Green Operating as master station

Operating other than as master station

DLINK Green

For online mode: Data link being executed For test mode: Test completed

For online mode: Data link stopped For test mode: Test being executed

Data link being executed

ERR Red Communication error occurred

Normal, unit being reset Faulty data link station

LERR Red Reception data error Reception data normal SD Green Sending data Not sending data RD Green Receiving data Not receiving data MODE Green Online mode Offline mode Test mode

LER1 Red PORT1 side reception frame error

PORT1 side reception frame normal

LER2 Red PORT2 side reception frame error

PORT2 side reception frame normal

LINK1 Green PORT1 side linking up PORT1 side linking down LINK2 Green PORT2 side linking up PORT2 side linking down GOT R/W Green Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT

(3) (4)

(5)

(8)

(6)

(7)

(9)

(1)

(2)

14 - 30 14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(2) Link information Displays the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit link status.

(3) Data link information Displays the data link information (Com Status, Cause of Ssp, Cause of Stop) of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.

No. Item Description

(2)

Host PORT1 link info

Link up status

Displays the link up status (Linking up/Linking down) of the host station PORT1 side.

Host PORT2 link info

Link up status

Displays the link up status (Linking up/Linking down) of the host station PORT2 side.

No. Item Description

(3) Com Status

Displays the communication (data link) status of the host station. D-Link in prog. B-Pass exec B-Pass stopped Testing Offline Offline

(4) Cause of Ssp

Displays the cause of the interrupted communication (baton pass) of the host station. Normal Comm Cable disconnection Disconnecting/returning to system Offline Offline test - H/W test Offline test - self-loopback test Offline test - Shipping test

(5) Cause of Stop

Displays the cause of the interrupted data link (cyclic transmission) of the host station. Normal Comm StopOrder D-Link observation timer time up Slave stations do not exist Param not rcvd Host out of range Host reservation Dup Host No. Dup Master Sta.: Master detected Sta.No. not set Param Err(Other) Params in comm. CPU stop error Invalid ring configuration

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

14 - 31

(4) Unit error information Displays the number of unit errors and the error codes.

(5) Link scan time information Displays the link scan time.

(6) Host station line status Displays the connection status of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.

No. Item Description (6) Unit error Displays the number of module errors. (7) ErrCode Error histories of 16 errors are displayed in 16 lows from the latest.

No. Item Description

(8)

Current LS time Displays the current link scan time. Max. LS time Displays the maximum link scan time. Min. LS time Displays the minimum link scan time. Constant LS time Displays the link scan time set in the parameter.

No. Item Description

(9)

Connection

Displays the connection status of the host station. Normal (PORT1: communicating, PORT2: communicating) Normal (PORT1: communicating, PORT2: cable disconnected) Normal (PORT1: in loopBK communication, PORT2 cable disconnected) Normal (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: communicating) Normal (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: in loopBK communication) Disconnect (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: cable disconnected) Disconnect (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: connecting a line) Disconnect (PORT1: connecting a line, PORT2: cable disconnected) Disconnect (PORT1: connecting a line, PORT2: connecting a line)

PORT1: cable disconnct count 0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors PORT1: line err count 0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors PORT2: cable disconnct count 0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors PORT2: line err count 0: No error, 1 or more: Number of accumulated errors

14 - 32 14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 CC-Link communication unit

(1) LED status Displays the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) operation status.

No. Item LED color

Lit Not lit Blink

(a)

RUN Green Running normally WDT error occurred or unit being reset

ERR. Red All station communication error

No communication error occurred or unit being reset

There is a communication error station or duplicated station numbers.

TIME Red

No responses from all stations due to cable breakage or transmission path affected by noise

Responses from all stations

MST Green Operating as master station

Operating other than as master station

SW Red Switch setting error No switch setting error LINE Red Cable breakage error No cable breakage error

S MST Green Operating as standby master station

Operating other than as standby master station

M/S Red Duplicate master station error

No duplicate master station error

LOCAL Green Operating as local station Operating other than as local station

PRM Red Parameter error No parameter error GOT R/W Green Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT

(b)

(c)(a)

14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

14 - 33

(2) Data link information Displays the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) data link startup status and error status.

No. Item Description

(b) D-Link Boot Status

Displays the data link startup status. D-Link in prog. : Data link being executed D-Link Offline : Data link being stopped Initialize : Set to the initial status Parameter wait : Parameter not received Disconnect (No Polling) : In cut-off status with no inquiry from master

station Disconnect (Line Err) : In cut-off status due to line error Disconnect (Other) : In cut-off status due to other causes Testing Line : Line test being executed Testing Pram Setup : Parameter setting test being executed from

master station Auto Reconnecting : Return processing being executed

automatically Reset. in prgr. : CC-Link communication unit being reset

(GOT reset status)

(c) Error Status

Displays the status of the current error. Normal : Normal status Invalid TransPath : Transmission path error detected Invalid Parameter : Parameter error detected CRC Error : Reception data error detected Time Out Error : Timeout error detected in data reception Abort Error : Error detected in data communication

Invalid Setup : Invalid station number, station type,

transmission speed, or mode setting detected

Other Abnormality : Error due to some other cause detected

14 - 34 14.8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14.8.3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.9 System Alarm Display

14.9.1 System alarm display function

System alarm display is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT, controller or network. System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen. For details of system alarm, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (10. ALARM)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (8. ALARM)

14.9.2 Displaying the system alarm display

Main menu [Debug & self check]

System alarm display

Touch [Debug & self

check].

Touch [System alarm

display].

Touching Reset resets the

system alarm display in the

GOT error.

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14.9 System Alarm Display 14.9.1 System alarm display function

14 - 35

14.9.3 Operating the system alarm display

1 System Alarm display resetting

(1) Before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error Eliminate the system alarm cause before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error. If not eliminated, the system alarm display in the GOT error will not be reset even after the reset operation.

(2) Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset.

GOT error code (Write device) GOT error detection signal (System Signal 2-1.b13)

1 Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being occurred. Error causes can be identified by the error code, error message and channel No. displayed on the System alarm display screen. ( 20. TROUBLESHOOTING)

2 A method for resetting system alarm depends on an error. GOT error

Touch the button to reset system alarms.

CPU error and Network error The system alarm is automatically reset after its cause is eliminated.

Touch.

Reset

14 - 36 14.9 System Alarm Display 14.9.3 Operating the system alarm display

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.10 GOT Start Time

14.10.1 GOT start time function

GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time. Start time of GOT Current time of GOT Operating hours of GOT

14.10.2 Display operation of GOT start time

Main menu [Debug & self check]

GOT start time

Touch [Debug & self check].

Touch [GOT start time].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14.10 GOT Start Time 14.10.1 GOT start time function

14 - 37

14.10.3 Display of GOT start time

To display correct time

Set the clock of GOT.( 12.1 Time Setting and Display) When the clock has not been set, the correct time is not displayed at [Start Time] and [Current Time].

Remark Time displayed at [Operating hours]

[Operating hours] is displayed irrespective of [Start Time] and [Current Time]. When changing the clock of the GOT, [Operating hours] does not match with the difference between [Current Time] and [Start Time]. ([Operating hours] is not the time calculated from [Current Time] and [Start Time].) The time displayed at [Operating hours] is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset-restarted (OS installation, communication setting change).

Item Description

Start Time Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset-restarted (OS installation, communication setting change).

Current Time Displays the current time.

Operating hours

Displays operating hours of the GOT. The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset- restarted (OS installation, communication setting change). When powering off or reset-restarting the GOT, the operating hours is cleared.

14 - 38 14.10 GOT Start Time 14.10.3 Display of GOT start time

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

14.11 Operator Information Management The operator information management is a function to display a list of the operator information and add, change, or delete the operator information to be used for the operator authentication. For details of the operator authentication, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.7 Security Setting) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.5 Security Setting)

14.11.1 Operator management

1 Operator management function The function enables adding, editing, and deleting the operator information to be used for the operator authentication. The function also enables importing and exporting the operator information as the backup data to/from a memory card.

Items Description Reference page

Operator management Enables adding, editing, deleting, importing, and exporting the operator information.

14-39

Password change Enables changing passwords to be used for login and logout in/out of the GOT.

14-52

Function setting Enables setting the automatic logout time and password expiration date.

14-54

Function Description Reference page

Add operation Adds operator information to the GOT. 14-44

Edit operation Edits the operator information stored in the GOT. 14-47

Delete operation Deletes the operator information stored in the GOT. 14-48

Undo operation Restores the current operator information to the previous saved one. 14-49

Import operation Imports the operator information, which is already exported to a CF card or a USB memory, to the GOT.

14-50

Export operation Exports the operator information stored in the GOT to a CF card or a USB memory.

14-51

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

14 - 39

2 Display operation of operator management

3 Display example of operator management (1) Operator information management screen

No. Item Description

(a) Operator Name Displays operator names.

Main menu Debug & self check Operator setting menu

Operator management

Touch [Debug & self

check].

Touch [Operator

management].

Touch [Operator info.

Management].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

(b) (c) (d)

(a)

(f) (e)

1

4 - 40 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(2) Operator information edit screen Touch the button or touch the button with the operator information selected on the Operator information management screen, and then the Operator information edit screen is displayed. The operator information can be edited.

*1 Since the key window is for hexadecimal format, the setting range can be input in the range of A to F or 0 to 9.

No. Item Description

(b) ID Displays operator IDs.

(c) Level Displays security levels for operators.

(d) Update Displays the last updated dates of the operator information.

(e) Operation keys Execution keys for each function

(f) Drive in use

Displays and sets the storage location for imported and exported operator information. To switch the drive, touch the key. (A: Built-in CF card/B: Extended memory card/ E: USB drive) Only when the extended memory card or the USB drive is installed on the GOT, the user can switch the drive.

No. Item Description

(a) Operator Name The operator name to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added. (Up to 16 alphanumeric characters)

(b) Operator ID The operator ID to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added. (Setting range: 1 to 32766, Maximum number of registrations: 255)

(c) Level The operator security level to be edited is displayed or input an operator security level to be added. (0 to 15)

(d) Password Input a password.

(e) Make a permanent password

Switches the setting of the item disabled and enabled.

( : Disabled : Enabled)

(f) Use ext. auth. ID Switches whether to use the external authentication ID.

( : Not Used : Used)

(g) Ext.auth. ID

The external authentication ID is displayed or input an external authentication ID. (Fingerprint authentication ID setting range: numbers 1 to 7 digits, External authentication ID setting range: alphanumerics 4 to 32 digits)

14.11.3 Function setting

Add Edit

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

14 - 41

4 Operator management operation

1 Touch [Operator management] in the operator setting menu.

2 The Admin password authentication screen is displayed, and then input the administrator password. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

Alphabet capital

Alphabet small letter

Numeric When the input is completed, touch the

key.

3 When the administrator password is correctly input, the Operator information management screen in displayed. For operating operation switches, refer to the following. Add.................... this section (1) Edit.................... this section (2) Delete................ this section (3) Undo.................. this section (4) Import................ this section (5) Export................ this section (6)

4 After all settings are completed, touch the button, and then the settings are

saved.

A-Z

a-z

0-9

Enter

Save

14 - 42 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

5 Touch the button without touching the button, and then the dialog box

shown left is displayed. Save

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

14 - 43

(1) Add operation Add operator information to the GOT.

1 Touch the button.

2 The Operator information edit screen is displayed, and then touch an item to be edited. (a) OperatorName (b) OperatorID (c) Level (d) Password (e) Make a permanent password (f) Use ext. auth. ID (g) Ext.auth. ID

(a) Touch the OperatorName, and then the Operator name input dialog box is displayed. Input an operator name. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

Alphabet capital

Alphabet small letter

Numeric When the input is completed,

touch the key.

(b) Touch the OperatorID, and then the Operator ID input dialog box is displayed. Input an operator ID. When the input is completed,

touch the key.

Add

A-Z

a-z

0-9

Enter

Enter

14 - 44 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(c) Touch the level, and then the Operator level input dialog box is displayed. Input an operator level. When the input is completed,

touch the key.

When the level of the operator being login is changed during editing the operator information, a new level is not reflected until you log out of the GOT once and log in the GOT again.

(d) For changing passwords during editing, touch the password. The New password input dialog box is displayed, and then input a password. When the input is completed,

touch the key.

When the password input is completed, the New password input confirmation dialog box is displayed. Input the same password.

Enter

Enter

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

14 - 45

(e) For enabling the setting of [Make a permanent password], touch the check box for [Make a permanent password], and then the setting is switched.

: Disabled

: Enabled

(f) For using the external authentication ID, touch the check box "Use ext. auth. ID" and switch the setting.

: The external authentication ID is not used.

: The external authentication ID is used.

(g) Touch Ext.auth ID to display the external authentication ID input dialog box, and enter the external recognition ID. When the input is completed,

touch the key. When the authentication method is set to "Fingerprint auth" or "External auth (general)", the external authentication ID can be input with the external authentication device.

3 Touch the button after all items are input, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added.

4 Touch the button or the button, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed.

Enter

OK

Cancel

14 - 46 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(2) Edit operation Edit the operator information stored in the GOT.

1 Select the operator information to be edited with touching the operator information.

2 Touch the button.

3 The Operator information edit screen is displayed, and then touch an item to be edited. (a) Level (b) Password (c) Make a permanent password (d) Use ext. auth. ID (e) Ext.auth. ID For how to edit operator information, refer to the following.

this section (1) Add operation

4 Touch the button after all items are input, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is changed.

5 Touch the button or the button, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed.

Edit

OK

Cancel

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

14 - 47

(3) Delete operation Delete the operator information stored in the GOT.

1 Select the operator information to be deleted with touching the operator information.

2 Touch the button, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed.

Touch the button, and then the selected operator information is deleted.

Touch the button, and then the delete operation is canceled.

3 When the delete operation is completed, a completion dialog box is displayed.

4 Touch the button, and then the dialog box is closed.

Delete

OK

Cancel

OK

14 - 48 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(4) Undo operation Restore the current operator information to the previous saved one.

1 Touch the button.

2 The dialog box shown left is displayed, and then touch the button.

3 The Admin password authentication screen is displayed, and then input the administrator password. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

Alphabet capital

Alphabet small letter

Numeric When the input is completed, touch the

key.

4 When the administrator password is correctly input, the current operator information is restored to the previous saved one.

Undo

OK

A-Z

a-z

0-9

Enter

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

14 - 49

(5) Import operation Import the operator information that is already exported to a memory card to the GOT.

1 Touch the button.

2 The dialog box shown left is displayed.

Touch button, and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed. Input the administrator password. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

Alphabet capital

Alphabet small letter

Numeric When the input is completed, touch the

key.

3 When the administrator password is correctly input, the dialog box shown left is displayed and the operator information stored in a memory card is imported to the GOT.

4 (file name: AUTHINF.G1U)

Import

OK

A-Z

a-z

0-9

Enter

14 - 50 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(6) Export operation Export the operator information stored in the GOT to a memory card.

1 Touch the button.

2 The dialog box on the left is displayed. Touch the following buttons according to the output format for the file.

Binary file : button

CSV file : button

3 The dialog box shown left is displayed.

Touch button, and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed. Input the administrator password. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

Alphabet capital

Alphabet small letter

Numeric When the input is completed, touch the

key.

4 When the administrator password is correctly input, the dialog box shown left is displayed and the operator information stored in the GOT is exported to a memory card.

Export

Binary

CSV

OK

A-Z

a-z

0-9

Enter

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.1 Operator management

14 - 51

14.11.2 Password change

1 Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed. For the password change, log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed.

2 Display operation of password change

Main menu Debug & self check Self check

Password change

Touch [Debug & self

check].

Touch

[Password change].Touch [Operator info.

Management].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

1

4 - 52 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.2 Password change

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 Password change operation

1 Log into the GOT with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed on the Main Menu screen for the utility.

2 Touch [Password change] in the operator setting menu, and then the Password change dialog box is displayed.

3 Input the current password on the Password change dialog box. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

Alphabet capital

Alphabet small letter

Numeric When the input is completed, touch the

key.

4 Input a new password.

5 After inputting a new password, input the new password again.

A-Z

a-z

0-9

Enter

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.2 Password change

14 - 53

14.11.3 Function setting

1 Function setting function The functions for the operator information can be set. The following items can be set.

6 When the new password is correctly input, the dialog box shown left is displayed and the password is changed.

Items Description Reference page

Automatic logout time The time from when the last time the GOT is operated until when you automatically log out of the GOT can be set. (1 to 60 minutes, 0 is invalid.)

14-56

Auth method

The authentication method can be switched. ([Operator name + password], [External auth (general)], [Fingerprint authentication]) When [External auth (general)] or [Fingerprint authentication] is selected, the check box for [Operator name + password] is displayed.

14-56

Password expiration date

Set the item for regularly changing the password to be used for the operator authentication. (1 to 1000 days, 0 is invalid.) When the password is out of date after setting the password, the GOT requests the password change.

14-57

Initial position input Set the initial position input (byte count) of external authentication ID from among the data read from the external authentication device. (0 to 1998 bytes)

14-57

Valid byte count input Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID. (2 to 16 bytes)

14-57

14 - 54 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.3 Function setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

2 Display operation of function setting

Operator setting menu

Function setting

Touch [Function

setting].

Main menu Debug & self check

Touch [Debug & self

check].

Touch [Operator info.

Management].

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.3 Function setting

14 - 55

3 Function setting operation

1 Touch [Function setting] in the operator setting menu, and then the Admin password authentication dialog box is displayed.

2 Input the administrator password. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons.

Alphabet capital

Alphabet small letter

Numeric When the input is completed, touch the

key.

3 When the administrator password is correctly input, the Function setting screen in displayed. Touch an item to be set. (a) Automatic logout time (b) Auth method (c) Password expiration date (d) Initial position input (e) Valid byte count input

(a) Touch [Automatic logout time], and then the Automatic logout time edit dialog box is displayed. Input the time. When the input is completed,

touch the key.

(b) Authentication method Switch the authentication method. Touch the item to switch the display between [Operator name + password] [External auth (general) ] [Fingerprint auth]

[Operator name + password].

A-Z

a-z

0-9

Enter

Enter

14 - 56 14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.3 Function setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

When [External auth (general)] or [Fingerprint authentication] is selected, the check box for [Operator name + password] is displayed. If the check box is selected, the login is also enabled with [Operator name + password].

(c) Touch [Password expiration date], and then the Password expiration date edit dialog box is displayed. Input the expiration date. When the input is completed,

touch the key.

(d) Initial position input Set the initial position input (byte count) of external authentication ID from among the data read from the external authentication device.

(e) Valid byte count input Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID. (Only available when the external authentication (general) is set as the authentication method.)

4 Touch the button after all items are input, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input setting is saved.

5 Touch the button without touching the button, and then the dialog box

shown left is displayed.

Enter

OK

OK

14.11 Operator Information Management 14.11.3 Function setting

14 - 57

14.12 Fingerprint authentication

14.12.1 The fingerprint authentication function

For executing the operator management using the fingerprint unit, fingerprint information must be registered to the fingerprint unit. This section describes how to get a fingerprint ID from the fingerprint information of the utility function. Refer to the following manual for details of drawing settings.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (4.7 Security Setting)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (3.5 Security Setting)

14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

1 Administrator password setting (1) Administrator password setting function

For registering or deleting fingerprint IDs, the administrator password must be set.

(2) Administrator password setting display operation When the administrator password is not set, the password input window is displayed before the selection of the administrator password setting, and the setting for password is required.

Main menu Debug & self check

Touch [Debug & self

check].

Touch [Fingerprint

authentication].

Touch [Administrator

password setting].

Fingerprint information management

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14 - 58

14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.1 The fingerprint authentication function

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(3) Administrator password setting operation Set the administrator password for fingerprint ID.

1 Touch [Administrator password setting] in the Fingerprint information management screen.

2 The dialog box shown left is displayed. Input the pre-registered administrator password and touch the key. (Up to 16 alphanumeric characters) Touch the key to return to the [Fingerprint information management] screen.

3 Touch the key to display the dialog box shown left. Input a new administrator password and touch the key. (Up to 16 alphanumeric characters) Touch the key to return to the [Fingerprint information management] screen.

4 Touch the key to display the dialog box shown left. Input a new administrator password again and touch the key. (Up to 16 alphanumeric characters) Touch the key to return to the [Fingerprint information management] screen.

Enter

Enter

Enter

Enter

Enter

14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

14 - 59

2 Contents registered list (1) Functions of Contents registered list

The operator fingerprint ID used in the fingerprint authentication can be added or deleted.

(2) Display operation of Contents registered list

5 When the password is input correctly, the data is updated with the new administrator password, and the dialog box shown left is displayed. Touch the button to return to the [Fingerprint information management] screen.

OK

Main menu Debug & self check

Touch [Debug & self

check].

Touch [Fingerprint

authentication].

Touch [Contents

registered list].

Fingerprint information management

( 9.3 Utility Display)

14

- 60 14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(3) Display example of Contents registered list (a) Contents registered list screen

Touch [Contents registered list] in the Fingerprint information management screen to display the administrator password authentication screen. After the password, which is set in [Administrator password setting], is correctly input, the following screen is displayed.

*1 Two fingerprints can be registered for each fingerprint ID. If two different fingerprints are registered for each operator, the fingerprint authentication can be executed even if one of the registered fingers cannot be used due to injury, etc.

Number Item Description

(1) Fingerprint ID Displays the fingerprint ID. (Maximum number of registrations: 100)

(2) Number of registered

fingerprints*1 The number of fingerprints registered in the fingerprint ID is displayed.

(3) REG Key for registering a fingerprint ID

(4) DEL Key for deleting a fingerprint ID

(5) DEL ALL Key for deleting all the fingerprint ID

(3)

(4)

(5)

(2)(1)

14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

14 - 61

(b) Operator registration screen

In the Contents registered list screen, touch the button to display the following screen.

Number Item Description

(1) Fingerprint ID The fingerprint ID is displayed or input a fingerprint ID. (Numbers: 1 to 7 digits)

(2) Select total count Select "Finger 1" or "Finger 2" for the fingerprint ID.

REG

(2)

(1)

14 - 62 14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

(4) Operation of Contents registered list For logging into the GOT using the fingerprint unit, the fingerprint information of the operator must be registered in the operator information. Refer to the following for details of operator information.

14.11 Operator Information Management Refer to the following for precautions when registering fingerprints.

this section (2) For registering operator

1 In the fingerprint information management, touch the [Contents registered list].

2 The administrator password authentication screen is displayed.

3 After the administrator password is correctly input, a list of fingerprint IDs registered in the fingerprint unit is displayed.

4 To register a fingerprint ID, touch the button.

Touch the button after selecting a fingerprint ID to delete the selected ID. Touch the button to delete all the registered fingerprint IDs.

REG

DEL

DEL ALL

14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

14 - 63

5 Input the fingerprint ID of the operator to be registered. (Input the same ID as the external authentication ID registered in the operator information edit screen.)

6 Touch the setting item of [Select total count] to switch in order of [Finger 1] [Finger 2] [Finger 1].

7 Enter all the items, and touch the button.

8 If the button is touched before the button is touched, the ID is not

registered, and the screen is returned to the Contents registered list screen.

9 Touch the button, follow the instruction, which is displayed in the dialog box, and register the fingerprint of the operator to be registered. Touch the button to return to [Contents registered list]. After [Finger 2] is selected and one fingerprint is registered, the screen is returned to [Contents registered list] even if the button is touched for registering the second fingerprint.

OK

OK

OK

Cancel

Cancel

14 - 64 14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

3 Authentication operation This section describes how to log into the GOT using the fingerprint authentication. For details of the procedures for creating an extended function switch that displays a login button on the user-created screen, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (2.7 Setting Special Function Switch)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (6.2.5 Setting items of special function switch)

10 After registering to the fingerprint unit is completed, the registration completion notice dialog box is displayed.

11 Touch the button to return to the [Contents registered list] screen.

1 Touch the button created in the user-created screen.

2 The dialog box shown left is displayed. Touch the button to return to the screen in .

OK

1

Login

Extended function switch

(Login)

Login

Login

Cancel

14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

14 - 65

3 Put the registered finger on the fingerprint unit.

4 When the fingerprint is correctly recognized, the dialog box shown left is displayed.

5 Touch the button to return to the user-created screen.

Login

OK

14 - 66 14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

4 Precautions (1) For installing fingerprint unit

The fingerprint unit complies with the protective structure IP4X. The unit cannot be used with wet fingers or oil fingers. The protective structure of the fingerprint unit differs from that of the GOT (IP67). When using the GOT, do not use with wet fingers or oil fingers.

Use the fingerprint unit under the brightness with the external light of 5000Lx or less. Do not pull the cable.

Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module. The fingerprint unit is a consumable product.

Check the unit for scratch, damage or dirt at regular intervals, and replace with new one if necessary.

To be recognized as a fingerprint, put the finger including fingertip on the fingerprint reader firmly with covering the reader as shown in the following figure.

The following shows corrective actions when the fingerprint unit operates incorrectly.

(2) For registering operator When selecting [Finger 2] in the [Select total count] in (4) of this section, register two

fingerprints consecutively. To execute [Finger 2], do not register the same finger twice. It may cause malfunction of the device.

(3) For registering operator again When the fingerprint registration is completed, another fingerprint cannot be registered.

To register another fingerprint, delete the existing fingerprint ID, and start to register another fingerprint ID.

Troubles Causes Corrective actions

When the fingerprint is registered, the fingerprint reader does not light brightly even when the finger is put on the reader.

Dry finger Moisten the finger with breath and put the finger again.

Dirty finger Remove stains and put the finger again.

When the fingerprint is registered, the fingerprint reader remains lit brightly.

The finger is not put on firmly. Press the finger on the fingerprint reader firmly.

Thin finger Change the registered finger to the middle finger or first finger.

When the fingerprint is recognized, the fingerprint is not recognized by the fingerprint reader unless the finger is put on the reader a number of times.

The unclear fingerprint image is registered.

Change the registered fingerprint.

Press the finger including

fingertip on the fingerprint

reader firmly.

Put the finger on

the fingerprint reader

with covering the reader.

14.12 Fingerprint authentication 14.12.2 Operating the fingerprint authentication

14 - 67

15. CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION (CLEAN)

In utility, the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes. Refer to the below for the cleaning procedure.

19.3 Cleaning Method

15.1 Clean

15.1.1 Display operation of Clean

Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen, the GOT does not operates.

Main menu Clean

Touch [Clean]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

15

- 1 15.1 Clean 15.1.1 Display operation of Clean

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

15.1.2 Operation of Clean

After cleaning the screen, touch the screen following the instruction displayed. After touching the screen, the screen returns to the Main Menu.

Depending on the GOT to use, either of the following screens is displayed.

Display pattern 1

Display pattern 2

15.1 Clean 15.1.2 Operation of Clean

15 - 2

16. MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING (MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING)

Energization time, touch count and writing times used as standard for the maintenance time are set. When use the maintenance timing function, battery and option function board are required. Refer to the following below for details of battery and option function board.

8. OPTION

16 - 1

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

16.1 Maintenance Timing Setting

16.1.1 Function of the maintenance timing setting

When use maintenance time notification function, battery and option function button are required. When setting the maintenance notifying time, refer to the life descrived in Section 3.2 Performance Specifications as a guide to set time or count. The maintenance time notification is output by the following two methods. Outputs to GOT special register (GS680). Outputs as system alarm

For details of the GOT special register and system alarm, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

Switching OFF the maintenance time notification output

The maintenance time notification setting which has been set once is not switched OFF even if changing its setting. Switch OFF the maintenance time notification by the following methods.

Execute addition time reset. Switch OFF each bit of "maintenance time notification cancel information

(GS638)".

Item Description Setting range Unit

Maintenance points

Reference page

Backlight maintenance time notification period. (0 to 100000 hour)

Sets energization time for the maintenance notification output. When 0, no message notification. The time is counted only when backlight is lit, in every ten minutes.

0 to 100

shipment: 0>

1000 hours

18-5

Display section maintenance time notification period (0 to 100000 hour)

Sets energization time for the maintenance notification output. When 0, no message notification. The time is counted only when energized, in every ten minutes.

0 to 100

shipment: 0>

1000 hours

Touch key maintenance time notification count (0 to 2000000times)

Sets touch key touching count for the maintenance notification output. When 0, no message notification. Counts by every screen touch.

0 to 200

shipment: 0>

10000 times

Built-in flash memory maintenance time notification count (0 to 1000000times)

Sets built-in flash memory writing count for the maintenance notification output. When 0, no message notification. Counts by every writing in built-in flash memory.

0 to 200

shipment: 0>

1000 times

16.1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16.1.1 Function of the maintenance timing setting

16 - 2

By using system alarm, the message that notifies that the maintenance time is near or it is already maintenance time is displayed. For the display of the system alarm, refer to the following.

20. TROUBLESHOOTING

For the display of the system alarm, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

16.1.2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting

For the addition times as power on addition time, refer to the following.

17.1 Addition times reset

Main menu Maintenance time notification settings

Touch [Maintenance

timing setting]

( 9.3 Utility Display)

1

6 - 3 16.1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16.1.2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting

9

U TI

LI TY

F U

N C

TI O

N

10

C O

M M

U N

IC AT

IO N

IN

TE R

FA C

E SE

TT IN

G

11

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

O PE

R AT

IO N

SE

TT IN

G S

12

C LO

C K

SE TT

IN G

S AN

D B

AT TE

R Y

ST AT

U S

D IS

PL AY

13

FI LE

D IS

PL AY

A N

D

C O

PY

14

G O

T SE

LF C

H EC

K

15

C LE

AN IN

G O

F D

IS PL

AY S

EC TI

O N

16

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

SE TT

IN G

16.1.3 Operating the maintenance timing setting

1 Touch a select button (item to be set) on the screen.

Key: If touched, displays the keyboard in the bottom part of the screen.

Remark

If touch after inputting the value out of the setting range, the alarm message is displayed.

2 If touch button, the settings are reflected.

3 If touch button instead of touching button, the settings are canceled after the dialog below is displayed, and the screen closes.

4 If touch button, GOT restarts. 5 After restart, GOT operates with the changed settings.

(For keyboard operation, refer Section 9.3.3 Basic operation of settings change page.)

Define the numerical input by .

Numerical

Enter

Enter

Example:

OK

OK

16.1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16.1.3 Operating the maintenance timing setting

16 - 4

17. ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION (ADDITION TIMES RESET)

Displays the present value of Backlight maintenance time notification period, Display section maintenance time notification period, Touch key maintenance time notification count and Built-in flash memory maintenance time notification count which are additioned for the maintenance time notification, respectively and resets these values. For maintenance time notification setting, refer to the following.

16.MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING (MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING)

17.1 Addition times reset

17.1.1 Addition times reset function

Resets the value which is additioned by the "16.1.1 Function of the maintenance timing setting" to "0".

17.1.2 Display operation of Addition times reset

Item Description

Backlight power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to "0".

Display power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to "0".

Touch key pushing addition times reset Function to reset the pushing addition times to "0".

Build in flash memory writing addition times reset Function to reset the writing addition times to "0".

Main menu Addtion times reset

Touch [Addtion

times reset] Addition time

( 9.3 Utility Display)

17 -

1 17.1 Addition times reset 17.1.1 Addition times reset function

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

17.1.3 Operation of Addition times reset

1 If touch button of each item, the addition time or the addition count becomes "0".

2 If touch button, the reset value is reflected.

3 If touch button instead of touching button, the changed contents are canceled after the dialog below is displayed, and the screen closes.

4 Touching the button returns the main menu screen.

Addition times resetting timing

It is convenient to reset addition times when replace backlight, display section, touch panel or built-in flash memory.

Reset

OK

OK

17.1 Addition times reset 17.1.3 Operation of Addition times reset

17 - 2

18. INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS

For executing the GOT utility, install the BootOS and standard monitor OS on the C drive (built-in flash memory) of the GOT, or set the OS boot drive to [A: Standard CF Card] and insert the CF card with OS files into the GOT. (BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment. It is not necessary to install BootOS when upgrading of it is unnecessary. ) This chapter explains the installation using GOT.

For details of the installation using GT Designer3 or GT Designer2, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT)

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transmission Manual

CoreOS

In 18.1 to 18.4 of this chapter, only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described. For CoreOS, refer to the following. Section 18.5 CoreOS

BootOS or standard

monitor OS installation

BootOS, standard

monitor OS installation

CF card

GT Designer3

or

GT Designer2

CF card

GOT

GOTGOT

Write OS file

OS file upload

When GOT is remote, installed

easily using the CF card

Install OS from GOT to GOT

using CF card

GT Designer2 CF card GOT

GT Designer3

or

GOT CF card GOT

Install the CF

card in GOT

Install the CF

card in GOT

CF card Install the CF

card in GOT Write OS file

GOT The GOT can starts without an

OS installed.

Set the OS boot drive to

[A: Standard CF Card].

18 - 1

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

18.1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation

Under-mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility.

OS name Function overview Storage location

BootOS

Requied for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT. Installed at factory shipment. (BootOS can be installed from GT Designer3, GT Designer2 or the CF card. When installed from GT Designer3, GT Designer2 or the CF card, GOT is initialized to be the factory shipment status. Standard monitor OS must be pre- installed in the GOT when installing the BootOS again.)

Built-in flash memory C: \G1BOOT\

CF card that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A drive A:\G1BOOT\

Standard monitor OS

Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring function of GOT, installation and deletion of the OS file or project data, touch key control or display function of the screen and guidance.

Required for display and operation of the user-created screen and utility screen. Not installed in GOT at factory shipment. Install it from GT Designer3, GT Designer2 or the memory card. At installation, select [Mincho] or [Gothic] for the 16-dot standard font.

Built-in flash memory C:\G1SYS\

CF card that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A drive A:\G1SYS\

System screen data

System screen management information file

TrueType numerical font

12-dot standard font (Gothic)

16-dot standard font (Mincho)

16-dot standard font (Gothic)

18.1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation

18 - 2

18.2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS

For the installation using GOT, the memory card storing BootOS or standard monitor OS is required. For the method of writing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the memory card, the following three methods are available.

(1) [To Memory Card] from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7.2 Transferring Data to Memory Card)

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual

8.9 Transferring Data Using a Memory Card (PC memory card GOT)

(2) Uploading from other GOT (BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed)

13. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL)

(3) Using CF card that stores data with OS boot drive set to A drive

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual

Precautions on writing BootOS, standard monitor OS in memory card

When writing BootOS, standard monitor OS, etc. in the memory card, be sure to execute by the utility of other GOT, GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. The installation is not executed properly with the memory card to which uploaded from the utility of GOT or copied by softwares other than GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. Note the available capacity of the memory card. The available capacity of BootOS and standard monitor OS can be confirmed by [To Memory Card] of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

Capacity of standard monitor OS

18 - 3 18.2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

18.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card

There are the following two types for the BootOS,standard monitor OS installation.

(1) Installing when starting the GOT ( 18.3.1) All the OS and project data stored in the memory card are transferred to the GOT when powering on the GOT. This installing method is effective in the following cases. The GOT utility cannot be displayed. The standard monitor OS is not installed.

(2) Installing using the Program/Data control function (Utility) ( 18.3.1) By operating the utility, select OS or project data stored in the memory card and transfer them to the GOT.

Precautions on installing BootOS, standard monitor OS

(1) Installing both BootOS and standard monitor OS After completing BootOS installation, install standard monitor OS. When installing BootOS, the built-in flash memory in the GOT is initialized and goes to the status at factory shipment. (All OS and project data are erased.)

BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment. It is not necessary to install BootOS when not upgrading it.

(2) Copying project data using a CF card After installing BootOS, standard monitor OS, and other OS, download the project data. At this time, match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created.

(3) When OS and project data are in the CF card (when using GT Designer3 or GT Designer2) For a 2-point press installation, after the OS installation is complete, the project data is downloaded. When installing with the utility, install the OS and download the project data from their respective operation screens.

(4) Installation cannot be interrupted. Do not perform any of the following during a BootOS or standard monitor OS installation. Failure to do so may result in installation failure, causing the GOT malfunction.

Powering off the GOT Pressing the reset button of the GOT Turning off the CF card access switch of the GOT Removing the CF card

18.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card

18 - 4

If the installation failure and the GOT malfunction occur, take the following action. If BootOS installation failed

Install CoreOS.

( 18.5.1Installing the CoreOS) If standard monitor OS installation failed:

Install BootOS.

( 18.3.1Installing when starting the GOT)

18.3.1 Installing when starting the GOT

The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of standard monitor OS. When the screen requesting operation is displayed, operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen.

(1) Drives to be used When installing OS at power-on, use the A drive. The B drive cannot be used for OS installation at power-on.

(2) 2-point press installation function When the CF card that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A drive is used, the 2-point press installation function is not available.

1 Operation procedure

1 Power OFF the GOT, switch the CF card access switch to OFF, and install the CF card where the BootOS, standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of the GOT. BootOS cannot be stored in the CF card where the standard monitor OS or project data is stored.

2 Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT.

3 Power on the GOT. For GT1595

Power on the GOT while pressing the installation switch (S.MODE switch) on the back of the GOT. (1- point press installation function)

For GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155 Power on the GOT while touching the upper and left of the GOT screen. (2-point presses installation function)

Installation switch ( S. MODE)

For GT1595

Simultaneous

2-point touch

For GT1585, GT157 , GT156 ,

GT155

18 - 5 18.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18.3.1 Installing when starting the GOT

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

4 BootOS, standard monitor OS is installed in the built-in flash memory. The CF card access LED is lit during install execution. Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the CF card access LED is lit.

5 GOT restarts automatically after installation is completed. (When standard monitor OS is already installed, GOT restarts by touching button.)

6 After confirming normal restart, switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT. When it is confirmed that CF card access LED is not lit, remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT.

18.3.2 Installation method using the program/data control function (Utility)

For details of program/data control function, refer to the following.

13. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL)

Precautions on executing program/data control function

When execute program/data control function, standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance. Thus, this function cannot be used for the initial installation of BootOS, standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT. Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods.

(1) GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 (2) Installing when starting the GOT

1 Operation procedure

1 Power OFF the GOT. After CF card access LED is off, install the CF card in which BootOS, standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT.

2 Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT.

Now installing BootOS.

OK

Reboot.

18.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18.3.2 Installation method using the program/data control function (Utility)

18 - 6

3 Display the program/data control function screen (Utility) on the GOT, and install BootOS, standard monitor OS from the CF card to GOT.

4 CF card access LED is lit during install execution. Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the CF card access card is lit.

5 GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed.

6 After confirming that GOT restarted normaly, switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT. Confirm the CF card access LED is not lit, remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT.

Touch [Install]

Reboot.

18 - 7 18.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18.3.2 Installation method using the program/data control function (Utility)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

18.4 When installing the different version of BootOS, standard monitor OS

(1) BootOS installation When installing BootOS, GOT compares the version of the BootOS to be installed with the version of BootOS which is already installed. If the major version of BootOS to be installed is old, execute the following operations to prevent it from being rewritten. (When installing from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2, a message is displayed on the personal computer screen. Follow the instructions in that message.)

(a) When only BootOS is stored in the CF card The message indicating disabled installation is displayed.

Touch the button to cancel installation. After canceling installation, restart the GOT.

(b) When BootOS, standard monitor OS, and other OS are stored in the CF card Skip the BootOS installation and install standard monitor OS and other OS. If the standard monitor OS is already stored on the GOT, the following message is displayed.

Touching the button executes installation.

Touching the button cancels installation. After executing or canceling installation, restart the GOT.

OK

OK

Cancel

18.4 When installing the different version of BootOS, standard monitor OS

18 - 8

(c) When the version is the same or newer regardless of the data stored in the CF card (conditions (a) and (b) above) The version information and a dialog for selecting whether or not to continue installation are displayed.

If touch button, installation is executed.

If touch button, installation is canceled.

(2) Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when installing standard monitor OS. Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match.

When the installation process is discontinued. When the installation process is normally executed. Standard monitor OS : 1. O. O Standard monitor OS : 2. O. O Communication driver : 2. O. O Communication driver : 2. O. O Optional function OS : 2. O. O Optional function OS : 2. O. O

OK

Cancel

Please match the number.

18 - 9 18.4 When insta

lling the different version of BootOS, standard monitor OS

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Checking method of BootOS, standard monitor OS version

1. Check the version of BootOS or standard monitor OS installed in GOT at [OS information] of the utility. Refer to the following for details.

13.2 OS Information 2. Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating

plate on GOT rear face.

MODEL

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL

SERIAL

GT1575-VTBA

00004701

BootOS version

(In case that the BootOS is two digits,

only the first digit is written.)

AA00001-A

IN 100240VAC 50/60Hz

POWER MAX 90VA

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN

A A

BACKLIGHT GT15-70VLTT

18.4 When installing the different version of BootOS, standard monitor OS

18 - 10

18.5 CoreOS Install CoreOS only when the GOT will not be the status of factory shipment even when BootOS is installed. Normally, the CoreOS has not to be installed.

Precautions for installing CoreOS

When executing the CoreOS installation once, it cannot be canceled on the way. Do not attempt the followings to cancel the installation on the way. The GOT may not operate.

Powering the GOT off. Pressing the GOT reset button.

If the GOT does not operate, please consult your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service center or representative.

If the GOT does not recover even when installing the CoreOS, the error may be caused by a hardware failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service center or representative.

18.5.1 Installing the CoreOS

1 Before installing the CoreOS (1) Installing procedureThe CoreOS can be installed only when using a memory card.

Installation via USB/RS-232/Ethernet is not available.

(2) Memory card to be used Memory card of 32MB or more is required.

(3) Boot OS When installing the CoreOS, the latest BootOS is also installed automatically. (Operation by the user is not required.)

18 - 11 18.5 CoreOS 18.5.1 Installing the CoreOS

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

2 Installing the CoreOS

1 Write the CoreOS from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to the CF card. For details of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 operation, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT) GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8. TRANSFERRING DATA)

2 After confirming that the GOT is powered off, install the CF card in the GOT. After installing, switch the CF card access switch on.

3 Powering the GOT on displays the following screen. To cancel the installation, power the GOT off and remove the CF card.

18.5 CoreOS 18.5.1 Installing the CoreOS

18 - 12

4 Turning the CF card access switch off executes Core OS installation.

5 When the installation is completed, the dialog as shown below is displayed. (The POWER LED of the GOT blinks (green/orange) at the installation completion.) Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off.

6 Remove the CF card after powering the GOT off.

7 Powering the GOT on again displays the screen as shown below. (The GOT goes to the status of factory shipment.) Install OS (Standard monitor OS, communication driver, etc.) or download project data as required. For how to install each OS or download project data, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT) GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (8. TRANSFERRING DATA)

18 - 13 18.5 CoreOS 18.5.1 Installing the CoreOS

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

18.5.2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed

When the CoreOS cannot be installed, confirm the following item. If the CoreOS cannot be installed even after checking the following item, the error may be caused by a hardware failure.ss Please consult your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service center or representative.

Error Action

The CoreOS installation is not executed even when installing the CF card in the GOT.

(1) Check whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is on. If the switch is off, switch it on.

(2) The writing from the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to the memory card may not have been completed normally. Execute the writing from the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to the memory card again.

The message is displayed on the GOT

GOT error. Contact your local sales office.

The GOT main unit is broken. Please consult your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service center or representative.

CF card error. Installation will be cancelled. Check whether the CF card can be used.

The CF card is defective. (1) Format the CF card and re-execute. (2) Replace the CF card.

Optional unit has been connected to extension I/F slot. The optional unit should be removed before starting installation. Installation will be canceled.

Remove the extension unit installed on the GOT.

GOT type and OS version do not match. Installation will be canceled.

The GOT type selected at [Core OS write] of the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is not correct. Confirm the GOT type and perform [Core OS write] again.

The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT. Installation will be canceled. Confirm the version of OS.

Install CoreOS from the latest GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

Memory card access switch is off. Turn on the switch and restart the GOT. Installation will be canceled.

The CF card access switch is off. Turn the switch on and restart the GOT.

18.5 CoreOS 18.5.2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed

18 - 14

19. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life. However, the battery, liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length. It is recommended to replace the battery, backlight periodically. (For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen, please consult Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service.) Refer to the following section for the lives of the battery, liquid crystal screen and backlight.

3.2 Performance Specifications

WARNING Connect the battery correctly.

Do not discharge, disassemble, heat, short, solder or throw the battery into the fire. These may cause the buttery to burst or fire.

Do not touch the terminals while the power is on. Doing so can cause an electric shock.

Before starting cleaning or retightening the terminal screws, always switch off the external power sup- plies used in the system in all phases. Cleaning or retightening the terminal screws while the power is on may cause an electric shock.

Before changing the backlight, always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases (when the GOT is connected to the bus, the PLC CPU power must also be switched off externally in all phases) and remove the GOT from the control panel. Not switching off the power in all phases may cause an electric shock. Not removing the unit from the control panel can cause injury due to a drop.

CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the GOT directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to GOT, do not hold and pull the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connec- tion fault.

Before insert/remove the connection cable, power off the GOT. Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction.

When replacing the backlight, use the gloves. Otherwise, it may cause you to be injured.

Start changing the backlight more than 5 minutes after switching the GOT power off. Not doing so can cause a burn due to the heat of the backlight.

Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted on the unit. Doing so can cause the battery to be damaged due to the drop or the impact, making the battery liquid to leak in the battery. Do not use but dispose the battery that is dropped or given an impact.

Before touching the unit, be sure to touch grounded metal or similar objects to discharge the static elec- tricity from human body. Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction of the unit.

When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.

19 - 1

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

19.1 Daily Inspection Daily inspection items

Refer to the following for the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure.

8.12 Protective Sheet

19.2 Periodic Inspection Yearly or half-yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed.

(Continued to next page)

No. Inspection Item Inspection

Method Criterion Action

1 GOT mounting status Check for loose mounting screws.

Securely mounted Retighten screws within the specified torque range.

2 Connection status

Loose terminal screws Retighten screws with screwdriver

Not loose Retighten terminal screws

Proximate solderless terminals

Visual check Proper intervals Correct

Loose connectors Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws

3 Usage status

Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one

Foreign material attachment

Visual check No foreign matter sticking

Remove clean

No. Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action

1 Surrounding environment

Ambient temperature

Make measurement with thermometer or hygrometer Measure corrosive gas

Display section 0 to 40C For use in control panel, temperature inside control panel is ambient temperature

Other portions 0 to 55C

Ambient humidity

10 to 90%RH

Atmosphere No corrosive gas

2

GOT with 100-240V AC power

Power supply voltage check

100 to 240VAC Measure voltage across terminals.

85 to 242VAC Change supply power

GOT with 24VDC power

Input polarity of 24VDC power

24VDC Measure voltage across terminals.

Left : - Right : +

Change wiring

3 Mounting status

Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws

Dirt, foreign matter

Visual check No dirt, foreign matter sticking

Remove, clean

19.1 Daily Inspection

19 - 2

19.3 Cleaning Method Use GOT always in a clean condition. To clean the GOT, wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent or ethanol.

Precautions for screen cleaning

Do not use solvents such as acetone, benzene, toluene, and alcohol (except ethanol). Solvents may deform the protective sheet, dissolve the surface, or peel the paint on the surface. In addition, do not use spray solvents. Doing so may cause an electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices.

No. Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action

4 Connection status

Loose terminal screws

Retighten screws with screwdriver

Not loose Retighten terminal screws

Proximate solderless terminals

Visual check Proper intervals Correct

Loose connectors

Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws

5 Battery

Check [GOT internal battery voltage status] in [Time setting & display] of the Utility. (Refer to 13.)

No alarm appears

Replace with new battery when the current battery has reached the specified life span, even if battery voltage low is not displayed.

Clean

19 - 3 19.3 Cleaning Method

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

19.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement

1 Low battery voltage detection and replacement The battery is used for backing up the present time or the maintenance time notification data. It is recommended that you replace battery periodically.

Refer to the following for the replacement procedure.

8.11 Battery

The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility and system alarm.

Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility.

12. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY (TIME SETTING AND

DISPLAY)

By using system alarm, the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT. To display the following message on system alarm, set [Battery alarm display] to "ON".

11.1.1 Display setting functions

Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (10. ALARM)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (8. ALARM)

Battery replacement timing

When detecting voltage low, replace the battery immediately. Data can be saved for 14 days after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that.

8.11.4 Battery life

System alarm

500 Warning! Built-in battery voltage is low.

19.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement

19 - 4

2 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.

(1) Disposal precautions In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center. The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built-in batteries used for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).

Symbol

This symbol is for EU member states only.

The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) Article 20

"Information for end-users" and Annex II.

The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.

(2) Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the follwoing when marketing or exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states. To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products

(a) Labelling To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol, to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, print the symbol shown in (1) on the GOT or their packaging.

(b) Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol. If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices.

Remark The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive(2006/66/EC).

19 - 5 19.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

19.5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display. When GOT detects backlight shutoff, the POWER LED blinks green/orange alternately. The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period. When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear, replace the backlight. When replace the backlight, refer to "19.6 Backlight Replacement".

(1) Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to [Screen saving backlight off] in the utility of GOT (GOT set up). Refer to the following for details.

11. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS (GOT SET UP)

(2) Replacement time of backlight The backlight replacement time can be set by the utility of GOT (Maintenance timing setting) with reference to the life of backlight. Refer to the following for details.

16. MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING (MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING)

Moreover, when system alarm is used, the message that notifies of the backlight replacement time can be displayed on the GOT screen.

Refer to the following for the system alarm display.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) (10. ALARM)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (8. ALARM)

Precautions for the backlight shutoff status

In the backlight shutoff status, the touch key operates. Early replacement of backlight is recommended.

System alarm

502 Warning! Backlight needs replacement soon.

19.5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement

19 - 6

19.6 Backlight Replacement This section explains the backlight replacing methods.

19.6.1 Applicable backlight

The following backlights are applicable for GT15 .

*1 For how to check the function version, refer to the following.

Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards

19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

1 For GT15-90XLTT

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.

3 Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT. When extension units, including bus connection units, are mounted on the GOT, remove the units.

4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws (8 pcs.) with a screwdriver.

Model name Description Target GOT

GT15-90XLTT For 15" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (XGA)

GT1595-X

GT15-80SLTT For 12.1" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA)

GT1585V-S, GT1585-S

GT15-70SLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA)

GT1575-S (Function version B or

earlier)*1

GT15-70VLTT For 10.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (SVGA, VGA)

GT1575V-S (Function version C

or later)*1, GT1575-V

GT15-70VLTN For 10.4" TFT (VGA) GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN

GT15-60VLTT For 8.4" high intensity, wide angle view TFT (VGA)

GT1565-V

GT15-60VLTN For 8.4" TFT (VGA) GT1562-VN

A

19 - 7 19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.1 Applicable backlight

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole. When removing, take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder. (Expanded figure of part A in )

6 Disconnect the cable connector of the upper (H01) backlight and the cable connector of the lower (H02) backlight from the GOT side connectors.

7 Pull the upper backlight by pressing the projecting part of the rubber holder that fixes the backlight with a minus driver to unfasten the backlight. In the same way, pull the lower backlight by pressing the projection part of the rubber holder that fixes the backlight with a minus driver to unfasten it. (Expanded figure of part A in )

A

A jut of the rubber holder

19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

19 - 8

8 Pull the upper backlight out through the hole for backlight replacement on the upper part of the GOT. In the same way, pull the lower backlight out through the hole for backlight replacement on the lower part of the GOT.

9 Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. When inserting a new backlight through the hole for backlight replacement of the GOT main unit, take care not to damage the sheath of the cable. And push the backlight in securely until the projection part of the rubber holder is fixed.

Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm). When mounting the case, take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT.

2 For GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN Backlight replacement varies with the hardware version of the applicable GOT. Before replacement, please confirm the hardware version.

( Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards)

Type Hardware version Reference

GT1585V-STBA A (March, 2006) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1585V-STBD A (May, 2006) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1585-STBA B (April, 2005) or earlier (2) Replacement procedure 2

C (March, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1585-STBD A (Jul, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575V-STBA A (March, 2006) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575V-STBD A (May, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575-STBA B (April, 2005) or earlier (2) Replacement procedure 2

C (March, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575-STBD A (Jul, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575-VTBA D (April, 2005) or earlier (2) Replacement procedure 2

E (March, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575-VTBD A (Jul, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575-VNBA A (Sep, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1575-VNBD A (Sep, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1572-VNBA A (Sep, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1572-VNBD A (Sep, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

Hole for backlight replacement

19 - 9 19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(1) Replacement 1

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.

3 Remove the extension unit cover from the right side of the GOT. Remove the extension unit, e.g. bus connection unit, if it is mounted.

4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws (8 pcs.) with a screwdriver.

5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole. When removing, take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder.

6 Pull up the backlight drive board, and disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the backlight drive board.

When replacing GT15-80SLTT, remove the cable from the cable holder. (When replacing GT15-80SLTT)

(Expanded figure of part A in )

A

Cable holder

19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

19 - 10

7 Press the backlight fixing latch (black) with your finger, and pull out the backlight to the left. When pulling the backlight, press the packing with your finger so that the backlight will not be hit with the packing.

8 Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When mounting the case, take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT.

(2) Replacement 2

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.

3 Remove the extension unit cover from the right side of the GOT. Remove the extension unit, e.g. bus connection unit, if it is mounted.

4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws (8 pcs.) with a screwdriver, and remove the case. Screw A must be tighten in the torque range of 0.186 to 0.245 Nm, as it is made of plastic.

(When replacing GT15-80SLTT) (When replacing GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT or GT15-70VLTN)

Latch Latch

Packing

A

19 - 11 19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

5 Pull up the backlight drive board, and disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the backlight drive board.

6 Press the backlight fixing latch (black) with your finger, and pull out the backlight to the left. When pulling the backlight, press the packing with your finger so that the backlight will not be hit with the packing.

7 Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the following torque range: Screw A: 0.186 to 0.245 Nm, Other screws: 0.36 to 0.48 Nm). When mounting the case, take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT.

(When replacing GT15-80SLTT) (When replacing GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT or GT15- 70VLTN)

Latch Latch

Packing

19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

19 - 12

3 For GT15-60VLTT or GT15-60VLTN Backlight replacement varies with the hardware version of the applicable GOT. Before replacement, please confirm the hardware version. ( Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards)

(1) Replacement 1

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.

3 Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT. Remove the extension unit, e.g. bus connection unit, if it is mounted.

4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws (8 pcs.) with a screwdriver.

5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole.When removing, take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder.

Type Hardware version Reference

GT1565-VTBA D (April, 2005) or earlier (2) Replacement procedure 2

E (March, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1565-VTBD A (Jul, 2005) or later (1) Replacement procedure 1

GT1562-VNBA A (Sep, 2005) or later (3) Replacement procedure 3

GT1562-VNBD A (Sep, 2005) or later (3) Replacement procedure 3

(Expanded figure of part A in )

A

19 - 13 19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

6 Disconnect the cable connector of the upper (H01) backlight and the cable connector of the lower (H02) backlight from the GOT side connectors.

When the GOTs with the following hardware versions are used, remove the cables from the insulation sheets for protecting cables.

7 Remove the cables of the upper connector (H01) from the 2 slits (black). Similarly, remove the cables of the upper connector (H02) from the 2 slits (black).

(Expanded figure of part B in )

8 Press the upper backlight fixing latch (black) with your finger, and pull out the backlight to the left. Similarly, press the lower backlight fixing latch (black) with your finger, and pull out the backlight to the left.

(Expanded figure of part A in )

GT1565-VTBA(Hardwear version W to AY) GT1565-VTBD(Hardwear version N to AL)

GT1565-VTBA(Hardwear version AZ or later) GT1565-VTBD(Hardwear version AM or later)

BAB

B

B

Insulation sheets

for protecting cables

B

B Insulation sheets for protecting cables

Latch

19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

19 - 14

9 Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. 10 When the GOT with the insulation sheets for protecting cables is used, place the cables between the

insulation sheet and the insulation sheets for protecting cables. 11 When connecting the cable connectors of the backlight and the GOT unit, connect by crossing the cable

connectors each other as the below. 12 The following figure shows an example with the insulation sheets for protecting cables.

Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm). When mounting the case, take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT.

Insulation sheets

for protecting cables

19 - 15 19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(2) Replacement 2

1 Power off the GOT.

2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.

3 Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT. Remove the extension unit, e.g. bus connection unit, if it is mounted.

4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws (8 pcs.) with a screwdriver, and remove the case. Screw A must be tighten in the torque range of 0.186 to 0.245 Nm, as it is made of plastic.

5 Disconnect the cable connector of the upper (H01) backlight and the cable connector of the lower (H02) backlight from the GOT side connectors.

6 Press the upper backlight fixing latch (black) with your finger, and pull out the backlight to the left. Similarly, press the lower backlight fixing latch (black) with your finger, and pull out the backlight to the left.

7 Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly. (Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the following torque range: Screw A: 0.186 to 0.245 Nm, Other screws: 0.36 to 0.48Nm.) When mounting the case, take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT.

A

19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

19 - 16

(3) Replacement 3

1 Power off the GOT

2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable. Remove the GOT from the control panel.

3 Remove the extension unit cover on the right side of the GOT. Remove the extension unit, e.g. bus connection unit, if it is mounted.

4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws (8 pcs.) with a screwdriver.

5 Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole. When removing, take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder. (Expanded figure of part A in (4))

A

19 - 17 19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

6 Disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the GOT side connector.

(Expanded figure of part A in )

When the GOTs with the following hardware versions are used, remove the cable from an insulation sheet for protecting cables.

7 Remove the cables from the 2 slits (black). (Expanded figure of part B in (6))

8 Press the backlight fixing latch (black) with your finger, and pull out the backlight to the left.

GT1562-VNBA (Hardware version S to AT) GT1562-VNBD (Hardware version K to AH)

GT1562-VNBA (Hardware version AU or later) GT1562-VNBD (Hardware version AJ or later)

B A

B

Insulation sheet for protecting cables

B Insulation sheet for protecting cables

Latch

19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

19 - 18

9 Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal. When the GOT with the insulation sheets for protecting cables is used, place the cable between the insulation sheet and an insulation sheet for protecting cables. When connecting the cable connector of the backlight to the GOT side connector, connect it as shown below. The following figure shows an example with the insulation sheets for protecting cables.

Also attach the case in the reverse procedure of removal. (Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0.36 to 0.48Nm). When attaching the case, take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT.

Insulation sheet for protecting cables

Latch

19 - 19 19.6 Backlight Replacement 19.6.2 Replacement procedure of backlight

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

20. TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter explains the GOT restoration sheet, troubleshooting in the bus connection, and the error message/system alarm list.

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally, which are listed in check sheets. The following explains how to use each sheet.

(1) When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions (GOT status check sheet)

When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions, identify the cause of the malfunction etc. with GOT status check sheet and take corrective action. When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

(2) When the wiring status needs to be improved (GOT installation status check sheet) When the noise caused by the GOT wiring status is considered to have caused the malfunction,

etc. based on the check result of (1) above, take corrective action for wiring using GOT installation status check sheet. When the GOT is restored, see the status for a while.

(3) When corrective action other than (1) and (2) above is required (System configuration check sheet) If malfunction etc. occurs even after checking with (1) and (2) above, please contact your local

Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service after filling out System configuration check sheet with details about your system.

When sending a troubled product, attach the GOT restoration sheets ( GOT status check sheet,

GOT installation status check sheet, System configuration check sheet) checked in this section. Please keep copies of the restoration sheets.

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 1

1 GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from (1) GOT status. Proceed as instructed by "Action".

(1) Status of the GOT

Phenomenon Cause/status Action

(a) Frequency when the GOT does not operate, an error occurs on the screen, etc.

Occurs always. Occurrence frequency: ( )

Example: Once a month Proceed to (1)-(b).

Occurs sometimes.

(b) Checking of the displayed error code (system alarm)

Can be checked. Error code (system alarm): ( )

Example: 460 Communication unit error

Take the action for the error code (system alarm) or error message checked. If the status does not change after the action is taken, proceed to (1)-(c).

Cannot be checked. Proceed to (1)-(c).

(c) POWER LED

Lit in green The power is supplied normally. Proceed to (1)-(d).

Lit in orange

Screen saving is being performed. The read device of the system information may have been turned ON when the device was set, and the screen was switched to the forced screen saving status.

Check the setting of the read device. When no problem is found in the setting, proceed to (1)-(d).

Blinks in green/orange The backlight has run out. Replace the backlight. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to (1)-(d).

Not lit

The power is not supplied. Check if the power is supplied. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

When the power is supplied, the GOT hardware may be faulty.

20 - 2 20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

*1 For models using STN monochrome LCDs, unintended lines may be seen flowing from the displayed line. Note that this phenomenon is a feature of the product, not a defect or fault.

Phenomenon Cause/status Action

(d) Screen display

The screen is completely black.

The LCD or BootOS may be failty.

Perform the following in order. 1) Reinstalling BootOS 2) Reinstalling standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by 1) and 2), perform the following. 3) Reinstalling CoreOS and then standard monitor OS If the GOT is not restored by the above operations, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

The screen is completely white.

The GOT hardware may be faulty. Proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

A line is displayed on the

screen. *1 The GOT hardware may be faulty.

Example: A vertical line is displayed. Proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

Other faulty displays

The screen freezes. The screen display is not updated and any operation is not allowed.

Proceed to (1)-(e).

(e) Buzzer sound

Does not sound. Buzzer sound: ( )

Example: The rhythm as three beeps, one beep, and then two beeps is repeated.

Proceed to (2) Status of the GOT when it freezes.

Continues to beep randomly.

Continues to beep in a particular pattern.

Beeps continuously. The read device of the system information may have turned ON when the device was set, turning ON the Buzzer output signal.

Check the setting of the read device. When the Buzzer output signal has no error, proceed to (2) Status of the GOT when it freezes.

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 3

(2) Status of the GOT when it freezes (screen operation stopped)

(3) Status of the PLC CPU

Phenomenon Cause/status Action

(a) Switching to the utility

Enabled Error code (system alarm): ( )

Example: 460 Communication unit error

When the system alarm display function can be used, take the action for the error code (system alarm) displayed. If the action cannot be taken, proceed to (2)-(b).

Disabled The system alarm display function cannot be used.

Proceed to (2)-(c).

(b) Executing of I/O check from the GOT utility

Communication error

Display details: ( )

Example: A message indicating the cause may be a connection error was displayed.

Proceed to (2)-(c).

No error The hardware such as a communication interface has no error.

Proceed to (3) Status of the PLC CPU.

(c) Objects not displayed on the monitor screen

Found Details: ( )

Example: The numerical display object is not displayed.

Proceed to (3) Status of the PLC CPU.

Not found

Phenomenon Cause/status Action

(a) PLC failure

Occurs always.

An error such as CONTROL-BUS. ERROR or SP. UNIT LAY. ERROR may have occurred. Error code (system alarm): ( )

Example: 1204 CPU H/W fault

Proceed to the following.

20.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection

Occurs sometimes.

The PLC CPU may be influenced by noise or the hardware may be faulty. Occurrence frequency: ( )

Example: Once a month

Error code (system alarm): ( )

Example: 1204 CPU H/W fault

Proceed to (4) GOT restoration procedure.

Operates normally.

20 - 4 20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(4) GOT restoration procedure Follow the procedures below starting from (a) and in order to check if the GOT is restored. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to the next item.

*1: The GOT reset switch does not operate when the bus connection is used.

*2: When the bus connection is used, do not power the GOT ON again (OFF ON) while the power of the PLC is ON.

When powering the GOT ON again (OFF ON), power OFF the PLC before that. *3: By powering OFF the GOT, an error occurs in the control station when the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10

connection is used or in the master station when the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) is used.

Check item Cause Action

(a) Press the GOT reset switch. *1, 3

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (b).)

The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise.

Take the action of (4)-(h).

(b) Power the GOT ON/OFF. *2, 3

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (c).)

(c) Reset or power ON/OFF the PLC CPU.

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (d).)

(d) Power the GOT and PLC CPU ON/OFF simultaneously.

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (e).)

(e) Connect the cable again.

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (f).)

The cable connection may be faulty. Securely connect the cable. If an error occurs again, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

(f) Reinstall the project data.

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (g).)

Data may have been destroyed by an action such as powering the GOT OFF during the installation of project data or OS.

Do not power the GOT OFF while transferring data. If an error occurs again, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

(g) Reinstall the OS.

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (h).)

(h) Take the action described in the "Action" column.

Restored Not restored (Proceed to (i).)

The GOT may have malfunctioned temporarily due to noise.

Take the action with referring to

GOT installation status check sheet.

(i) Replace the unit/module.

Restored Not restored The hardware of the unit/module may be faulty.

Install the unit/module with which the GOT malfunctioned again to see if the unit/module caused the malfunction. After checking, proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

The GOT is not restored even by performing (a) to (i).

Proceed to (5) Troubled product investigation.

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 5

(5) Troubled product investigation When malfunction of the GOT is not improved, please contact your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service. Depending on the problem details, we may ask you to return the troubled product to us. In that case, please attach the GOT status check sheet, GOT installation status check sheet, and the system configuration check sheet filled out with details of your system.

20 - 6 20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

2 GOT installation status check sheet Check the current installation status of the GOT you are using against the GOT installation status described in the upper column of items (1) to (7). When the measure described in the lower column is needed, take the measure for the current status. When the measure is taken, check the result, "Effective" or "Ineffective".

(1) Panel inside wiring

(2) Panel outside wiring

Current status

The power line connected to the power or servo amplifier and the communication cable such as bus connection cable or network cable are mixed in the duct.

Mixed

Not mixed

Measure for the cables mixed

Wiring the power line and communication cable in the panel without mixing them in the duct can reduce the influence of noise.

Effective

Ineffective

Current status

The power line and communication cable are installed together.

Installed together

Not installed together

Measure for the cables installed together

Fig. A

Leading the power line and communication cable outside the panel at separate places can make the communication cable less influenced by noise from the power line. Installing the communication cable apart from the power line or using a separator (made of metal) in the duct as shown in Fig. B can make the communication cable less influenced by noise.

Effective

Ineffective Fig. B

NFB

MC MC RA RA

NFB

MC MC RA RA

Power line

Communication cable

Communication cable Power line

Power line

Wiring duct

Separator

Power line

Signal line Communication

cable

100mm or more

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 7

(3) Wiring of GOT's FG cable and power line

(4) Surge measures

Entry area

Current status The FG cable and power line of the GOT are installed together.

Installed together

Not installed together

Measure for the cables installed together

Separating the FG cable and power line of the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of noise.

Effective

Ineffective

Current status

A surge suppressor is used for the wiring of the load such as MCCB, electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, or induction motor.

(When a surge suppressor is used, fill out the entry area below with the surge suppressor model name and the name of the equipment for which the surge suppressor is used.)

Used

Not used

Measure for the equipment without a surge suppressor used

Attaching the surge suppressor on the cable close to the load can reduce the influence of surge on the GOT.

Effective

Ineffective

Model name of the surge suppressor Equipment name

GOT

LG FG

Power for the power equipment

GOT

Power for the power equipment

LG FG

AC

C L

R Output

PLC

AC

C L

R Output

PLC

The surge suppressor must be

attached close to the load

20 - 8 20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(5) Grounding status

Current status

The FG cables of the control equipment (such as PLC) and the power equipment (such as servo amplifier) are connected as shown by "a".

Connected

Not connected

Measure for the FG cables connected

Fig. A

Perform independent grounding at two places as shown in Fig. A. Independent grounding can reduce the influence of noise. If independent grounding is not allowed, be sure to perform shared grounding as shown in Fig. B.

Effective

Ineffective

Fig. B

GOTFG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2 LG

a

PLCServo

GOT FG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding

Grounding for power system

Grounding for power system

Terminal block Terminal block

Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2 LG

PLCServo

GOTFG LG

Connection cable

Panel grounding

Panel grounding

FG

FG

CN1BCN1A

CN3CN2

LG

PLCServo

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 9

(6) Grounding status of the panel on which the GOT is installed

Current status

A single ground cable is led from the panel having the control equipment such as PLC to the panel having the GOT.

Led

Not led

Measure for the ground cable led

Fig. A

Connecting the ground cable to the panel having the GOT as shown in Fig. A to reduce the potential difference may prevent the malfunction. When wiring as shown in Fig. A is difficult, perform wiring as shown in Fig. B.

Effective

Ineffective

Fig. B

Fig. C

Attaching the ferrite core (KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. RFC-H13 or equivalent product) to the ground cable connected to the panel having the GOT as shown in Fig. C reduces the influence of noise. When wiring as shown in Fig. C is difficult, perform wiring as shown in Fig. D.

Effective

Ineffective

Fig. D

Connection cable

GOT FG LG

Ground cable led from the panel having the control equipment

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ground cable

Use a short and thick wire as possible.

FG LG

Connection cable

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ground cable FG LG

Connection cable

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ferrite coreGround cable

FG LG

Connection cable

Use a short and thick wire as possible.

GOT

Ground to the panel.

Ground cable FG LG

Connection cable

Ferrite core

20 - 10 20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(7) Power supply system

Current status

The power from the same system is used for the GOT, I/O equipment (such as relay), and power equipment (such as servo amplifier).

Used

Not used

Measure for the equipment for which the power from the same system is used

Connecting an isolation transformer as well as separating the wiring of the GOT power from that of the power of the I/O equipment and power equipment reduces the influence of noise.

Effective

Ineffective

Main power PLC power AC200V

I/O power

Main circuit power

I/O equipment

Power equipment

PLC

GOT

Main power PLC power

Isolation transformer

AC200V

I/O power

Main circuit power

I/O equipment

Power equipment

PLC

GOT

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 11

3 System configuration check sheet Fill in the brackets with the unit/module name.

(Continued to next page)

(1) System configuration of the GOT (a) GOT main unit [ ]

(b) Option function board Used [ ]

Not used

(c) Communication interface Communication unit

[ ]

GOT built-in interface

(d) Option unit Used [ ]

Not used

(e) Cable between the PLC and GOT [ ] (f) Cable length [ m]

(g) If any other unit etc. is used, please describe it.

(2) System configuration of the PLC (a) Power supply module [ ] (b) CPU module [ ]

(c) Serial communication module/ computer link module

Used [ ]

Not used

(d) Network module Used [ ]

Not used

(e) Interrupt module Used [ ]

Not used

(f) Positioning module Used [ ]

Not used

(g) Number of extension stages [ stages]

(h) If any other module etc. is used, please describe it.

20 - 12 20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Entry area for recurrence (when the malfunction occurred after the action is taken)

(3) Describe the operation situation when freezing of the screen or faulty display of the GOT has reocurred.

20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet

20 - 13

20.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection, and the cause is not clear in "20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm", execute the following troubleshooting. Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2/GT Works2

20.2.1 Locating error positions

Explanation regarding the method of specifying the error part. (Please refer to User's Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register.)

(1) How to locate error positions: (a) Use of peripheral devices

Using the peripheral devices such as GX Developer, check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and, based on the error message on the PLC CPU, check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses.

(b) Error timing Check the timing of errors.

(c) Locating the module where an error occurs: Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information, locate a specific module where an error occurs.

By the method stated above, correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one, and check whether the error occurs. If the error continues to occur, it may have another cause. Referring to 20.2.2 "Further locating error positions", locate the error position further.

1) An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset: The error may be detected by the initial processing of the PLC CPU. In this case, because the faulty module may not be identified, use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur. When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed, the module may be causing the error.

2) An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds: The error may occur in the sequence program. Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step. The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the sequence program.

3) An error occurs when a specific device operates: The mis-operation may be caused by noise. Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating device. If the line is too close to the device, separate the line 100 mm or more from the device.

20 - 14 20.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20.2.1 Locating error positions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

20.2.2 Further locating error positions

If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is replaced with a new one, the error may be caused by the effect from another module. Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the module located furthest from the operating position in the system, and check for the status of occurrence of the error each time the cables are disconnected until the error does not occur. The module or extension cables/bus-connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to cause the error. Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below. (When use the extension base unit QnASCPU)

Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to locate error positions.

Notes on narrowing the error part range

1. When disconnecting the extension base units in order, use only an END instruction for the sequence program, and any error resulting from the sequence program will not occur, and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained easily.

2. When the frequency of occurrence of an error is low, check the error by taking a rather long time with the modules disconnected.

The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis-operation is caused by noise.

Example 1:

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Disconnect the bus-connection cable

(IN side) from the final stage GOT.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

If an error does not occur, the final

stage GOT may be faulty.

Disconnect the bus-connection cable

(OUT side) from the GOT located one

stage before the final stage.

Example 2:

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

If an error does not occur, the final

stage GOT and the bus-connection

cable before the final stage may be

faulty.

20.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20.2.2 Further locating error positions

20 - 15

20.2.3 Specific example of troubleshooting

Taking the following system as an example, troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred. (When QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used)

PLC

(main base unit) GOT 1) GOT 2)

PLC

(extension base unit) Bus connection

cable

Bus connection

cable

Extension cable

Start

The SP. UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU.

Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one.

The error occurs further (not on PLC CPU).

The error occurs further

(not on the GOT 2) (bus connection unit)).

The error will not occur.

End

Check the error code/step appearing on the PLC CPU.

(Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs.)

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the GOT.

Turn off the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the PLC.

Turn on the power of the GOT.

The bus-connection cable connecting the GOT 1) to the GOT 2) is judged faulty.

Replace the faulty bus-connection cable with a new one.

Disconnect the bus-connection cable from the GOT 2) at IN side

(to further locate the error positions).

Disconnect the bus-connection cable from the GOT 1) at OUT side

(to further locate the error positions).

20 - 16 20.2 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20.2.3 Specific example of troubleshooting

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT. As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT, controller or network, there are two kinds: system alarm and advanced system alarm. For details of the system alarm and advanced system alarm, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

Remark Error code and channel No.

Error codes can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information function.

The channel No. where an error is occurring can be confirmed with the GOT special register (GS262 to 264).

For details of the system information and GOT special register, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

20.3.1 Error Contents Display

This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT.

1 Popup-displaying the error code and error message (Advanced alarm popup display (System alarm)) If an error occurs, the error code and error message can be popup-displayed on the front of the monitor screen. As alarms are popup-displayed regardless of the screen type, the error occurred will not be overlooked.

2 Displaying error code and error message in a list (Advanced system alarm display) If error has occurred, error code and error message can be displayed on the list set with the screen. Multiple errors can be displayed, or the history of display can be recorded.

A 1254

348B

A 1254

348B

04/6/1 13:20 Power module

Pop up generated alarms

regardless of the screen.

04/6/1 8:05 Fuse error

Occurred Message Restore Check

04/6/1 10:25 Temp. error

Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm

the details of the alarms and take measures.

11:25 10:45

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.1 Error Contents Display

20 - 17

3 Checking error messages with the utility (Utility) The error code and error message can be checked with the system alarm display of the utility when the object is not set.

14.9 System Alarm Display

Error code and reference manual

*1 For details of GOT special registers (GS262 to 264), refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual (2.9.1 GOT internal devices)

*2 The assigned error code for FXCPU is 100 to 109, which displays the status of M8060 to M8069. (Example) When the error code (100) error occurs, correct the error according to the M8060 description.

*3 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code (Hexadecimal) displayed on the servo amplifier to the decimal number and adding 20000 to it. When referring to the manual of servo amplifier by the error code displayed as a GOT system alarm, subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and change its lower three digits to the hexadecimal number. (Example: When GOT system alarm is 20144, the error code of servo amplifier becomes 90H.)

Error source Error code Description

Channel No. storage destination

*1

Reference

Controller

0 to 99 (Value of D9008)

Error code of CPU (for ACPU)

GS263

User's manual of the ACPU connected with GOT

100 to 299

Error code of the following controllers

FXCPU*2

Third party PLC Temperature controller

(OMRON temperature controller only)

User's manual of the controller connected with the GOT Deal with errors according to the error messages.

GOT*5

300 to 399 Error code of the GOT main unit function

GS262*4 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

400 to 499 Error code of the GOT communication function

500 to 699 Error code of the GOT main unit function

Network 800 to 999 Error code of network GS264

CPU 1000 to 10000 (Value of SD0)

Error code of CPU (for QCPU, LCPU, QnACPU)

GS263

User's manual of the QCPU, LCPU and QnACPU connected with GOT

Motion controller

10001 to 10999 Error code of motion controller (Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU)

User's manual of the motion controller connected to GOT

CNC C70 11000 to 11999 Error code of CNC (Q173NCCPU)

User's manual of the CNC C70 connected to GOT

Robot controller

12000 to 12999 Error code of robot controller (Q172DRCPU)

User's manual of the robot controller connected to GOT

Servo

amplifier*3 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier User's manual of the servo amplifier connected to GOT

20 - 18 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.1 Error Contents Display

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

*4 Channel No. will not be stored depending on the error code. For channel No. storage availability for each error code, refer to the following.

20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm *5 An alarmed drive cannot be confirmed in the system alarm regarding file access; however, it can be specified by

confirming the file access error signal (b7 to 10) of system signal 2-2.

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.1 Error Contents Display

20 - 19

20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

303 Set monitor points too large. Decrease setting points.

Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen. For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual

304 Set trigger points too large. Decrease setting points.

The number of objects using Sampling/Cycle during ON/ Cycle during OFF exceeds 100. Decrease the number of objects.

306 No project data. Download screen data.

The project data is not downloaded or the screen data is not sufficient. Download the project data or screen data.

307 Monitor device not set The monitor device of the object is not set. Set the monitor device of the object.

308 No comment data. Download comment.

The comment file does not exist. Create the comment file and download to GOT.

309 Device reading error. Correct device.

The error occurred when reading a continuous device. Correct the device.

310 Project data does not exist or out of range.

1. Specified base screen / window screen does not exist in the project data.

2. Specified base screen / window screen is out of the permissible area. Specify the existing base screen / window screen.

311 No. of alarm has exceeded upper limit. Delete restored alarm.

The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history display function has exceeded the maximum points. Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories.

312 No. of sampling has exceeded upper limit. Delete collected data.

The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when "Store Memory" and "Accumulate/Average" were set in the scatter graph. 1. Approve "Clear trigger" setup in the scatter graph. 2. Set the "Operation at frequency over time" to "Initialize

and Continue" in scatter graph.

315 Device writing error. Correct device.

Error occurred while writing in the device. Correct the device.

316 Cannot display or input operation value. Review expression.

In indirect specification of comment/parts number, the data operation result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed. Review the data operational expression, in order not exceeding the range in which the device type can be expressed.

20 - 20 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

317 Too high frequency of data collection. Review conditions.

Data of an object, to which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set, are collected too frequently, or the number of objects has exceeded the number of objects collectable simultaneously. 1. Set a longer cycle for trigger occurrence to each object. 2. Make the settings so that 257 or more display triggers of

objects, to which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set, do not occur simultaneously.

320 Specified object does not exist or out of range.

The part file does not exist. Create the part file and download to GOT.

322 Dedicated device is out of range. Confirm device range.

The monitored device No. is out of the permissible area of the targeted PLC CPU. Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored PLC CPU and parameter settings.

330 Insufficient memory media capacity. Confirm M-card capacity.

Available memory of the memory card is insufficient.Confirm the available memory of the memory card. The available memory can be confirmed by system information screen, which is described in GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) or GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual.

331 Memory card not installed or M-CARD switched OFF

The memory card is not installed or in the drive access switch is OFF in drive. 1. Install the memory card in the specified drive. 2. Turn ON the access switch.

332 Memory media is not formatted.

Memory card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly. Format the memory card.

333 Unable to overwrite. Memory card is write- protected.

Memory card is write-protected. Cancel the write-protection of memory card.

334 Memory media error. Replace memory media.

Memory card is faulty. Replace the memory card.

335 Memory card battery voltage low. Replace battery.

The battery voltage of the memory card is low. Replace the battery of the memory card.

337 File output failed. Confirm output file path.

Either of the following folder or file with the name same as the file to be created exists in the storage destination memory card.

Folder storing data

Write-protect file Delete the above folder or file, or change the name of the file to be created.

340 Printer error or power failure

Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on. 1. Confirm the printer. 2. Turn on the power supply of the printer.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

20 - 21

341 Printer error

Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been turned on. 1. Confirm the printer. 2. Turn on the power supply of the printer.

342 External power is not supplied to external I/O unit

Error occurred at the external I/O interface module. 1. If an external power supply (24VDC) is not supplied,

supply the external power supply. 2. If an external power supply is supplied, replace the

external I/O interface module.

343 External I/O unit installation error. Check if firmly installed.

The external I/O interface module is not installed correctly. Install the external I/O interface module correctly.

345 BCD/BIN conversion error Correct data

Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD/BIN value is being displayed/input. 1. Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value. 2. Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer.

351 Recipe file error. Confirm content of recipe file.

The contents of the recipe file are not normal. 1. Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the memory

card. 2. Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the

memory card (format).

352 Recipe file make error. Reboot GOT after inserting memory card.

Failed to generate recipe file. Reboot the GOT after installing the memory card.

353 Unable to write Recipe file. Confirm memory card is inserted.

Failed to write in the recipe file. 1. Confirm the write-protection of the memory card. 2. Confirm the contents of the memory card. 3. Do not pull out the memory card while recipe is operating.

354 Recipe file write error Error occurred while writing in the recipe file. Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating.

355 Recipe file read error

Error occurred while writing in the recipe file. 1. Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating. 2. Confirm the contents (device value) of the recipe file in the

memory card.

356 File system error occurred in PLC. Confirm file register.

Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name. 1. Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file

register name. 2. Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC

memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20 - 22 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

357 Error in specified PLC drive Confirm PLC drive

When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name, error occurred in PLC CPU drive. 1. Execute the recipe function again after confirming the

specified PLC CPU drive. 2. Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC

memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer.

358 PLC file access failure. Confirm PLC drive.

When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name, PLC CPU file register could not be accessed. 1. Execute the recipe function again after confirming the

specified PLC CPU drive / file register name. (When you specify drive 0, execute the recipe function again after changing to other drives.)

2. Confirm whether the memory card is write-protected, and execute the recipe function again.

3. Confirm that the security key is not set on the specified CPU, and execute the recipe function again.

359 Processing from another peripheral device. Execute it after.

When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name, other peripherals carry out the process to the file register. Wait until the processing of other peripherals end, and execute the recipe function again.

360 0 divisor division error. Confirm operation expression.

Zero division occurred by the data operational expression. Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not become 0.

361 Specified device No. is out of range.

The entered file number is out of range. Check the entered file number, and enter a valid value (1 to 9999).

362 Invalid device value in time action setting

When controllers are controlled with the GOT's time action function, the set No. is our of range, or the set device values regarding the operation settings are out of range or invalid. Set valid values.

370 Upper and lower limit value error. Confirm value setting.

The setting of lower/upper limit value is [Upper limit Lower limit]. Correct the setting so as to be "Upper limit > Lower limit".

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

20 - 23

402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules.

The time-out error occurred during communicating. 1. Confirm the cable omission, the communication unit

mounting status and status of the PLC. Channel No. is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi- channel function. Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No. in error.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT

Works3 and a controller used (1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT

Designer2/GT Works2 (Description of "Checking for normal monitoring" of each connection type) 2. may occur when the load of PLC CPU becomes heavier

while accessing other stations. In such case, transfer the data of the other station to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host.

3. Put COM instruction when the PLC scanning is long. 4. Check if the version of the communication driver supports

the controller. For how to check the version of the communication driver, refer to the following.

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals) 8. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT

403 SIO status error. Confirm communication pathway or modules.

Either of the overrun error, parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS-422 / RS-232 communication was received. Confirm the cable omission, the communication module mounting status, status of the PLC.and the transmission speed of the computer link. Channel No. is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi-channel function. Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No. in error.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT

Works3 and a controller used (1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT

Designer2/GT Works2 (Description of "Checking for normal monitoring" of each connection type)

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20 - 24 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

406 Specified station access is out of range. Confirm station no.

1. Station numbers other than master/local station are specified at the CC-Link connection (via G4).

2. A PLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed. Confirm the station number of the project data.

407 Accessed other network. Change network setting.

When monitoring the same network as the GOT The GOT accesses the other networks with the MELSEC- NET/H, MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network), or CC-Link IE Controller Network connection.Confirm the network number of the project data so as not to access to other networks.

When monitoring other networks Reconfigure the [Routing Information Setting] of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 or the [Routing parameters] of GX Developer.

When the GT15-75J71LP23-Z/GT15-75J71BR13-Z is used These models cannot monitor other networks.

Confirm Network No. of the project data, in order for not accessing other networks.

410 Cannot perform operation because of PLC run mode. stop the PLC.

The operation, which could not be performed during RUN of PLC CPU, was performed. Stop the PLC CPU.

411 Memory cassette is write- protected. Check the memory cassette.

The memory cassette installed in the PLC CPU is EPROM or

E2PROM, and it is in a protected status. Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU.

412 Cannot read/write device protected by keyword. Remove keyword.

The key word is set in PLC CPU. Cancel the key word.

420 E71 specification is ASCII.

[ASCII code] is selected in [Ethernet operations] of the PLC side setting. Select [Binary code].

421 E71 is set as read-only. Clear setting.

The Ethernet module on the PLC side is set in read-only. Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write-enabled.

422 Not communicating between CPU and E71. Confirm CPU error.

PLC CPU error. Communication between PLC CPU and the PLC side Ethernet module impossible. Confirm whether there is error in PLC CPU by GX Developer etc. (Confirm buffer memory)

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

20 - 25

423 Insufficient network table information. Add station no.

The station number set in the project data and the station number set in the switching station No. device do not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. 1. Add the station number set in the project data to the

Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2. 2. When using the station No. switching function, check the

data of the switching station No. device. When the station number specified in the switching station No. device is not set in the Ethernet setting, add the station number to the Ethernet setting. When the station number does not exist in the system, change the data of the switching station No. device. (Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer.)

424

Same sta. on GOT & project data. Review communication parameter.

The station number set in the GOT's utility is the same as the station number set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 (the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module) or in the project data. Check the following contents so that the multiple station numbers should not be the same. 1. Check the GOT's station number in the GOT's utility. 2. Check the station number set in the project data. 3. Check the station number set in the Ethernet setting.

(Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module set in the parameter setting of GX Developer.)

4. When using the station No. switching function, check the data of the switching station No. device.

425 A duplicate IP address has beendetected. Confirm the setting.

A duplication of IP address with another device has been detected. Change the IP address of GOT or the other device.

448 PLC cannot handle as requested. Correct devices.

A device outside the range of PLC CPU file registers and the buffer memory was specified. Correct the monitor device by setting file register of the PLC CPU.

449 Dedicated device is out of range. Confirm device range.

1. Set the address for the special function module in the GOT monitor available range.

2. Set the device in the GOT monitor available range.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20 - 26 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

450 Path has changed or timeout occurred in redundant system.

The path has been switched or timeout occurred in the redundant system. 1. Check the PLC CPU to know if the path has been

switched. 2. Check the cable connection status, the communication

unit installation status, and the PLC CPU status. 3. This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU

becomes heavier when accessing other stations. In such a case, transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host.

4. Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long: COM instruction/Extension of END processing/Setting of the number of processing times for general data/Data update batch processing.

451 Q redundant system settings and current config. do not match.

Change the Q redundant setting in accordance with the actual Q redundant CPU system.

460 Communication unit error 1. Reset the power of the GOT. 2. Replace the unit.

480 Communication channel not set. Set channel number on Utility.

Channel (CH.No.1 to 4) to communicate with a controller is not set. 1. After setting the Communication Settings on the GT

Designer3 or GT Designer2, download it to the GOT. 2. Change the channel assignment in the Communication

Setting on the utility.

*1

481 Communication unit not mounted to the slot of active channel.

The interface where the channel (CH No.1 to 4) is set does not have a communication unit installed. 1. Install a communication unit to the interface where the

channel (CH No.1 to 4) is set. 2. Change assignment of the channel (CH No.1 to 4) in the

Communication Setting.

*1

482 Too many same units are mounted. Confirm the no of units.

Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units. Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.

*1

483 Simultaneous mounting of the units are not allowed.

Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT simultaneously are mounted. Check the mounted units, and remove unnecessary units.

*1

484 Unit mounted incorrectly. Move the unit to correct position.

The unit is not mounted on the GOT in the correct position. Confirm the mounting position of the unit.

*1

485 Too many units mounted on GOT. Reduce units.

Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units. Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.

*1

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

20 - 27

486 Communication unit not corresponded to set communication driver.

The communication driver set in the Communication Setting and the communication unit installed on the GOT do not match. 1. Check whether the communication driver set in the

Communication Setting is correct. 2. Check whether any incorrect communication unit has

been installed on the GOT.

*1

487 Please turn on the PLC and the GOT again.

Turn the power of the PLC and GOT on again.

488 Too many units mounted on GOT. Reduce units.

Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units.Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.

*1

489 Inactive channel has been selected at Communication Settings.

Inactive channel No. has been set in the project data. 1. Check whether any unnecessary channel No. has been

set in the project data. 2. Check whether channel Nos. set in the project data are

set in the Communication Settings.

*1

490 Simultaneous mounting of the units are not allowed.

Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT simultaneously are mounted.Check the mounted units, and remove unnecessary units.

*1

491 Too many units mounted on GOT. Reduce units.

Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum number of mountable units.Check the number of units, and remove unnecessary units.

*1

500 Warning! Built-in battery voltage is low.

The voltage of the GOT built-in battery is decreased. Replace the GOT built-in battery.

502 Warning! Backlight needs replacement soon.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached 80% or more of the set time. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.

503 Warning! Display section needs replacement soon.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached 80% or more of the set time. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the display section. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.

504 Warning! Touch panel needs replacement soon.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached 80% or more of the set count number. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the touch key. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20 - 28 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

505 Warning! Built-in Flash ROM needs replacement soon.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the built-in flash memory writing times have reached 80% or more of the set times. The GOT must be replaced. In that case, Data backup and re- setting are needed. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.

506 Warning! Backlight needs replacement.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached the set time or more. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.

507 Warning! Display section needs replacement.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached the set time or more. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the display section. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time.

508 Warning! Touch panel needs replacement.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached the set count number or more. The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the touch key. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.

509 Warning! Built-in Flash ROM needs replacement. Change the GOT.

The dedicated GS is notifying that the built-in flash memory writing times have reached the set times or more. The GOT must be replaced. In that case, Data backup and re- setting are needed. The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually. In such a case, turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times.

510 Clock data input out of range

The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range. In this case, the input value is not accepted. Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data, and input the proper value again.

511 A blown backlight is detected.

The backlight is shut off or the lighting status of the backlight is unstable. If the error is detected repeatedly, contact your local Mitsubishi representative.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

20 - 29

520 Insufficient Flash ROM capacity

The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the build in flash memory 1. Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified

buffering area size. 2. Install the option function board with add-on memory.

521 Insufficient user memory (RAM) capacity

The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the user memory (RAM) 1. Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified

buffering area size. 2. Install the option function board with add-on memory.

522 Unnecessary file deleted to create new file.

The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new file has been created. Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if the file of the same name with different contents exists when creating files.

524 Device writing error. Correct device.

When writing in the device, error occurred. Correct the device.

525 Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects.

Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project. Confirm the alarm log file and where to store the alarm log file.

526 File conversion failed. The file specified for the file conversion does not exist. Check the settings for specifying a file to be converted.

530 Improper monitor device. Confirm monitor channel.

The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or the channel is not the monitor target. Confirm the monitor target channel of the screen data.

535 Cannot open image file. Confirm whether any file exists in the memory card.

536 Image file error or invalid file format.

1. Confirm whether the image file in the memory card is normal.

2. Confirm whether any image file of invalid format is stored.

550 Invalid key code

The key code input execution trigger was ON with the non- target key code set in the key code storage device. Confirm the key code supported by the object where error occurs.

560 Language switch failure. Install optional functions.

Switched language specifying KANJI other than Japanese without the option OS installed. Install the option OS.

561 Language switch failure. Load expansion memory board.

Switched language specifying a KANJI region other than Japanese without the option function board with add-on memory installed. Install the option function board with add-on memory.

562 Install the font appropriate for the specified system language.

No font appropriate for the system language specified at the system language switching is installed. Install the appropriate font.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20 - 30 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

570 Recipe device points too large.

The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified range. Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range.

571 Capacity shortage of user memory (RAM)

There is no empty area/space in D drive. Format the D drive in the memory to secure free area.

581 Abnormal Advanced recipe file

Advanced Recipe cannot be executed for advanced recipe file with incorrect contents. Delete the advanced recipe file from the memory card.

582 Cannot generate Advanced recipe file.

Cannot generate advanced recipe file. Confirm the following and execute recipe processing again. 1. Confirm whether the memory card is installed. 2. Confirm whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is

ON. 3. Confirm the available memory of the memory card.

583 Unable to save device value to Advanced recipe file.

Unable to save device value to advanced recipe file. 1. Confirm the write-protection of memory card. 2. Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading

only.

584 Advance recipe file save error

An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file writing. Do not pull the memory card out while the Advanced Recipe is operating.

585 Advanced recipe file upload error

An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading. Do not pull the memory card out while the Advanced Recipe is operating.

586 Specified Advanced recipe number does not exist.

The advanced recipe of non-existing number is about to be executed. Execute advanced recipe of existing number.

587 Specified record number does not exist.

The advanced record of non-existing number is about to be executed. Execute record of existing number.

588 Cannot save recipe data to read only record.

Saving recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value cannot be edited. Make the recipe device value of the record editable with Advanced Recipe Setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 or specify the record of which recipe device value can be edited.

589 Recipe device save error. Recipe file does not exist.

Saving recipe is about to be executed to the advanced recipe setting that is set for not using file. Specify the advanced recipe setting that uses file.

590 Recipe device upload error. Recipe device value does not exist.

Loading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which recipe device value is not set. Specify the record of which recipe device value is set.

591 Advanced Recipe error. Check recipe data.

The advanced recipe setting is not correct. Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and download it to the GOT again.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

20 - 31

595 Logging file error. Logging file error. When collecting data again, delete logging files and management files.

596 Logging setting does not exist or setting value error.

The logging setting specified in the historical trend graph setting does not exist. Review the historical trend graph setting and specify a logging setting that exists.

597 The specified logging ID does not exist.

Check the logging ID in the historical trend graph setting. 1. When setting the logging, enter an existing logging ID. 2. When setting the logging ID by using a device or the

graph offset function, specify the device for the logging ID set in the logging setting.

598 The specified logging setting is incompatible.

1. Configure the setting so that the number of logging devices set for the logging ID exceeds that of data lines on the historical trend graph.

2. Configure the setting so that the data type of the logging device set for the logging ID is the same as that of the device specified in the historical trend graph.

600 Unsupported version of printer unit.

The version of OS installed in the GOT is not compatible with the printer unit. Install the extended function OS (Printer) with the latest GT Designer3 or GT Designer2.

601 Printer unit error.

The printer unit is installed incorrectly. The built-in flash memory of the printer unit is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed. Check that the printer unit is installed correctly. When the printer unit has been installed correctly, the built-in flash memory is broken or the guaranteed life has been elapsed. Replace the printer unit with new one.

602 Video/RGB unit not mounted

1. Check if the video/RGB input unit is installed. 2. Check if the GOT used supports video/RGB input.

603 External I/O unit error Check if the external I/O unit is correctly installed.

604 Sound output unit error Check if the sound output unit is correctly installed.

610 Insufficient memory capacity.

The memory capacity for the MES interface function is insufficient. Delete unnecessary files, and reserve memory.

611 Improper job files. Confirm job setting.

The contents for job files are unmatched with the settings for job files. Check if there are mistakes in the settings on the setting screen.

612 Cannot access Logging Files Check the memory card

1. Insert a memory card. 2. Turn on the memory card access switch. 3. If the memory card has unnecessary files, delete the files.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20 - 32 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

613 Error in writing logfile 1. Insert a memory card. 2. Turn on the memory card access switch. 3. Check if the memory card is writable.

614 Error in reading logfile 1. Insert a memory card. 2. Turn on the memory card access switch. 3. Check if the memory card is readable.

615 Cannot connect to MES Server. Check the Server.

The server does not work normally or the connection path to the server is made up incorrectly. 1. Check the operating conditions of the server. 2. Check the network to the server.

616 Cannot connect to SNTP Server. Check the Server.

The settings for the SNTP server are wrong or the network to the SNTP server is made up incorrectly. 1. Check the operating conditions of the STNP server. 2. Check the network to the SNTP server.

640 An error occurred in a FTP client process.

Reconfigure the GOT (FTP client) setting. Check the operating status and network line of the FTP server. For the error details, check the GOT special register GS989 (FTP communication error notification).

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3

800 Abnormal module status Refer to explanations of SB0020 on the applicable network manual.

801 Abnormal baton passing status

Refer to explanations of SB0047 on the applicable network manual.

802 Abnormal cyclic transmission status

Refer to explanations of SB0049 on the applicable network manual.

803 Transient error Refer to explanations of SB00EE on the applicable network manual.

804 The cable on the IN side is disconnected or is not connected.

Refer to explanations of SB0067 on the applicable network manual.

805 The cable on the OUT side is disconnected or is not connected.

Refer to explanations of SB0068 on the applicable network manual.

850 CC-Link switch setting error

1. Check if the switch settings have no error. 2. Check error codes stored in SW006A. 3. Refer to explanations of SB006A on the applicable

network manual.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

20 - 33

*1 When an error occurs, "FFH" is stored to the channel No.

851 Abnormal cyclic transmission status

1. Check if terminating resistors are connected. 2. Check error codes for the PLC CPU. 3. Check the parameter for the PLC CPU on the master

station. 4. Check the error status of the master station. 5. Refer to explanations of SB006E on the applicable

network manual.

852 Abnormal host line status 1. Check if the cable is unplugged or not. 2. Refer to explanations of SB0090 on the applicable

network manual.

853 Transient error 1. Check the transient error occurrence status for each

station stored in SW0094 to SW0097. 2. Refer to explanations of SB0094.

Error code

Error message Action Channel

No. storage

20 - 34 20.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20.3.2 List of Error Message/System Alarm

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

APPENDICES

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

(1) GT1595

Unit:mm(inch)

1 0

(0 .3

9 )

2 8

1 (1

1 .1

) 1

0

(0 .3

9 )

397(15.6)

320(12.6)

2 9

6 (1

1 .7

)

320(12.6)

6 1

(2 .4

)

6 (0 .2

4 )

5 (0

.2 0

)

382(15.0)

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

App - 1

(2) GT1585

Unit: mm (inch)

301(11.85)

250(9.84)

316(12.44)

263(10.35)

1 0

1 0

(0 .3

9 )

(0 .2

0 )

(0 .2

4 )

(0 .3

9 )

5 6

(2 .2

0 )

6 5 2

(2 .0

5 )

5

2 2

7 (8

.9 4

)

2 4

2 (9

.5 3

)

App - 2 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(3) GT157

Unit: mm (inch)

288(11.34)

222(8.74)

303(11.93)

252(9.92)

5 6

(2 .2

0 )

6 (0 .2

4 )

4 9

(1 .9

3 )

5 (0 .2

0 )

2 1

4 (8

.4 3

)

1 9

9 (7

.8 3

) 1

0

(0 .3

9 )

1 0

(0 .3

9 )

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

App - 3

(4) GT156

Unit: mm (inch)

226(8.90)

175.5(6.91)

175.5(6.91)

241(9.49)

5 6

(0 .2

0 )

1 9

0 (7

.4 8

)

1 7

5 (6

.8 9

) 1

0

(0 .3

9 )

1 0

(0 .3

9 )

5 2

(2 .0

5 )

6 (0 .2

4 )

5 (0 .2

0 )

App - 4 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(5) GT155

110(4.33)

110(4.33)

167(6.57)

5 6

1 3

5 (5

.3 1

)

1 2

0 (4

.7 2

) 1

0 1

0

6 0

(2 .3

6 )

152(5.98)

Unit: mm (inch)

(0 .3

9 )

(0 .3

9 )

(0 .2

0 )

(0 .2

4 )

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

App - 5

(6) Depth dimension and cable bending dimensions of the GOT with extension unit

(a) GT1595

Unit: mm (inch)

GOT rear face GOT side face

Model name A B C D R

(bending radius of the cable)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

95(3.74)

123(4.84)

0(0)

21(0.83)

55(2.17)

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2

73.5(2.89) 36(1.42)

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

95(3.74)

8(0.32)

55(2.17)

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

73.5(2.89) 36(1.42)

GT15-RS2-9P*2, GT15-RS4-9S*2

72.5(2.85)

21(0.83)

30(1.18)

GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32)

GT15-J71E71-100 38(1.5)*2 - 24(0.95)

GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4

GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44)

0(0)

30(1.18)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 34.5(1.36)

15(0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *8 66(2.60) 26(1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 21(0.83) 28(1.1)

GT15-75J71LP23-Z *4 *4 45(1.77)

*4

GT15-75J71BR13-Z 80(3.15)

0(0) 50(1.97)

GT15-75J61BT13-Z 50(1.97)

GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 21(0.83) 18(0.71)

GT15-CFCD - - - 20(0.79)

-

GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)

123(4.84) 0(0)

55(2.17)

GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 21(0.83)

43(1.69)

GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 30(1.18)

B A

C*7R Extension unit

100 (3.94)

or more

* D*1

Other equipment Unit: mm (inch)

GOT type Dimension of *

GT1595 55 (2.17)

GT1585 46 (1.81)

GT157 43 (1.69)

GT156 46 (1.81)

GT155 54 (2.13)

App - 6 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(b) GT1585

Unit: mm (inch)

Model name A B C D R

(bending radius of the cable)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

95(3.74)

64(2.52)

31(1.22)

18(0.71)

55(2.17)

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2

73.5(2.89) 9.5(0.37) 36(1.42)

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

95(3.74) 31(1.22)

5(0.2)

55(2.17)

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

73.5(2.89) 9.5(0.37) 36(1.42)

GT15-RS2-9P*2, GT15-RS4-9S*2

72.5(2.85) 8.5(0.33)

18(0.71)

30(1.18)

GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 0(0)

GT15-J71E71-100 38(1.5)*2 - 24(0.95)

GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4

GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 23.5(0.93) 30(1.18)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 16(0.63) 31.5(1.24)

15(0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *8 66(2.60) 2(0.08) 26(1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 0 18(0.71) 28(1.1)

GT15-75J71LP23-Z *3 *3 42(1.65)

*3

GT15-75J71BR13-Z 80(3.15) 16(0.63) 50(1.97)

GT15-75J61BT13-Z 47(1.85)

GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 0(0)

18(0.71)

18(0.71)

GT15V-75V4*5 132(5.2) 68(2.68) 20(0.79)

GT15V-75R1*5 77(3.03) 13(0.51) 32(1.26)

GT15V-75V4R1*5

BNC: 132(5.2)

RGB: 77(3.03)

BNC:68 (2.68)

RGB:13 (0.51)

BNC:20(0.79) RGB:32(1.26)

GT15V-75ROUT*5 77(3.03) 13(0.51) 32(1.26)

GT15-CFCD - - - 17(0.67)

-

GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)

64(2.52)

56(2.20) 55(2.17)

GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 17(0.67) 18(0.71)

43(1.69)

GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 0(0) 30(1.18)

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

App - 7

(c) GT157

Unit: mm (inch)

Model name A B C D R

(bending radius of the cable)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

95(3.74)

50(1.97)

45(1.77)

21(0.83)

55(2.17)

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2

73.5(2.89) 23.5(0.93) 36(1.42)

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

95(3.74) 45(1.77)

8(0.32)

55(2.17)

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

73.5(2.89) 23.5(0.93) 36(1.42)

GT15-RS2-9P*2, GT15-RS4-9S*2

72.5(2.85) 22.5(2.60)

21(0.83)

30(1.18)

GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 0(0)

GT15-J71E71-100 38(1.5)*2 - 24(0.95)

GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4

GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 37.5(1.48) 30(1.18)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 30(1.18) 34.5(1.36)

15(0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *8 66(2.60) 16(0.63) 26(1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 0 21(0.83) 28(1.1)

GT15-75J71LP23-Z *4 *4 45(1.77)

*4

GT15-75J71BR13-Z 80(3.15) 30(1.18) 50(1.97)

GT15-75J61BT13-Z 50(1.97)

GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 2(0.08)

21(0.83)

18(0.71)

GT15V-75V4*6 132(5.2) 82(3.23) 20(0.79)

GT15V-75R1*6 77(3.03) 27(1.06) 32(1.26)

GT15V-75V4R1*6

BNC:132 (5.2)

RGB:77 (3.03)

BNC:82 (3.23)

RGB:27 (1.06)

BNC:20(0.79) RGB:32(1.26)

GT15V-75ROUT*6 77(3.03) 27(1.06) 32(1.26)

GT15-CFCD - - - 20(0.79)

-

GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)

50(1.97)

70(2.76) 55(2.17)

GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 31(1.22) 21(0.83)

43(1.69)

GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 0(0) 30(1.18)

App - 8 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(d) GT156

Unit: mm (inch)

Model name A B C D R

(bending radius of the cable)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

95(3.74)

45(1.77)

50(1.97)

23(0.91)

55(2.17)

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2

73.5(2.89) 28.5(1.12) 36(1.42)

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

95(3.74) 50(1.97)

10(0.39)

55(2.17)

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

73.5(2.89) 28.5(1.12) 36(1.42)

GT15-RS2-9P*2, GT15-RS4-9S*2

72.5(2.85) 27.5(1.08)

23(0.91)

30(1.18)

GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 0(0)

GT15-J71E71-100 38(1.5)*3 - 24(0.95)

GT15-J71LP23-25 *4 *4 *4

GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 42.5(1.67) 30(1.18)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 35(1.38) 36.5(1.44)

15(0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *8 66(2.60) 21(0.83) 26(1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 2(0.08) 23(0.91) 28(1.1)

GT15-75J71LP23-Z *4 *4 47(1.85)

*4

GT15-75J71BR13-Z 80(3.15) 35(1.38) 50(1.97)

GT15-75J61BT13-Z 52(2.05)

GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 7(0.28) 23(0.91) 18(0.71)

GT15-CFCD - - - 22(0.87)

-

GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)

45(1.77)

75(2.95) 55(2.17)

GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 36(1.42) 23(0.91)

43(1.69)

GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 0(0) 30(1.18)

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

App - 9

(e) GT155

Unit: mm (inch) *1 Refer to App.1 (7) for the depth dimensions when installing units, which allows multiple stages. *2 For cables prepaired by the user, the dimensions are different. *3 This dimension is applied when the external dimension of cable connector is 21.5mm. (Refer to the following fig-

ure.) The dimension varies depending on the connector used.

*4 For cable details of GT15-75J71LP23-Z (Optical loop unit), consult the local office of Mitsubishi Electric System & Service, Co., Ltd.

*5 GT1585V-S *6 GT1575V-S *7 If cable bending radius is smaller than the lowest part of the case on the back of the GOT, the dimension of *7 is

equal to or less than 0; however, it is written as "0" in the table. *8 The bend radius varies depending on the Ethernet cable to be used.

Model name A B C D R

(bending radius of the cable)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2

95(3.74)

16(0.63)

79(3.11)

23(0.91)

55(2.17)

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2

73.5(2.89) 57.5(2.26) 36(1.42)

GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

95(3.74) 79(3.11)

10(0.39)

55(2.17)

GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

73.5(2.89) 57.5(2.26) 36(1.42)

GT15-RS2-9P*2, GT15-RS4-9S*2

72.5(2.85) 56.5(2.22)

23(0.91)

30(1.18)

GT15-RS4-TE*2 33.5(1.32) 17.5(0.69)

GT15-J71E71-100 38(1.5) 22(0.87) 24(0.95)

GT15-J71LP23-25 *3 *3 *3

GT15-J71BR13 87.5(3.44) 71.5(2.81) 30(1.18)

GT15-J71GP23-SX 80(3.15) 64(2.52) 36.5(1.44)

15(0.59)

GT15-J71GF13-T2 *8 66(2.60) 50(1.97) 26(1.02)

GT15-J61BT13 47(1.85) 31(1.22) 23(0.91)

28(1.1)

GT15-PRN 52(2.05) 36(1.42) 18(0.71)

GT15-CFCD - - - 22(0.87)

-

GT15-CFEX-C08SET 120(4.72)

16(0.63)

104(4.09) 55(2.17)

GT15-DIO 81(3.19) 65(2.56) 23(0.91)

43(1.69)

GT15-SOUT 44(1.73) 28(1.10) 30(1.18)

GT15-J71E71-100

Cable connector

2 1

.5

(0 .8

5 )

App - 10 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(7) Depth dimensions for installing multiple stages The following shows how to calculate the depth dimensions for installing multiple stages to the GOT. When installing only the first stage , refer to the dimensions in App.1 (6).

1 Select the GOT main unit coefficient from the following list.

2 Select the option coefficient of the corresponding extension unit from the following list.

Unit: mm (inch) *1 When installing GT15V-75V4, GT15V-75R1, GT15V-75V4R1, GT15V-75ROUT and GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-

J71GF13-T2, install GT15-J71GP23-SX, GT15-J71GF13-T2 in the second stage.

3 Substitute the coefficients selected in and to the following formula. 4 E (for 2 stages) = G (GOT main unit coefficient) + H (option coefficient) + H (option coefficient) 5 F (for 3 stages) = G (GOT main unit coefficient) + H (option coefficient) + H (option coefficient) +

H (option coefficient)

GOT side face

Model name H (option

coefficient)

GT15-CFCD, GT15-CFEX-C08SET 20.5(0.81)

GT15V-75V4*1, GT15V-75R1*1, GT15V-75V4R1*1, GT15V-75ROUT*1, GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE, GT15-J71E71-100, GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13, GT15-J71LP23-Z, GT15-J71BR13-Z, GT15-J61BT13, GT15-J61BT13-Z, GT15-PRN, GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR, GT15-SOUT

21.5(0.85)

GT15-J71GP23-SX*1, GT15-J71GF13-T2*1 35.5(1.4)

Example) A calculation example is shown below. F dimension (for 3 stages) for installing a video input unit (GT15-75V4) in the first stage, a CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit (GT15-J71GP23-SX) in the second stage and a CF card unit (GT15-CFCD) in the third stage of the GT1595

F (for 3 stages) = -0.5 (main unit coefficient of GT1595) + 21.5(option coefficient of GT15-75V4) + 35.5 (GT15-J71GP23-SX) + 20.5 (GT15-CFCD)

= 77 The dimension after installing the above-mentioned extension units is F=77mm.

Other equipment

100(3.94) or more

E

F

Unit: mm (inch)

GOT type G (main unit coefficient)

GT1595 -0.5(-0.02)

GT1585 -3.5(-0.14)

GT157 -0.5(-0.02)

GT156 1.5(0.59)

GT155 1.5(0.59)

Appendix 1 External Dimen

sions App - 11

(8) External dimensions of the communication cable

(a) External dimensions of the bus connection cable connector

*1: The GT15-C EXSS cable has a grounding wire (1 m).

The GT15-C BS cable has a grounding wire (For the cable length of 10m or more: 1m, for the cable length less than 10m: 0.5m). Be sure to connect the wire to control panels.

*2: The GT15-C EXSS-1 is the set product consisting of (GT15-EXCNB+GT15-C BS). (Refer to Fig. A)

Unit:mm(inch)

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions

GT15-QC B 0.6(2.0),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16),10(33) Fig. 1

GT15-QC BS 15(49),20(66),25(82),30(98),35(115) Fig. 1

GT15-C NB 1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16) Fig. 2

GT15-AC B 0.6(2.0),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16) Fig. 3

GT15-A370C B-S1 1.2(3.9),2.5(8.2) Fig. 4

GT15-A370C B 1.2(3.9),2.5(8.2) Fig. 5

GT15-A1SC B 0.7(2.3),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16) Fig. 6

GT15-A1SC NB 0.45(1.5),0.7(2.3),3(10),5(16) Fig. 7

GT15-C EXSS-1 10.6(34.8),20.6(67.6),30.6(100) Figs. 8 & 9

GT15-EXCNB 0.5(1.6) Fig.8

GT15-C BS 0.7(2.3),1.2(3.9),3(10),5(16),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 9

GT15-J2C10B 1(3) Fig. 10

Fig. A

GT15-EXCNB (Fig. 8) GT15-C BS (Fig. 9)

PLC side GOT side

+G O

T side C

O N

2

C O

N 1

145 (5.71)

L 95 (3.74)10(0.39)

42 (1

.6 5)

34.5 (1.36)

Cable approx. 10(0.39)

Fig.1

Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),red holder tube

20 (0.79)

60 (2.36)

58 (2

.2 8)

70 (2.76)

50 (1.97)

32 (1.26) 11.5

(0.45)

49

(1 .9

3)

L Fig.2

Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)

Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tubePLC side

GOT side

20 (0.79)

60 (2.36) 50

(1.97) 70 (2.76)

58 (2

.2 8)

Fig.3 L

Cable approx. 17.0(0.67)

Ferrite core, approx. 32(1.26) 16(0.63),green holder tube

11.5 (0.45)

32 (1.26)

110 (4.33)

49 (1

.9 3)

L 50 (1.97)

Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)

Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube

Fig.4

L 60 (2.36) 20

(0.79)

58

(2 .2

8)

Fig.5

11.5 (0.45)

32 (1.26)

110 (4.33)

49 (1

.9 3)

50 (1.97)

Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube

Motion controller side A7GT-CNB side

Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)

160 (6.30)

L 110 (4.33)

Fig.6 11.5 (0.45)

33 (1.30)

49 (1

.9 3)

Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube

Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)

App - 12 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

(b) External dimensions of RS-422 connection cable connector

Unit:mm(inch)

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions

GT01-C30R4-25P 3(10) Fig. 11

GT01-C R4-25P 10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 12

GT01-C R4-8P 1(3),3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 13

GT10-C R4-8P 1(3),3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 14

GT10-C R4-25P 3(10),10(33),20(66),30(98) Fig. 15

GT10-C10R4-8PL 1(3) Fig. 16

50 (1.97)

Fig.7

PLC side A7GT-CNB side

L 110 (4.33)

11.5 (0.45)

32 (1.26)

49 (1

.9 3)

20 (0.79)

60 (2.36)

58

(2 .2

8)

Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),green holder tube

Cable approx. 8.0(0.31)

1000

(39.37)

500

(19.69)

75

(2.95)

20.5

(0.81)

Fig.8 FG cable

PLC side GOT side

6

0

(2 .3

6 )

11.5

(0.45) 32

(1.26)

4 9

(1 .9

3 )

G O

T s

id e

C O

N 2

C O

N 1

50 (1

.9 7)

33 (1.30) L

110 (4.33)

160 (6.30)

FG cable

Ferrite core, approx. 35(1.38) 40(1.57),blue holder tube

Cable approx. 9.0(0.35)

Fig.9 11.5 (0.45)

1000

(39.37)

70

(2.76) 100

(3.94)

A0J2-PW side

GOT side

4

9

(1 .9

3 )

11.5

(0.45)

32

(1.26)

Fig.10

50

(1.97)

16

(0.63)

3 5

(1 .3

8 )

53

(2.09)

5 5

(2 .1

7 )

3000

(118.11)

16

(0.63)

Fig.11 L50 (1.97)

16 (0.63)

35 (1

.3 8)

53 (2.09)

55 (2

.1 7)

16 (0.63)

Fig.12

40 (1.57)

13 (0.51)

13 (0

.5 1)

L50 (1.97)

16 (0.63)

35 (1

.3 8)

Fig.13 30

(1.18)

L 40

(1.57)250

(9.84)

Fig.14

53

(2.09)

5 5

(2 .1

7 )

16

(0.63)

30

(1.18)

L

250

(9.84)

Fig.15 1000

(39.37)

38

(1.50)

3 0

(1 .1

8 )

30

(1.18) 250

(9.84)

Fig.16

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

App - 13

(c) External dimensions of RS-232 conversion cable connector

Unit:mm(inch)

Cable model Cable length (m(ft.)) External dimensions

GT01-C30R2-6P 3(10) Fig. 17

GT01-C30R2-9S 3(10) Fig. 18

GT01-C30R2-25P 3(10) Fig. 19

GT10-C30R2-6P 3(10) Fig. 20

50

(1.97)

40

(1.57)

13

(0.51)

3000

(118.11)

3 5

(1 .3

8 )

16

(0.63)

1 3

(0 .5

1 )

Fig.17 3000

(118.11)

3 5

(1 .3

8 )

50

(1.97)

50

(1.97)

16

(0.63)

16

(0.63)

3 5

(1 .3

8 )

Fig.18

3000

(118.11)

50

(1.97) 16

(0.63)

3 5

(1 .3

8 )

53

(2.09)

5 5

(2 .1

7 )

16

(0.63)

Fig.19

3000

(118.11)

40

(1.57)200

(7.87)

Approx. 48

(1.89)

30

(1.18)

Fig.20

App - 14 Appendix 1 External Dimensions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards

1 Rating plate The GOT hardware version, function version, and the standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed at the rating plate on the GOT rear face.

2 Packing box The standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed by the label on the packing box. Note that the position of the label differs depending on the model or shipment date.

A A

Hardware version

Back light model The applicable back light model

is described

Conformed standard

B

Function version

B

BootOS version

(In case that the BootOS is two digits,

only the first digit is written.)

The conformed standards

(such as CE) are described.

Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards

App - 15

Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type. Moreover, there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set.

: Applicable : Not applicable : Not required

(Continued to next page)

Item Functions overview GT15 GT

SoftGOT 1000

GT11 Refe- rence

Communication setting Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication interfaces.

Communication setting

Setting communication parameters

Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words, canceling sequence program protection status (When connecting to FX series CPU)

Ethernet setting

Displaying the contents of Ethernet setting, changing the host

GOT setup

Display

Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time *1

Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen saving

Switching message languages *2

Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF

Setting the black and white inversion display to ON or OFF (For GT15, applicable to only GT1550-Q)

Setting the human sensor (Applicable to only GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, and GT1585-S)

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Operation

Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer

Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed

Setting the touch detection mode (Applicable to only GT1595- X)

Changing security levels

Setting the utility call keys

Adjusting the touch panel (Applicable to only GT1595-X)

SoftGOT-GOT link function setting

Q/L/QnA ladder monitor

Setting the data storage location for the MELSEC-Q/L/QnA ladder monitor function.(Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

Transparent mode settings

Setting the channel No. to be used for the communication for the FA transparent function

Video/RGB Setting

Setting the video display and RGB display (Applicable to only GT1585V-S and GT1575V-S)

Backup/ restoration setting

Setting the storage locations for backups and backup settings

App - 16 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

: Applicable : Not applicable : Not required

(Continued to next page)

Item Functions overview GT15 GT

SoftGOT 1000

GT11 Refe- rence

GOT setup

Behavior of duplicate IPs

Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards.

Time setting & display

Selecting a base clock

Displaying and setting the clock current time

Displaying the battery status

Program /data control

OS information

Installing or uploading OS, displaying OS property, checking OS data

Project Information

Downloading/uploading/deleting/copying project files, displaying project file property, checking project file data

Alarm information

Deleting or copying alarm log files

Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV/TXT format

Displaying graphs of alarm log files

Advanced Recipe information

Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format CSV/TXT format Deleting/copying/moving advanced recipe files, creating a new advanced recipe file Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders, changing advanced recipe folder names, creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing/reading/matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list

Logging information

Converting logging files in G1L format CSV/TXT format

Deleting/copying/moving logging files, changing logging file names Deleting logging folders, creating a new logging folder

Operation log information

Converting operation log files in G1O format CSV/TXT format

Deleting/copying/moving operation log files, changing operation log file names Deleting operation log folders, creating a new operation log folder

Hard copy information

Deleting/copying hard copy files, changing hard copy file names

Memory card format

Formatting memory cards

Memory Information

Displaying the available memory of the GOT

Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function

App - 17

: Applicable : Not applicable : Not required

(Continued to next page)

Item Functions overview GT15 GT

SoftGOT 1000

GT11 Refe- rence

Program /data control

Special data information

Deleting or checking special data files Deleting special data folders Downloading special data stored in the A drive (Standard CF card) or B drive (Extended memory card) to the C drive (Built-in flash memory)

GOT data package acquisition

Copying the OS, special data, and project data to a memory card

Debug & self check

Debug

Ladder monitor. (Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

System monitor

A List editor

FX list editor

Intelligent module monitor (Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

Network monitor

Motion monitor for Q series motion controller CPU

Servo amplifier monitor

CNC monitor (Applicable to only GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, GT1585-S, GT1575V-S, and GT1575-S)

Backup/restoration

CNC data I/O (Applicable to only GT1595-X, GT1585V-S, GT1585-S, GT1575V-S, and GT1575-S)

SFC Monitor(Inapplicable to GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

Ladder editor (Inapplicable to GT1555-V, GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q)

Motion SFC monitor

Self check

Memory check

Drawing check

Font check

Touch panel check

I/O check

Network unit status display

System alarm display

Displaying or resetting GOT errors Displaying CPU errors and network errors

GOT start time Displaying the GOT start date and time, current time, and accumulated operating hours

App - 18 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

: Applicable : Not applicable : Not required

*1: The screen saving time cannot be set. *2: The following display and operations are not allowed with the GT11.

Chinese (Traditional) cannot be displayed. Japanese and Chinese (Simplified) cannot be selected on the GOT screen. (Japanese and Chinese (Simplified) fonts cannot be installed at the same time.)

Item Functions overview GT15 GT

SoftGOT 1000

GT11 Refe- rence

Debug & self check

Operator info. management

Adding/editing/deleting operator information, changing passwords Setting the automatic logout time and password expiration date

Finferprint Authentication

Adding/deleting fingerprint information

Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display

Maintenance timing setting

Setting the maintenance notification times for the backlight and display Setting the number of maintenance notifications for touch keys and the built-in flash memory

Addition times reset Resetting accumulated hours and counts for maintenance time notifications

Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function

App - 19

Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

Appendix 4.1 Relevant models

The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below.

Appendix 4.2 Transportation guidelines

Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment. When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location, make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations. For details, please consult your transportation company.

Product name Model Description Handled as

Battery for GOT1000 Series GT15-BAT Lithium battery Non-dangerous goods

App - 20 Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive For using a CF card, select the A or B drive according to the following.

(1) A drive The CF card interface built in the GOT is used as the A drive.

(2) B drive The following two units can be used as the B drive. CF card unit

When an additional drive is used, use the CF card unit as the B drive of the GOT. CF card extension unit

When an additional drive is used, use the CF card extension unit as the B drive of the GOT. Use the unit when a CF card interface is needed on the control panel.

1 Example of how to use CF card unit Infrequently used data, including project data, are saved to a CF card, and frequently used data, including alarm histories and operation logs, are saved to another CF card. The data can be saved in each CF card.

2 Example of how to use CF card extension unit The CF card extension unit can be used in the same way as the above "Example of how to use CF card unit". For using the CF card extension unit, there is no need to open the control panel's door when a CF card is inserted or ejected.

CF card

GOT CF card unit

The first CF card: Project data

The second CF card: Alarm history, operation log

GOT

CF card extension unit

Project data is saved to

the first CF card.

Inside the

control panel

Outside the

control panel

GOT

CF card extension unit

Alarm histories and operation logs are

saved to the second CF card.

Appendix 5 How to Choose Drive

App - 21

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

The following describes the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 Version2.96A (partially including 2.98C). For function comparisons among GOTs, refer to the following.

GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (App3-2 List of Differences between the GOT1000 series and GOT-900 series functions)

For using the following functions, use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later. (Applicable OS versions and communication drivers for GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11 are different from those for GT10. The added functions for GT10 are listed separately from those for GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11.)

How to use this table

provides the versions of GT Designer2 and OS required for each GOT or communication unit.

and the following provides description for the functions added with the version upgrade, and the versions of GT Designer2 and OS with which the function is compatible.

Regarding and the following, there may be a case where the function is not supported by a particular type of GOT even when the function is compatible with the version. In such a case, check the version for the function and the version of the GOT, and use GT Designer2 or OS of the later version.

Appendix 6.1 GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11

1 Added GOT main unit/Communication unit

Target Models Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD, GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD, GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

GT1595-XTBA 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

GT1595-XTBD 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

GT1585-STBD 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

GT1575-STBD 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

GT1575-VTBD 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD, GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

GT1565-VTBD 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

(Continued to next page)

App - 22 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

2 Added connection types (1) For GT16

GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

GT1555-VTBD 2.58L Standard monitor OS [03.03.**]

GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD, GT1550-QLBD 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA

2.58L Standard monitor OS [03.03.**]

GT1155-QTBD 2.73B Standard monitor OS [03.09.**]

GT1155HS-QSBD to GT1150HS-QLBD 2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

GT SoftGOT1000 2.27D -

GT15-QBUS(2), GT15-ABUS(2), GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE 2.18U

Standard monitor OS [02.02.**] Communication driver For communication drivers used in each connection, use [02.02.**] or

GT15-J71GP23-SX 2.77F Standard monitor OS [03.12.**]

GT01-RS4-M 2.96A

Standard monitor OS [04.03.**] Communication driver Multidrop(Host) [04.04.**] Multidrop(Slave) [04.04.**]

GT16M-V4, GT16M-R2, GT16M-V4R1, GT16M-ROUT 2.90U Extended function OS Video/RGB [04.02.**]

GT16M-MMR 2.90U Extended function OS Multimedia [04.02.**]

GT15-CFCD 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**] BootOS [03.01.**.M]

GT15-CFEX-C08SET 2.45X Standard monitor OS [03.02.**] BootOS [03.02.**.N]

GT15-SOUT 2.58L Extended function OS Sound Output [03.03.**]

GT15-DIO 2.58L Extended function OS External I/O / Operation Panel [03.03.**]

GT15-DIOR 2.90U Extended function OS External I/O / Operation Panel [04.02.**]

GT15-80FPA 2.91V

Extended function OS Operator authentication [04.03.**] Fingerprint Authentication [04.03.**]

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

Bus connection

Supporting connection to BUS 2.90U Communication driver Bus(Q)[04.02.**] Bus(A/QnA) [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver Bus(Q)[04.03.**]

(Continued to next page)

Target Models Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 23

Bus connection Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver Bus(Q)[04.04.**]

Direct connection to CPU

Supporting the direct CPU connection 2.90U Communication driver A/QnA/Q CPU, QJ71C24 [04.02.**] MELSEC-FX [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver A/QnA/Q CPU, QJ71C24 [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver A/QnA/Q CPU, QJ71C24 [04.04.**]

Computer link connection

Supporting the computer link connection 2.90U

Communication driver A/QnA/Q CPU, QJ71C24 [04.02.**] AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* [04.02.**] AJ71C24/UC24 [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver A/QnA/Q CPU, QJ71C24 [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver A/QnA/Q CPU, QJ71C24 [04.04.**]

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)

Supporting connection to MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)

2.90U Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.04.**]

MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

Supporting connection to MELSECNET/10 PLC to PLC connection)

2.90U Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.04.**]

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

Supporting connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network 2.90U Communication driver CC-Link IE Controller Network [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver CC-Link IE Controller Network [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver CC-Link IE Controller Network [04.04.**]

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

Supporting connection to CC-Link (Intelligence device station)

2.90U Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [04.04.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

App - 24 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

CC-Link connection (Via G4)

Supporting connection to CC-Link (Via G4) 2.90U Communication driver CC-Link(G4) [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver CC-Link(G4) [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver CC-Link(G4) [04.04.**]

Ethernet connection

Supporting connection to the Ethernet 2.90U Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [04.04.**]

OMRON PLC connection

Supporting connection to OMRON PLC 2.90U Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC [04.02.**]

KEYENCE PLC connection

Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2.90U Communication driver KEYENCE KV700/1000 [04.02.**]

KOYO EI PLC connection

Supporting connection to KOYO EI PLC 2.90U Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL [04.02.**]

SHARP PLC connection Supporting connection to SHARP PLC 2.90U Communication driver SHARP JW [04.02.**]

TOSHIBA PLC connection

Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC 2.90U Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V [04.02.**]

TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC connection

Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 2.90U Communication driver TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini [04.02.**]

JTEKT PLC connection Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2.90U Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC [04.02.**]

HITACHI IES PLC connection

Supporting connection to HITACHI IES PLC 2.90U

Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H [04.02.**] HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol 2) [04.02.**]

HITACHI PLC connection

Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2.90U Communication driver HITACHI S10mini/S10V [04.02.**]

FUJI PLC connection Supporting connection to FUJI PLC 2.90U Communication driver FUJI MICREX-F [04.02.**]

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC connection

Supporting connection to PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

2.90U Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP [04.02.**]

Communication driver name has been changed. 2.96A Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP [04.04.**]

YASKAWA PLC connection

Supporting connection to YASKAWA PLC 2.90U

Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/ CP9300MS [04.02.**] Ethernet(YASKAWA) [04.02.**]

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 25

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

YOKOGAWA PLC connection

Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA PLC 2.90U

Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3/ STARDOM [04.02.**] Ethernet(YOKOGAWA) [04.02.**] MODBUS/TCP [04.02.**]

ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC connection

Supporting connection to ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC 2.90U

Communication driver AB SLC500, AB 1:N [04.02.**] AB MicroLogix [04.02.**] AB Control/CompactLogix [04.02.**] EtherNet/IP(AB) [04.02.**]

GE PLC connection Supporting connection to GE PLC 2.90U Communication driver GE Fanuc Automation(SNP-X) [04.02.**]

LS IS PLC connection Supporting connection to LS IS PLC 2.90U Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K[04.02.**]

SCHNEIDER PLC connection Supporting connection to the MODBUS /TCP 2.90U

Communication driver MODBUS/TCP [04.02.**]

SIEMENS PLC connection

Supporting connection to SIEMENS PLC 2.90U Communication driver SIEMENS S7-300/400 [04.02.**] SIEMENS S7-200 [04.02.**]

Microcomputer connection

Supporting connection to a microcomputer 2.90U Communication driver Computer [04.02.**]

MODBUS /RTU connection

Supporting MODBUS /RTU connection 2.96A Communication driver MODBUS/RTU [04.04.**]

MODBUS /TCP connection

Supporting connection to the MODBUS /TCP 2.90U Communication driver MODBUS/TCP [04.02.**]

OMRON temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to OMRON temperature controller 2.90U Communication driver OMRON THERMAC / INPANEL NEO [04.02.**]

SHINKO indicating controller connection

Supporting connection to SHINKO indicating controller 2.90U Communication driver SHINKO TECHNOS CONTROLLER [04.02.**]

CHINO controller connection

Supporting connection to CHINO controller 2.90U Communication driver CHINO Controllers(MODBUS) [04.02.**]

FUJI temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to FUJI temperature controller 2.90U Communication driver FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH [04.02.**]

YAMATAKE temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to YAMATAKE temperature controller 2.90U Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC [04.02.**]

YOKOGAWA temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA temperature controller

2.90U Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/ UT2000 [04.02.**]

RKC temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to RKC temperature controller 2.90U Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG(MODBUS) [04.02.**]

Inverter connection Supporting connection to inverter 2.90U Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 [04.02.**]

Robot controller connection

Supporting connection to robot controller 2.90U Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71,Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [04.02.**]

(Continued to next page)

App - 26 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

*1 This item is supported by GT Works3 Version1.14Q or later.

(2) For GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

Servo amplifier connection

Supporting connection to servo amplifier 2.90U Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to MR-J2S-*CL 2.96A Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [04.04.**]

CNC connection (MELDAS C6/C64)

Supporting connection to CNC (MELDAS C6/C64 series) 2.90U

Communication driver AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* [04.02.**] MELSECNET/H [04.02.**] CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [04.02.**] Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [04.02.**]

GOT multidrop connection

Supporting the GOT multidrop connection *1 -

Barcode reader connection

Supporting connection to barcode reader 2.90U Extended function OS Barcode [04.02.**]

Printer connection Supporting connection to printer 2.90U Extended function OS Printer [04.02.**]

FA transparent

Supporting the FA transparent function via USB 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Supporting the Ethernet connection between the GOT and the PLC on GX Developer

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

External I/O device connection

Supporting connection to external I/O devices 2.90U Extended function OS External I/O / Operation Panel [04.02.**]

RFID connection Supporting connection to the RFID controller 2.90U Extended function OS RFID [04.02.**]

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

Bus connection

Supporting connection to BUS

2.04E Communication driver Bus(Q)[01.00.**] Bus(A/QnA) [01.00.**]

2.58L

GT15 Communication driver Bus(Q) [03.03.**] Bus(A/QnA) [03.03.**] GT11 BootOS [03.03.**.P] Standard monitor OS [03.03.**] Communication driver Bus(Q) [03.03.**] Bus(A/QnA) [03.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU

2.09K Communication driver Bus(Q) [01.02.**]

Priority order of data load can be set. 2.43V Communication driver Bus connection Q [03.01.**]

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver Bus connection Q [03.07.**]Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 27

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

Bus connection

Supporting connection to CRnQ-700 2.73B Communication driver Bus connection Q [03.09.**]

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU

2.77F Communication driver Bus connection Q [03.12.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver Bus connection Q [03.13.**]Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU,

Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver Bus connection Q [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver Bus connection Q [04.04.**]

Direct connection to CPU

Supporting connection to Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU

2.09K Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24 [01.02.**]

Supporting connection to FX3U series 2.18U Communication driver MELSEC-FX[02.02.**]

Supporting automatic system switching for QCPU redundant system

2.32J Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS C6* [03.00.**]

Communication driver name has been changed.

2.43V Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.01.**]

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24, MELDASC6*[03.07.**]

Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

Supporting connection to CRnQ-700

2.73B

Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.09.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries, the timeout time, and delay time

Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.09.**] MELSEC-FX[03.09.**]

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU

2.77F Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.12.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.13.**]

Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to QS001CPU

Supporting connection to FX3G series 2.90U Communication driver MELSEC-FX[04.02.**]

(Continued to next page)

App - 28 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

Direct connection to CPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [04.04.**]

Computer link connection

Supporting connection to Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU

2.09K Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24 [01.02.**]

Communication driver name has been changed.

2.43V Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.01.**] AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* [03.01.**]

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24, MELDASC6*[03.07.**]

Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit

Supporting connection to CRnQ-700

2.73B

Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.09.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries, the timeout time, and delay time

Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.09.**] AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* [03.09.**] AJ71C24/UC24[03.09.**]

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU 2.77F

Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.12.**]Supporting connection to QJ71CMON

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [04.04.**]

Computer link connection

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [03.13.**]

Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24 [04.03.**]

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)

Supporting connection to MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network)

2.25B -

2.32J Communication driver MELSECNET/H [03.00.**]

Supporting routing parameter setting with GT Designer2.

2.43V Communication driver MELSECNET/H [03.01.**]

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 29

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.07.**]Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

Supporting connection to CRnQ-700 2.73B Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.09.**]

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU

2.77F Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.12.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.13.**]

Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to QS001CPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.04.**]

MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

Supporting connection to MELSECNET/ 10 PLC to PLC connection)

2.09K Communication driver MELSECNET/10 [01.02.**]Supporting connection to Q172HCPU,

Q173HCPU

Supporting automatic system switching for QCPU redundant system

2.32J Communication driver MELSECNET/10 [03.00.**]

Supporting routing parameter setting with GT Designer2.

2.43V Communication driver MELSECNET/H [03.01.**]

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.07.**]Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

Supporting connection to CRnQ-700 2.73B Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.09.**]

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU

2.77F Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.12.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver MELSECNET/H[03.13.**]

Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to QS001CPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver MELSECNET/H [04.04.**]

(Continued to next page)

App - 30 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

Supporting connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network

2.77F Communication driver CC-Link IE Controller Network[03.12.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver CC-Link IE Controller Network[03.13.**]

Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to QS001CPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver CC-Link IE Controller Network[04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver CC-Link IE Controller Network[04.04.**]

CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)

Supporting connection to CC-Link (Intelligence device station)

2.09K Communication driver CC-LINK(ID) [01.02.**]Supporting connection to Q172HCPU,

Q173HCPU

Supporting connection to CC-Link Ver.2 2.32J Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [03.00.**]

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [03.07.**]

Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit

Supporting connection to CRnQ-700 2.73B Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [03.09.**]

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU

2.77F Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [03.12.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [03.13.**]Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU,

Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver CC-Link Ver2 (ID) [04.04.**]

CC-Link connection (Via G4)

Supporting connection to CC-Link (Via G4)

2.09K Communication driver CC-LINK(G4) [01.02.**]Supporting connection to Q172HCPU,

Q173HCPU

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 31

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

CC-Link connection (Via G4)

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver CC-Link(G4)[03.07.**]

Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit

Supporting connection to AJ65BT-R2N

2.73B Communication driver CC-Link(G4)[03.09.**]

Supporting connection to CRnQ-700

Supporting settings for the number of retries, the timeout time, and delay time

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU

2.77F Communication driver CC-Link(G4)[03.12.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

2.82L Communication driver CC-Link(G4)[03.13.**]Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU,

Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver CC-Link(G4) [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver CC-Link(G4) [04.04.**]

Ethernet connection

Supporting connection to the Ethernet

2.09K Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71 [01.02.**]

Supporting connection to Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU

Supporting automatic system switching for QCPU redundant system

2.32J Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71 [03.00.**]

Supporting routing parameter setting with GT Designer2.

2.43V Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71 [03.01.**]

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71, Q17nNC[03.07.**]

Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU

Supporting connection to CNC C70

Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit

Supporting the redundant system with the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system

The communication driver name is changed.

2.73B Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71,Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [03.09.**]Supporting connection to CRnQ-700 and

CRnD-700

Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU and Q26UDHCPU

2.77F Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71,Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [03.12.**]

(Continued to next page)

App - 32 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

Ethernet connection

The communication driver name is changed.

2.82L Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [03.13.**]

Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and Q06PHCPU

Supporting connection to Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU

Supporting connection to QS001CPU

Supporting connection to Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, and Q20UDEHCPU

2.91V Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [04.03.**]

Supporting connection to Q170MCPU 2.96A Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [04.04.**]

OMRON PLC connection

Extended device range monitored (The setting of TIM or CNT up to 4095, etc.)

2.09K Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC [01.02.**]

Supporting delay time setting 2.27D Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC [02.04.**]

Supporting the settings of Retry and Timeout Time.

2.43V Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC [03.01.**]

Supporting connection to CP1L 2.82L Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC [03.13.**]

KEYENCE PLC connection

Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2.18U Communication driver KEYENCE KV700/1000 [02.02.**]

Supporting connection to KV-3000 and KV-5000

2.77F Communication driver KEYENCE KV700/1000 [03.12.**]

KOYO EI PLC connection

Supporting connection to KOYO EI PLC 2.82L Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL [03.13.**]

SHARP PLC connection

Supporting connection to SHARP PLC 2.09K Communication driver SHARP JW [01.02.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries and the timeout time

2.73B Communication driver SHARP JW [03.09.**]

TOSHIBA PLC connection

Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC 2.09K Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V [01.02.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries, the timeout time, and delay time

2.73B Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V [03.09.**]

Supporting connection to model2000(S2T)

2.77F Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V [03.12.**]

TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC connection

Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

2.77F Communication driver TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini [03.12.**]

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 33

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

JTEKT PLC connection

Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2.32J Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC [03.00.**]

HITACHI IES PLC connection

Supporting connection to HITACHI IES PLC

2.09K

Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H [01.02.**] HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol 2) [01.02.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries, the timeout time, and delay time

2.73B

Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H [03.09.**] HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol 2) [03.09.**]

HITACHI PLC connection

Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2.43V Communication driver HITACHI S10mini/S10V [03.01.**]

FUJI PLC connection

Supporting connection to FUJI PLC 2.43V Communication driver FUJI MICREX-F [03.01.**]

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC connection

Supporting connection to PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

2.09K Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP [01.02.**]

Supporting connection to FP- 2.18U Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP [02.02.**]

Supporting connection to FP-X

2.58L Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP [03.03.**]

The device range applicable to monitoring is extended. (Up to 991F for R and up to 911 for WR can be set.)

Supporting settings for the timeout time and the delay time

2.73B Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP [03.09.**]

Communication driver name has been changed.

2.96A Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP [04.04.**]

YASKAWA PLC connection

Supporting connection to MP2000 and MP3000

2.47Z Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/ CP9300MS [03.02.**]

Supporting the Ethernet connection 2.47Z Communication driver Ethernet(YASKAWA) [03.02.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries and the timeout time

2.73B Communication driver YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/ CP9300MS [03.09.**]

Supporting connection to CP-312 2.77F Communication driver Ethernet(YASKAWA) [03.12.**]

YOKOGAWA PLC connection

Supporting connection to STARDOM 2.32J Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3/ STARDOM [03.00.**]

Supporting the Ethernet connection 2.47Z Communication driver Ethernet(YOKOGAWA) [03.02.**]

Supporting connection to the

MODBUS /TCP 2.73B

Communication driver MODBUS/TCP [03.09.**]

(Continued to next page)

App - 34 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

ALLEN- BRADLEY PLC connection

Can use L device by MicroLogix 1000/ 1200/1500 series

2.18U Communication driver AB MicroLogix [02.02.**]

Supporting connection to Control/ CompactLogix

2.58L Communication driver AB Control/CompactLogix [03.03.**]

Supporting the Ethernet connection 2.63R Communication driver EtherNet/IP(AB)[03.07.**]

GE PLC connection

Supporting connection to GE PLC 2.82L Communication driver GE Fanuc Automation(SNP-X) [03.13.**]

LS IS PLC connection

Supporting connection to LS IS PLC 2.90U Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K [04.02.**]

SCHNEIDER PLC connection

Supporting connection to the

MODBUS /TCP 2.73B

Communication driver MODBUS/TCP [03.09.**]

SIEMENS PLC connection

Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7- 200 series

2.18U Communication driver SIEMENS S7-200 [02.02.**]

Microcomputer connection

Supporting XON/XOFF control 2.32J

Communication driver Computer [03.00.**]Supporting interrupt extension

MODBUS /RTU connection

Supporting MODBUS /RTU connection 2.96A Communication driver MODBUS/RTU [04.04.**]

MODBUS /TCP connection

Supporting MODBUS /TCP connection 2.73B Communication driver MODBUS/TCP [03.09.**]

OMRON temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to OMRON temperature controller

2.18U Communication driver OMRON THERMAC / INPANEL NEO [02.02.**]

The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added.

2.58L Communication driver OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO [03.03.**]

SHINKO indicating controller connection

Supporting connection to SHINKO indicating controller

2.43V Communication driver Shinko Technos Controller [03.01.**]

The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added

2.58L Communication driver Shinko Technos Controller [03.03.**]

CHINO controller connection

Supporting connection to CHINO controller

2.58L Communication driver CHINO Controllers(MODBUS) [03.03.**]

The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 35

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

FUJI temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to FUJI temperature controller

2.32J Communication driver FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH [03.00.**]

The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added

2.58L Communication driver FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH [03.03.**]

YAMATAKE temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to YAMATAKE temperature controller

2.18U Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC [02.02.**]

The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added

2.58L Communication driver YAMATAKE SDC/DMC [03.03.**]

YOKOGAWA temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA temperature controller

2.43V Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/ UT2000 [03.01.**]

The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added

2.58L Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/ UT2000 [03.03.**]

RKC temperature controller connection

Supporting connection to RKC temperature controller

2.18U Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG(MODBUS) [02.02.**]

Supporting connection to SRZ

2.58L Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG(MODBUS) [03.03.**]

The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added

Supporting connection to CB series 2.87R Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG(MODBUS) [04.03.**]

Inverter connection

Supporting connection to inverter 2.18U Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 [02.02.**]

Setting range for Timeout Time has been changed. (3 to 30 seconds 1 to 30 seconds)

2.43V Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 [03.01.**]

Supporting connection to E700 series and V500/V500L series

2.63R Communication driver FREQROL 500/700[03.07.**]

Supporting connection to D700 series 2.91V Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 [04.03.**]

Servo amplifier connection

Supporting connection to servo amplifier 2.09K Communication driver MELSERVO-J2S/M [01.02.**]

Supporting connection to MELSERVO-J3 series

2.18U Communication driver MELSERVO-J3,J2S/M [02.02.**]

Supporting connection to MR-J3-*T series 2.63R Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [03.07.**]

Supporting writing to the E2PROM area in parameter writing

2.32J Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [03.00.**]

(Continued to next page)

App - 36 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

Servo amplifier connection

Supporting the point table setting for MR- J2S-*CP

2.32J Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [03.00.**]

Supporting the test run mode 2.32J Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [03.00.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries, the timeout time, and delay time

2.73B Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [03.09.**]

Enables setting the host station address. 2.90U Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [04.02.**]

Supporting connection to MR-J2S-*CL 2.96A Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [04.04.**]

Robot controller connection

Supporting connection to robot controller 2.77F Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71,Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [03.12.**]

CNC connection (MELDAS C6/ C64)

Supporting connection to CNC (MELDAS C6/C64 series)

2.18U

Communication driver A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS

C6* [02.02.**] A/QnAQJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71 [02.02.**] MELSECNET/10 [02.02.**] CC-Link(ID) [02.02.**]

Communication driver name has been changed.

2.43V Communication driver AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* [03.01.**]

Supporting settings for the number of retries, the timeout time, and delay time

2.73B

Communication driver AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* [03.09.**]

Communication driver name has been changed.

Communication driver QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71,Q17nNC, CRnD-700 [03.09.**]

GOT multidrop connection

Supporting the GOT multidrop connection 2.96A Communication driver Multidrop(Host) [04.04.**] Multidrop(Slave) [04.04.**]

*1

Barcode reader connection

Supporting connection to barcode reader 2.09K Extended function OS Barcode [01.02.**]

Supporting connection to 2D-code reader 2.27D Extended function OS Barcode [02.04.**]

Printer connection

Supporting connection to printer 2.27D Extended function OS Printer [02.04.**]

FA transparent

Supporting the FA transparent function via USB

2.09K

GT15 Standard monitor OS [01.02.**] GT11 Standard monitor OS [01.02.**] Boot OS [01.02.**.C]

MT Developer (via USB), MR Configurator and FR Configurator are added as compatible software.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

GX Configuration and PX Developer are added as compatible software.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 37

*1 This item is supported by GT Works3 Version1.14Q or later.

3 Added GT Designer2 functions (1) For GT16

(2) For GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11

Item Description Version of

GT Designer2

Version of OS GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT11

Bus Serial

FA transparent

Supporting the computer link connection between the GOT and PLC on GX Developer

2.77F Standard monitor OS [03.12.**]

Supporting the computer link connection between the GOT and PLC on PX Developer 2.82L Standard monitor OS [03.13.**]

FX Configurator-FP is added as compatible software.

Supporting the Ethernet connection between the GOT and the PLC on GX Developer

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Multiple-GT11 connection

Connection with multiple GT11s 2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

External I/O device connection

Supporting connection to external I/O devices

2.58L Extended function OS External I/O / Operation Panel [03.03.**]

RFID connection Supporting connection to the RFID controller

2.73B Extended function OS RFID [03.09.**]

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

Function for GT Designer2

All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2.90U or earlier are available.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Communication The A drive and E drive are available for installing the OS at power-on.

2.91V -

Project data matching Project data matching is available between data stored in the personal computer and data opened with GT Designer2.

2.96A -

Screen preview Enables switching screens in the Screen Preview window. 2.96A -

Auxiliary setting The setting to adjust the order of displaying objects on the GOT to that of the overlapped objects on GT Designer2 is added.

2.96A -

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Ethernet download Downloading the project data via Ethernet 2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Basic comment, comment group

Copying comments in column unit on Basic Comment or Comment Group, etc.

2.09K -

Enables editing the comment group directly in settings for lamps and touch switches.

2.77F -

(Continued to next page)

App - 38 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Library workspace

Improved library structure and added import function

2.09K -

Improved user library structure, expanded the user library registration capacity, copying the figure data to the user library, etc.

2.18U -

Addition of fixed frame figure 2.18U -

Enables setting the background color of the figures in the Library Editor screen.

2.47Z -

Enables sorting the figure data by subject or function and displaying different- shaped figures in the same color in the image list.

2.58L -

Real type data are added to the subject in the library.

2.63R -

Project data matching

Project data matching is available between data stored in the GOT and data opened with GT Designer2.

2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Project data matching is available between the GOT and GT Designer2 even if the minor versions are not matched.

2.82L -

Project data matching is available between data stored in the personal computer and data opened with GT Designer2.

2.96A -

Copy ON OFF Copy OFF ON

Enables copying of only characters in lamp display, touch switch and comment display.

2.18U -

Enables copying of only comment No. in bit lamp, touch switch, and comment display(bit).

2.73B -

Import, Export

Enables editing of the settings for advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarm), alarm history, advanced recipe function and recipe function in the CSV file format and other format.

2.18U -

Items that can be imported or exported with the advanced alarm observation and alarm history are added. (Device No., comment No., detail No., and others)

2.77F -

Print Enables printing of header and footer 2.18U -

Edit Enables duplicating and consecutive copying of figures and objects.

2.90U -

Data View Enables changing of the settings for the respective objects in grouped objects

2.18U -

Batch Edit Enables global replacement of channel No.

2.18U -

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 39

Screen Preview Enables checking for security level switching and language switching in image after switching

2.18U -

Screen preview Enables switching screens in the Screen Preview window.

2.96A -

Wizard Wizard for setting the GOT type, controller type and communication settings when creating a new project

2.18U -

Screen script, project script

Settings on the Script Edit dialog are available for screen script and project script.

2.27D -

Auxiliary setting

Setting of maintaining screen numbers of the screens being displayed (System Information) during screen switching is added.

2.27D -

The setting to adjust the order of displaying objects on the GOT to that of the overlapped objects on GT Designer2 is added.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Expansion / Reduction

Supports expansion/reduction when multiple objects and shapes are selected.

2.32J -

Supports automatically zooming in and out objects and figures suitable for the screen size when the GOT type is changed to a GOT type with different resolution.

2.73B -

Screen capture Function for capturing the specified range and loading to GT Designer2

2.43V -

Zoom

Interval of magnification specification has been changed.

+/- buttons have been added. Zoom in/zoom out operations using the

" Ctrl key" and "Mouse wheel" have been added.

2.43V -

Guidelines Lines to align figures and objects are displayed when arranging a placed figure or object.

2.90U -

Communication

Holds the previous downloaded drive. 2.47Z -

Enables updating BootOS without the standard monitor OS updated when only BootOS is already installed on the GOT.

Enables installing the standard monitor OS, the communication driver, the extended OS or the option OS at once when only BootOS is already installed in the GOT.

2.58L BootOS [03.03.**.P]

Enables installing OSs on the A drive with the OS boot drive set to the A drive.

2.73B -

Preferences Enables setting the maximum number of screens to be displayed on GT Designer2.

2.63R -

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

App - 40 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

4 Added common settings/object functions (1) For GT16

Device list Functions of the collection target selection, jump, file output, and others are added.

2.73B -

Text list Enables displaying the direct input texts in a list.

2.90U -

Reading BMP or JPEG image data

Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image

data reduced to a resolution of 2000 1600 or less on GT Designer2.

2.77F -

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

Common setting All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2.90U or earlier are available.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Figure Supporting logo text 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Standard font Supporting Chinese(Traditional)(supporting Europe) 2.91V Standard monitor OS [04.03.**]

Window screen Supporting the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

GOT internal device

The settable range of GS is extended to the range from GS0 to GS2047.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

For the GOT multidrop connection, the device to store the GOT station number is added.

*1 -

The device to notify the RGB signal input status is added. 2.96A

Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Devices for the MODBUS /RTU connection are added. Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Screen switching function

Enables setting the screen switching devices for the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Station No. Switching Function

Enables setting the station No. switching devices for the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

System information

System information regarding the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5 is added. 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

System information regarding the E drive is added.

The system signal 2-3 is added. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Security

Supporting the external authentication (RFID) for the operator authentication

2.91V

Extended function OS Operator authentication [04.03.**] RFID [04.03.**]

Supporting the fingerprint authentication for the operator authentication

Extended function OS Operator authentication [04.03.**] Fingerprint Authentication [04.03.**]

Enables notifying the login operator name.

2.96A

Extended function OS Operator authentication [04.04.**]

Supporting the GOT operator management information conversion tool

-

Device setting Enables reading or writing a device when the 32K-block unit is splitted.

2.91V Standard monitor OS [04.03.**]

Communication settings

Enables setting the multi-channel Ethernet connection. 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Enables setting multiple drivers for external devices, including a bar code reader. (One driver can be set for one type of external device.)

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 41

*1 This item is supported by GT Works3 Version1.14Q or later. *2 For the ASCII display or ASCII input, the Kana-kanji conversion is not available.

Only the Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version) is available.

(2) For GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11

RGB display Enables using up to two channels when the GT16M-R2 is used for the RGB input unit.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**] Extended function OS Video/RGB [04.02.**]

Multimedia function

Function to display or record video images taken by a video camera connected to the multimedia unit and to play video files stored in a CF card.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**] Extended function OS Multimedia [04.02.**]

Enables sending video files to the personal computer by using the Ethernet interface of the multimedia unit.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**] Extended function OS Multimedia [04.04.**]

Enables recording a video image for approximately 1500 minutes (200 video files).

Enables fast-forwarding and playing videos in slow motion.

Enables recording or playing video files with sound. 2.98C

Object function All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2.90U or

earlier are available.*2 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Touch switch

[Batch Self Check], [USB Device Display], and [Multimedia] are added to [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**] The go to screen switch is applicable to the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5.

[Ladder Editor] and [Operator Management] are added to [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Numerical display/ Numerical input

Enables setting the asterisk display. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

ASCII display / ASCII input

Enables setting the asterisk display. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Historical Trend Graph Enables displaying logging data at the specified time on a trend graph.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

RFID function Supporting the dedicated protocol (ICU-60S and ICU- 215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)

2.91V Extended function OS RFID [04.03.**]

Project Script The file operation functions (file_copy, file_xcopy) are added.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Screen Script

Supporting the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5 2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

The file operation functions (file_copy, file_xcopy) are added.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Key Code The key code for the historical trend graph (Display position time specification jump) is added.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Figure

JPEG file reading enabled 2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Function to import IGES format data. 2.43V -

Enables adjusting image qualities for reading JPEG files.

2.47Z -

Supporting piping 2.73B Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

Enables setting the coordinates and the size using values.

2.90U -

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

App - 42 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Figure Supporting logo text 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Object Enables setting the coordinates and the size using values.

2.90U -

Text

Windows fonts applicable 2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Stroke font applicable 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Enables specifyng of background color. 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

Standard font

The following fonts are supported. Japanese 12dot Japanese 16dot Gothic Japanese 16dot Mincho

2.04E Standard monitor OS [01.01**]

The following fonts are supported. Japanese (supporting Europe) 12dot Japanese (supporting Europe) 16dot

Gothic Japanese (supporting Europe) 16dot

Mincho Chinese (Simplified) 12dot Chinese (Simplified) 16dot Mincho Chinese (Simplified) (supporting

Europe) 12dot Chinese (Simplified) (supporting

Europe) 16dot Mincho

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**] Boot OS [G]

Standard font Supporting Chinese (Traditional) (supporting Europe)

2.91V Standard monitor OS [04.03.**]

TrueType font Supporting the TrueType numerical font (7-segment)

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**] Boot OS [04.02.**U]

Stroke font

Enables setting the KANJI region. 2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**]

Supporting Thai 2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**]

The following font name is changed. Stroke Standard Font(JPN) The following fonts are added. Stroke Standard Font(China GB) Stroke Standard Font(China

GB)(supporting Hangul)

2.58L Extended function OS Stroke Standard Font [03.03.**]

The following font is added. Stroke Font(JPN)

2.58L Option OS Stroke Font(JPN) [03.03.**]

KANJI Region Supporting Chinese (Traditional) 2.18U

Standard monitor OS [02.02.**] Option OS Standard Font (China Big5) [02.02.**]

Window screen Supporting the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5

2.96A -

GOT internal device

System alarm information, printer status information, and GT SoftGOT1000 end device are added.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

The devices for the trigger buffer of the MES interface are added.

2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**] Option OS MES Interface [03.02.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 43

GOT internal device

The settable range of GS is extended to the range from GS0 to GS2047.

2.96A -

For the GOT multidrop connection, the device to store the GOT station number is added.

2.96A

Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

*1

Devices for the MODBUS /RTU connection are added.

2.96A

GOT Type Supporting vertical installation type display

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Screen switching function

"ON" and "OFF" can be set. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Enables setting the screen switching devices for the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5.

2.96A -

Station No. Switching Function

Designation of the channel No. for which station No. is switched is possible.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Enables setting the station No. switching devices for the overlap windows 3, 4, and 5.

2.96A -

Language Switching Device

Language switching device can be used. 2.00A Standard monitor OS [01.00.**]

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Enables setting the column No. of the comments to be displayed when the device value is out of range.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Password Setting Password can be set for the connection of motion controller and servo amplifier.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

System information

System information of report function and print are added.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

D drive automatic recovery status notification signal is added.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

System information regarding B drive has been added.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

The system signal 2-3 is added. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Security

The name [Password] is changed to [Security] in the system environment.

2.58L Standard monitor OS [03.03.**]

Enables setting the operator authentication.

2.58L Extended function OS Operator authentication [03.03.**]

Supporting the external authentication (RFID) for the operator authentication

2.91V

Extended function OS Operator authentication [04.03.**] RFID [04.03.**]

Supporting the fingerprint authentication for the operator authentication

Extended function OS Operator authentication [04.03.**] Fingerprint Authentication [04.03.**]

Enables notifying the login operator name.

2.96A

Extended function OS Operator authentication [04.04.**]

Supporting the GOT operator management information conversion tool

-

GOT Setup In clock management, both adjust and broadcast can be set.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

App - 44 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

GOT Setup

Data save device of MELSEC-Q / QnA ladder monitor data can be set at GT Designer2.

2.18U -

Automatic program read at the start of ladder monitor for MELSEC-Q/QnA/ Priority Level Comment can be set.

2.43V -

Time setting for call key ON until the start up of utility can be set (for 1-point pressing).

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Alarm can be set to be displayed in system language switching or battery drops.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Enables the backup/restore setting.

2.58L - Enables the setting for monitoring local devices.

Enables setting the drive for collectively reading comment data.

Enables settings for the backup trigger setting and the maximum number of backup data.

2.73B -

Clock Setting Designation of the channel No. used for adjusting and broadcasting is possible.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Startup Logo

Function for setting any screen for the GOT startup screen

2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**] Boot OS [01.02.**.C]

Enables displaying a BMP data stored in the A drive as the startup logo when the OS boot drive is set to the A drive.

2.73B Boot OS [03.09.**.S]

Handy GOT Setting

Setting of the grip switch LED of handy GOT

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Dialog window System messages to be displayed on GOT can be customized or created by the user.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Operation log

Function to save the GOT operation performed by the user as a history

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**] Option OS Operation Log [03.00.**]

Function for converting multiple files 2.43V -

The binary format file output can be converted to CSV/Unicode format file by external control.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Enables saving the operation log for the operator authentication.

2.58L

Standard monitor OS [03.03.**] Option OS Operation Log [03.03.**] Extended function OS Operator authentication [03.03.**]

Comment Comment group can be used. 2.00A Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Part Enables setting the background color of the figures in the Parts Editor screen.

2.47Z -

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 45

Key Window

User defined key window display can be switched in synchronization with the language switching device.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

In the user defined key window, input range (maximum value) and input range (minimum value) are displayed.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

The current value is displayed in the key window.

2.82L Standard monitor OS [03.13.**]

Device setting

65 or later station numbers in the MELSECNET/G network system can be set with using Universal model QCPU as a relay station.

2.63R Standard monitor OS [03.07.**]

Enables reading or writing a device when the 32K-block unit is splitted.

2.91V Standard monitor OS [04.03.**]

Communication settings

Enables setting multiple drivers for external devices, including a bar code reader. (One driver can be set for one type of external device.)

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Object rename Function to allow setting of object name 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

Lamp

Windows fonts applicable 2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Stroke font applicable 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Figure created as a part can be used to a lamp.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

[Comment Group] can be used. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a figure.

2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**]

Touch switch

Windows fonts applicable 2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Stroke font applicable 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Figure created as a part can be used to a touch switch.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Data change switch can be used. 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

[Comment Group] can be used. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

[Adjust Text Size] setting is possible. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Touch switch

Auto repeat can be used. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

The toutch switch on the ladder monitor with device search function can be used.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

[PX Developer Function call] is added to [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**]

Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a figure.

2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

App - 46 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Touch switch

[FX List Monitor], [Operator Information Management], [Log-in/Log-out (Operator Authentication)], [Password Change (Operator Authentication)], and [Backup/ Restore] are added to [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

2.58L Standard monitor OS[03.03.**]

The name [Password] is changed to [Password (Security Level)] in [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

[CNC Data Input/Output] is added to [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

2.63R Standard monitor OS [03.07.**]

[SFC Monitor] is added to [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

2.77F Standard monitor OS [03.12.**]

[Ladder Editor] and [Operator Management] are added to [Switch Action] of the special function switch.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Numerical display/ Numerical input

Setting to display input value when entering the value at input target object position is possible.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

Format String setting is possible. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Enables setting the TrueType Numerical for the font.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Enables setting the asterisk display. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

ASCII display / ASCII input

Function to store NULL (0x00) at the end of input characters

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Function to convert characters input in Kana into Kanji

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**] Option OS KANA KANJI (JP) [02.02.**]

Alignment setting is added. 2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Setting for displaying an input value at the input target object position is possible.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

The character display position during the ASCII input can be set to [Left] or [Right].

2.82L Standard monitor OS [03.13.**]

Supporting the Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version)

2.90U

Standard monitor OS [04.02.**] Option OS KANA KANJI (JPN) (Enhanced Version) [04.02.**]

Enables setting the asterisk display. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Clock display Enables setting the TrueType Numerical for the font.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Data List When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Comment Display

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

The simple comment is added. 2.77F Standard monitor OS [03.12.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 47

Advanced alarm popup display

Enables setting whether to enable or disable the display position switching.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

User alarm

Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 (Up to 8192 alarms).

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Alarm history

Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 (Up to 3072 alarms).

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Function to save alarm history data to the A drive (standard CF card) for GT11

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Function to display the cursor by touching an alarm, and function to output the corresponding comment No. to a device

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

The comment group application 2.73B Standard monitor OS [03.09.**]

Scrolling alarm display

The scrolling alarm display applicable 2.73B Standard monitor OS [03.09.**]

Advanced Alarm

Function for detecting alarm even at the fall of bit device with Advanced User Alarm

2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Function to display a cursor by touching an alarm and to output the corresponding comment No. to a device.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

The binary format file output can be converted to CSV/Unicode format file by external control.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

For the advanced alarm display, the title row can be set to be hidden.

2.82L Standard monitor OS [03.13.**]

For the advanced alarm display, the alarm information in the top row is output if the external output trigger is on when the cursor is hidden.

2.82L Standard monitor OS [03.13.**]

Parts Display/ Parts Movement

Function for using BMP/JPEG data in memory card as parts

2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Settings for BMP/JPEG file parts can be made on each object.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Parts Display/ Parts Movement

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a figure.

2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**]

Panelmeter

Windows fonts applicable 2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**]

Stroke font applicable 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Up to 101 points can be set for scale, value number.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Meter Attribute and Core can be set. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Level When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

App - 48 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Trend graph

Up to 101 points can be set for scale, value number.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

Line graph

Up to 101 points can be set for scale, value number.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Bar graph

Up to 101 points can be set for scale, value number.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Statistics graph

Up to 101 points can be set for scale, value number.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

When Bit Trigger is not met, whether to enable "Hold Display" can be selected.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Scatter graph

Up to 101 points can be set for scale, value number.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

Historical Trend Graph

Function to display the data collected by the logging function in trend graph format

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.01.**]

Enables displaying logging data at the specified time on a trend graph.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Time Action Second specification and external control are possible.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Logging Function

Function to collect and accumulate device values

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**] Option OS Logging [02.02.**]

Function for converting multiple files 2.43V -

The binary/CSV/Unicode format files output can be stored to another folder by external control.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Device data transfer function

Function to read the device value and write in the other device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

2.73B Extended function OS Device data transfer [03.09.**]

Recipe function

Number of devices settable for one recipe in GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 (Up to 8192 devices).

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**] Option OS Recipe [02.04.**]

Function to save recipe data of GT11 in CSV file format

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**] Option OS Recipe [02.04.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 49

Recipe function Function to save recipe data to the A drive (standard CF card) for GT11

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**] Option OS Recipe [02.04.**]

Advanced Recipe

The extended function of the existing recipe function

2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.02.**] Option OS Advanced recipe [01.02.**]

Function for converting multiple files 2.43V -

The binary format file output can be converted to CSV/Unicode format file by external control.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

The number of records that can be set is changed to 2000.

2.58L Standard monitor OS [03.03.**] Option OS Advanced Recipe [03.03.**]

Report function Function to print the colleted data 2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**] Extended function OS Report [02.04.**]

Hard copy function Compatible with the printer output 2.27D

Standard monitor OS [02.04.**] Extended function OS Printer [02.04.**]

Thumbnail Output can be set. 2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

Operation panel function

Enables setting the operation panel. 2.58L Extended function OS External I/O / Operation Panel [03.03.**]

Sound output function

Enables setting the sound output. 2.58L Extended function OS Sound Output [03.03.**]

Barcode

Function for loading the data read with bar cord reader to PLC CPU

2.09K Standard monitor OS [01.00.**]

Number of settable devices is extended from 32 to 1024 points.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Space (0x20) or NULL (0x00) can be selected for blank device.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

RFID function

Function to write in the devices which data are read by the RFID reader/writer.

2.73B Extended function OS RFID [03.09.**]

Supporting the dedicated protocol (ICU- 60S and ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)

2.91V Extended function OS RFID [04.03.**]

Video display Function to display an image taken by a video camera on the GOT

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**] Extended function OS Video/RGB [03.00.**]

RGB display Function to display the personal computer screen on the GOT

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**] Extended function OS Video/RGB [03.00.**]

Remote personal computer operation function

Function to operate the mouse pointer on the personal computer by touching the personal computer screen displayed on the GOT using the RGB display function.

2.82L Standard monitor OS [03.13.**] Extended function OS PC Remote Operation [03.13.**]

Set overlay screen Number of screens that can be called on GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 (Up to 2047 screens).

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

App - 50 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

*1 This item is supported by GT Works3 Version1.14Q or later.

Set overlay screen

Screen calling setting with dragging is possible.

2.43V -

Specifying of placement position (Front/ Back) for the basic and called screens is possible.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

[Disable background colors of overlay screen when setting an overlay screen] can be set.

2.58L Standard monitor OS [03.03.**]

Test function Function for changing device value with displaying test window.

2.09K Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Project Script

Function to execute scripts in unit of project file

2.00A Standard monitor OS [01.00.**]

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Word device values can be converted into data in the specified data type, and the GOT can read or write the data. (Data type conversion function)

2.73B Standard monitor OS [03.09.**]

The file operation functions are added. 2.77F Standard monitor OS [03.12.**]

The file operation functions (file_copy, file_xcopy) are added.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Screen Script

Function to execute scripts in unit of screen

2.00A Standard monitor OS [01.00.**]

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Word device values can be converted into data in the specified data type, and the GOT can read or write the data. (Data type conversion function)

2.73B Standard monitor OS [03.09.**]

The file operation functions are added. 2.77F Standard monitor OS [03.12.**]

The file operation functions (file_copy, file_xcopy) are added.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Object Script

Function to execute scripts in unit of object

2.18U Option OS Object Script [02.02.**]

"width", "height", and "decimal_point" are added to the object property.

2.90U Option OS Object Script [04.02.**]

Key Code

Key codes for increment key and decrement key are added.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Key code for historical trend graph is added.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Key code used for Kana Kanji conversion is added.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Key codes for user ID ascending/ descending order movement of cursor are added.

2.27D Standard monitor OS [02.04.**]

Key codes used for the Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version) are added.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

The key code for the historical trend graph (Display position time specification jump) is added.

2.96A Standard monitor OS [04.04.**]

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 51

5 Other functions added (1) For GT16

(2) For GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

Other function All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2.90U or earlier are available.

2.90U Standard monitor OS [04.02.**]

Q motion monitor function

Supporting Q170MCPU 2.96A Option OS Q motion monitor [04.04.**]

Backup/restore function

Enables setting the E drive for the storage location for the backup data or backup setting.

2.90U Extended function OS Backup/Restore [04.02.**]

Supporting Q170MCPU 2.96A Extended function OS Backup/Restore [04.04.**]

CNC data I/O function

Enables specifying the E drive for the target to input or output the CNC data.

2.90U Extended function OS CNC Data I/O [04.02.**]

Cycle monitor data can be input and output 2.96A Extended function OS CNC Data I/O [04.04.**]

Ladder editor Function to edit the sequence program stored in the controller by using the GOT

2.96A

Extended function OS GOT Platform Library [04.04.**] Option OS Ladder editor [04.04.**] GOT Function Expansion Library [04.04.**]

Multi-channel function Supporting connection to multiple controllers on the Ethernet network

2.90U

Standard monitor OS [04.02.**] Communication driver Use the communication driver, [04.02.**] or later for each connection.

Tag import function Function to import a tag file created by the third party programming software to GT Designer2, and set a tag as a device.

2.91V Standard monitor OS [04.03.**]

OS installation The A drive and E drive are available for installing the OS at power-on.

2.91V Standard monitor OS [04.03.**] BootOS [04.03.**]

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Utility

Displays details in OS information, project information, alarm information, hard copy information and advance recipe information properties.

2.18U Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]

Network unit status display

Function to display the status of MELSECNET/H communication unit and CC-Link communication unit

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

GOT data package acquisition

Function for copying the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the memory card

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**] BootOS [03.01.**.M]

(Continued to next page)

App - 52 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Unlimited installation of extended function OSs and option OSs

Extended function OS and option OS can be installed unlimitedly. Extended function OS and option OS can be operated up to 21. (Conventionally, both of above OSs can be installed and operated up to 9. The extended function OS data size is twice as large as other OS data. The logging OS data size is three times as large as other OS data.)

2.18U BootOS [02.02.**.E]

Unlimited installation of extended function OSs and option OSs

Extended function OS and option OS can be operated up to 32. (The extended function OS data size is twice as large as other OS data. The logging OS data size is three times as large as other OS data.)

2.73B BootOS [03.09.**.S]

Built-in option function board

GT15-FNB built in the GOT is enabled. 2.58L BootOS [03.03.**.P] Standard monitor OS [03.03.**]

System monitoring function

Function for monitoring/testing device of PLC CPU or buffer memory of intelligent function module

2.09K Extended function OS System monitor [01.02.**]

Supporting display of Chinese (Simplified/ Traditional), German, Korean

2.27D Extended function OS System monitor [02.04.**]

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Extended function OS System monitor [03.07.**]

Supporting connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network

2.77F Extended function OS System monitor [03.12.**]

Network monitor function

Function to monitor the network status of MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, etc.

2.18U Option OS Network monitor [02.02.**]

Supporting display of Chinese (Simplified/ Traditional), German, Korean

2.27D Option OS Network monitor [02.04.**]

Enables monitoring the status of the CC- Link IE Controller Network.

2.77F Option OS Network monitor [03.12.**]

Ladder monitoring function

Function for displaying sequence program loaded to CPU on GOT

2.09K

Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC-A [01.02.**] Ladder monitor for MELSEC-Q /QnA [01.02.**] Ladder monitor for MELSEC-FX [01.02.**]

Supporting display of Chinese (Simplified/ Traditional), German, Korean

2.27D

Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC-Q /QnA [02.04.**] Ladder monitor for MELSEC-FX [02.04.**]

Supporting language switching (Japanese/Korean) for displaying file name and title of the sequence program

2.27D Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [02.04.**]

Supporting the read of programs/ comments

2.43V Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [03.01.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 53

Ladder monitoring function

Supporting reading comments from CF cards

2.58L Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [03.03.**]Supporting monitoring local devices 2.58L

Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU

2.63R Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [03.07.**]

Ladder monitoring function

In searching multiple file programs, the backward search display is possible.

2.73B Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [03.09.**]

With MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor, the currently displayed program automatically reflect the set value of TC changed in the test function.

Supporting connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network

2.77F Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [03.12.**]

Supporting the safety function block display when using the QS001CPU (Only the FB definition name is displayed in the application instruction format.)

2.82L Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [03.13.**]

The ranges of M and B devices that can be monitored are expanded.

2.82L Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC- Q/QnA [03.13.**]

Intelligent module monitor function

Function to monitor and change the data of intelligent function module buffer memory using a dedicated screen

2.18U Option OS Intelligent module monitor [02.02.**]

Supporting connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network

2.77F Option OS Intelligent module monitor [03.12.**]

When using the QS001CPU, the PC information monitor screen (Operation details screen, Error details screen) is displayed.

2.82L Option OS Intelligent module monitor [03.13.**]

List editor for MELSEC-A

Function for displaying/editing sequence program saved from ACPU with list mode

2.09K Option OS List editor for MELSEC-A [01.02.**]

List editor for MELSEC-FX

Function to display / edit the sequence program read out from the FXCPU in the list mode

2.18U Option OS List editor for MELSEC-FX [02.02.**]

Supporting display of Chinese (Simplified) 2.27D Extended function OS List editor for MELSEC-FX [02.04.**]

Supporting display of Chinese (Simplified/ Traditional), German and Korean (GT11 supports display of Chinese (Simplified/Traditional) and Korean)

2.27D Extended function OS List editor for MELSEC-FX [02.04.**]

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

App - 54 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Q motion monitor function

Function to execute servo monitor and parameter setting for motion controller CPU (Q series)

2.18U Option OS Q motion monitor [02.02.**]

Parameter setting is enabled for Q172HCPU/Q173HCPU.

2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**]

Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU 2.63R Option OS Q motion monitor [03.07.**]

Enables clearing the SFC error history. (Universal model QCPU only)

2.63R Option OS Q motion monitor [03.07.**]

Supporting connection to CC-Link IE Controller Network

2.77F Option OS Q motion monitor [03.12.**]

Supporting Q170MCPU 2.96A Option OS Q motion monitor [04.04.**]

Servo amplifier monitor function

Function to monitor the servo amplifier and also to change parameters, execute test run, etc.

2.18U Option OS Servo amplifier monitor [02.02.**]

CNC monitor function

Function to monitor the MELDAS that is connected to the GOT

2.18U Option OS CNC monitor [02.02.**]

Supporting connection to CNC C70 2.63R Option OS CNC monitor [03.07.**]

Backup/restore function

Function to back up setting data for controllers and to restore the data to the controllers

2.58L Extended function OS Backup/Restore [03.07.**]

Supporting Backup Data Conversion Tool 2.63R -

Supporting the trigger backup 2.73B Extended function OS Backup/Restore [03.09.**]

Supporting Q170MCPU 2.96A Extended function OS Backup/Restore [04.04.**]

CNC data I/O function

Function to copy or delete data of the CNC that is connected to the GOT

2.63R Extended function OS CNC Data I/O [03.07.**]

Cycle monitor data can be input and output

2.96A Extended function OS CNC Data I/O [04.04.**]

SFC monitor function

Function to display sequence programs written in the PLC CPU in the SFC diagram format on the GOT

2.77F

Extended function OS GOT Platform Library [03.12.**] Option OS SFC Monitor [03.12.**] GOT Function Expansion Library [03.12.**]

Ladder editor Function to edit the sequence program stored in the controller by using the GOT

2.96A

Extended function OS GOT Platform Library [04.04.**] Option OS Ladder editor [04.04.**] GOT Function Expansion Library [04.04.**]

Multi-channel function

Function to monitor multiple controllers with a single unit of GOT

2.18U

Standard monitor OS [02.02.**] Communication driver Use the communication driver, [02.02.**] or later for each connection.

(Continued to next page)

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 55

Gateway function

Function for monitoring each controller from one GOT/PC or sending a mail from GOT

2.09K

Option OS Gateway function (Mail) [01.02.**] Gateway function (Server, Client) [01.02.**]

Supporting the FTP server function 2.18U Option OS Gateway functionFTP [02.02.**]

Enables transfer of binary data by the FTP server function.

2.32J Option OS Gateway (FTP) [03.00.**]

Document display function

Function to display document on the GOT 2.32J Standard monitor OS [03.00.**] Option OS Document Display [03.00.**]

Image quality adjustment for documents is possible.

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**]

MES interface function

Function to execute data linkage between the control and information systems

2.43V Standard monitor OS [03.01.**] Option OS MES Interface [03.01.**]

Oracle 8i, ACCESS2000, ACCESS2003, and MSDE2000 are added to the applicable database.

2.47Z Standard monitor OS [03.02.**] Option OS MES Interface [03.02.**]The trigger buffering function is added.

Enables setting [Do not sample] for the sampling setting in the device tag settings.

Industrial SQL Server 9.0 and Microsoft SQL Server 2005 are added as an applicable database.

2.58L Standard monitor OS [03.03.**] Option OS MES Interface [03.03.**]

Access 2007 is added as an applicable database.

2.82L Standard monitor OS [03.13.**] Option OS MES Interface [03.13.**]Function to send resource data stored in

the GOT to the database

Tag import function

Function to import a tag file created by the third party programming software to GT Designer2, and set a tag as a device.

2.91V Standard monitor OS [04.03.**]

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT 15

GT Soft GOT1000

GT 11

App - 56 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Appendix 6.2 For GT10

GT Designer2 Version 2.43V or later is applicable to GT1020. GT Designer2 Version 2.58L or later is applicable to GT1030. GT Designer2 Version 2.90U or later is applicable to GT105 . GT Designer2 Version 2.90U or later is applicable to GT104 .

1 Added GOT main unit

2 Added connection types : Applicable : N/A - : Applicable (from the first version)

Target Models Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL 2.43V -

GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2, GT1020-LBLW 2.58L -

GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2 , GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2 2.58L -

GT1055-QSBD, GT1050-QBBD 2.90U -

GT1045-QSBD, GT1040-QBBD 2.90U -

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT

105 /

104

GT 1030

GT 1020

Direct connection to CPU

Supporting connection to FX3G series 2.90U Standard monitor OS [01.10.**] Communication driver MELSEC-FX[01.06.**]

Computer link connection

Supporting connection to A series PLC 2.82L Standard monitor OS [01.09.**] Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24[01.04.**]

-

CC-Link connection (Via G4)

Supporting connection to CC-Link (Via G4) 2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] Communication driver CC-Link(G4)[01.00.**]

-

GOT multidrop connection

Supporting the GOT multidrop connection 2.96A

Standard monitor OS [01.11.**] Communication driver Multidrop(Host) [01.11.**] Multidrop(Slave) [01.11.**]

Microcomputer connection

Supporting the data formats of Format 1 and Format 2.

2.47Z Standard monitor OS [01.02.**] Communication driver Computer[01.02.**]

- -

MODBUS / RTU connection

Supporting MODBUS /RTU connection 2.96A Standard monitor OS [01.12.**] MODBUS/ RTU [01.07.**]

OMRON PLC connection

Supporting connection to OMRON PLC 2.47Z Standard monitor OS [01.02.**] Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC [01.02.**]

- -

KEYENCE PLC connection

Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] Communication driver KEYENCE KV-700/1000[01.00.**]

-

Supporting connection to KV-3000 and KV-5000 2.77F Communication driver KEYENCE KV700/1000 [01.03.**]

-

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 57

TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC connection

Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

2.77F Communication driver TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini [01.03.**]

-

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC connection

Supporting connection to PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

2.73B

Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP [01.00.**]

-

Communication driver name has been changed. 2.96A

Standard monitor OS [01.12.**] Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP [01.07.**]

YASKAWA PLC connection

Supporting connection to CP9200SH/MP900 series

2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] Communication driver YASKAWA MP [01.00.**]

-

Supporting connection to MP2000/MP900 series 2.73B -

LS IS PLC connection

Supporting connection to LS IS PLC 2.90U

Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K [01.05.**]

ALLEN- BRADLEY PLC connection

Supporting connection to MicroLogix 1000/1200/ 1500 series.

2.58L Standard monitor OS [01.04.**] Communication driver AB MicroLogix [01.00.**]

-

Supporting connection to SLC500 series. 2.58L Standard monitor OS [01.04.**] Communication driver AB SLC 500 [01.00.**]

-

SIEMENS PLC connection

Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7-200 series.

2.58L Standard monitor OS [01.04.**] Communication driver SIEMENS S7-200 [01.00.**]

-

Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7-300/400 series

2.90U Standard monitor OS [01.10.**] Communication driver SIEMENS S7-300/400 [01.05.**]

Inverter connection

Supporting connection to inverter 2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] Communication driver FREQROL 500/700 [01.00.**]

-

Servo amplifier connection

Supporting connection to MR-J2S-*CL 2.96A Standard monitor OS [01.12.**] Communication driver MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M [01.07.**]

Bar code reader connection

Supporting connection to barcode reader 2.77F Standard monitor OS [01.08.**] -

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT

105 /

104

GT 1030

GT 1020

App - 58 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

3 Added GT Designer2 functions

4 Added common settings/object functions

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT

105 /

104

GT 1030

GT 1020

Library workspace

Enables setting the background color of the figures in the Library Editor screen.

2.47Z - - -

Project data matching

Project data matching is available between data stored in the personal computer and data opened with GT Designer2.

2.96A -

Screen preview Enables switching screens in the Screen Preview window.

2.96A -

Auxiliary setting

Enables setting [Specify the touch area.]. 2.77F - -

For the set overlay screen function, the setting to place the called screen under the basic screen is added.

2.96A - For the set overlay screen function, the setting to disable the background color of the called screen is added.

Reading BMP or JPEG image data

Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image data

reduced to a resolution of 2000 1600 or less on GT Designer2.

2.77F - -

Directly editing comment group

Enables editing the comment group directly in settings for the lamps and touch switches.

2.77F - -

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT

105 /

104

GT 1030

GT 1020

Figure

Supporting piping 2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.00.**] -

Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image data reduced to a resolution of 2000 1600 or less on GT Designer2.

2.77F Standard monitor OS [01.08.**] -

Supporting logo text 2.96A Standard monitor OS [01.12.**]

Standard font

Supporting Japanese Supporting Japanese (supporting Europe) Supporting Chinese (Simplified)(supporting Europe) Supporting Chinese (Traditional)(supporting Europe)

2.91V Standard monitor OS [01.11.**]

TrueType font

Supporting the TrueType numerical font (Gothic)

2.91V

Standard monitor OS [01.11.**]

Supporting the TrueType numerical font (7-segment)

BootOS [01.11.**.G] Standard monitor OS [01.11.**]

Window screen Corresponding to the overlap window display and the superimpose display.

2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] -

GOT internal device

Devices from GS0 to GS1023 are available. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [01.12.**]

GOT Setup The key reaction speed can be set. 2.82L Standard monitor OS [01.09.**] -

(Continued to next page)

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 59

5 Other functions added

Clock function The clock data storage to the GD device is possible.

2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] -

Numerical Display/ Numerical input

Format String setting is possible. 2.77F Standard monitor OS [01.08.**] -

Enables setting the asterisk display. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [01.12.**]

ASCII input The ASCII input can be set. 2.58L Standard monitor OS [01.03.**] -

Enables setting the asterisk display. 2.96A Standard monitor OS [01.12.**]

Comment Display

The simple comment is added. 2.77F Standard monitor OS [01.08.**] -

Lamp Display [Comment Group] can be used. 2.77F Standard monitor OS [01.08.**] -

Touch switch

Auto repeat can be used. 2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] -

[Comment Group] can be used. 2.77F Standard monitor OS [01.08.**] -

The device monitor and debug function can be set for the action setting of the special function switch and the multi action switch.

2.82L Standard monitor OS [01.09.**] -

Graph The statistics bar graph can be set. 2.58L Standard monitor OS [01.03.**] - -

The statistics pie graph can be set. 2.58L Standard monitor OS [01.03.**] - -

Alarm history display

Enables selecting whether to set the scrolling comment display suitable for the message display area.

2.63R Standard monitor OS [01.06.**] -

Comment group can be used. 2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] -

Scrolling alarm display

The scrolling alarm display applicable 2.73B Standard monitor OS [01.07.**] -

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT

105 /

104

GT 1030

GT 1020

Installing OS Enables installing the OS without the OS installation screen of the GOT.

2.77F Standard monitor OS [01.08.**] -

Installing/ uploading with GT10-LDR

Enables installing or uploading the OS, communication drivers, project data, and others with the GT10-LDR.

2.77F -

Enables installing the OS for the GT10-LDR. Supporting the following fonts when the OS is installed. Japanese Chinese (Simplified)(supporting Europe) Chinese (Traditional)(supporting Europe) TrueType numerical font (7-segment) TrueType numerical font (Gothic)

2.91V Standard monitor OS [01.11.**]

MELSEC-FX list editor function

Function to display or edit a sequence program read from the FXCPU in the list mode

2.90U -

Item Description Version of GT

Designer2 Version of OS

GT

105 /

104

GT 1030

GT 1020

App - 60 Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

MEMO

Appendix 6 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)

App - 61

INDEX

[A] A list editor ........................................................... 14-1 Addition times reset for maintenance time notification ........................................................... 17-1

Addition times reset function ............................ 17-1 Display operation of addition times reset ......... 17-1 Operation of Addition times reset..................... 17-2

Advanced Recipe Information ........................... 13-45 Alarm information .............................................. 13-28

Alarm information operation ........................... 13-30 Function of alarm information......................... 13-28 The display operation of alarm information .... 13-28

Attachment .................................................. 2-19,8-58 Applicable attachment...................................... 8-58 Installing procedure.......................................... 8-59

[B] Backlight ...................................................... 2-18,19-7

Backlight replacement...................................... 19-7 Backlight shutoff detection and replacement ... 19-6

Backup/Restore Settings ................................... 11-44 Drive for backup data ..................................... 11-44 Drive for backup setting ................................. 11-44 Max. of backup data....................................... 11-44 Trigger backup setting.................................... 11-48

Bar code reader................................................... 2-16 Basic operation of settings change...................... 9-11 Basic OS................................................................ 9-1 Battery ......................................................... 2-17,8-46

Applicable battery............................................. 8-46 Battery life ........................................................ 8-47 Battery replacement procedure........................ 8-46 Battery specifications ....................................... 8-46 Battery voltage low detection and battery replacement ..................................................... 19-4

Battery status display .......................................... 12-1 GOT internal battery status display.................. 12-6

Behavior of duplicate IPs................................... 11-51 Boot OS ................................................................. 9-1 Brightness, contrast adjustment ........................ 11-12

Brightness adjustment function ...................... 11-12 Display operation of brightness, contrast ....... 11-12

Buffer circuit cable ................................................. 2-9 Bus connection unit ......................................... 2-7,8-1 Bus connector conversion box ............................ 2-15 Bus extension connector box .............................. 2-15

[C] CC-Link communication unit.................................. 2-7 CC-Link IE controller network communication unit ................................................................... 2-7,8-2 CF card........................................................ 2-15,8-34

Applicable CF card........................................... 8-34 Clean ................................................................... 15-1

Index - 1

Cleaning method .............................................. 19-3 Display operation of clean................................ 15-1 Operation of clean............................................ 15-2

Cleaning of display section .................................. 15-1 Communication detail settings........................... 10-13

Communication detail settings display operation ........................................................ 10-13 Communication detail settings functions ........ 10-13 Display contents of communication detail settings........................................................... 10-15 Key word registration, deletion and protection delete ............................................................. 10-16

Communication interface setting ......................... 10-1 Communication setting ........................................ 10-1

Communication setting contents ...................... 10-3 Communication setting display operation ................................................................. 10-2,10-7 Communication setting functions ..................... 10-1

Communication unit .........................................2-7,8-1 Applicable communication unit........................... 8-1 Installing procedure............................................ 8-3

Component list ....................................................... 2-2 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs............. 2-9

[D] Daily inspection.................................................... 19-2 Display and operation settings............................. 11-1

Display operation of display setting.................. 11-5 Display setting functions .................................. 11-2 Display setting operations ................................ 11-6

Drawing check ..................................................... 14-8 Display operation of drawing check ................. 14-8 Drawing check function .................................... 14-8 Drawing check operation.................................. 14-9

Drawing software ................................................. 2-19

[E] Error message and system alarm...................... 20-17

List of error message/system alarm ............... 20-20 Ethernet communication unit ........................... 2-7,8-1 Explanation of the GOT model name .................... 2-2 Explanation of the option model name .................. 2-3 Ext.auth. ID ........................................................ 14-41 External dimensions ..........................................App-1 External I/O unit ................................................... 8-25

Applicable external I/O unit .............................. 8-25 Installation procedure....................................... 8-25

[F] File display and copy ........................................... 13-1

Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location........................................ 13-5 Data type and the storage location .................. 13-2 Display file ........................................................ 13-6

17

AD D

IT IO

N T

IM ES

R ES

ET

FO R

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

TI M

E N

O TI

FI C

AT IO

N

18

IN ST

AL LA

TI O

N O

F C

O R

EO S,

B O

O TO

S AN

D

ST AN

D AR

D M

O N

IT O

R O

S

19

M AI

N TE

N AN

C E

AN D

IN

SP EC

TI O

N

20

TR O

U BL

ES H

O O

TI N

G AP

PE N

D IC

ES IN

D EX

Drive name allocation ...................................... 13-1 OS version confirmation................................... 13-4

Fingerprint ......................................................... 14-58 Fingerprint ID ................................................. 14-58 Fingerprint information ................................... 14-58 Fingerprint unit ............................................... 14-58

Font check ......................................................... 14-13 Display operation of font check...................... 14-13 Font check function........................................ 14-13 Font check operation ..................................... 14-14

[G] General specifications ........................................... 3-1 GOT data package acquisition ........................ 13-110 GOT self check.................................................... 14-1 GOT set up .......................................................... 11-1 GOT Start Time ................................................. 14-37

Display of GOT start time............................... 14-38 Display operation of GOT start time............... 14-37 GOT start time function.................................. 14-37

GOT-to-GOT connection cable.............................. 2-8 GOT-to-GOT long distance connection cable ....... 2-8 GT Designer2 ...................................................... 2-19

[H] Hard copy information ....................................... 13-36

The display operation of hardcopy information ..................................................... 13-36 The function of hardcopy information............. 13-36 The operation of hardcopy information .......... 13-38

[I] I/O check ........................................................... 14-17

Display operation of I/O check ....................... 14-18 I/O check function .......................................... 14-17 I/O check operation........................................ 14-19

Installation of boot OS and standard OS ............. 18-1 Boot OS and standard OS installation using CF card ............................................................ 18-4 Boot OS and standard OS required for installation ........................................................ 18-2 Prior preparations for installing boot OS and standard OS..................................................... 18-3 Program / data control function........................ 18-6 The 2-point presses installation function.......... 18-5 When installing the different version of boot OS, standatd OS...................................... 18-8

Interface converter unit.................................... 2-7,8-2

[L] Ladder monitor .................................................... 14-1 Large-size CPU extension cable ........................... 2-8 Logging information ........................................... 13-67

[M] Maintenance time notification setting .................. 16-1

Display operation of maintenance timimg setting............................................................... 16-3 Maintenance time notification function ............. 16-2 Operation of maintenance time notification...... 16-4

MELSECNET/10 communication unit.............. 2-7,8-2 Memory card adaptor................................... 2-16,8-43

Applicable memory card adaptor ..................... 8-43 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory card adaptor .................................... 8-43

Memory card format........................................... 13-42 Display operation of memory card format ...... 13-42 Format operation of memory card.................. 13-43 Function of the memory card format .............. 13-42

Memory check ..................................................... 14-5 Display operation of memory card ................... 14-5 Memory check function .................................... 14-5 Memory check operation.................................. 14-6

Memory information ........................................... 13-80 Multi color display board .............................. 2-17,8-61

Applicable multi-color display board................. 8-61 Installing procedure of the multi-color display board ................................................................ 8-62

[O] Operation of system alarm................................. 14-36

Display operation of system alarm ................. 14-35 System Alarm Display .................................... 14-35 System alarm display function ....................... 14-35

Operation settings.............................................. 11-14 Display operation of display setting................ 11-15 Operation setting functions ............................ 11-14 Setting operation of operation ........................ 11-16

Operator Information Management.................... 14-39 Option .................................................................... 2-7 Option function board .................................. 2-16,8-44

Applicable option function board ...................... 8-44 Installing procedure of the option function board ................................................................ 8-44

OS information..................................................... 13-7 Display operation of OS information ................ 13-8 Function of OS information .............................. 13-7 Operation of OS information .......................... 13-10

Overall configuration.............................................. 2-1

[P] Packing list...........................................................A-36 Part names and settings of the GT155 ................ 4-11 Part names and settings of the GT156 .................. 4-9 Part names and settings of the GT157 .................. 4-6 Part names and settings of the GT1585 ................ 4-3 Part names and settings of the GT1595 ................ 4-1 PC connection cable............................................ 2-20 Performance specifications.................................... 3-3 Periodic inspection............................................... 19-2 Power supply specifications................................. 3-19 Power supply wiring............................................... 7-3

Grouding ............................................................ 7-6 Printer unit ........................................................... 8-18

Installing procedure.......................................... 8-18

Index - 2

Printer unit type................................................ 8-18 Program/data control ........................................... 13-1 Project data transfer cable................................... 2-20 Project information............................................. 13-15

Display operation of project information......... 13-16 Function of OS information ............................ 13-15 Operation of project information..................... 13-18

Protective cover for oil ......................................... 8-50 Applicable protective cover for oil .................... 8-50 Installation procedure....................................... 8-50

Protective sheet........................................... 2-18,8-48 Applicable protective sheet .............................. 8-48 Installing procedure.......................................... 8-49

[Q] Q extension cable.................................................. 2-8 Q long distance connection cable.......................... 2-8 Q/L/QnA ladder monitor setting ......................... 11-31 QCPU (Q mode) bus connection cable ................. 2-8 QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable.................................................... 2-8

[R] RFID controller .................................................... 2-16 Rough pre-operation procedure ............................ 1-3 RS-232 cable....................................................... 2-10 RS-422 cable....................................................... 2-10 RS-422 conversion unit ............................... 2-15,8-17

Applicable RS-422 conversion unit .................. 8-17 Installing procedure.......................................... 8-17

[S] Security level change ........................................ 11-18

Security change display operation ................. 11-18 Security level change functions...................... 11-18 Security level change operation ..................... 11-19

Small-size CPU extension cable ........................... 2-8 Small-size CPU long distance connection cable ............................................................................... 2-8 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function Setting................. 11-26 Sound output unit ................................................ 8-27

Applicable sound output unit ............................ 8-27 Installation procedure....................................... 8-27

Special Data Information ................................... 13-82 Stand ........................................................... 2-17,8-56

Applicable stand............................................... 8-56 Installing procedure.......................................... 8-56

System configuration ............................................. 2-1 System monitor.................................................... 14-1

[T] Third party PLC connection cable ......................... 2-4 Time setting and display...................................... 12-1

Clock setting operations................................... 12-3 Display operation of clock display and setting ......................................................................... 12-2 Time setting and display functions ................... 12-1

Touch panel calibration ..................................... 11-23

Index - 3

Touch panel check............................................. 14-15 Display operation of touch panel check ......... 14-15 Touch panel check function ........................... 14-15 Touch panel check operations ....................... 14-16

Transparent function setting .............................. 11-34 Transportation Precautions..............................App-20 Troubleshooting ................................................... 20-1

Troubleshooting in bus connection ................ 20-14

[U] Usage condition of utility function ....................App-16 USB environmental protection cover ................... 8-54

Applicable USB environmental protection cover ................................................................ 8-54 Installing procedure.......................................... 8-54

Utility basic configuration ..................................... 9-10 Utility call key setting ......................................... 11-20

Utility call key display operation ..................... 11-20 Utility call key setting function ........................ 11-20 Utility call key setting operation...................... 11-21

Utility display.......................................................... 9-5 Display operation of main menu......................... 9-7 Main menu ......................................................... 9-5 Password ........................................................... 9-9 System message switch button.......................... 9-5

Utility execution...................................................... 9-1 Utility function list ................................................... 9-2

WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term]

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.

[Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified. If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure

diagnosis at the customers expence. The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric

Corporation. (2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow

the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product. (3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.

1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.

2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or

structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.

4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.

5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses. 6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure

such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. 7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.

Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

6. Product application (1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major

accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.

(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications. However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at our discretion.

In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required.

GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States. MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA. VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

SH(NA)-080528ENG-AJ

GT15 User's Manual

MODEL

MODEL CODE

GT15-U(SHO)-E

1D7M23

SH(NA)-080528ENG-AJ(2010)MEE

Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Jap

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GT15 Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User's Manual for Mitsubishi Electric GT15 as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric GT15. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric GT15 User's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.